JP2024057538A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] The objective is to increase the interest of games. [Solution] A gaming machine equipped with an operating means operable by a player and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect related to the operating means is capable of referring to setting information and holding a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a game ball enters a specific ball entrance, and the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid includes a setting corresponding period set in accordance with the setting information. [Selected Figure] Fig. 66

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can execute a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In these types of gaming machines, it is possible to create display effects using character images, patterns, etc.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there was still room for improvement in terms of technology to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described below in order to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way.

[Application Example 1]
An operation means operable by a player;
A game machine including: a performance execution means capable of executing a performance related to the operation means;
When a lottery is held for a game ball entering a specific ball entrance, the lottery can be held with a lottery probability according to the setting information by referring to the setting information;
The period during which the operation of the operation means is valid includes a setting corresponding period that is set in correspondence with the setting information.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application Example 2]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1,
the effect execution means, when the operation means is operated during the set corresponding period, executes a valid effect suggesting that the operation is valid;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application Example 3]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1,
The setting information includes first setting information and second setting information,
When the first setting information is information of a higher setting than the second setting information, the setting corresponding period set in response to the first setting information is a period equal to or longer than the setting corresponding period set in response to the second setting information.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application Example 4]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1,
The setting information includes first setting information and second setting information,
a first period is set as the setting corresponding period in correspondence with the first setting information;
A second period is set as the setting corresponding period in correspondence with the second setting information.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application Example 5]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 4,
The setting information is represented by a predetermined integer value,
The first setting information is an even number, and the second setting information is an odd number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application Example 6]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 4 or Application Example 5,
There is an overlapping period between the first period and the second period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining judgment tables T1 to T4. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during non-time-saving mode. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during time-saving mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. 13 is a flowchart of a main control process. 13 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 pre-judgment processing. This is a flowchart of the special diagram 1 pre-judgment processing. 13 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a special action process. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 13 is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. This is a first flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status management process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status reset process. 13 is a flowchart of special electric device processing. 13 is a flowchart of a V-type opening/closing member operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. 13 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 13 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart of a pre-reading performance determination process. 10 is a diagram for explaining a configuration of a pre-determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading performance pattern determination table T51. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing. An explanatory diagram of the core performance pattern determination table T52. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 13 is a flowchart of a display control process. An explanatory diagram illustrating the movement pattern of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the frame movable part 69. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the display presentation of a sub-display screen 64. FIG. A diagram to explain the pattern row change presentation A. A diagram to explain the pattern row change presentation B. A diagram to explain the pattern row change presentation C. A diagram to explain the pattern row change presentation D. A diagram to explain the pattern row change performance E. A diagram to explain the pattern row change presentation F. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 13 is a flowchart of button processing during performance. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between time periods and button valid periods (start time, valid period). FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a process performed when a button is operated. A diagram to explain performance change performance A. A diagram to explain the performance change performance B. A diagram to explain the performance change performance C. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 13 is a flowchart of button processing during performance. An explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between setting information and button validity period in setting suggestion performance A. A diagram to explain setting suggestion effect A. An explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between setting information and button validity period in setting suggestion performance B. A diagram to explain setting suggestion display B. This is a front view of a fishing rod device installed on a ball supply tray (upper tray). 1A is a front right perspective view of the fishing rod device, and FIG. 1B is a front left perspective view of the fishing rod device. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of the fishing rod device viewed from the right side of the gaming machine when the fishing rod device is tilted from the central position to the front position, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the fishing rod device viewed from the right side of the gaming machine when the fishing rod device is tilted from the central position to the rear position. 13 is a flowchart of processing during variable presentation for executing a fishing experience presentation. 13 is a flowchart of a lure effect determination process for executing a fishing experience effect. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a lure effect determination table for executing a fishing experience effect. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a character's favorite lure table for implementing a fishing experience presentation. 13 is a flowchart of a load presentation determination process for executing a fishing experience presentation. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a load effect determination table for executing a fishing experience effect. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a lure throwing process for executing a fishing experience presentation. 1A is a diagram illustrating a setting screen and FIG. 1B is a diagram illustrating a customization selection screen. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a fishing experience presentation A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a fishing experience presentation B. FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the continuation of fishing experience presentation B in FIG. 82. This is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing for executing a sure-win promotion effect by means of a super-hot effect. This is a flowchart of the variable performance start process for executing a special bonus promotion performance with a super hot performance. 13 is a flowchart of a pseudo chance time effect occurrence determination process for executing a sure-change promotion effect through a super-hot effect. This is an explanatory diagram of a pseudo chance time effect occurrence judgment table for executing a special rate promotion effect through a super hot effect. This is a flowchart of the processing during the variable performance to execute a special promotion performance with a super hot performance. This is an explanatory diagram of a super hot effect execution judgment table for executing a special rate promotion effect by a super hot effect. This is a flowchart of the processing during the waiting for customers effect to execute the special rate promotion effect by the super hot effect. This is a diagram to explain the special bonus promotion effect A due to the super hot effect. This is a diagram to explain the special bonus promotion effect B due to the super hot effect. This is a diagram to explain the special bonus promotion effect C due to the super hot effect. This is an explanatory diagram of the development effect to SP reach by the super hot effect (variant 1). This is an explanatory diagram of the special bonus promotion effect (variant 2) due to the super hot effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example of the super hot effect. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance to execute a performance upgrade performance using special effects. This is an explanatory diagram of a performance upgrade execution determination table for executing a performance upgrade effect using a special effect. A diagram to explain the special effect promotion effect A. A diagram to explain the special effect promotion effect B. A diagram to explain the special effect promotion effect C. A diagram to explain the special effect promotion effect D. A diagram to explain the special effect promotion effect E. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example of a special effect. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration on the sub-control board when the touch sensor linked performances A and B can be executed. 11 is a diagram for explaining a right region R72R and a left region R72L of the display screen 7a. FIG. A diagram to explain touch sensor linked performance A (1). A diagram to explain touch sensor linked performance A (2). A diagram to explain touch sensor linked performance B(1). A diagram to explain touch sensor linked performance B (2). A diagram to explain touch sensor linked performance B (3). A block diagram showing the electrical configuration on the sub-control board when the touch sensor linked performances C to E are executable. 11 is a diagram for explaining an upper right region R72UR, a lower right region R72LR, an upper left region R72UL, and a lower left region R72LL of the display screen 7a. A diagram to explain touch sensor linked performance C. A diagram to explain touch sensor linked performance D. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a normal group performance. A diagram to explain touch sensor linked performance E. This is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a high reliability effect pattern determination table T55. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display example A when another mode is emphasized. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display example B when another mode is emphasized. 13 is a flowchart of a switch process A. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display example of a game custom display A. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display example of game custom display B. 13 is a flowchart of a switch process B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display example of a game customization display C. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display example of a game custom display D. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lottery for determining whether or not a player-operated special effect will be performed, and which player-operated special effect will be performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the appearance of special effects when a player performs an operation to adjust the LED brightness. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the appearance of a special effect when a player performs a volume adjustment operation. 13 is a diagram illustrating the appearance of special effects when a player performs an operation to switch effect modes. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the setting operations for special effects operated by the player. 13 is a flowchart of player-operated special effect judgment processing 1. A diagram to explain the presentation mode switching presentation. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode switching presentation accompanied by a special player-operated presentation that outputs sound. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation mode switching presentation accompanied by a special player-operated presentation that displays a character. A diagram to explain the presentation mode switching presentation. 13 is a flowchart of the player operation special effect judgment process 2. A diagram for explaining reserved specific information classification. 13 is a diagram for explaining a lottery conducted using the acquired lottery number. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the player operation special effect judgment process 3. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lottery for the type of special effect operated by the player. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation mode switching presentation in which the same presentation mode is returned after the switching presentation. 13 is a flowchart of a player-operated special effect determination process 4 when a player-operated special effect is set. 13 is a flowchart of a background mode transition method determination process. 13 is a flowchart of a notice selection process. This is an explanatory diagram of the lottery for determining the major category of the preview. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating variations in item previews. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a lottery for determining the variation of item previews in the ocean background mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the lottery for determining the variation of item previews in the land background mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the lottery for determining the variation of item previews in sky background mode. This is an explanatory diagram of another example 1 of a lottery table for determining variations of item previews in sky background mode. This is an explanatory diagram of another example 2 of a lottery table for determining variations of item previews in sky background mode. 13 is a diagram for explaining the transition to background mode by operating the select button 68. FIG. A diagram for explaining the background mode transition presentation on the display screen 7a. A figure to explain the background mode transition presentation in the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L. 13 is a flowchart of a presentation mode selection process. 13 is a flowchart of a notice selection process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the presentation of a presentation mode selection by operating the presentation button 63 and the select button 68. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the presentation of a presentation mode selection by operating the presentation button 63 and the select button 68. A diagram to explain the transition to the presentation mode selection screen. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the transition to the normal display state. A diagram to explain the preview performance that is performed while the selection screen is displayed. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the priority order of light-emitting effects. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining light emission priority example 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining light emission priority example 2.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the gaming machine Fig. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 1. The front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that shoots gaming balls based on the player's shooting operation, and when a gaming ball wins a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the player based on the winning. The gaming machine 1 comprises a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to a front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 comprises an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer hull of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit located on the front side of the outer frame and inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, a performance button 63, a sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), a sword member 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 69. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the play area 3 of the play board 2 can be seen through the opening.

The handle 60 is located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a launch strength according to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, a movable frame movable body 69 (also called a frame movable gadget 69) is provided, which is a movable so-called gimmick. The frame movable body 69 is configured so that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 can move left and right in the left and right directions. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured so that the main surface approaches and moves away from the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 is normally stationary at a retreat position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and can move (advance) from the retreat position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other and stop at a position where it touches the handle 60. When in the advance position, the frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60.

The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances that are performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is located inside the performance button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right depending on the performance. The sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword and can be pushed downward by the player during performances that are performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in a pair via the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and is arranged above the front frame 53 to perform light-emitting effects during play. The right frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element located between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element located between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are located at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and provide sound effects during play.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, a fixed winning device (center) 19, a normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first large winning device (first attacker) 31, a second large winning device (second attacker) 36, a large winning opening start port 17, a normal winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), an outlet 16, and displays 40.

The play area 3 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down, and has multiple game nails protruding therein to guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the play area 3, and guides the game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the play area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the rear side of the play area 3, and irradiates light from the rear side of the play area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured to have a continuous shape and light emission.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the play area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display), a reserved image display area in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a reserved digestion image display area (respective reserved display area) in which a reserved digestion image 9C is displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B are images that represent a reserved play, and are also called reserved icons 9A and 9B. The reserved digestion image 9C is an image that represents the reserved play, and is also called the reserved image 9C, the reserved icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, or the variable icon 9C. The reserved icon 9C may also be simply called a reserved icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas, "left", "center", and "right". The left symbol display area displays a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L. The center symbol display area displays a center effect symbol (center decorative symbol) 8C. The right symbol display area displays a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers, for example, from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 can display the results of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, (the result of the big win lottery) in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, by the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas.

For example, if a jackpot is won, the display will stop with a repeat number such as "777". If a loss occurs, the display will stop with a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result from the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, as well as the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. In addition, the variable display of the variable symbols may be a vertical scroll or may be other than that. The combination of the variable symbols to be displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereinafter, the display of the variable symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be referred to as "variable symbol display", "variable decorative symbol display", or simply "variable display" or "variable display". In addition, this decorative pattern change performance counts the performance during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops (also called the special pattern change period) as one change performance (one cycle of change performance). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops, the temporary stop performance is included in the decorative pattern change performance.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a not only the performance symbol changing performance, but also a jackpot performance performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo performance for waiting for customers, and the like. In the performance symbol changing performance, in addition to the performance symbol, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 7 may display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol, an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can suggest that a special symbol is changing or the result of a lottery for a special symbol. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of reserved first special symbols described below, and a second reserved display area that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of reserved second special symbols described below. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the reserved first special symbol display 43a described below and the number of reserved second special symbols displayed on the reserved second special symbol display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays reserved consumption image 9C. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing performance pattern (performance pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and by displaying the reserved consumption image 9C, it can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player that the reserved first special symbol or reserved second special symbol is consumed ("reserved special symbol consumption" described below).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first movable board 14 (also called the first movable gadget 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable gadget 14 is configured as a vertically long rod-shaped member that can move left and right in front of the image display device 7. The first movable gadget 14 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Figure 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable gadget 14 is formed to be approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and in the advanced position, it covers a part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom.

A second movable board 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured so that a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Fig. 1) above the image display device 7, and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable gadget 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed below the image display device 7. The stage section 11 has a shape that can guide game balls rolling on the upper surface of the stage section 11 to a first starting hole 20 described below. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The fixed winning device (center) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball hole, fixed starting hole) 20, which always allows the game ball to enter with a constant ease. The entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a first special symbol (jackpot lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a jackpot random number and the like, as well as the determination of a jackpot.

The normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22 is disposed below the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entry hole, variable starting hole) 21. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a second special symbol (a big win drawing). The electric chute 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting hole 21, and the second starting hole 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (Fig. 3). The second starting hole 21 is capable of receiving a game ball when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient that the electric chute 22 allows a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in an open state than when it is in a closed state, and may allow a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in a closed state.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is located above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. The passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers a normal pattern lottery that determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open. In other words, the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a normal pattern random number (winning random number) and a win determination, etc.

Here, "special symbol lottery" refers to a process in which, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot" to determine whether or not there is a jackpot. The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b described below displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed stationary (determined display), and the lottery result is notified to the player. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot.

"Drawing a normal pattern" refers to a process in which, when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, a random number for determining the normal pattern is acquired, and this acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "win" to determine whether or not there is a win. The result of the drawing for the normal pattern is also not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through gate 28; rather, a fluctuating display of the normal pattern is performed on normal pattern display 42 (described below), and after a predetermined fluctuating time has elapsed, the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a confirmed one (lit or unlit), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first large prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is located above and to the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a first large prize winning hole (first special prize winning hole) 30, a V area 39, a non-V area 70, and a V opening and closing member 71. The first large prize winning hole 30 includes an opening and closing member (first special prize winning hole opening and closing member) 32 that allows or prevents the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening and closing action. The opening and closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize winning hole solenoid 33 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the first large prize winning hole 30 when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large prize winning device 31 is equipped with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (Figure 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a (Figure 3), a first large prize winning port sensor 30a (Figure 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (Figure 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured inside the first large prize winning device 31 as areas through which a game ball that has passed through the first large prize winning port 30 can pass. The first large prize winning port sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning port 30. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39, and detects the passage of a game ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to distribute the game ball to the V area 39 in a first state (rotating state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is located at the origin and distributes the game ball to the non-V area 70 in a second state (stopped state). In addition, the V-opening member 71 may be configured to move in a left-right direction with respect to the game board 2, as long as it has a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, without being limited to rotational movement. That is, when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retreat state (first state) in which the game ball is distributed to the V area 39, and when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advance state (second state) in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V area 39 is a trigger for transition to a high probability state described later. In other words, the V area 39 is a probability variable operation port. On the other hand, the non-V area 70 is not a probability variable operation port. The first large winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first large winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first large winning device 31. The first big prize device discharge sensor is installed at the point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 join downstream, and counts the number of game balls that pass through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second large prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is located above and to the right of the first large prize winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a second large prize winning opening (second special prize winning opening) 35. The second large prize winning opening 35 is equipped with an opening/closing member (second special prize winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of game balls by swinging open and closed. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize winning opening solenoid 38 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the second large prize winning opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The large prize opening start port 17 is located above the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large prize opening 30 opens when the game ball passes through. However, the game machine 1 does not have to be equipped with the large prize opening start port 17.

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3. The outlet 16 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3, and ejects game balls that do not win at any of the winning openings out of the play area 3. The indicators 40 are located near the center of the right side of the play board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the bottom right of the play area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called a "left hit". On the other hand, a hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called a "right hit". The game machine 1 is configured so that a left hit can aim for winning at the first starting hole 20. On the other hand, a right hit can aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second starting hole 21, the first large winning hole 30, and the second large winning hole 35.

Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserved display 43a, a second special symbol reserved display 43b, and a normal symbol reserved display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special symbol reserved display 43a displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserved display 43b displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol display 41b. The regular symbol reserve display 44 displays the number of reserved activations (regular symbol reserves) stored in the regular symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41." The first special symbol reserve display 43a and the second special symbol reserve display 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve display 43."

The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varies) the special symbol (identification information) and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of a lottery (special symbol winning lottery, jackpot lottery) based on winning at the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) of a predetermined jackpot stopping mode, a special game (jackpot game) is played in which the first jackpot opening 30 or the second jackpot opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that has been won). The opening patterns of the jackpot openings (first jackpot opening 30 and second jackpot opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if a big win (one of the multiple types of big wins described below) is won, the big win symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, as in "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). If it is a loss, a losing symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, as in "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the special symbol is displayed in a variable display (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode may be, for example, each LED is lit so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (light display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be all LEDs flashing at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 (Fig. 5). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20, it is stored in the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a (Fig. 5) as the first special pattern reservation, and if the game ball enters the second start hole 21, it is stored in the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b (Fig. 5) as the second special pattern reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special pattern reservations that can be stored in each special pattern reservation memory area 85, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is four for both the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a and the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b. The special pattern reservation stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 is consumed when it becomes possible to variably display the special pattern based on the special pattern reservation. "Consuming the reserved special symbols" refers to determining the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the reserved special symbols, and executing the variable display of the special symbols to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, even if a winning occurs during the variable display of the special symbols or during the execution of the special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the winning can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on the reserved special symbol display 43. The first reserved special symbol display 43a and the second reserved special symbol display 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each reserved special symbol display 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting the LEDs for the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays (varies) the normal symbol, and then displays it still to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol that is displayed still (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a specific normal symbol that has been determined in advance (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern that corresponds to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal pattern display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal pattern according to the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern with only the right LED lit is displayed as "●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a normal loss pattern may be adopted. Before the normal pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the normal pattern is displayed in a predetermined change time. The mode of the change display may be, for example, both LEDs are turned on alternately. The mode of the change display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, the mode of the change display may be all LEDs flashing at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal pattern random number (winning random number) acquired for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal pattern reserve in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reserves that can be stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reserve stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 is consumed when it becomes possible to variable display the normal pattern based on that normal pattern reserve. The consumption of the normal pattern reserve means determining the normal pattern random number (winning random number) corresponding to that normal pattern reserve and executing variable display of the normal pattern to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the normal pattern based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, even if a prize is won during the variable display of the normal pattern or during the execution of the auxiliary game, the right to draw the normal pattern for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of normal pattern reserves is displayed on the normal pattern reserve display 44. The regular map reservation indicator 44 is, for example, composed of four LEDs, and displays the number of regular map reservations by lighting up the LEDs according to the number of regular map reservations.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), a sound control board 106 (FIG. 4), and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as big win lottery and transition of game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is a performance control board that controls performances executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large prize opening start port sensor 17a, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize port sensor 30a, the second large prize port sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal prize port sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize port solenoid 33, the second large prize port solenoid 38, and the V opening and closing member solenoid 73. The large prize opening start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large prize opening start opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the large prize opening start opening 17. The first start opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first start opening 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second start opening 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30, and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the first large prize opening 30, and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27, and detects game balls that have won in the regular prize opening 27. The regular prize opening sensor 29a detects game balls that have passed through the regular prize opening 29. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. The V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of the first big prize device 31.

The main control board 80 is connected to the displays 40 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserved display 43a, the second special symbol reserved display 43b, and the normal symbol reserved display 44.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the loan ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and is connected to the launch device 112 via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The loan ball payout device 130 pays out loan balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending device 130 to dispense balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The dispensed balls are detected by a ball-lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launching volume 115. Then, the launching motor 113 is driven so that the game balls are launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launching volume 115.

The sub-control board 90 (Figure 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (not shown, for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting the direction of communication.

The sub-control board 90 includes a performance control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The performance control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the performance of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the performance control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to an image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for controlling the display, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols (including performance patterns) and background images. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding the image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64. Based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 and controls the display based on the read image data.

The speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, audio data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69, and controls them. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 through the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light pattern data (data that determines the on/off and light color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and controls the light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 according to the light emission pattern data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69, and controls the operation of the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable roles 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The relay board 108 is connected to a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. A vibration motor is also attached to the performance button detection switch 63a, which can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the performance button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, a sword component detection switch that detects that the sword component 65 has been searched is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 5 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 6 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 6 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) stores a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol change pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, a change pattern determination table T6, an electric chute opening pattern determination table T7, a large prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V-shaped opening member opening pattern determination table T9. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special chart reserved memory area 85, and a normal chart reserved memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a pre-determination command, a reserved ball number command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V pass command, a customer waiting standby command, and the like are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, a ceiling flag, a V flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a probability change counter, a time reduction counter, etc. are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area where a status in the special operation process described later is set. The special pattern reserved memory area 85 includes a first special pattern reserved memory area 85a in which the first special pattern reserved is stored, and a second special pattern reserved memory area 85b in which the second special pattern reserved is stored. The first special pattern reserved memory area 85a is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as random numbers for special patterns corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special pattern reserved, respectively. The second special symbol reserved memory area 85b is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special symbol reserved. The normal symbol reserved memory area 86 is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal symbol reserved. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 is provided with a winning type set buffer in which special symbol stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the movable parts 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off or on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information do not change state even when the power is turned OFF and ON, and the information is maintained. Meanwhile, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" as the initial state of the flags, and the other flags are set to "OFF". Also, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the initial state of the counters, and the other counters are set to "0".

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a core performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. These determination tables are referenced by the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the performance control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command memory area 94a, a performance command set area 94b, a pre-judgment information memory area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command memory area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side in the sub-control main processing (described later) are stored, and pre-judgment commands, reserved ball number commands, fluctuation start commands, fluctuation stop commands, opening commands, round designation commands, ending commands, game state designation commands, V pass commands, customer waiting standby commands, etc. are stored. The performance command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and a fluctuation performance start command, a pre-fluctuation end command, a fluctuation performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set. The pre-judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-judgment information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a first special reserved effect counter, a second special reserved effect counter, a normal reserved effect counter, a ceiling effect counter, an overnight effect counter, a probability change effect counter, a time-saving effect counter, and the like are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight effect counter is not cleared even when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF or ON, and is maintained as it is. In other words, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the overnight effect counter, and pre-judgment information are not changed even when the power supply is turned OFF or ON, and the information is maintained. The overnight effect counter is reset by turning the power supply of the gaming machine 1 OFF or ON, and 0 is set as the initial state. The information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by the RAM clear of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to 500 as the initial state of the counters, and the other counters are set to 0.

Figure 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 7 (A) shows the random numbers acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 7 (B) shows the random numbers acquired by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal pattern random number (win random number)" at the timing described below. The "jackpot random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "jackpot type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine the type of jackpot that has been won (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the performance pattern change performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a miss, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The reach is a state in which there is only one performance pattern remaining among multiple performance patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a changing manner, and depending on which of the performance patterns that are displayed in a changing manner are displayed as stopped, a combination of performance patterns that indicates a jackpot win (for example, a "7↓7" state). Note that the performance pattern that is displayed in a stopped state in the reach state may be displayed as if it is flickering on the display screen 7a. The "change pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a change pattern including a change time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal pattern random number (win random number)" is used in a lottery (normal pattern lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22. The normal pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "variation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the start port (first start port 20 or second start port 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 20 is stored in the first special pattern reserve memory area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second start port 21 is stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area 85b. The "normal pattern random number (winning random number)" is obtained based on the passage through the gate 28. The obtained normal pattern random number value is stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "look-ahead performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at the timing described below. The "look-ahead performance random number" is a random number used to determine the look-ahead performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead performance random number" is acquired based on a pre-determination command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a variation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining the judgment tables T1 to T4. Figure 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the big win judgment table T1, Figure 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach judgment table T2, Figure 8 (C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern hit judgment table T3, and Figure 8 (D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern change pattern judgment table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired jackpot random number (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "miss." In FIG. 8(A), it is shown that in the "normal probability state," if the jackpot random number is "0 to 164," it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535)," it is determined to be a "miss." In addition, in the "high probability state," if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649," it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)," it is determined to be a "miss." The contents of the "normal probability state" and "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach judgment table T2 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to judge whether the acquired reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". In FIG. 8 (B), it is shown that in the "non-time-saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 13", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". Also, in the "time-saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach judgment table T2, it is more difficult to reach when losing in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because when in the time-saving mode, more no-reach misses with short fluctuation times are selected, speeding up the consumption of reserved special charts.

The normal symbol hit determination table T3 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to a "hit" or a "miss." FIG. 8(C) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 to 255)," it is determined to be a "miss." It also shows that in the "time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)," it is determined to be a "miss."

The normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine how many seconds the normal symbol change time is depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 8 (D) shows that in the "non-time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the "time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "1 second".

Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the "jackpot type" and the "type of special symbol" according to the acquired jackpot type random number (any of 0 to 127). In Figure 9, when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected in the lottery, if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol 1 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random number is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50-55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56-67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V-non-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". On the other hand, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is selected in the lottery, when the jackpot type random number value is "0-82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV-passing jackpot" and the special symbol 2 stop pattern (special symbol stop pattern) is determined to be "jackpot pattern 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop pattern data" corresponding to the special symbol stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command" of the special game can also be specified. The specific contents of "16RV passing jackpot", "16R (actual 15R) V passing jackpot", "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", and "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" will be described later.

Figure 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time-saving state. Figure 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127). Figure 10 shows, for example, that in the non-time-saving state, when a ball enters the first starting hole 20, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "miss," the reach determination table T2 determines it as a "reach," the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2," and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 60," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7." In FIG. 11, for example, when the second starting hole 21 is won in the time-saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "jackpot", the jackpot type determination table T5 determines it as a "jackpot expected to pass 16RV", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 10", the fluctuation pattern is determined as "P61". As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when a reach occurs, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). A super reach is a reach performance in which the fluctuation time after the reach is longer than that of a normal reach. Here, five types of super reaches (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, it is executed in a developed manner after a normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo consecutive.

Figure 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). In Figure 12 (A), it is shown that in the "non-time-saving state", the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and in the "time-saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12". In Figure 12 (B), the contents of opening pattern 11 and opening pattern 12 are shown. In opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric chute 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls are won (a maximum of 10 balls), the electric chute 22 will close even if there is still time left to open it.

Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. The large prize opening pattern determination table T8 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). In Figure 13 (A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H", "15H", or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 23". In Figure 13 (B), the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23 are shown. In the opening pattern 21, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds. In the opening pattern 22, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th rounds, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 15th round. In opening pattern 23, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in round 14, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in round 16. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (prescribed number of winnings, up to 9 balls), the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 are closed even if there is still opening time remaining.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). In Figure 14 (A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "opening pattern 31", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 8th and 10th races, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd and 6th races, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th races, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30. In opening pattern 34, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 seconds.

4. Description of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "jackpot", a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "loss", a "loss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the jackpot winning holes (the first jackpot winning hole 30 and the second jackpot winning hole 35) are opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (type of jackpot) that is displayed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit opening games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the last round game ends. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The time (interval time) for closing the big prize opening between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure.

There are several types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. 9. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing jackpot" and "V-non-passing jackpot". A "V-passing jackpot" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37, and the V-opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. Here, a jackpot with special stop pattern data of 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to a "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), the game ball can pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. A "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 in an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) that makes it impossible for the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. Here, a jackpot with special stop pattern data of 15H and 22H corresponds to a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), it becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V passing jackpot" includes the "16RV passing jackpot", the "16R (actually 13R) V passing jackpot", and the "16R (actually 15R) V passing jackpot". The "16RV passing jackpot" has a total of 16Rs. The first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R in Rs 1 to 13 and R 15. The second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R in Rs 14 and 16 (Figure 13: opening pattern 21). In Rs 10 and 12, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time (Figure 14: opening pattern 31), and it is easy to pass through to the V area 39 in the first large prize opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R in effect. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 33), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, and in 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 14R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short in 14R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be won. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of 15R in effect. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of opening pattern 22, in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in 15R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize winning hole 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize winning hole is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R in effect. At 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (Figure 14: opening pattern 34), making it nearly impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" have the same opening pattern (opening pattern 22) between the first large prize winning opening 30 and the second large prize winning opening 35 (opening member 32 and opening member 37), and only the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are designed to play a time-saving game (100 times in this example) after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first large prize winning opening 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning port 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", and it becomes difficult to determine whether the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state) or a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state). In addition, after the time-saving game ends, the game state becomes a low-probability low-base state (normal state) in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state becomes a high-probability low-base state that appears to be the normal state in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot". That is, in the "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first large winning port 30, when the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state becomes a high probability low base state but a latent state in which a high probability is hidden (latent high probability state), and this latent high probability state is difficult for the player to distinguish. That is, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high base state) after the jackpot play of "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", the high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot play of "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", and the low-probability low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the high-probability low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

As shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60/128 (about 47%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In contrast, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing jackpot and 45/128 (about 35.2%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In this way, the gaming machine 1 is set up so that the jackpot lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) held when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot lottery (lottery for the first special symbol) held when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 20.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The gaming control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs probability variation control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability change state)," and the state in which the probability variation control is not performed is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The gaming control microcomputer 81 realizes the high probability state by performing a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, as the probability variation control of the special symbols. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the special pattern of the special pattern display device 41, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern by the special pattern display device 41 will be a jackpot pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the time-shortening of the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called the "time-shortening state", and the state in which the time-shortening of the special symbol is not controlled is simply called the "non-time-shortening state". In the time-shortening state, the time-shortening of the special symbol (the time from the start of the display to the derivation of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges the variation pattern using the variation pattern judgment table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time-shortening state in the time-shortening state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time-shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, a short variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol compared to when the variation time-shortening control is not executed. As a result, in the time-shortening state, the pace of consumption of the special symbol reservation is faster, and effective winning (winning that can be stored as the special symbol reservation) at the starting port is more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a big win while playing smoothly. Note that the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern of the normal pattern display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special pattern of the special pattern display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern in the time-shortening state, but does not execute them in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the hit judgment (judgment of the normal pattern) using the normal pattern hit judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) in which the number of normal pattern random number values (hit random number values) judged as a hit is higher in the time-shortening state than in the non-time-shortening state, as the probability fluctuation control for the normal pattern. Therefore, in the time-shortening state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal pattern normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal pattern of the normal pattern display 42, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display 42 will be a winning pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not executed. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than that in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but is 1 second in the time-saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control on the electric chute 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chute 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening number increase control on the electric chute 22. In a situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 is opened more frequently and the game balls enter the second start hole 21 more frequently than when these controls are not executed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, becomes higher. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand. The high base state is a state in which the so-called electric support control (control that supports the entry into the second start hole 21 by the electric chute 22) is executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the following controls, it is sufficient that the electric chute 22 is more likely to open than when the control is not executed: probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, opening time extension control for the electric chute 22, and opening count increase control for the electric chute 22. Also, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time-saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot game due to winning a V-passing jackpot is a high probability state, a time-saving state, and a high base state if the game passes through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. This game state is particularly called a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability time-saving state." Specifically, the jackpots that result in a high probability high base state after a jackpot game are the "16RV-passing jackpot," the "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," and the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. For the "16RV-passing jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," the high probability high base state ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won after the jackpot game and the jackpot game is executed. In the case of the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing jackpot", the high probability high base state ends when the special pattern is displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is played. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game due to the winning of the V non-passing jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., low probability state), time-saving state, and high base state if the V area 39 is not passed during the jackpot game (almost never). This game state is particularly called the "low probability high base state" and the "low probability time-saving state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes the low probability high base state is the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. In this jackpot, the low probability high base state ends when the special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is played. When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly called a "low probability low base state." The low probability low base state is sometimes called a "normal game state" or a "low probability non-time-saving state (also simply called a non-time-saving state)." In addition, the state during which a special game (jackpot game) is being played is sometimes called a "special game state (jackpot game state)." Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is sometimes called a "specific game state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the right game area 3B (Fig. 1). This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chute 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start hole 21 than the first start hole 20. For this reason, in a high base state, the ball is hit to the right to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal pattern lottery. This allows more start wins (entry into the start hole) to be obtained than by hitting to the left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during a jackpot game. On the other hand, in a low base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the left game area 3A (Fig. 1) by hitting to the left. Because electric support control is not being executed, the electric chute 22 is less likely to open than in the high base state, making it easier to win in the first starting hole 20 than in the second starting hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, the ball is hit from the left in order to get the game ball to win in the first starting hole 20. This allows more start wins to be obtained than if the ball was hit from the right.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (Fig. 3) will be described with reference to Figs. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the win/lose determination means (Fig. 23) and the win/lose advance determination means (Figs. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the main control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads out a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is the ceiling flag, i.e., "1", i.e., "ON", and the initial value of the other flags is "0", i.e., "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial value of the counter is the ceiling counter, i.e., "500", and the other counters are "0". The initial setting is performed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, normal symbol random number) shown in FIG. 7(A) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is prohibited, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7 (A). This random number update process is the same as the normal and special pattern main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update process of various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by the various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors are, for example, the first start hole sensor 20a, the second start hole sensor 21a, the first large winning hole sensor 30a, the second large winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Figure 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the start hole sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V-area sensor detection process (step S106), and the reserved ball number process (step S107) in that order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes other processes (step S109). In the other processes, for example, the second special chart reserved display 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 2 described later, and the first special chart reserved display 43a is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 1.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved normal symbols, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved normal symbols provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved normal symbol balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved normal symbol balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in the first to fourth memory areas of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 of the main RAM 84 according to the current number of reserved normal symbol balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is the number of reserved second special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved second special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 (step S207), and then a special chart 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special chart reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special chart reserved memory area 85b for the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. After the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special chart 2 pre-determination process (step S209). The details of the special chart 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is the number of reserved first special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (step S212), and then a random number acquisition process related to special chart 1 is performed (step S213). Here, as in the above-mentioned special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special chart 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reservation storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the first special chart reservation storage area 85a for the special chart 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The details of the special chart 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special Drawing 2 Pre-Decision Processing]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the special chart 2 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability of winning is ON or not (step S301). If the probability of winning is OFF (step S301: NO), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability of winning is OFF, no pre-judgment is performed. On the other hand, if the probability of winning is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-judgment of a jackpot by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-judgment of whether or not a jackpot has been won by using the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to be referred to. Here, since the probability state is high (the probability flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high probability state table (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1 to determine in advance whether or not there is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is determined in advance as a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance as a "miss". In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used to perform the pre-determination, but in other embodiments, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used to perform the pre-determination.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "miss" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127", the pre-determination is "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but in other embodiments, the pre-determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot type determination table T5.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as the judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, since the time-saving state (time-saving flag is ON) is in effect here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state (FIG. 11) and specifies the fluctuation pattern from the jackpot pre-determination result of step S304, the reach pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value, and the fluctuation pattern random number value. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, if a reach or miss is determined in advance based on the jackpot advance determination result and the reach/no reach advance determination result, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 selects two patterns: fluctuation pattern "P64" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and fluctuation pattern "P68" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the advance determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but in other embodiments, the advance determination may be performed using a fluctuation pattern determination table for advance determination that is different from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a win, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment Processing]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart of the special chart 1 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special chart 2 pre-judgment process, if the probability variable flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is ON, pre-judgment is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Next, since the state is normal probability (the probability flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the table for normal probability (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as a "miss". Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a jackpot determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. The process of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described above, so the description will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the normal pattern is changing (step S502). If the normal pattern is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal pattern is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), the process ends. If the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of normal symbols being "0", the number of reserved balls of normal symbols becomes "1" once in step S203 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), and then the reserved balls are consumed in this step S504, and the reserved balls of normal symbols immediately become "0". This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the reserved balls of special symbols become "1" once, and then the reserved balls are consumed in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) described later, and the reserved balls of special symbols become "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a win judgment by referring to the normal symbol win judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol random number value (win random number value) stored as a judgment value in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserved) of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86. Then, it judges whether or not there is a win by using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not there is a time-saving state), and the normal symbol win judgment table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is judged as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is judged as a "lose" (see FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8 (D)) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not the time-saving state) and selects the normal symbol fluctuation time as the normal symbol fluctuation pattern using the game state determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "30 seconds," and in the time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern to start displaying the normal symbol fluctuation (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8 (D)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation display continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "miss" (step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned hit determination is a "win" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 (Figure 12 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 using the game state determination result and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. Here, when it is in a non-time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when it is in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the operation of the electric chute in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above-mentioned step S501, if the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 22 has reached a specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 6 balls) or the operation time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it has become time to close the electric chute 22. The operation time of the electric chute 22 is the operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and ends this process.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "1", "2", "3", and "4" of the "special operation status". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a big win determination, a change pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol change process is executed (step S1304). In the special symbol change process, a change stop command is output after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output when a jackpot occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric device process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric device process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The initial setting of the special operation status is "1".

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol waiting process, the game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" or not (step S1401). If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, if the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b does not store a random number group acquired due to winning the second starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variable pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variable pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of reserved information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest location from the side to be read in the second special chart reserved storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when reserved information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and when reserved information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the reserved second special charts are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and is displayed as the reserved consumption image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left out of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b are shifted one to the left (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one second special symbol reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 2 variation start processing (step S1406). In the special symbol 2 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. Also, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the fluctuation start command (special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process includes information regarding the special chart stop pattern data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information regarding the fluctuation time).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" or not (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if the first special chart reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group obtained due to winning the first starting hole 20, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest location from the side to be read in the first special chart reserved storage area 85a (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special chart reserved is consumed in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the reserved image 9A at the right end of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and is displayed as a reserved consumption image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a are each shifted one position to the right (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one first special chart reserved has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 1 variation start processing (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). Note that the variation start command (special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start processing includes information on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the big win determination processing (step S1408) and information on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection processing (step S1409) (including information on the variation time).

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a waiting screen or not (step S1413). The waiting screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may judge, for example, by the ON/OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a waiting screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a waiting screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined waiting time to elapse, sets a customer waiting waiting command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the consumption of the second reserved special chart is executed in priority to the consumption of the first reserved special chart. Also, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of this embodiment, the lottery based on the second reserved special chart makes it easier for the player to win a jackpot (a jackpot scheduled to pass V) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first reserved special chart.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402, S1408). The jackpot determination process for special chart 2 (step S1402) and the jackpot determination process for special chart 1 (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special chart 1, the jackpot random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved first special chart) of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred by using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to which it refers. Here, since the probability of a jackpot is high (the probability flag is ON), the jackpot determination is determined based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value in the same manner as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) is being assumed here, it determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special chart 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of jackpot based on the read out jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the type of jackpot, the special stop pattern data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the jackpot determination is "miss," the special stop pattern data (01H) corresponding to the miss pattern is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flow charts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403, S1409). The variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1 (step S1409) are similar in flow of processing, so they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not (step S1600). The judgment of whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not is made by whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot is a special symbol 2 or not (step S1603). When the jackpot is a special symbol 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V-passing jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. When the jackpot is a special symbol 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot or not (step S1604). The jackpot type is judged based on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the main RAM 84.

When the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving state V-passing jackpots in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuation pattern random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for a non-time-saving state V-passing jackpot, the portion of the non-time-saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 that corresponds to a V-passing jackpot (the portion with fluctuation patterns "P1" to "P3" in special chart 1, and the portion with fluctuation patterns "P21" to "P23" in special chart 2) is referenced (the address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in special chart 2.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S1606). Here, as the table for a non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the portion "P4" to "P6"). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value or not (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a judgment value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved memory area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not there is a reach using the reach judgment table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of a reach with miss, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects the fluctuation pattern (step S1608). Here, as the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to reach with miss (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P7" to "P14" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, one of the fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In Special Chart 2, one of the patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected as the pattern from the read-out random number value for the pattern and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1 to 4). Since the pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortened pattern function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, in both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more patterns with shorter change times are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". This makes it possible to speed up the consumption of reserved special charts when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If the reach random number is not a reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects a fluctuation pattern (step S1609). Here, as the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to a miss without a reach (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P15" to "P16" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In the special chart 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 (1 to 4). Here too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so the shortened variation function according to the number of reserved balls is activated.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, so explanations will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referenced in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619 is different from that of the already-described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referenced, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot, the part corresponding to the V-passing jackpot (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P41" to "P43" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P61" to "P63" in the special chart 2) of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special chart 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special chart 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the portion "P44" to "P46") is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and is sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (Figure 16: step S108). This starts the variation display of the special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, FIG. 25) described above. If the variation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process is terminated. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes associated with the variation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data, etc. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game status management process (step S1801). The game status management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time-saving times, and the details of which will be described later. After the game status management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process moves to the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next reserved game is executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening and the V-shaped opening member according to the type of the jackpot that has been won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V-shaped opening and closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71. Along with setting the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V-shaped opening/closing member, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds according to the type of big win that was won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) that were executed during the big win game. In this case, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 13 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag, and will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process ends.

[Game Status Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flow chart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variable counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variable counter counts the number of times the special pattern is changed during the high probability state. Here, the probability variable counter is set to "100" when the state transitions to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the counter value becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variable counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability variable counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the high probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the high probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state. Here, the time-saving counter is set to "100" when the time-saving state is entered. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time-saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information about the set current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON or not, the ceiling counter value, whether or not the game is in a special state, the special state counter value, whether or not the game is in a time-saving state, the time-saving counter value, etc.).

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached, and counts the number of times the special pattern changes when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of rotations. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the counter value becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1 (step S2012). In other words, it judges whether the specified number of rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached has elapsed. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time-saving flag is switched ON (step S2013), and the time-saving counter is set to "700" as the number of time-saving times (number of times awarded). Then, the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game Status Reset Processing]
FIG. 29 is a flow chart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the high probability flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the high probability flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the high probability flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the high probability flag is switched OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process is terminated. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, the ceiling flag is OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since the non-time-saving state is always in a low base state, the low base state is maintained during the execution of a jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart of the special electric device processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the big win end flag is ON or not (step S2200). The "big win end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of all the big win devices (first big win device 31 and second big win device 36) based on the opening pattern in the ongoing big win game has ended. If the big win end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. If the big win end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening and closing member operation process is performed to operate the V opening and closing member 71 (step S2201). The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first large winning opening 30, and in the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined number of game balls enter according to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Details of the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) are open or not (step S2202). If they are open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the large prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the large prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the large prize opening includes, for example, when the opening time for the large prize opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening for the first round of play, and when the interval time (closing time) until the large prize opening is temporarily closed after opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the large prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the big prize opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big prize opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30 or second big prize opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big prize. After the big prize opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the big prize game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the big prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round of game. However, in another embodiment, when the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the large prize opening is the first opening during one round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2202, if the large prize opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that either the number of winnings in the large prize opening in that round of play has reached a specified maximum number of winnings (e.g., 9 winnings per round), or the time to close the large prize opening has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the large prize opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the large prize opening (step S2211).

If it is not the time (timing) to open the large prize opening in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) after the large prize opening is closed. As described above, this is because the time (interval time) for the large prize opening to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before the closure. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended based on whether a predetermined interval time has passed since the large prize opening was closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value is "0" or not (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of rounds has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round play. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0", a jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) as a jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot play, and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (e.g., 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". This allows the player to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" even if the game ball passed through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot". Note that the ending time when the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is also the same length. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol waiting process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation process]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can judge that it is an opening round when the round counter value is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", or "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is terminated. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the relevant round.

If it is the round in which the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won in the first large winning port 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), the process judges whether the first ball has won (step S2503). If the first ball has not won (step S2503: NO), the process ends. This is because there has been no winning in the first large winning port 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V-shaped opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2504). The reason for short-opening the V opening/closing member 71 is to execute a short opening (here, 0.1 seconds) when the first ball wins, regardless of whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)) is "short opening" or "long opening". In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that wins the first large winning hole 30 passes through the non-V area 70 without passing through the V area 39. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and for several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set to be the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and sets the V effective period during the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the period other than the V effective period (including when a jackpot game is not being executed) as the V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is judged to be invalid. Here, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be valid" means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (see the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 33) described later). Also, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is that, since there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a, the period until the game ball that entered the V area 39 side just before the V opening/closing member 71 is detected by the V area sensor 39a is taken into consideration. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball into the V area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and the V flag is not turned ON when the V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variable flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big win game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned ON based on the V passage due to fraudulent acts and is not set to a high probability state. After the V opening/closing member 71 is short-circuited and the V valid period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the second winning flag is ON or not (step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first large winning port 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening or not (step S2521). If it is not a long opening (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short opening, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if the opening is long (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2523). The reason for opening the V opening/closing member 71 long is to execute the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) when the second ball wins in the case of "long opening" in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)). Note that here, the maximum play time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning port 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), so generally, the time from the winning of the second ball to the end of the round is shorter than 31.5 seconds. As described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the opening time of the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is configured such that at least a portion of the second and subsequent game balls that enter the first large winning port 30 pass through the V area 39 because the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open or not. If the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not based on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the big prize opening was closed.

If the round of play has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period several seconds (here, 1 second) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, and ends this processing.

If the round of play has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is met (step S2560). For example, the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be that a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the V opening/closing member 71 was opened in the case of a short opening. If the closing condition is met (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the process ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the V opening/closing member 71 is left open and the V valid period is continued, and the process ends.

If the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S2540 that the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), it ends this process.

[Game Status Setting Process]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the V flag is ON or not (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time-saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the current big win game becomes "non-high probability state", "time-saving state", and "high base state" (i.e., low probability high base). This low probability high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special pattern is performed 100 times, or the next big win is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the high probability flag ON (step S2304), sets the high probability counter to "100" (step S2305), and turns the V flag OFF (step S2306). The game control microcomputer 81 also turns the time-saving flag ON (step S2307), and sets the time-saving counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time-saving state", and a "high base state" (i.e., high probability, high base). This high probability, high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special pattern is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns the ceiling flag ON, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of spins until the b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, when the probability change flag is OFF after a jackpot game, the game will enter the b time reduction (play time) after 500 spins. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information regarding the set game state (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a game ball has been detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is a period set by the V-effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V-effective period is set during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, during which the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed for several seconds (ball brushing period). If the V valid period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the V valid period is in progress (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern. After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to Figures 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
35 is a flow chart showing the sub-control main process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. In addition to incrementing the random number value by 1, it may also be configured to increment by 2 or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). The received command analysis process will be described later in detail. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a variable performance process (step S4305). The variable performance process is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to execute a specific display performance on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable performance process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc., to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. The image control board 100, which has received various commands, executes a display performance according to the received command using the image display device 7. In addition, the voice control board 106, which has received various commands, executes a sound performance that outputs sound from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107, which has received various commands, executes a lamp performance that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and ends this process. In the other processes, for example, a random number update process is performed.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first judges whether or not a pre-judgment command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), a pre-reading performance determination process is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading performance determination process" is a process for determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance, and a pre-reading performance pattern if executed. Details of the pre-reading performance determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading performance determination process is skipped. The pre-reading performance is a performance that suggests that the reserved information newly stored in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is highly likely to contain a jackpot, and is performed during a variable performance.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a reserved display process is performed (step S4450). In the reserved display process, the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated based on the information on the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern included in the reserved ball number command. This allows the information on the number of reserved balls to be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a fluctuation start command has been received (step S4455: YES), a fluctuation performance start process is performed (step S4460). The "fluctuation performance start process" is a process for selecting the fluctuation performance pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation performance start process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If a change stop command has been received (step S4465: YES), a change performance end process is performed (step S4470). The "change performance end process" is a process for stopping the change performance executed during the change of the special pattern. In the change performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter based on the analysis result of the change stop command, and sets a change performance end command for ending the change performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 that is changing is stopped and displayed. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. Note that if the change stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the change performance end process described above is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If an opening command has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information about the special symbol stop pattern data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the performance pattern of the opening performance that is preset in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data is selected, and an opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big prize opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (big prize game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a performance pattern of the round designation that is preset in accordance with the winning type and the number of rounds indicated by the special stop pattern data is selected, and a round designation start command for starting the selected round designation is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If an ending command has been received (step S4495: YES), an ending performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special chart stop pattern data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the microcomputer 91 selects an ending performance pattern according to the type of win indicated by the special chart stop pattern data, and sets an ending performance start command to start the selected ending performance in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a specific ending performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If no ending command has been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (such as time-saving flag, time-saving counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, and ceiling counter) in the sub-RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time-saving performance counter, probability change performance counter, and ceiling performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations during time-saving (number of games) is set in the time-saving performance counter, the remaining number of fluctuations during probability change is set in the probability change performance counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached is set in the ceiling performance counter. This allows the information on the time-saving number of times, the probability change number, and the ceiling number to be stored not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores the V-passed information in the sub-RAM 94. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (such as a customer waiting command, a RAM clear notification command, etc.) and then ends this processing.

[Pre-reading performance decision processing]
38 is a flowchart of the pre-reading performance determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-judgment information rewrite process (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 stores the jackpot pre-judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type pre-judgment result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result (fluctuation pattern information) contained in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c.

Figure 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. In addition to the jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information described above, the pre-judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-reading performance pattern information. The pre-reading performance pattern information is information indicating the contents of the pre-reading performance executed during the fluctuation performance, and is selected in step S4604 described later. Figure 39 (A) shows a state in which the jackpot judgment information "miss" and the fluctuation pattern information "P72" and "P73" are stored in the first to third storage areas as pre-judgment results corresponding to the first to third reserved special charts 2, respectively, and the pre-judgment results corresponding to the fluctuations are stored in the corresponding areas. Figure 39 (B) shows a state in which the special chart 2 wins from the state of Figure 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 2. Here, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored as the pre-determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is set as the pre-reading performance pattern information in each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved special chart 2 pieces and the area corresponding to the variation. FIG. 39(C) shows the state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the pre-determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the pre-determination information in the fourth storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation performance end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. If the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, the pre-reading performance pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, if the pre-judgment information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). When the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "miss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, when the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "jackpot" or "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), a look-ahead performance execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, and a look-ahead performance pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the look-ahead performance random number, and determines whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93 by referring to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-determination result is "big win" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-55", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "56-67", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "68-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Also, if the pre-determination result is "reach with miss" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-107", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "108-114", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "115-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Note that the type, content, and range of the random number value to be selected of the look-ahead performance pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a look-ahead performance is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the look-ahead performance pattern is stored not only in the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also in the storage area before the corresponding storage area and in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only is "Pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, but "Pattern A" is also set in the first to third storage areas and the area. As a result, the look-ahead performance pattern A is also executed in the variable performance executed before the variable performance corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable performance corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). Note that whether or not the look-ahead performance is executed in the variable performance corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable performance. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance will not be executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it will be executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead performance will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the processing ends.

[Variable performance start processing]
41 is a flow chart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special chart stop pattern data included in the variable start command and information on the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status, pattern information indicating the pattern as the judgment result of the hit judgment process of the special chart 1 or special chart 2, etc. The game status information and pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a core performance pattern determination process (step S5010). The core performance pattern determination process is a process for determining the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display and movement of predetermined characters, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67, the lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up performances and pre-reading performances on this core performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the core performance pattern by referring to the core performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the core performance pattern determination table T52. In Figure 42, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, and multiple types of core performance patterns that perform no reach miss performance are set. The type of core performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", a core performance pattern that performs an SP1 performance is selected. Also, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", a core performance pattern that performs a no reach miss performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up performance pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up performance pattern determination processing is processing for determining additional performance to be superimposed on the variable performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up performance pattern by referring to the obtained random number value and the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation performance pattern of special chart 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, Figure 43 shows the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". Note that the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 may or may not include a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", or "61" to "73".

In FIG. 43, the chance-up effect patterns are set as "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO". These chance-up effect patterns correspond to the various chance-up effects described below.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up presentation pattern, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a count presentation pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count presentation pattern determination process is a process for displaying on the display screen 7a the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during the special bonus period, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time-saving period, the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, the number of fluctuations since the power was turned on, the number of fluctuations since the big win was played, etc. During the special bonus period, the presentation control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of times in the special bonus period on the display screen 7a based on the value of the special bonus presentation counter. Also, during the time-saving period, the presentation control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of times in the special bonus period based on the value of the time-saving presentation counter.

The performance control microcomputer 91 can execute various performances based on the value of the ceiling performance counter and the value of the overnight performance counter. The ceiling performance counter stores the number of remaining variations until the ceiling is reached, and the overnight performance counter records the number of variations since the power is turned on. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 can set the number of variations since the power is turned on by incrementing the overnight performance counter every time it receives a variable performance end command from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling performance counter is equal to or less than TH2 (for example, TH2 = 200) when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH1 (for example, TH1 = 10). If the value of the ceiling performance counter is equal to or less than TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling performance counter is greater than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. This allows a player who sees the chance image to recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that RAM clearing has not been performed. The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH3 (e.g., TH3=50). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also erase the display or chance image showing the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH4 (e.g., TH4=100). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH5 (e.g., TH5=200) again. The performance control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling performance counter based on the value of the overnight performance counter as described above, or may also determine based on the value of the ceiling performance counter. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH6 (e.g., TH6 = 100), may turn off the display of the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH7 (e.g., TH7 = 70), and may display the value of the ceiling performance counter again when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH8 (e.g., TH8 = 50).

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number value and the stop pattern pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed. This determines what kind of effect will be performed as the variable effect.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 above is realized (step S5020). When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (Figure 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the variable performance timer (step S5030) and ends this process. The variable performance timer is set to a variable time (Figure 42) that corresponds to the variable pattern included in the variable start command. For example, when the variable pattern is "P1", the variable performance timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the process during the variable performance (FIG. 36: step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not the variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be judged, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is set to zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the performance control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variable performance, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command, it switches the performance content or displays a specific image according to the information contained in the pre-variation end command.

If it is not the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change performance. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead performance in which a look-ahead performance image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead performance pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade performance in which the preview image fades.

8. Operation of the image control microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided in the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. 45. The buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flow chart of the display control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 judges whether or not a variable performance start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If it has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable performance display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable performance start command, reads out a predetermined variable performance image designated in the variable performance start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the image display device 7. On the other hand, if the command has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Next, the image control microcontroller 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If a pre-variation end command has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcontroller 101 starts the pre-reading performance display (step S5004). On the other hand, if a pre-variation end command has not been received (step S5003: NO), the image control microcontroller 101 skips the above-mentioned process.

Then, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable performance end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If so (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 an image that displays the variable performance as stopped, and displays the variable performance stopped on the image display device 7 (step S5006). On the other hand, if the command has not been received (step S5005: NO), the image control microcomputer 101 skips the above-mentioned process.

Then, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 predetermined images instructed in various commands in addition to the above-mentioned commands, and displays them on the image display device 7. For example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an opening performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening performance image instructed in the opening performance start command, and displays it on the image display device 7. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives a round performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined round performance image instructed in the round performance start command, and displays it on the image display device 7. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives an ending performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined ending performance image instructed in the ending performance start command, and displays it on the image display device 7, and then this processing ends.

9. Operation of movable body and display performance of sub display screen 64 Using Figures 46 to 50, the operation of the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15), the operation of the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), and the display performance of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) will be described. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a display performance to display a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable role 14. Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable role 14. The first movable role 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, with its upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and its lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The first movable role 14 is difficult to see at its upper and lower ends, and the center area is visible in front of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable role 14 can be stationary at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). In the retracted position, only a portion of the first movable role 14 may be stored and the remaining portion may be visible, or the entirety of the first movable role 14 may be stored and difficult to see. As shown in Figure 46, the first movable role 14 is configured to be movable in the left and right directions in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and to be movable in the left and right directions in front of the display screen 7a. It can also stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable part 14 can be set arbitrarily. As shown in FIG. 47, the first movable part 14 can move to the right edge of the display screen 7a and stop at that position (second mode). At least a part of the first movable part 14 may be formed with a decorative part, or may be transparent.

Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable role 15. The second movable role 15 has a rectangular decorative part marked "OARO" and is configured to be able to move up and down. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable role 15 can stop at a retreat position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable role 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable role 15 can move downward from the state shown in Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in Figure 48 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops in front of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable role 15 can move upward (retreat) from the advanced position of Figure 48 to the retreat position shown in Figure 1 and can stop there.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the movable frame gadget 69. The movable frame gadget 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and each is configured to be movable in the left and right directions. The two members are made of flexible materials, and one main surface of each member is configured to approach and move away from the handle 60. As shown in Figure 1, the two members of the movable frame gadget 69 are normally stationary at retreated positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60 (first mode). As shown in Figure 49, the two members of the movable frame gadget 69 can move (advance) from the retreated positions toward the handle 60, that is, move close to each other, and stop at a position where they touch the handle 60 (second mode). When in the advanced position, the movable frame gadget 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60. The movable frame part 69 can move in a direction in which the two components move away from each other so that the frame moves from the second position to the first position.

Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U can each display images independently. They can also display effects linked to the images on the display screen 7a.

10. Examples of the performance, effects, modifications, and aspects of the present embodiment The following describes each of the performance examples (display performance examples, role-moving performance examples) of the present embodiment. In addition, effects, modifications, and aspects of the performance examples are also described. The performances described below are, as described above, performances realized by the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. The following display performance examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, etc. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples.

The symbol row change effects A to F are explained below using Figures 51 to 56. These symbol row change effects are executed in the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a symbol row change effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Pattern row change performance A]
51 is a diagram for explaining the symbol row change performance A. The symbol row change performance A is a performance in which the middle decorative pattern 8C (final stop pattern) among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R variably displayed in a plurality of rows on the display screen 7a changes.

First, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change rapidly and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that the hold icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in Figures 51 (B) to (D), a left pattern stop effect is executed. In the left pattern stop effect, the speed at which the left decorative pattern changes (moves) slows down, and then the left decorative pattern stops.

In FIG. 51(B), the speed of change of the left decorative pattern 8L is slowed down. The left decorative pattern 8L includes the "4", "5", "6", and "7" symbols, which are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "7" symbol is out of the frame.

In Figure 51 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped in the top row, the "5" symbol is stopped in the middle row, and the "6" symbol is stopped in the bottom row. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 51(D), the "4" symbol in the top row and the "6" symbol in the bottom row of the stopped left decorative pattern 8L are hidden, and only the "5" symbol in the middle row on the active line is displayed. Note that the "4" symbol in the top row and the "6" symbol in the bottom row may be displayed semi-transparently to be inconspicuous rather than being completely hidden.

Next, as shown in Figures 51 (E) to (G), a right pattern stop effect is executed. In the right pattern stop effect, the speed at which the right decorative pattern changes (moves) slows down, and then the right decorative pattern stops.

In FIG. 51(E), the speed of change of the right decorative pattern 8R is slowed down. The right decorative pattern 8R includes the "6", "5", "4", and "3" symbols, which are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "3" symbol is out of the frame.

In Figure 51 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the "6" symbol is stopped in the top row, the "5" symbol is stopped in the middle row, and the "4" symbol is stopped in the bottom row. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In Fig. 51 (G), the "6" symbol in the upper row and the "4" symbol in the lower row of the stopped right decorative symbol 8R are hidden, and only the "5" symbol in the middle row on the activated line is displayed. Note that the "6" symbol in the upper row and the "4" symbol in the lower row may be displayed semi-transparently so as not to be completely hidden.
When the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "5" symbol, a so-called "reach" state is formed.

Next, as shown in Figures 51 (H) to (L), a center symbol stop effect is executed. The center symbol stop effect is an effect in which the fluctuation speed (movement speed) of the center decorative symbol slows down, and then the center decorative symbol stops.

In FIG. 51(H), the speed of change of the middle decorative pattern 8C is slowed down. The middle decorative patterns 8C, which are the "7", "8", "9", and "0" patterns, are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "0" pattern is out of the frame.

In FIG. 51(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is difficult to see. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is covered with a band-shaped image (shown with hatching). This increases the likelihood that attention will be drawn to the change in the middle decorative pattern 8C. When making the middle decorative pattern 8C difficult to see, it is not enough to simply display an image, but it is also possible to use effects such as making the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C light up or go dark.

In FIG. 51(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C has changed. Here, all of the middle decorative patterns 8C have been changed to "5" patterns. The "5" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y as the middle decorative pattern 8C. Most of the "5" pattern in the bottom row is out of the frame.

In Figure 51 (K), the center decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol is stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 51(L), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "5" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped middle decorative symbol 8C are hidden, and only the "5" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. The "5" symbols on the top and bottom rows may be displayed semi-transparently rather than being completely hidden. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in the winning pattern of "555".

[Pattern row change performance B]
52 is a diagram for explaining the symbol row change performance B. The symbol row change performance B is a performance in which one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in multiple rows on the display screen 7a (here, the left decorative pattern 8L) changes. When the symbol row change performance B is executed, a reach is confirmed. In other words, when the reach performance is confirmed, the symbol row change performance B may be selected.

First, as shown in FIG. 52(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that the hold icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in Figures 52 (B) to (D), a left pattern stop effect is executed. In the left pattern stop effect, the speed of change (movement speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down, and then the left decorative pattern stops.

In FIG. 52(B), the speed of change of the left decorative pattern 8L is slow. All of the left decorative patterns 8L are "5" patterns, and the "5" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "5" patterns in the bottom row are out of frame.

In Figure 52 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol is stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 52(D), the "5" symbol in the top row and the "5" symbol in the bottom row of the stopped left decorative symbol 8L are hidden, and only the "5" symbol in the middle row on the active line is displayed. Note that the "5" symbols in the top and bottom rows may be displayed semi-transparently to be inconspicuous rather than being completely hidden.

Next, as shown in Figures 52 (E) to (G), a right pattern stop effect is executed. In the right pattern stop effect, the speed at which the right decorative pattern changes (moves) slows down, and then the right decorative pattern stops.

In FIG. 52(E), the speed of change of the right decorative pattern 8R is slowed down. The right decorative pattern 8R includes the "6", "5", "4", and "3" symbols, which are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "3" symbol is out of the frame.

In Figure 52 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the "6" symbol is stopped in the top row, the "5" symbol is stopped in the middle row, and the "4" symbol is stopped in the bottom row. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In Fig. 52(G), the "6" symbol in the upper row and the "4" symbol in the lower row of the stopped right decorative symbol 8R are hidden, and only the "5" symbol in the middle row on the activated line is displayed. Note that the "6" symbol in the upper row and the "4" symbol in the lower row may be displayed semi-transparently so as not to be completely hidden.
When the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "5" symbol, a so-called "reach" state is formed.

Next, as shown in Figures 52 (H) to (K), a center symbol stop effect is executed. The center symbol stop effect is an effect in which the fluctuation speed (movement speed) of the center decorative symbol slows down, and then the center decorative symbol stops.

In FIG. 52(H), the speed of change of the middle decorative pattern 8C is slowed down. The middle decorative patterns 8R, which are the "7", "8", "9", and "0" patterns, are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "0" pattern is out of the frame.

In FIG. 52(I), the speed of change of the middle decorative pattern 8C is even slower. The middle decorative patterns 8C, which are the "5", "6", "7", and "8" patterns, are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "8" pattern is out of the frame.

In Figure 52 (J), the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol is stopped in the top row, the "6" symbol is stopped in the middle row, and the "7" symbol is stopped in the bottom row. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 52(K), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "7" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped right decorative symbol 8R are hidden, and only the "6" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. Note that the "5" symbol on the top row and the "7" symbol on the bottom row do not have to be completely hidden, but may be displayed semi-transparently to make them less noticeable. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "565", which is a missed reach.

[Pattern row change effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the pattern row change performance C. The pattern row change performance C is a performance in which two columns (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in multiple columns on the display screen 7a change. The pattern row change performance C is a performance selected when the expectation of a win is higher than that of the pattern row change performance B. When the pattern row change performance C is executed, the development to the SP reach is confirmed. In other words, when the development to the SP reach is confirmed, the pattern row change performance C may be selected.

First, as shown in FIG. 53(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that the hold icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in Figures 53 (B) to (D), a left pattern stop effect is executed. In the left pattern stop effect, the speed of change (movement speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down, and then the left decorative pattern stops.

In FIG. 53(B), the speed of change of the left decorative pattern 8L is slow. All of the left decorative patterns 8L are "5" patterns, and the "5" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "5" patterns in the bottom row are out of frame.

In Figure 53 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol is stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 53(D), the "5" symbol in the top row and the "5" symbol in the bottom row of the stopped left decorative symbol 8L are hidden, and only the "5" symbol in the middle row on the active line is displayed. Note that the "5" symbols in the top and bottom rows may be displayed semi-transparently to be inconspicuous rather than being completely hidden.

Next, as shown in Figures 53 (E) to (G), a right pattern stop effect is executed. In the right pattern stop effect, the speed at which the right decorative pattern changes (moves) slows down, and then the right decorative pattern stops.

In FIG. 53(E), the speed of change of the right decorative pattern 8R is slow. All of the right decorative patterns 8R are "5" patterns, and the "5" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Most of the "5" patterns in the bottom row are out of frame.

In Figure 53 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol is stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In Fig. 53(G), the upper and lower "5" symbols of the stopped right decorative symbol 8R are hidden, and only the middle "5" symbol on the activated line is displayed. The upper and lower "5" symbols may be displayed semi-transparently instead of being completely hidden.
When the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "5" symbol, a so-called "reach" state is formed.

Next, as shown in Figures 53 (H) to (K), a battle effect is performed, followed by a middle symbol stop effect.

In FIG. 53(H), the speed of change of the middle decorative pattern 8C is slowed down. The middle decorative patterns 8C, which are the "7", "8", "9", and "0" patterns, are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "0" pattern is out of the frame.

In FIG. 53(I), a battle presentation is being executed. The battle presentation is a presentation in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are fighting. If the ally character CRA wins against the enemy character CRB, it is a win, and if the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB, it is a loss. The left and right decorative patterns 8L, 8R are reduced in size and displayed in the upper left and upper right parts of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 53 (J), a victory or defeat notification effect is being executed. The victory or defeat notification effect is an effect that notifies the winner or loser of a battle effect. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A "6" symbol is displayed superimposed on the enemy character CRB. A message image MSG saying "Defeat" is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB.

In Figure 53 (K), only the "6" symbol in the middle row on the pay line is displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "565", which is a reach miss pattern.

[Pattern row change performance D]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the pattern row change performance D. The pattern row change performance D is a performance in which all columns (here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in multiple columns on the display screen 7a change. The pattern row change performance D is a performance selected when the expectation of a win is higher than that of the pattern row change performance C. When the pattern row change performance D is executed, a win is confirmed. In other words, when a win is confirmed, the pattern row change performance D may be selected.

First, as shown in FIG. 54(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that the hold icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in Figures 54 (B) to (D), a left pattern stop effect is executed. In the left pattern stop effect, the speed of change (movement speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down, and then the left decorative pattern stops.

In FIG. 54(B), the speed of change of the left decorative pattern 8L is slow. All of the left decorative patterns 8L are "5" patterns, and the "5" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "5" patterns in the bottom row are out of frame.

In Figure 54 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol is stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 54(D), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "5" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped left decorative symbol 8L are hidden, and only the "5" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. Note that the "5" symbols on the top and bottom rows may be displayed semi-transparently to make them less noticeable rather than being completely hidden.

Next, as shown in Figures 54 (E) to (G), a right pattern stop effect is executed. In the right pattern stop effect, the speed at which the right decorative pattern changes (moves) slows down, and then the right decorative pattern stops.

In FIG. 54(E), the speed of change of the right decorative pattern 8R is slow. All of the right decorative patterns 8R are "5" patterns, and the "5" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "5" patterns in the bottom row are out of frame.

In Figure 54 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol is stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In Fig. 54 (G), the "5" symbol in the upper row and the "5" symbol in the lower row of the stopped right decorative symbol 8R are hidden, and only the "5" symbol in the middle row on the activated line is displayed. Note that the "5" symbols in the upper and lower rows may be displayed semi-transparently instead of being completely hidden.
When the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "5" symbol, a so-called "reach" state is formed.

Next, as shown in Figures 54 (H) to (L), a center symbol stop effect is executed. The center symbol stop effect is an effect in which the fluctuation speed (movement speed) of the center decorative symbol slows down, and then the center decorative symbol stops.

In FIG. 54(H), the speed of change of the middle decorative pattern 8C is slowed down. The middle decorative patterns 8C, which are the "7", "8", "9", and "0" patterns, are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "0" pattern is out of the frame.

In FIG. 54(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is difficult to see. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is covered with a band-shaped image (shown with hatching). This increases the likelihood that attention will be drawn to the change in the middle decorative pattern 8C. Note that when making the middle decorative pattern 8C difficult to see, rather than simply displaying an image, it is also possible to use effects such as lighting up or darkening the changing area of the middle decorative pattern 8C.

In FIG. 54(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C has changed. Here, all of the middle decorative patterns 8C have been changed to "5" patterns. The "5" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y as the middle decorative pattern 8C. Most of the "5" pattern in the bottom row is out of the frame.

In Figure 54 (K), the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol is stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The pay line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 54(L), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "5" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped middle decorative symbol 8C are hidden, and only the "5" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. The "5" symbols on the top and bottom rows may be displayed semi-transparently rather than being completely hidden. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in the winning pattern of "555".

[Pattern row change effect E]
Fig. 55 is a diagram for explaining the symbol row change performance E. Fig. 55 (A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol row change performance E, and Fig. 55 (G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol row change performance E.

The first example of the pattern row change performance E is another example of the pattern row change performance B. That is, the first example of the pattern row change performance E is a performance in which one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in multiple rows on the display screen 7a (here, the left decorative pattern 8L) changes. When the first example of the pattern row change performance E is executed, a reach is confirmed. In other words, when a reach performance is confirmed, the first example of the pattern row change performance E may be selected. In the first example of the pattern row change performance E, unlike the pattern row change performance B, the change speed (movement speed) of the decorative patterns in the multiple rows slows down almost simultaneously, making it possible to see at a glance which of the multiple rows of decorative patterns is changing.

In the first example of the pattern row change effect E, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in Figures 55 (B) to (F), the decorative patterns stop in the order of left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and center decorative pattern 8C.

In FIG. 55(B), the speed of change of the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is slow. The left decorative patterns 8L are all "5" patterns, and the "5" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "5" patterns in the bottom row are framed out. The right decorative patterns 8R are "4," "3," "2," and "1," and are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "1" patterns are framed out. The middle decorative patterns 8C are "6," "7," "8," and "9," and are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "9" patterns are framed out.

In Figure 55 (C), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped. Here, the "5" pattern is stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row. The right decorative pattern 8R consists of the "6", "5", "4", and "3" patterns, and is scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "3" pattern is framed out. The middle decorative pattern 8C consists of the "6", "7", "8", and "9" patterns, and is scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "9" pattern is framed out.

In FIG. 55(D), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "5" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped left decorative pattern 8L are hidden, and only the "5" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. The "5" symbols on the top and bottom rows may be displayed semi-transparently, rather than being completely hidden. The right decorative pattern 8R is also stopped. Here, a "6" symbol is stopped on the top row, a "5" symbol is stopped on the middle row, and a "4" symbol is stopped on the bottom row. The active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row. The middle decorative pattern 8C is a "5", a "6", a "7", and a "8", and is scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "8" symbol is out of the frame.

In Figure 55 (E), the "6" symbol on the top row and the "4" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped right decorative pattern 8R are hidden, and only the "5" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. Note that the "6" symbol on the top row and the "4" symbol on the bottom row do not have to be completely hidden, but may be displayed semi-transparently to make them less noticeable. Also, the middle decorative pattern 8C has stopped. Here, the "5" symbol has stopped on the top row, the "6" symbol has stopped on the middle row, and the "7" symbol has stopped on the bottom row. Note that the active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 55(F), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "7" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped middle decorative symbol 8C are hidden, and only the "6" symbol on the active line is displayed. The "5" symbol on the top row and the "7" symbol on the bottom row may be displayed semi-transparently, rather than being completely hidden. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "565", which is a missed reach.

The second example of the pattern row change performance E is another example of the pattern row change performance C. That is, the second example of the pattern row change performance E is a performance in which two of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in multiple rows on the display screen 7a (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) change. Compared to the first example of the pattern row change performance E, the second example of the pattern row change performance E is a performance selected when the expectation of a win is greater. When the second example of the pattern row change performance E is executed, the development to an SP reach is confirmed. In other words, when the development to an SP reach is confirmed, the second example of the pattern row change performance E may be selected. In the second example of the pattern row change performance E, unlike the pattern row change performance C, the change speed (movement speed) of the decorative patterns in the multiple rows slows down almost simultaneously, so that it is possible to see at a glance which of the multiple rows of decorative patterns is changing.

In the second example of the pattern row change effect E, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (G), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in Figures 55 (H) to (L), the decorative patterns stop in the order of left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and center decorative pattern 8C.

In Figure 55 (H), the speed of change of the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is slowed down. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are all "5" patterns, and the "5" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Most of the "5" patterns in the bottom row are framed out. The center decorative pattern 8C is a "7," a "8," a "9," and a "0," and is scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Most of the "0" patterns are framed out.

In Figure 55 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped. Here, the "5" pattern is stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row. The right decorative patterns 8R are all "5" patterns, and are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Most of the "5" patterns in the bottom row are framed out. The middle decorative patterns 8C are "6," "7," "8," and "9" patterns, and are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Most of the "9" patterns are framed out.

In FIG. 55(J), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "5" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped left decorative pattern 8L are hidden, and only the "5" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. The "5" symbols on the top and bottom rows may be displayed semi-transparently rather than being completely hidden. The right decorative pattern 8R is also stopped. Here, "5" symbols are stopped on the top, middle, and bottom rows. The active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row. The middle decorative pattern 8C is a "5", a "6", a "7", and an "8", and is displayed by scrolling in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "8" symbol is out of the frame.

In Figure 55 (K), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "5" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped right decorative pattern 8R are hidden, and only the "5" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. Note that the "5" symbols on the top and bottom rows do not have to be completely hidden, but may be displayed semi-transparently to make them less noticeable. Also, the middle decorative pattern 8C has stopped. Here, the "5" symbol has stopped on the top row, the "6" symbol has stopped on the middle row, and the "7" symbol has stopped on the bottom row. Note that the active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 55(L), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "7" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped middle decorative symbol 8C are hidden, and only the "6" symbol on the active line is displayed. The "5" symbol on the top row and the "7" symbol on the bottom row may be displayed semi-transparently, rather than being completely hidden. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "565", which is a missed reach.

[Pattern row change effect F]
Fig. 56 is a diagram for explaining the symbol row change presentation F. Fig. 56 (A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol row change presentation F, and Fig. 56 (G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol row change presentation F.

The first example of the pattern row change performance F is another example of the pattern row change performance D. That is, the first example of the pattern row change performance F is a performance in which all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in multiple rows on the display screen 7a (here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R) change. Compared to the second example of the pattern row change performance E, the first example of the pattern row change performance F is a performance selected when the expectation of a win is greater. When the first example of the pattern row change performance F is executed, a win is confirmed. In other words, when a win is confirmed, the first example of the pattern row change performance F may be selected. In the first example of the pattern row change performance F, unlike the pattern row change performance D, the change speed (movement speed) of the decorative patterns in the multiple rows slows down almost simultaneously, so that it is possible to see at a glance which of the multiple rows of decorative patterns is changing.

In the first example of the pattern row change performance F, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in Figures 56 (B) to (F), the decorative patterns stop in the order of left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and center decorative pattern 8C.

In FIG. 56(B), the speed of change of the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is slow. The left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all "5" patterns, and the "5" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y in each row. Most of the "5" pattern in the bottom row is out of frame.

In Figure 56 (C), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped. Here, "5" patterns are stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row. The right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are all "5" patterns, and are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "5" pattern in the bottom row is out of frame.

In FIG. 56(D), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "5" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped left decorative pattern 8L are hidden, and only the "5" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. The "5" symbols on the top and bottom rows do not have to be completely hidden, and may be displayed semi-transparently to make them less noticeable. The right decorative pattern 8R is also stopped. Here, "5" symbols are stopped on the top, middle, and bottom rows. The active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row. The middle decorative patterns 8C are all "5" symbols, and are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "5" symbol on the bottom row is out of frame.

In Figure 56 (E), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "5" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped right decorative pattern 8R are hidden, and only the "5" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. Note that the "5" symbols on the top and bottom rows do not have to be completely hidden, but may be displayed semi-transparently to make them less noticeable. Also, the middle decorative pattern 8C has stopped. Here, "5" symbols are stopped on the top, middle, and bottom rows. Note that the active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 56(F), the "5" symbol on the top row and the "5" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped middle decorative symbol 8C are hidden, and only the "5" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. The "5" symbols on the top and bottom rows do not have to be completely hidden, and may be displayed semi-transparently to make them less noticeable. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in the winning pattern of "555".

The second example of the pattern row change presentation F, like the first example of the pattern row change presentation F, is a presentation in which all columns (here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in multiple columns on the display screen 7a change. However, unlike the first example of the pattern row change presentation F, the second example of the pattern row change presentation F differs in that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state are a specific sequence of numbers.

In the second example of the pattern row change performance F, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (G), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in Figures 56 (H) to (L), the decorative patterns stop in the order of left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and center decorative pattern 8C.

In FIG. 56 (H), the speed of change of the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is slow. All of the left decorative patterns 8L are "1" patterns, and the "1" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Most of the "1" patterns in the bottom row are framed out. All of the right decorative patterns 8R are "8" patterns, and the "8" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Most of the "8" patterns in the bottom row are framed out. All of the middle decorative patterns 8C are "2" patterns, and the "2" patterns are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Most of the "2" patterns in the bottom row are framed out.

In Figure 56 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped. Here, "1" symbols are stopped in the top, middle, and bottom rows. The active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row. The right decorative patterns 8R are all "8" symbols, and are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Most of the "8" symbols in the bottom row are framed out. The middle decorative patterns 8C are all "2" symbols, and are scrolled in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Most of the "2" symbols in the bottom row are framed out.

In FIG. 56(J), the "1" symbol on the top row and the "1" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped left decorative pattern 8L are hidden, and only the "1" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. The "1" symbols on the top and bottom rows do not have to be completely hidden, and may be displayed semi-transparently to make them less noticeable. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped. Here, "8" symbols are stopped on the top, middle, and bottom rows. The active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row. The middle decorative patterns 8C are all "2" symbols, and are scrolled in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Most of the "2" symbol on the bottom row is out of frame.

In Figure 56 (K), the "8" symbol on the top row and the "8" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped right decorative pattern 8R are hidden, and only the "8" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. Note that the "8" symbols on the top and bottom rows do not have to be completely hidden, but may be displayed semi-transparently to make them less noticeable. Also, the middle decorative pattern 8C has stopped. Here, "2" symbols are stopped on the top, middle, and bottom rows. Note that the active line is a straight line connecting the stopping positions in the middle row.

In FIG. 56(L), the "2" symbol on the top row and the "2" symbol on the bottom row of the stopped middle decorative symbol 8C are hidden, and only the "2" symbol on the middle row on the active line is displayed. The "2" symbols on the top and bottom rows may be displayed semi-transparently rather than being completely hidden. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in the winning pattern of "128".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effect of the pattern row change presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, all the decorative symbols constituting a predetermined row among the multiple rows are changed to decorative symbols with the same identification information, and a first performance is executed in which the identification information of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the predetermined row can be predicted before the decorative symbols in the predetermined row are stopped and displayed (FIG. 51(J), FIG. 52(B), FIG. 53(B)(E), FIG. 54(B)(E)(J), FIG. 55(B)(H), FIG. 56(B)(H)). With this configuration, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed can be predicted before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, which can increase the interest of the game.
In addition, the presentations in Figures 51 (J), 52 (B), 53 (B) (E), 54 (B) (E) (J), 55 (B) (H), and 56 (B) (H) correspond to the "first presentation", the numbers represented by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the "identification information", and the presentation control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "presentation execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of predetermined columns in the first performance suggests the expectation of winning the special game. Specifically, if one of the multiple columns changes, it is confirmed that it will be a reach (FIG. 52, FIG. 55 (A) to (F)), if two of the multiple columns change, it is confirmed that it will develop into an SP reach (FIG. 53, FIG. 55 (G) to (L)), and if all of the multiple columns change, it is confirmed that it will be a win (FIG. 54, FIG. 56 (A) to (F)). According to this configuration, the expectation is suggested by the change in the decorative pattern, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the predetermined row in which the decorative symbols change may become the final row that stops last among the multiple rows (FIG. 51). According to this configuration, a win is confirmed before the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is the final stopping symbol, stops, so that the player can have a sense of security and superiority, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variation in which a winning game is won, the decorative symbols constituting each of the multiple columns are changed to decorative symbols with the same identification information, and a second performance can be executed in which the identification information of the decorative symbols in the multiple columns can be predicted before the decorative symbols in the multiple columns are stopped and displayed (FIGS. 54 and 56). According to this configuration, since a winning is confirmed before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the interest of the game can be improved. The performances in FIG. 54 and FIG. 56 correspond to the "second performance".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the identification information of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second performance may be a specific sequence of numbers (FIGS. 56(G)-(L)). With this configuration, a win is confirmed before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the winning mode is special, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the symbol row change presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed, a performance is performed to make the middle decorative pattern 8C difficult to see (FIG. 51(I), FIG. 54(I)). Instead of such a performance, while the middle decorative pattern 8C is being scrolled, all the decorative patterns 8C that are framed in may be made the same (the identification information may be made the same). Alternatively, while the middle decorative pattern 8C is being scrolled, a performance such as an animation that changes the middle decorative pattern 8C may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, there are cases where the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have already changed when the speed of change (movement speed) slows down and the decorative patterns become visible (FIGS. 52(B), 53(B)(E), 54(B)(E), 55(B)(H), and 56(B)(H)). In response to this, a performance may be performed to make the decorative patterns difficult to see.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, when one of the multiple columns changes, it is determined that it will be a reach (FIG. 52, FIG. 55 (A)-(F)), when two of the multiple columns change, it is determined that it will develop into an SP reach (FIG. 53, FIG. 55 (G)-(L)), and when all of the multiple columns change, it is determined that it will be a win (FIG. 54, FIG. 56 (A)-(F)). In contrast to this, for example, when one of the multiple columns changes, it may be determined that it is a "chance", when two of the multiple columns change, it is determined that it is "super hot", and when three of the multiple columns change, it is determined that it is a "win".

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the degree of expectation of winning the special game is suggested by how many columns out of the multiple columns change. In contrast, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect to be executed later is predicted by how many columns out of the multiple columns change. For example, if one column out of the multiple columns changes, the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect is confirmed, if two columns out of the multiple columns change, the execution of the strongest SP reach is confirmed, and if three columns out of the multiple columns change, the execution of a premium effect is confirmed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine that notifies the winner of a special game by displaying a stop of a decorative pattern of each of a plurality of rows, the decorative pattern being changed in each row,
a performance execution means for executing a first performance in which all decorative symbols constituting a predetermined row among the plurality of rows are changed to decorative symbols having the same identification information, and the identification information of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the predetermined row can be predicted before the decorative symbols in the predetermined row are stopped and displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
The effect execution means indicates an expectation of winning the special game based on the number of the predetermined columns in the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
The predetermined row is a final stop row that stops last among the plurality of rows.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a second performance in which, in a variation in which the special game is won, the decorative symbols constituting each of the plurality of columns are changed to decorative symbols having the same identification information, and the identification information of the decorative symbols of the plurality of columns can be predicted before the decorative symbols of the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine that notifies the winner of a special game by displaying a stop of a decorative pattern of each of a plurality of rows, the decorative pattern being changed in each row,
a presentation execution means for executing a second presentation in which, in a variation in which the special game is won, the decorative symbols constituting each of the plurality of columns are changed to decorative symbols having the same identification information, and the identification information of the decorative symbols of the plurality of columns can be predicted before the decorative symbols of the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-4 or A1-5,
The identification information of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the second performance is a specific sequence of numbers.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the change-of-presentation performance with reference to Figures 57 to 63. This change-of-presentation performance is executed in the decorative pattern variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the change-of-presentation performance is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, we will first explain the flow chart related to the execution of the change-of-presentation performance, and then explain change-of-presentation performances A to C.

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the variable performance processing (step S4305 in FIG. 36). This variable performance processing is a processing that replaces the variable performance processing shown in FIG. 44. Specifically, the variable performance processing shown in FIG. 57 is a processing that includes a performance button processing (step S4706).

First, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not a variable performance is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is at zero. If a variable performance is not in progress (step S4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if a variable performance is in progress (step S4701: YES), the performance in progress button process is executed (step S4706), and then the process proceeds to step S4702.

In step S4702, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is time to set a pre-change end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. The pre-change end command is a command that the performance control microcomputer 91 uses to inform the image control board 100 and other devices that it is a specific timing during the change performance, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-change end command, it switches the performance content or displays a specific image in accordance with the information contained in the pre-change end command.

If it is not the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change performance. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead performance in which a look-ahead performance image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead performance pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade performance in which the preview image fades.

[Button processing during performance]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the button processing during the performance (step S4706 in FIG. 57).
In the button processing during the performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the current time (step SA4701). This processing is, for example, processing in which the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires information from an RTC (not shown). Of course, instead of using the RTC, a timer function or a clock function of the CPU 92 of the performance control microcomputer 91 may be used.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the time period (step SA4702). As described below, a day is divided into three time periods A, B, and C (Figure 59). This process is to determine which of time periods A to C the acquired current time falls into.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the time period has moved to another time period (step SA4703). The time period to be compared is stored in the sub-RAM 94. Here, a positive determination is made when there is a move from time period A to time period B, from time period B to time period C, or from time period C to time period A. If it is determined that the time period has moved (step SA4703: YES), the process proceeds to step SA4704. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time period has not moved (step SA4703: NO), the process proceeds to step SA4706.

In step SA4704, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates and stores the time zone. This process is a process of storing in the sub-RAM 94 the time zone corresponding to the current time.
Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the button valid period (step SA4705). The button valid period is determined in advance for each of the time periods A to C. This process updates and sets the button valid period to match the current time period. Then, the process proceeds to step SA4706.

In step SA4706, the performance control microcontroller 91 executes processing upon button operation, and then terminates button processing during performance.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between time periods and button valid periods (start time, valid period).
As shown in FIG. 59(A), 9:00 to 11:00 is time zone A, 11:00 to 17:00 is time zone B, and 17:00 to 23:00 is time zone C of one day.

The button valid period corresponding to time period A is 1 second from the start of the special effect. The button valid period corresponding to time period B is 0.2 seconds from the start of the special effect, and 0.2 seconds from 2 seconds after the start of the special effect. The button valid period corresponding to time period C is 3 seconds from the start of the special effect, and 3 seconds from 4 seconds after the start of the special effect. These are shown in Figure 59 (B). The special effect is executed from time ts to time te.

In this embodiment, no effect is performed to encourage the pressing of the effect button 63. Therefore, the button valid period shown in FIG. 59 is the period during which the so-called hidden button is valid. Therefore, the difficulty of pressing the button is "normal" in time period A, "very difficult" in time period B, and "easy" in time period C.

[Button operation processing]
Fig. 60 is a flowchart of the button operation process (step SA4706 in Fig. 58). Fig. 60(A) is the button operation process corresponding to the performance change performance A, and Fig. 60(B) is the button operation process corresponding to the performance change performance B and C.

In the button operation processing of FIG. 60(A), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the performance button 63 has been pressed (step SA4801). If it is determined that the performance button 63 has been pressed (step SA4801: YES), the process proceeds to step SA4802. On the other hand, if it is determined that the performance button 63 has not been pressed (step SA4801: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed and the button operation processing ends.

In step SA4802, the performance control microcontroller 91 determines whether or not the button is in an effective button period. If it is determined that the button is in an effective button period (step SA4802: YES), the process proceeds to step SA4803. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button is not in an effective button period (step SA4802: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed, and the button operation processing ends.

In step SA4803, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether the current fluctuation is a big win fluctuation or not. If it is judged to be a big win fluctuation (step SA4803: YES), the process proceeds to step SA4804. On the other hand, if it is judged not to be a big win fluctuation (step SA4803: NO), the process of step SA4804 is not executed and the button operation process is terminated.
In step SA4804, the performance control microcomputer 91 replaces the performance. This replacement of the performance results in a performance different from the originally planned performance being executed. Alternatively, a different performance is executed in parallel with the originally planned performance. Alternatively, the originally planned performance gradually changes to a different performance. Then, the button operation processing is terminated.

In the button operation processing of FIG. 60(B), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the performance button 63 has been pressed (step SA4901). If it is determined that the performance button 63 has been pressed (step SA4901: YES), the process proceeds to step SA4902. On the other hand, if it is determined that the performance button 63 has not been pressed (step SA4901: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed and the button operation processing ends.

In step SA4902, the performance control microcontroller 91 determines whether or not the button is in an effective button period. If it is determined that the button is in an effective button period (step SA4902: YES), the process proceeds to step SA4903. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button is not in an effective button period (step SA4902: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed, and the button operation processing ends.

In step SA4903, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not there is at least a jackpot in the reserved portion. Note that a positive determination is also made if the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation. If it is determined that there is a jackpot in the reserved portion (step SA4903: YES), the process proceeds to step SA4904. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the reserved portion (step SA4903: NO), the process proceeds to step SA4906.

In step SA4904, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the chance mode is in progress. If it is determined that the chance mode is in progress (step SA4904: YES), the process proceeds to step S4906. On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance mode is not in progress (step SA4904: NO), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step SA4905, the performance control microcomputer 91 shifts the game mode to the chance mode, and then ends the button operation process.
In step SA4906, the performance control microcomputer 91 transitions the game mode to the next mode. If the game mode is currently in the chance mode, the performance control microcomputer 91 transitions to the mode next to the mode from which the game mode was transitioned to the chance mode. Then, the button operation process is terminated.

[Direction change direction A]
Fig. 61 is a diagram for explaining the performance change performance A. Fig. 61 (A) to (F) shows a first example of the performance change performance A, and Fig. 61 (G) to (L) shows a second example of the performance change performance A. The first example of the performance change performance A shows a case where the change is not a winning change or the performance button 63 is not pressed during the button valid period. On the other hand, the second example of the performance change performance A shows a case where the change is a winning change and the performance button 63 is pressed during the button valid period.

In the first example of the effect change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, four hold icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols stop in a specified reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop as "6" symbols to form a reach state. Hereinafter, the two symbols that form the reach state are also referred to as "reach symbols".

Next, as shown in Figures 61 (C) to (E), a group preview performance is executed. The group preview performance is a performance in which a predetermined image moves in a group. The group preview performance indicates that the expectation of a win is relatively high. In performance change performance A, the group preview performance corresponds to a "specific performance". Then, if the change in question is not a winning change (step SA4803: NO), it is assumed that the performance button 63 was not pressed during the button valid period (step SA4801: YES, step SA4802: NO). In this case, the performance is not replaced, so a performance using only the ally character image MCG is performed as originally planned.

In Figure 61 (C), the ally character image MCG frames in from the right edge of the display screen 7a. It then moves leftward toward the display screen 7a at a speed v. In Figure 61 (D), the ally character image MCG, which frames in from the right edge of the display screen 7a, moves to the center of the display screen 7a. This makes it difficult to see the reach symbol "6". The ally character image MCG continues to move leftward at a speed v. In Figure 61 (E), the ally character image MCG continues to move leftward at a speed v, framing out of the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(F), a normal reach effect is executed. The normal reach effect is an effect that teases whether or not the final stopping pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C, will stop on the reach pattern "6". Of course, there are also cases where it develops into a SP reach effect.

In the second example of the effect change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, the four hold icons 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols stop in a specified reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop as "6" symbols to form a reach state. Hereinafter, the two symbols that form the reach state are also referred to as "reach symbols".

Next, as shown in Figure 61 (I) to (K), a group preview performance is executed. The group preview performance is a performance in which a predetermined image moves in a group. The group preview performance indicates that the expectation of a win is relatively high. In performance change performance A, the group preview performance corresponds to a "specific performance". Then, it is assumed that the change in question is a win variation (step SA4803: YES in Figure 60 (A)), and the performance button 63 was pressed during the button valid period (step SA4801: YES, step SA4802: YES). In this case, the performance is replaced (step SA4804), and the ally character image MCG changes to a smile image SG.

In Figure 61 (I), the ally character image MCG frames in from the right edge of the display screen 7a. It then moves leftward toward the display screen 7a at a speed v. Here, it is assumed that the performance button 63 is pressed during the button valid period. In Figure 61 (J), the ally character image MCG that frames in from the right edge of the display screen 7a changes to a smile image SG and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. This makes it difficult to see the reach symbol "6". The smile image SG continues to move leftward at a speed v. In Figure 61 (K), the smile image SG moves further leftward at a speed v and frames out from the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(L), a normal reach effect is executed. The normal reach effect is an effect that teases whether or not the final stopping pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C, will stop on the reach pattern "6". Of course, there are cases where it develops into a SP reach effect.

[Change in Production B]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the performance change performance B. In FIG. 62 (A) to (F), a first example of the performance change performance B is shown, and in FIG. 62 (G) to (L), a second example of the performance change performance B is shown. The first example of the performance change performance B shows a case where there is no winning in the reserved (including the change) and the performance button 63 is pressed once during the button valid period. On the other hand, the second example of the performance change performance B shows a case where there is a winning in the reserved (including the change) and the performance button 63 is pressed once during the button valid period. Normally, by pressing the performance button 63, the game mode is shifted from "spring mode" to "summer mode" to "autumn mode" to "winter mode" to "spring mode" to ..., but when there is a winning in the reserved (including the change), it is shifted to "special mode".

In the first example of the performance change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern starts changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right start changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, four hold icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a rectangular image of thin solid lines is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the "spring mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image. In the performance change performance B, the decorative pattern change performance is a "specific performance".

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left decorative symbol stops. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L stops at the "6" symbol. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R continue to change at high speed. Here again, the four reserved icons 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Then, it is assumed that the effect button 63 is pressed during the button valid period. By pressing the effect button 63 during the button valid period, the mode transitions to summer mode (step SA4901: YES, step SA4902: YES, step SA4903: NO, step SA4906 in FIG. 60(B)). As a result, a thick solid rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the "summer mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols stop in a specified reach state. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R stops at a "6" symbol, forming a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L. Again, a thick solid rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and "summer mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), a battle presentation is executed. A battle presentation is one in which a battle unfolds between an ally character and an enemy character. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB face off in the center of the display screen 7a. Again, a rectangular image in thick solid lines is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the "summer mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), a final battle presentation is executed. A final battle presentation is a presentation in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight to decide the winner at the end of a battle presentation. Here, the presentation shows friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB just before they collide in the center of display screen 7a. Again, a thick solid rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of display screen 7a, and "summer mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the winner by a combination of decorative symbols. Here, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at "676", which is a reach miss pattern, notifying the winner that they have lost. Again, a thick solid rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and "summer mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image. Additionally, four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In the second example of the performance change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern starts changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, four hold icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a rectangular image of thin solid lines is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the "spring mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image. In the performance change performance B, the decorative pattern change performance is a "specific performance".

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left decorative symbol stops. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L stops at the "6" symbol. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R continue to change at high speed. Here again, the four reserved icons 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Then, it is assumed that the effect button 63 is pressed during the button valid period. By pressing the effect button 63 during the button valid period, the special mode is entered (step SA4901: YES, step SA4902: YES, step SA4903: YES, step SA4904: NO, step SA4905 in FIG. 60(B)). As a result, a thick dashed rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the "special mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(I), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols stop in a specified reach state. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R stops at a "6" symbol, forming a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L. Again, a thick dashed rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and "Special mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (J), a battle presentation is executed. A battle presentation is one in which a battle unfolds between an ally character and an enemy character. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB face off in the center of the display screen 7a. Again, a rectangular image in thick dashed lines is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the word "special mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (K), a final battle presentation is executed. A final battle presentation is a presentation in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight at the end of a battle presentation to determine the winner. Here, the presentation shows friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB just before they collide in the center of display screen 7a. Again, a thick dashed rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of display screen 7a, and "Special Mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the winner by a combination of decorative symbols. Here, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at "676", which is a reach miss pattern, notifying the winner that they have lost. Again, a thick dashed rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and "Special mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image. Additionally, four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

[Change in Production C]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the performance change performance C. In FIG. 63 (A) to (F), a first example of the performance change performance C is shown, and in FIG. 63 (G) to (L), a second example of the performance change performance C is shown. The first example of the performance change performance C shows a case where there is no winning in the reserved (including the change) and the performance button 63 is pressed twice during the button valid period. On the other hand, the second example of the performance change performance C shows a case where there is a winning in the reserved (including the change) and the performance button 63 is pressed twice during the button valid period. Normally, by pressing the performance button 63, the game mode is shifted from "spring mode" to "summer mode" to "autumn mode" to "winter mode" to "spring mode" to ..., but when there is a winning in the reserved (including the change), it is shifted to "special mode".

In the first example of the performance change performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern starts changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have started changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, four hold icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a rectangular image of thin solid lines is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the "spring mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image. In the performance change performance C, the decorative pattern change performance is a "specific performance".

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left decorative symbol stops. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L stops at the "6" symbol. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R continue to change at high speed. Here again, the four reserved icons 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Then, it is assumed that the effect button 63 is pressed during the button valid period. By pressing the effect button 63 during the button valid period, the mode transitions to summer mode (step SA4901: YES, step SA4902: YES, step SA4903: NO, step SA4906 in FIG. 60(B)). As a result, a thick solid rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the "summer mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols stop in a specified reach state. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R stops at a "6" symbol, forming a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L. Again, a thick solid rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and "summer mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a battle presentation is executed. A battle presentation is one in which a battle unfolds between an ally character and an enemy character. Here, ally character CRA and enemy character CRB face off in the center of display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that presentation button 63 is pressed during the button valid period. Pressing presentation button 63 during the button valid period transitions to autumn mode (step SA4901: YES, step SA4902: YES, step SA4903: NO, step SA4906 in FIG. 60(B)). As a result, a rectangular image of thin dashed lines is displayed on the periphery of display screen 7a, and "Autumn mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (E), a final battle presentation is executed. A final battle presentation is a presentation in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight to decide the winner at the end of a battle presentation. Here, the presentation shows friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB just before they collide in the center of display screen 7a. Again, a rectangular image made of thin dashed lines is displayed on the periphery of display screen 7a, and "Autumn mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the winner by a combination of decorative symbols. Here, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at "676", which is a reach miss pattern, notifying the winner that they have lost. Again, a thin dashed rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and "Autumn mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image. Additionally, four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In the second example of the performance change performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern starts changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right start changing. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right change at high speed and are displayed semi-transparently or transparently, making it difficult to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, four hold icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a rectangular image of thin solid lines is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the "spring mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image. In the performance change performance C, the decorative pattern change performance is a "specific performance".

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left decorative symbol stops. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L stops at the "6" symbol. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R continue to change at high speed. Here again, the four reserved icons 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Then, it is assumed that the effect button 63 is pressed during the button valid period. By pressing the effect button 63 during the button valid period, the special mode is entered (step SA4901: YES, step SA4902: YES, step SA4903: YES, step SA4904: NO, step SA4905 in FIG. 60(B)). As a result, a thick dashed rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the "special mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(I), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols stop in a specified reach state. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R stops at a "6" symbol, forming a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L. Again, a thick dashed rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and "Special mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(J), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the performance button 63 is pressed during the button valid period. By pressing the performance button 63 during the button valid period, the special mode is switched to the summer mode (step SA4901: YES, step SA4902: YES, step SA4903: YES, step SA4904: YES, step SA4906 in FIG. 60(B)). As a result, a rectangular image of a thick solid line is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the "summer mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image. Normally, the mode is switched from the spring mode to the summer mode, but when the mode is switched from the spring mode to the special mode, the mode is switched from the special mode to the summer mode. In other words, the mode from which the transition to the special mode takes place (spring mode) is stored (step SA4905 in FIG. 60(B)), and the mode is transitioned to the next mode (summer mode) relative to the mode from which the transition took place (spring mode) (step SA4906).

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (K), a final battle presentation is executed. A final battle presentation is a presentation in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight to decide the winner at the end of a battle presentation. Here, the presentation shows friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB just before they collide in the center of display screen 7a. Again, a thick solid rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of display screen 7a, and "summer mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the winner by a combination of decorative symbols. Here, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at "676", which is a reach miss pattern, notifying the winner that they have lost. Again, a thick solid rectangular image is displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a, and "summer mode" is displayed superimposed on this rectangular image. Additionally, four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the performance change effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the period during which pressing the effect button 63 is valid includes a button valid period, which is a period set for each of the predetermined time periods A to C (FIG. 59). The time period is determined by the timing means, and the button valid period is switched to correspond to the determined time period (FIG. 58). According to this configuration, the button valid period during which pressing the effect button 63 is valid is changed and set depending on the time period of the day, so that the period during which the effect button 63 functions as a hidden button becomes relatively longer, which can increase the interest of the game.
In addition, the button effective period corresponds to the "special period", the performance button 63 corresponds to the "operation means", and the timing function (e.g., RTC) of the performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "timing means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button valid period is not notified. According to this configuration, the button valid period becomes the valid period of the back button, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button effective period is set within the execution period of the group preview performance (FIG. 61 (C) to (E)), and when the performance button 63 is pressed during the button effective period, if a predetermined condition is met, a group preview performance using a smile image SG is executed instead of the group preview performance using the ally character image MCG (FIG. 61 (I) to (K)). Also, the button effective period is set within the execution period of the variable performance (FIGS. 62, 63), and when the performance button 63 is pressed during the button effective period, if a predetermined condition is met, the game mode transition destination becomes the "special mode" (FIGS. 62 (H), 63 (H)). With this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and increase the interest of the game.
The group preview effect using the ally character image MCG corresponds to the "first effect," and the group preview effect using the smile image MCG corresponds to the "second effect." In addition, the spring mode effect corresponds to the "first effect," and the special mode effect corresponds to the "second effect."

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button effective period is set within the execution period of the variable performance (FIGS. 62, 63), and when the performance button 63 is pressed during the button effective period, if the predetermined conditions are not met, the game mode transition destination becomes the "summer mode" (FIGS. 62(B), 63(B)). With this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and increase the interest of the game.
The spring mode presentation corresponds to the "first presentation," and the summer mode presentation corresponds to the "third presentation."

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the predetermined condition for changing the presentation is met when the change is a big win change (step SA4803 in FIG. 60A). Or, it is met when there is a big win in the reserve (step SA4903 in FIG. 60B). This configuration can attract the player's attention and increase the excitement of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the presentation change presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, instead of the group advance notice performance (first performance) using the ally character image MCG, when the relevant fluctuation is a big win fluctuation and the performance button 63 is validly operated, the group advance notice performance (second performance) using the smile image SG is changed. That is, the second performance is executed instead of the first performance. In contrast, the second performance may be executed in addition to the first performance. For example, the group advance notice performance using both the ally character image MSG and the smile image SG is executed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, instead of the spring mode effect (first effect), if there is a jackpot in the reserve and the effect button 63 is operated validly, the effect is changed to the special mode effect (second effect). That is, the second effect is executed instead of the first effect. In contrast, the second effect may be executed in addition to the first effect. For example, an effect that is not in the normal spring mode may be added.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the predetermined conditions are that the change is a big win change and that there is a big win in the reserved state. In contrast, the predetermined conditions may be, for example, that a specific big win has been hit, that a lottery has been won on whether or not to change the performance, that the change is a small win change, that there is a small win in the reserved state, etc. These conditions may be used alone or in combination.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Mode B1-1]
An operation means operable by a player;
A gaming machine having a timing means having a clock function,
The period during which the operation of the operating means is valid includes a special period which is a period set for each predetermined time period,
by determining the time zone by the clock means, switching the special period in accordance with the determined time zone;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The special period is not announced.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The special period is set within a period during which a first performance is performed, and when the operation means is operated during the special period, a performance execution means is provided for executing a second performance in addition to or instead of the first performance if a predetermined condition is established.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
When the operation means is operated during the special period within the execution period of the first performance, if a predetermined condition is not established, the performance execution means executes a third performance in addition to or instead of the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-3 or B1-4,
The predetermined condition is met when the winning lottery is won.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The setting suggestion presentation will be explained below with reference to Figures 64 to 69. This setting suggestion presentation is executed in the decorative pattern variation presentation. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a setting suggestion presentation is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and causes the image to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the flow chart related to the execution of the setting suggestion presentation will be explained first, and then setting suggestion presentations A and B will be explained.

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the variable performance process (step S4305 in FIG. 36). This variable performance process is a process that replaces the variable performance process shown in FIG. 44. Specifically, the variable performance process shown in FIG. 64 is a process that includes a performance button process (step S4707).

First, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not a variable performance is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is at zero. If a variable performance is not in progress (step S4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if a variable performance is in progress (step S4701: YES), the performance in progress button process is executed (step S4707), and then the process proceeds to step S4702.

In step S4702, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is time to set a pre-change end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. The pre-change end command is a command that the performance control microcomputer 91 uses to inform the image control board 100 and other devices that it is a specific timing during the change performance, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-change end command, it switches the performance content or displays a specific image in accordance with the information contained in the pre-change end command.

If it is not the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change performance. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead performance in which a look-ahead performance image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead performance pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade performance in which the preview image fades.

[About setting information]
The setting information of the gaming machine 1 will be explained.
As described above, the gaming machine 1 judges whether or not a jackpot has occurred by referring to the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8(A)). In the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8(A)), the jackpot probability is set for each of the normal probability state and the high probability state. In contrast, in the setting suggestion presentation, the gaming machine 1 is configured so that the jackpot probability can be set in six stages for each of the normal probability state and the high probability state. This setting is performed, for example, on the side of the hall. Specifically, the setting is set to one of "1" to "6" by operating a setting change device. The numbers "1" to "6" are called setting information, setting value, setting, etc. The smaller the setting information number, the lower the jackpot probability. For example, when the setting information is "1", the jackpot probability in the normal probability state is 1/300 and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30, when the setting information is "2", the jackpot probability in the normal probability state is 1/290 and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/29, when the setting information is "3", the jackpot probability in the normal probability state is 1/280 and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/28, when the setting information is "4", the jackpot probability in the normal probability state is 1/270 and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/27, when the setting information is "5", the jackpot probability in the normal probability state is 1/260 and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/26, when the setting information is "6", the jackpot probability in the normal probability state is 1/250 and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/25, etc. Therefore, it is more advantageous for a player to play on a gaming machine with a good setting, that is, a gaming machine with a large number in the setting information. For this reason, it is important for a player to guess the setting information. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the setting information. The setting information is stored in the main RAM 93 and the sub-RAM 94.

[Button processing during performance]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the button processing during the performance (step S4707 in FIG. 64).
In the button processing during the performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether the performance button 63 has been pressed (step SB4701). If it is judged that the performance button 63 has been pressed (step SB4701: YES), the process proceeds to step SB4702. On the other hand, if it is judged that the performance button 63 has not been pressed (step S4701: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed and the button processing during the performance is terminated.

In step SB4702, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads the setting information. This process is a process of reading the setting information stored in the sub-RAM 94 as described above.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the button valid period (step SB4703). This process is for determining whether or not it is the period during which pressing the performance button 63 is valid. If it is determined that it is the button valid period (step SB4703: YES), it proceeds to step SB4704. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the button valid period (step SB4703: NO), it does not execute the process of step SB4704 and ends the button processing during performance.

In step SB4704, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes a valid suggestion process. The valid suggestion process is a process that suggests that pressing the performance button 63 is valid. Specifically, in response to pressing the performance button 63, a specific sound (including voice) is output from the speaker 67, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are illuminated, a specific image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7, and the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, etc. are driven.

[Button validity period in setting suggestion performance A]
Fig. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the setting information and the button valid period in the setting suggestion performance A. Fig. 66(A) is a table showing the setting information, the button valid period, and the valid time. Fig. 66(B) is a timing chart showing the relationship between a specific performance and the button valid period.

As shown in FIG. 66, in setting information "1" and setting information "2," the button valid period is "3 to 4 seconds after the start of the special effect." The valid period in this case is 1 second. In setting information "3" and setting information "4," the button valid period is "2 to 6 seconds after the start of the special effect." The valid period in this case is 4 seconds. In setting information "5" and setting information "6," the button valid period is "1 to 6 seconds after the start of the special effect." The valid period in this case is 5 seconds. These button valid periods are not notified. In other words, these button valid periods are the valid periods of the so-called back buttons.

[Setting suggestion production A]
Fig. 67 is a diagram for explaining the setting suggestion effect A. Fig. 67 (A) to (F) are battle effects arranged in chronological order. Here, the battle effects correspond to the "specific effects" for determining the button valid period. Therefore, as shown on the right side of Fig. 67, the start time of the battle effect is the start time ts of the specific effect, and the end time of the battle effect is the end time te of the specific effect.

The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB. If the ally character CRA ultimately wins, a big win is confirmed.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a battle start effect is executed. The battle start effect is an effect that notifies the start of a battle effect. Here, a message image MSG saying "Battle Start" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), a two-person confrontation presentation is executed. The two-person confrontation presentation is a presentation in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), an ally disadvantage presentation is executed. The ally disadvantage presentation is a presentation in which the ally character CRA is pushed by the enemy character CRB and is pushed to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), an ally advantage effect is executed. The ally advantage effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA pushes the enemy character CRB, pushing the enemy character CRB to the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), a clash between the two characters is performed. In the clash between the two characters, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB collide in the center of the display screen 7a. After this, the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA is determined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), an ally victory presentation is executed. The ally victory presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that an ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. This confirms a big win. If the fluctuation is a losing fluctuation, an ally defeat presentation is executed. The ally defeat presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that an ally character has been defeated. In this case, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image saying "Defeat" is displayed.

It is assumed that the player presses the effect button 63 in the middle of such a battle effect. Specifically, as shown on the right side of Figure 67, the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 is pressed at one of four times A to D.

When the effect button 63 is pressed at timing A, if the setting information is "5" or "6", it is suggested that the press was valid (Figure 66). When the effect button 63 is pressed at timing B, if the setting information is "3" to "6", it is suggested that the press was valid (Figure 66). When the effect button 63 is pressed at timing C, if the setting information is "1" to "6", it is suggested that the press was valid (Figure 66). When the effect button 63 is pressed at timing D, if the setting information is "3" to "6", it is suggested that the press was valid. The indication that the press was valid is made, for example, by outputting a specific sound via the speaker 67.

[Button validity period in setting suggestion performance B]
Fig. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the setting information and the button valid period in the setting suggestion effect B. Fig. 68(A) is a table showing the setting information, the button valid period, and the valid time. Fig. 68(B) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the specific effect and the button valid period.

As shown in FIG. 68, in setting information "1", "3" and "5", the button valid period is "2 to 5 seconds after the start of a special effect". The valid period in this case is 3 seconds. In setting information "2", "4" and "6", the button valid period is "1 to 6 seconds after the start of a special effect". The valid period in this case is 5 seconds. These button valid periods are not notified. In other words, these button valid periods are the valid periods of the so-called back buttons.

[Setting suggestion B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the setting suggestion effect B. FIG. 69(A)-(F) shows the decorative pattern variation effects arranged in chronological order. Here, the decorative pattern variation effect corresponds to the "specific effect" for determining the button valid period. Therefore, as shown on the right side of FIG. 69, the start time of the decorative pattern variation effect is the start time ts of the specific effect, and the end time of the decorative pattern variation effect is the end time te of the specific effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols start changing. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right start changing at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the left symbol pre-stop performance is executed. The left symbol pre-stop performance is a performance in which the speed of change (movement) of the left decorative symbol slows down to become visible. Here, the left decorative symbols 8L are the "4", "5", "6" and "7" symbols, which are moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Note that most of the "7" symbol is framed out of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the right symbol pre-stop performance is executed. The right symbol pre-stop performance is a performance in which the speed of change (movement) of the right decorative symbol slows down to become visible. Here, the "6", "5", "4" and "3" symbols are moving in the direction indicated by arrow Y. Note that most of the "3" symbol is framed out of the display screen 7a. Note that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped at the "5" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols stop in a predetermined reach state. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R stops as a "5" symbol while the stopped left decorative symbol 8L is a "5" symbol, forming a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(E), the performance before the middle symbol stops is executed. The performance before the middle symbol stops is a performance in which the speed of change (movement speed) of the middle decorative symbol slows down to become visible. Here, the "7", "8", "9" and "0" symbols are moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. Note that most of the "0" symbol is framed out of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are fixed and stopped. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped at the "5" pattern, and the center decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "8" pattern. In other words, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "585", which is a reach miss pattern.

It is assumed that the player presses the effect button 63 during this type of decorative pattern variation effect. Specifically, as shown on the right side of Figure 69, the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 is pressed at one of three times E to G.

When the effect button 63 is pressed at timing E, if the setting information is "2", "4", or "6", it is suggested that the press was valid (Figure 68). When the effect button 63 is pressed at timing F, if the setting information is "1" to "6", it is suggested that the press was valid (Figure 68). When the effect button 63 is pressed at timing G, if the setting information is "2", "4", or "6", it is suggested that the press was valid (Figure 68). The indication that the press was valid is made, for example, by outputting a specific sound via the speaker 67.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of setting suggestion.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button effective period during which the effect button 63 is effective is set in correspondence with the setting information (FIGS. 66 and 68). With this configuration, the setting information can be inferred from the button effective period, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation means", the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect execution means", and the button effective period shown in FIG. 66 and FIG. 68 corresponds to the "setting corresponding period".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the effect button 63 is pressed during the button valid period, a valid suggestion process is executed to indicate that the press is valid (step SB4701: YES, step SB4703: YES, step SB4704 in FIG. 65). This configuration makes it easier for the player to know whether pressing the effect button 63 is valid or not, which can increase the player's interest in the game. The effect executed by the valid suggestion process in step SB4704 in FIG. 65 corresponds to the "valid effect."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the setting suggestion presentation A, when the first setting information is higher than the second setting information, the button effective period set corresponding to the first setting information is equal to or longer than the button effective period set corresponding to the second setting information (FIG. 66). According to this configuration, the higher the setting information is, the more effective the pressing of the presentation button 63 becomes, so that a suggestion that does not feel unnatural can be made, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the setting suggestion presentation B, a first period is set as the button valid period corresponding to the settings "2,""4," and "6," and a second period is set as the button valid period corresponding to the settings "1,""3," and "5" (FIG. 68). With this configuration, the setting of the button valid period becomes simple, and it is highly likely that the setting information can be easily guessed, thereby making the game more interesting.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the setting suggestion effect B, the first period is 1 to 6 seconds after the start of the specific effect, and the second period is 2 to 5 seconds after the start of the specific effect, and the button effective periods overlap. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to guess the setting information during the overlapping period, so that the setting information is likely to be guessed multiple times by the back button, which increases the possibility of increasing interest in the back button, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Modification]
Below are some variations on the setting suggestion presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when the effect button 63 is pressed, a valid effect is performed to indicate that the pressing is valid. The valid effect is an effect in which a specific sound (including voice) is output from the speaker 67, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are illuminated, a specific image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64, and the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 are driven in response to the pressing of the effect button 63. The type of valid effect when the effect button 63 is pressed may be associated with the setting information. For example, in the case of the setting information "5" and "6", the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are illuminated, and in the case of the setting information "1" to "4", a specific sound is output from the speaker 67. In this way, the setting information can be guessed from the type of valid effect, which can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the button effective period is set based on the specific performance, such as the number of seconds from the start of the specific performance (FIGS. 66 and 68). In contrast, the button effective period may be set based on the variation pattern, such as the number of seconds from the start of the variation pattern.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the setting information is guessed by operating the effect button 63. Alternatively, the setting information may be guessed by operating the sword member 65 or the select button 68. When the sword member 65 and the select button 68 are used in addition to the effect button 63, it may be set as to which operation of the operation means is determined to be valid in correspondence with the setting information. When the select button 68 is used, it may be set as to which of the left button, right button, up button, and down button constituting the select button 68 is determined to be valid in correspondence with the setting information. In this way, it becomes possible to guess the setting information from the type of operation means, which improves the interest of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect B2-1]
An operation means operable by a player;
A game machine including: a performance execution means capable of executing a performance related to the operation means;
When a lottery is held for a game ball entering a specific ball entrance, the lottery can be held with a lottery probability according to the setting information by referring to the setting information;
The period during which the operation of the operation means is valid includes a setting corresponding period that is set in correspondence with the setting information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
the effect execution means, when the operation means is operated during the set corresponding period, executes a valid effect suggesting that the operation is valid;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The setting information includes first setting information and second setting information,
When the first setting information is information of a higher setting than the second setting information, the setting corresponding period set in response to the first setting information is a period equal to or longer than the setting corresponding period set in response to the second setting information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The setting information includes first setting information and second setting information,
a first period is set as the setting corresponding period in correspondence with the first setting information;
A second period is set as the setting corresponding period in correspondence with the second setting information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
The setting information is represented by a predetermined integer value,
The first setting information is an even number, and the second setting information is an odd number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4 or B2-5,
There is an overlapping period between the first period and the second period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, fishing experience presentations A and B are explained using Figures 70 to 83. Figure 70 is a front view of the fishing rod device provided on the ball supply tray (upper tray), Figure 71 is a front right perspective view of the fishing rod device (A) and a front left perspective view of the fishing rod device (B), and Figure 72 is a schematic diagram of the fishing rod device viewed from the right side of the gaming machine with the fishing rod device tilted from the center position to the front position (A) and a schematic diagram of the fishing rod device viewed from the right side of the gaming machine with the fishing rod device tilted from the center position to the rear position (B).

In addition, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the variable performance processing for executing the fishing experience performance, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the lure performance decision processing for executing the fishing experience performance, FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram of the lure performance decision table for executing the fishing experience performance, FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram of the character's favorite lure table for executing the fishing experience performance, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the load performance decision processing for executing the fishing experience performance, FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram of the load performance decision table for executing the fishing experience performance, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the lure throwing processing for executing the fishing experience performance, and FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the setting screen (A) and the customization selection screen (B).

In addition, Figure 81 is a diagram for explaining fishing experience performance A, Figure 82 is a diagram for explaining fishing experience performance B, and Figure 83 is a diagram for explaining the continuation of fishing experience performance B in Figure 82.

In addition, in Figures 81 to 83, the various movable props, various decorative members, and various background images arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing. In addition, the fishing rod device and the like arranged in front (front) of the display screen 7a have also been omitted for ease of viewing.

Here, we will first explain the fishing rod device provided on the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, then explain various flowcharts for implementing a fishing experience performance using the fishing rod device, the customization selection screen for customizing the fishing rod device, etc., and the fishing experience performance, in that order.

[Fishing rod device]
The fishing rod device used for the fishing experience presentation will be described with reference to Figures 70 to 72. The presentation button 63 was disposed below the front frame 53 and near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 in Figure 1. Here, as shown in Figure 70, a fishing rod device 75 is disposed below the front frame 53 and near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 in Figure 1 in place of the presentation button 63, and the presentation button 63 is disposed to the right of the fishing rod device 75.

The fishing rod device 75 is mainly composed of a rod section 76 and a reel section 77. As shown in Figs. 71(A) and (B), the rod section 76 is composed of a rod 76a, which is a fishing rod, a grip 76b to which the reel section 77 is fixed on the underside of the rod 76a and which holds the rod 76a, and a front-rear swing table 76c to which the lower end of the rod 76a is attached and which can swing back and forth. A fish-shaped lure member 76aa is attached to the tip of the rod 76a of the rod section 76 (the rear side of the tip of the rod 76a of the rod section 76). An image corresponding to this lure member 76aa is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a lure image to be described later. In this way, an image (specific image) showing the "fish-shaped lure member 76aa", which is a specific object shown on at least a part of the fishing rod device 75, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a lure image to be described later.

Here, the left-right distance dimension of the lure member 76aa is smaller than the diameter of the rod 76a. For this reason, when the fishing rod device 75 is viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1, the lure member 76aa is covered by the entire rod 76a of the rod portion 76 and is difficult to see. Therefore, by making the left-right distance dimension of the lure member 76aa larger than the diameter of the rod 76a (for example, about 1.5 to 2 times), the entire lure member 76aa is not covered by the rod 76a even when the fishing rod device 75 is viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1, and the presence of the lure member 76aa can be emphasized.

The lure member 76aa is fish-shaped, but may be a vertically long ellipsoid. In this case, a design corresponding to a plurality of lures (e.g., three types of lures, lure 1 to lure 3) may be formed on the surface of the vertically long ellipsoid, or stickers of images corresponding to a plurality of lures (e.g., three types of lures, lure 1 to lure 3) may be attached. The plurality of lures may be of the same type (e.g., all three types are fish-shaped lures) or may be of different types (e.g., lure 1 is a fish-shaped lure, lure 2 is a spoon-shaped lure, and lure 3 is a worm-shaped lure). In any case, an image corresponding to one of the plurality of lures represented on the surface of the vertically long ellipsoid is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a lure image to be described later. In this way, an image (specific image) showing the "vertically long ellipsoid lure member 76aa", which is a specific object represented on at least a part of the fishing rod device 75, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a lure image to be described later.

The underside of the front-rear rocking platform 76c is formed with a front inclined surface 76ca for tilting the rod 76a towards the front to the front position, an upright surface 76cb for standing the rod 76a vertically to the central position, and a rear inclined surface 76cc for tilting the rod 76a towards the rear to the rear position.

The lower surface of the front-rear swing table 76c is formed with a pair of mounting pieces 76cd for mounting the fishing rod device 75 to the underside of the front frame 53, and a connection piece 76ce for allowing the rod 76a to swing (rotate) in the front-rear direction. The front-rear swing table 76c houses a vibration motor 78a for vibrating the fishing rod device 75 in the front-rear and left-right directions.

A storage recess 53a is formed on the underside of the front frame 53 to store the front-rear oscillating base 76c of the fishing rod device 75. The bottom surface 53aa of the storage recess 53a is a horizontal surface and has a through hole. Through this through hole, a pair of mounting pieces 76cd and a connection piece 76ce of the front-rear oscillating base 76c are attached to a oscillating device (not shown) attached to the underside of the front frame 53. When the front inclined surface 76ca of the front-rear oscillating platform 76c is in surface contact with the bottom surface 53aa of the storage recess 53a, the rocking position of the rod portion 76 is the front position, when the upright surface 76cb of the front-rear oscillating platform 76c is in surface contact with the bottom surface 53aa of the storage recess 53a, the rocking position of the rod portion 76 is the central position, and when the rear inclined surface 76cc of the front-rear oscillating platform 76c is in surface contact with the bottom surface 53aa of the storage recess 53a, the rocking position of the rod portion 76 is the rear position.

The swing device (not shown) houses a rod-side motor 79, a swing mechanism (not shown), and three position detection sensors 79a for detecting the swing position of the rod portion 76. Of the three rod position detection sensors 79a, the first rod position detection sensor 79a detects whether the swing position of the rod 76a is the front position, the second rod position detection sensor 79a detects whether the swing position of the rod 76a is the center position, and the third rod position detection sensor 79a detects whether the swing position of the rod 76a is the rear position.

The protruding fixed piece of the rocking mechanism (not shown) fits into the area of the pair of mounting pieces 76cd on the front-rear rocking table 76c, and the front-rear rocking table 76c is attached to the underside of the front frame 53 by inserting a shaft (not shown) from one of the pair of mounting pieces 76cd to the other, and can rock (rotate) in the front-rear direction with this shaft as the center of rotation (rocking center).

The rotor shaft of the rod-side motor 79 is connected to the above-mentioned rocking mechanism (not shown), and the arm constituting the rocking mechanism is connected to the connection piece 76ce of the front-rear rocking base 76c. When the rotor shaft of the rod-side motor 79 rotates in the clockwise direction, the connection piece 76ce of the front-rear rocking base 76c connected to the arm of the rocking mechanism moves upward with the shaft inserted into the pair of mounting pieces 76cd of the front-rear rocking base 76c as the rotation center (rocking center), and the rod 76a rotates (rocks) toward the front side (rotates (rocks) toward the left in Figures 72 (A) and (B)). When the rocking position of the rod 76a is rocked (rotated) until it reaches the front position, the front side inclined surface 76ca formed on the lower side of the front-rear rocking base 76c abuts and comes into surface contact with the bottom surface 53aa of the storage recess 53a formed on the lower side of the front frame 53. This prevents the rod 76a from rotating (swinging) any further toward the front side. When the rod 76a is swung (rotated) to the front side position, the first rod position detection sensor 79a detects that the rod 76a is in the front side position.

When the rotor shaft of the rod-side motor 79 rotates counterclockwise, the connection piece 76ce of the front-rear oscillating table 76c connected to the arm of the oscillating mechanism moves downward around the shaft inserted through a pair of mounting pieces 76cd of the front-rear oscillating table 76c as the center of rotation (oscillation center), causing the rod 76a to rotate (oscillate) toward the back (rotate (oscillate) toward the right in Figures 72 (A) and (B)). When the rod 76a is oscillated (rotated) until it reaches the back position, the back-side inclined surface 76cc formed on the lower side of the front-rear oscillating table 76c abuts and comes into surface contact with the bottom surface 53aa of the storage recess 53a formed on the underside of the front frame 53. This prevents the rod 76a from rotating (oscillating) toward the back any further. When the rod 76a is swung (rotated) to the rear position, the third rod position detection sensor 79a detects that the rod 76a is in the rear position. Even if the rod 76a is swung (rotated) to the rear position, as shown in FIG. 72B, the upper end of the rod 76a and the front surface of the front frame 53 are separated by a distance dimension d (50 mm in this embodiment), so that even if the rod 76a moves (swings (rotates)) to the rear position, the upper end of the rod 76a does not collide with the front surface of the front frame 53 and does not destroy the front surface of the front frame 53.

Of course, when the rotor shaft of the rod-side motor 79 rotates counterclockwise from a state in which the swing position of the rod 76a is in the front position, this rotation causes the connection piece 76ce of the front-rear swing table 76c, which is connected to the arm of the swing mechanism, to move downward around the axis inserted through a pair of mounting pieces 76cd of the front-rear swing table 76c as the center of rotation (swing center), causing the rod 76a to rotate (swing) toward the rear side (rotate (swing) toward the right in Figures 72(A) and (B)).When this action causes the swing position of the rod 76a to swing (rotate) until it reaches the central position, the rear-side inclined surface 76cc formed on the lower side of the front-rear swing table 76c abuts and comes into surface contact with the bottom surface 53aa of the storage recess 53a formed on the underside of the front frame 53. In addition, when the rotor shaft of the rod-side motor 79 rotates clockwise from a state in which the swing position of the rod 76a is in the rear position, this rotation causes the connection piece 76ce of the front-rear oscillating table 76c, which is connected to the arm of the swing mechanism, to move upward with the shaft inserted into a pair of mounting pieces 76cd of the front-rear oscillating table 76c as the center of rotation (swing center), causing the rod 76a to rotate (swing) toward the rear side (in Figures 72 (A) and (B) it rotates (swings) toward the left), and when the swing position of the rod 76a is swung (rotated) until it reaches the central position, the rear inclined surface 76cc formed on the underside of the front-rear oscillating table 76c abuts and comes into surface contact with the bottom surface 53aa of the accommodating recess 53a formed on the underside of the front frame 53. When the rod 76a is swung (rotated) until it reaches the center position, the second rod position detection sensor 79a detects that the rod 76a is in the center position.

The above-mentioned rocking mechanism (not shown) is provided with a non-excitation automatic center position return mechanism that uses the restoring force of a spring to move (rock (rotate)) the rod 76a to the center position and maintains the rod 76a at the center position. When no excitation current flows to the rod side motor 79, even if the rod side motor 79 is in a non-excitation state and torque-free, the non-excitation automatic center position return mechanism can move (rock (rotate)) the rod 76a to the center position and maintain the rod 76a at the center position. Therefore, before the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and when a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the spring restoring force of the non-excitation automatic center position return mechanism can automatically move (rotate (rock)) the rod 76a to the center position and maintain the stopped state without being operated by an electrical drive source. The restoring force of this spring is set so as not to cause the rod shaft of the rod-side motor 79 to step out, and is smaller than when the static torque of the rod-side motor 79 is "small." Of course, the restoring force of this spring is also smaller than the force exerted by the player pulling the grip 76b toward himself or pushing the grip 76b toward the rear.

By grasping the grip 76b and pulling it towards the player, the player can swing (rotate) the rod 76a towards the front position.

The reel section 77 is mainly composed of a reel 77a, a frame 77b, and a rotating shaft 77c. The reel 77a is a pair of disks arranged at a predetermined distance apart, with the centers of both disks connected via a cylindrical member (not shown). The frame 77b has a rotating shaft 77c fixed thereto, through which the cylindrical member of the reel 77a is inserted. When the cylindrical member of the reel 77a is inserted into the rotating shaft 77c and attached, the reel 77a is rotatable relative to the frame 77b, and covers the entire side of one of the pair of disks of the reel 77a (the side of the disk on the frame 77b side).

The frame 77b houses two rotation direction detection sensors 77ba for detecting the rotation direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) of the reel 77a.

A pair of handles 77aa are provided on the side of the other of the pair of disks of the reel 77a, allowing the reel 77a to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise relative to the frame 77b. By rotating the handles 77aa, the player can actually rotate the reel 77a in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

The rotating shaft portion 77c houses a reel-side motor 78b and a speed reduction mechanism (not shown). The rotation of the rotor shaft of the reel-side motor 78b is transmitted to an internal gear fixed to the inside of the cylindrical member of the reel 77a via a speed reduction mechanism (not shown), and the reel 77a becomes rotatable relative to the frame body 77b to which the rotating shaft portion 77c is fixed.

When the rotor shaft of the reel-side motor 78b rotates clockwise, this rotation is transmitted to an internal gear fixed to the inside of the cylindrical member of the reel 77a via a reduction mechanism (not shown), causing the reel 77a to rotate clockwise relative to the frame 77b to which the rotating shaft portion 77c is fixed (clockwise rotation in Figures 72 (A) and (B)).

When the rotor shaft of the reel-side motor 78b rotates counterclockwise, this rotation is transmitted to the internal gear fixed to the inside of the cylindrical member of the reel 77a via a reduction mechanism (not shown), causing the reel 77a to rotate counterclockwise relative to the frame 77b to which the rotating shaft portion 77c is fixed (counterclockwise in Figures 72 (A) and (B)).

The vibration motor 78a, the reel side motor 78b, and the rod side motor 79 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and the performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the vibration motor 78a, the reel side motor 78b, and the rod side motor 79 based on the command received from the main control board 80, and controls the operation of the vibration motor 78a, the reel side motor 78b, and the rod side motor 79 according to the operation pattern data. The operation pattern data is created using data stored in the sub-ROM 93. As described above, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute the lighting control of the lamp based on the command and the operation control of the vibration motor 78a, the reel side motor 78b, and the rod side motor 79. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The reel-side motor 78b and the rod-side motor 79 are stepping motors, and the static torque can be varied from small to large. As a result, when the static torque to the reel-side motor 78b is controlled to be small, the resistance (resistance) to the force with which the player rotates the handle 77aa is small, and this small force causes the reel-side motor 78b to step out. The player feels the force with which the player rotates the handle 77aa, i.e., the force with which the fishing line is wound, to be weak, and the fish is pulled in lightly. On the other hand, when the static torque to the reel-side motor 78b is controlled to be large, the resistance (resistance) to the force with which the player rotates the handle 77aa is large, and this large force causes the reel-side motor 78b to step out. The player feels the force with which the player rotates the handle 77aa, i.e., the force with which the fishing line is wound, to be strong, and the fish is pulled in heavily.

The frame 77b may have a plurality of light-emitting parts spaced apart at equal intervals along its outer periphery. The plurality of light-emitting parts indicate the magnitude of the resistance (resistance) against the force of the player rotating the handle 77aa. In a light-emitting state in which the plurality of light-emitting parts are lit in white, the magnitude of the resistance (resistance) against the force of the player rotating the handle 77aa is "small." In a light-emitting state in which the plurality of light-emitting parts are lit in blue, the magnitude of the resistance (resistance) against the force of the player rotating the handle 77aa is "medium." In a light-emitting state in which the plurality of light-emitting parts are lit in red, the magnitude of the resistance (resistance) against the force of the player rotating the handle 77aa is "large." The magnitudes of the resistance (resistance) against the force of the player rotating the handle 77aa, "small," "medium," and "large," will be described later.

In addition, when the static torque to the rod-side motor 79 is controlled to be small, the resistance (resistance) to the force with which the player pulls the grip 76b toward the player becomes small, and this small force causes the rod-side motor 79 to step out, so the player feels the force pulling the grip 76b toward the player (i.e., the force of the fish pulling the rod 76a) weakly, and the fish feels lighter to pull. On the other hand, when the static torque to the rod-side motor 79 is controlled to be large, the resistance (resistance) to the force with which the player pulls the grip 76b toward the player becomes large, and this large force causes the rod-side motor 79 to step out, so the player feels the force pulling the grip 76b toward the player (i.e., the force of the fish pulling the rod 76a) strongly, and the fish feels heavier to pull.

The light emitting units may be provided on the front of the front-rear swing platform 76c on the player's side, which is composed of a left light emitting unit, a center light emitting unit, and a right light emitting unit. The light emitting units indicate the magnitude of the resistance (resistance) against the force of the player pulling the grip 76b toward the player. In a light emitting mode in which only the left light emitting unit is lit, it indicates that the magnitude of the resistance (resistance) against the force of the player pulling the grip 76b toward the player is "small". In a light emitting mode in which the left light emitting unit and the center light emitting unit are lit, it indicates that the magnitude of the resistance (resistance) against the force of the player pulling the grip 76b toward the player is "medium". In a light emitting mode in which the left light emitting unit, the center light emitting unit, and the right light emitting unit are all lit, it indicates that the magnitude of the resistance (resistance) against the force of the player pulling the grip 76b toward the player is "large". The magnitudes of the resistance (resistance) against the force of the player pulling the grip 76b toward the player, "small", "medium", and "large", will be described later.

The signals from the three rod position detection sensors 79a and the two rotation direction detection sensors 77ba are input to the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 via the lamp control board 107. The performance control microcomputer 91 can grasp the position of the rod 67 (front position, center position, rear position) and the swing direction (rotation direction) of the rod 67 based on the signals from the three rod position detection sensors 79a input, and can grasp the state in which the reel 77a is stopped, rotating clockwise (including accelerating and decelerating states), and rotating counterclockwise (including accelerating and decelerating states) based on the signals from the two rotation direction detection sensors 77ba input.

[Various flowcharts for implementing a fishing experience using a fishing rod device]
Next, various flowcharts for executing a fishing experience performance using the fishing rod device will be described. Here, a flowchart for a variable performance process for executing a fishing experience performance will be described, followed by a flowchart for a lure performance decision process for executing a fishing experience performance, a flowchart for a load performance decision process for executing a fishing experience performance, and a flowchart for a lure throwing process for executing a fishing experience performance will be described in order.

[Processing during variable performance for executing fishing experience performance]
The variable performance processing for executing the fishing experience performance will be described with reference to Fig. 73. The variable performance processing for executing the fishing experience performance is processing executed in place of the variable performance processing shown in Fig. 44. Here, the same steps are given the same steps executed in the variable performance processing shown in Fig. 44, and detailed explanations are omitted. In Fig. 73, the processing (steps SL4701a to SL4701g) that differs from the variable performance processing shown in Fig. 44 is characterized by being surrounded by a chain line.

When the variable performance processing for executing the fishing experience performance is started, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not a variable performance is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is at zero. If a variable performance is not in progress (step S4701: NO), this processing ends as is. On the other hand, if a variable performance is in progress (step S4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to form a reach (step SL4701a). Whether or not it is time to form a reach can be determined by the variable performance timer. If it is not time to form a reach (step SL4701a: NO), proceed to step SL4701e. "When it is not time to form a reach" includes cases where a reach has already been formed and the processes in steps SL4701b to SL4701d described below have been performed, cases where a reach will eventually be formed but the timing for forming the reach has not yet been reached, and cases where no reach is formed and there is a miss (no reach, miss).

On the other hand, if it is reach formation timing (step SL4701a: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs lure effect determination processing (step SL4701b). In the lure effect determination processing, one lure effect is determined from among multiple lure effects, and if the lure used in this determined lure effect is the favorite lure of the character of the effect pattern that formed the reach (so-called Tenpai pattern), it can be changed to one with a higher expectation of winning compared to the determined lure effect. The lure effect determined in the lure effect determination processing is executed as the fishing experience effect. Details of the lure effect determination processing will be described later.

Following the lure performance determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a load performance determination process (step SL4701c). The load performance determination process is a process for determining the load performance of the reel side motor 78b and the rod side motor 79 (how the fish is pulled by the rod 76a and how the fish is pulled by the handle 77aa of the reel 77a) that corresponds to the lure performance. The details of the load performance determination process will be described later.

Following the load effect determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a lure throwing process (step SL4701d) and proceeds to step SL4701e. The lure throwing process is a process for controlling the operation of the fishing rod device 75 in order to throw the lure. The details of the lure throwing process will be described later.

In step SL4701e, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not there is a development to a Super Reach (SP Reach). The determination of whether or not there is a development to a Super Reach (SP Reach) can be determined based on the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation. If there is no development to a Super Reach (SP Reach) (step SL4701e: NO), proceed to step S4702. On the other hand, if there is a development to a Super Reach (SP Reach) (step SL4701e: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to develop to a Super Reach (SP Reach) (step SL4701f). Whether or not it is the timing to develop to a Super Reach (SP Reach) can be determined by the fluctuation performance timer. If it is not the timing to develop to a Super Reach (SP Reach) (step SL4701f: NO), proceed to step S4702. On the other hand, if it is time to progress to a Super Reach (SP Reach) (step SL4701f: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a Super Reach (SP Reach) command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step SL4701g) and proceeds to step S4702. By processing step SL4701g, the Super Reach (SP Reach) command is sent to the image control board 100. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a Super Reach (SP Reach) performance that displays a Super Reach (SP Reach) performance image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the Super Reach (SP Reach) performance is a Fishing Super Reach (SP Reach) and the player grasps the grip 76b of the fishing rod device 75 and pulls it toward him while the Fishing Super Reach (SP Reach) is being performed, so that the swing position of the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 is not at the rear position, the performance control microcomputer 91 controls the rotor shaft of the rod side motor 79 to rotate and move (swing (rotate)) the swing position of the rod 76a to the rear position, and when the swing position of the rod 76a is returned to the rear position, it again sets the strength of the static torque of the rod side motor 79 during the development of the Super Reach (SP Reach) corresponding to the lure performance described below.

If there is no progression to a Super Reach (SP Reach) (step SL4701e: NO) or following step SL4701g, in step S4702, it is determined whether it is time to set a pre-variation end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94.

If it is not the time to set a pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the time to set a pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705), and this process ends.

[Lure performance decision process]
The lure performance determination process will be described with reference to Fig. 74. The lure performance determination process is the process of step SL4701b in the variable performance process of Fig. 73. In the lure performance determination process, one lure performance is determined from among a plurality of lure performances, and if the lure used in this determined lure performance is the favorite lure of the character of the performance pattern (so-called Tenpai pattern) that has formed a reach, it can be changed to a lure performance with a higher expectation of winning than the determined lure performance. The lure performance determined in the lure performance determination process is executed as a fishing experience performance.

First, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines the lure performance by referring to the lure performance determination table (step SL4750). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the counter of the random number for determining the lure performance, and determines the lure performance by referring to the obtained random number value and the lure performance determination table stored in the sub-ROM 93.

The lure performance determination table will now be described with reference to FIG. 75. The lure performance determination table is stored in the sub-ROM 93 together with other tables. The lure performance determination table is a table that is referenced to determine one of lure performances 1 to 6 based on the presence or absence of a super reach (SP reach) and the hit/miss determination result analyzed from the fluctuation pattern, and the acquired random number for determining a lure performance (any value between 0 and 127). The random number for determining a lure performance is updated by a random number counter set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94. The "random number for determining a lure performance" is a random number used to determine a lure performance when a lure performance is executed, and takes a value in the range of "value 0 (zero)" to "value 127". The "random number for determining a lure performance" is acquired when determining a lure performance.

If there is no "Super Reach (SP Reach)", one of the three lure effects, Lure Effect 1 to Lure Effect 3, will be selected. If there is a "Super Reach (SP Reach)", the game will progress to the Super Reach (SP Reach) Fishing Super Reach (SP Reach), and one of the three lure effects, Lure Effect 4 to Lure Effect 6, will be selected.

Lure effect 1 is an effect that is determined when there is no "Super Reach (SP Reach)" and the judgment result is a "Miss" and the random number for determining the lure effect is between "value 0 (zero)" and "value 50". When lure effect 1 is determined, lure effect pattern LE01 is determined as the pattern of the lure effect, and lure 1 is determined as the type of lure. The activation of lure effect 1 is such that when the middle effect symbol passes by without temporarily stopping at the winning symbol after the reach is formed, the fish does not bite the lure, the rod is not pulled, and the reel does not spin.

Lure effect 2 is an effect that is determined when there is no "super reach (SP reach)" and the judgment result is a "miss" and the random number for determining the lure effect is between "value 51" and "value 101". When lure effect 2 is determined, lure effect pattern LE02 is determined as the lure effect pattern, and lure 2 is determined as the type of lure. The activation of lure effect 2 is when, after a reach is formed, the middle effect symbol passes by without temporarily stopping at the winning symbol, and a fish bites the lure, but the force pulling the rod is weak, so the reel does not rotate and it comes off (breaks off).

Lure effect 3 is an effect that is determined when there is no "super reach (SP reach)" and the judgment result is a "miss" and the random number for determining the lure effect is between "value 102" and "value 127". When lure effect 3 is determined, lure effect pattern LE03 is determined as the lure effect pattern, and lure 3 is determined as the type of lure. The activation of lure effect 3 is that when the middle effect symbol passes by without temporarily stopping at the winning symbol after the reach is formed, a fish bites the lure and the force pulling the rod is stronger than that of lure effect 2, so the reel does not rotate and comes off (breaks off).

Lure effect 4 is determined when there is a "Super Reach (SP Reach)" and the judgment result is a "Miss" or "Big Hit", and the random number for determining the lure effect is between "value 0 (zero)" and "value 50". When lure effect 4 is determined, lure effect pattern LE04 is determined as the lure effect pattern, and lure 1 is determined as the type of lure. The activation of lure effect 4 is such that when the middle effect symbol passes by without temporarily stopping at the winning symbol after the reach is formed, a fish bites the lure, but the force pulling the rod is weak (the same force as the force pulling the rod in lure effect 2), and the reel does not spin.

Lure effect 5 is an effect that is determined when there is a "Super Reach (SP Reach)" and the judgment result is a "Miss" or "Big Hit" and the random number for determining the lure effect is between "value 51" and "value 101". When lure effect 5 is determined, lure effect pattern LE05 is determined as the lure effect pattern and lure 2 is determined as the type of lure. The activation of lure effect 5 is such that when the middle effect symbol passes by without temporarily stopping at the winning symbol after the reach is formed, the force with which the fish bites the lure and pulls the rod is stronger than in lure effect 5 (lure effect 2) (the same force as the force with which the rod is pulled in lure effect 3), and the reel does not spin.

Lure effect 6 is determined when there is a "Super Reach (SP Reach)" and the judgment result is a "Miss" or "Big Hit", and the random number for determining the lure effect is between "value 102" and "value 127". When lure effect 6 is determined, lure effect pattern LE06 is determined as the lure effect pattern, and lure 3 is determined as the type of lure. The activation of lure effect 6 is when, after the reach is formed, the middle effect symbol passes by without temporarily stopping at the winning symbol, the force with which the fish bites the lure and pulls the rod is stronger and strongest than lure effect 5 (lure effect 2), and the reel does not spin.

Note that Lure 1, Lure 2, and Lure 3 are fish-shaped lures that imitate fish, and are all different from one another. For example, the lures may have different colors, different patterns, or different types of fish.

In the case of "without super reach (SP reach)", the distribution rate at which lure effects 1 to 3 are determined is 51/128 when lure effect 1 is determined, 51/128 when lure effect 2 is determined, and 26/128 when lure effect 3 is determined. In the case of "with super reach (SP reach)", the distribution rate at which lure effects 4 to 6 are determined is 51/128 when lure effect 4 is determined, 51/128 when lure effect 5 is determined, and 26/128 when lure effect 6 is determined.

In addition, in the case of "without Super Reach (SP Reach)", the order of Lure effect 1 → Lure effect 2 → Lure effect 3 suggests that there is a high chance of a hit (hope for a hit), and in the case of "with Super Reach (SP Reach)", the order of Lure effect 4 → Lure effect 5 → Lure effect 6 suggests that there is a high chance of a hit (hope for a hit).

In the case of lure effects 4 to 6 in "Super Reach (SP Reach)", they develop into the fishing super reach (SP reach). In the developed fishing super reach (SP reach), when the player grasps the grip 76b of the fishing rod device 75 and pulls it toward him, so that the swing position of the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 is not at the rear position, the performance control microcomputer 91 controls the rotor shaft of the rod side motor 79 to rotate and move (swing (rotate)) the swing position of the rod 76a to the rear position, and when the swing position of the rod 76a is returned to the rear position, the strength of the static torque of the rod side motor 79 during the super reach (SP reach) development corresponding to lure effects 4 to 6 described below is set again.

In lure performances 1 to 6, the reel 77a of the fishing rod device 75 is not rotated after the reach is formed. This is because if a fish bites the lure and the fishing line is pulled, causing the reel 7a to rotate vigorously, the handle 77aa of the reel 77a will also rotate, and the handle 77aa may hit the player's hand or fingers and cause injury. However, if the handle 77aa is not to hit the player and cause injury, so that the player can simulate the experience of a fish biting the lure and the fishing line being pulled along by the rotation of the reel 7a, for example, the rotation speed of the rotor shaft of the reel-side motor 78b may be set so that the reel 77a rotates once every two seconds, or the rotation speed of the rotor shaft of the reel-side motor 78b may be set so that the reel 77a rotates once every second.

Returning to FIG. 74, following step SL4750, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the lure of the determined lure performance is the same as the favorite lure of the character of the tenpai pattern by referring to the character's favorite lure table (step SL4751). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the lure of the determined lure performance is the same as the favorite lure of the character of the tenpai pattern by referring to the character's favorite lure table stored in the sub-ROM 93 for the favorite lure of the character of the performance pattern that has formed a reach (the character of the tenpai pattern).

Now, the character's favorite lure table will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The character's favorite lure table is stored in the sub-ROM 93 together with other tables. The performance symbols displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are composed of number symbols and character symbols. Among the characters, some have favorite lures and some do not.

The design may be composed of a number design of the number "1" and a character design of the character A, a number design of the number "2" and a character design of the character B, a number design of the number "3" and a character design of the character C, a number design of the number "4" and a character design of the character D, a number design of the number "5" and a character design of the character E, a number design of the number "6" and a character design of the character F, a number design of the number "7" and a character design of the character G, a number design of the number "8" and a character design of the character H, and a number design of the number "9" and a character design of the character I.

Character A is set to have no favorite lure. Character B is set to have lure 1 as his favorite lure. Character C is set to have lure 2 as his favorite lure. Character D is set to have lure 1 as his favorite lure. Character E is set to have no favorite lure. Character F is set to have no favorite lure. Character G is set to have lure 3 as his favorite lure. Character H is set to have lure 1 as his favorite lure. Character I is set to have no favorite lure.

Returning to FIG. 74, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the result of the determination in step SL4751 is that the lure of the determined lure performance is the same as the favorite lure of the character of the tenpai pattern (step SL4752). When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the lure of the determined lure performance is the same as the favorite lure of the character of the tenpai pattern (step SL4752: YES), it proceeds to step SL4753, whereas when it determines that the lure of the determined lure performance is not the same as the favorite lure of the character of the tenpai pattern (step SL4752: NO), it skips step SL4753 and proceeds to step SL4754.

In step SL4753, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the determined lure performance is lure performance 3 or slur performance 6. If the determined lure performance is lure performance 3 or slur performance 6 (step SL4753: YES), the process proceeds to step SL4754. On the other hand, if the determined lure performance is not lure performance 3 or slur performance 6 (i.e., if the determined lure performance is neither lure performance 3 nor slur performance 6) (step SL4753: NO), the process proceeds to step SL4755.

In step SL4754, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a command corresponding to the lure performance determined in step SL4750, and ends this process. In step SL4754, the lure performance determined in step SL4750 is executed as a fishing experience performance.

In step SL4755, the performance control microcomputer 91 changes the lure performance determined in step SL4750 to a lure performance with a number one greater than the number of the lure performance determined in step SL4750, sets a command corresponding to the changed lure performance, and ends this process. The lure performance changed in step SL4755 is executed as a fishing experience performance. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 changes the lure performance determined in step SL4750 to lure performance 2, which is one number greater than the number of lure performance 1, when it is lure performance 2, to lure performance 3, which is one number greater than the number of lure performance 2, when it is lure performance 4, to lure performance 5, which is one number greater than the number of lure performance 4, and when it is lure performance 5, to lure performance 6, which is one number greater than the number of lure performance 5. By changing the lure effect number to a lure effect with a number one higher, the lure effect will be changed to one with a higher chance of winning (expectation of winning). Note that even if the lure effect number is changed to a lure effect with a number one higher, the changed lure effect will proceed using the favorite lure of the character in the winning pattern.

[Load performance determination process]
The load performance determination process will be described with reference to Fig. 77. The load performance determination process is the process of step SL4701c in the variable performance process of Fig. 73. The load performance determination process is a process for determining the load performance of the reel side motor 78b and the rod side motor 79 (the pulling condition (load) of the fish at the rod 76a, and the pulling condition (load) of the fish at the handle 77aa of the reel 77a) corresponding to the lure performance. By setting the static torque of the reel side motor 78b and the rod side motor 79, the pulling condition (load) of the fish at the rod 76a and the pulling condition (load) of the fish at the handle 77aa of the reel 77a are determined.

In the load effect determination process, the static torque of the reel-side motor 78b is set to provide a resistance to the force acting in the direction of rotation of the handle 77aa of the reel 77a, which corresponds to the lure effect, and the static torque of the rod-side motor 79 is set to provide a resistance to the force acting in the direction of pulling the rod 76a, and the magnitude of these resistance forces (magnitude of static torque) can suggest the degree of reliability of a hit.

The performance control microcomputer 91 first sets a command for the load performance pattern of the rod and reel corresponding to the lure performance by referring to the load performance determination table (step SL4760), and ends this process. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 refers to the load performance determination table stored in ROM 93 to determine the load performance pattern in which the stationary torque of the rod 76a and reel 77a at various timings is set, which corresponds to the lure performance determined in the lure performance determination process of FIG. 74, among lure performances 1 to 6.

Here, the load performance determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 78. The load performance determination table is stored in the sub-ROM 93 together with other tables. For lure performances 1 to 6, the swing position of the rod 76a in the fishing rod device 75 and the stationary torque of the rod-side motor 79, the presence or absence of rotation of the reel 77a in the fishing rod device 75, and the stationary torque of the reel-side motor 78b at the time of reach formation, after reach formation, and at the time of super reach (SP reach) development are set as various timings. Here, "at the time of reach formation" refers to the time when the reach is formed and the lure is cast, and the rod 76a is stopped at the back position for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds). This is because the rod 76a and the reel 77a are designed to operate in order to cast the lure when the reach is formed and the lure is cast. For this reason, hereafter "when reach is formed" may be written as "when reach is formed (after the lure is cast)."

In the figure, with respect to the rod 76a, "none" indicates a torque-free state in which the rod-side motor 79 is in a non-excitation state, "small" indicates a static torque of about 30% (may be about 30% to about 50%) of the maximum static torque of the rod-side motor 79, "medium" indicates a static torque of about 60% (may be about 60% to about 70%) of the maximum static torque of the rod-side motor 79, and "large" indicates a static torque of about 85% (may be about 85% to about 100%) of the maximum static torque of the rod-side motor 79. As a result, the player can feel the force pulling the grip 76b toward the player to de-tune the rod-side motor 79, that is, the force of the fish pulling the rod 76a, strongly and feel the fish pulling heavier, as the static torque of the rod-side motor 79 increases in the order of "none" → "small" → "medium" → "large". By detuning the rod-side motor 79, the rod 76a rotates in a jerky manner for each step angle of the rod-side motor 79, which is a stepping motor, and this jerky feeling is transmitted to the player through the grip 76b. In other words, the heavier the jerky feeling is felt through the grip 76b when pulling the grip 76b toward the player, the stronger the force of winding the fishing line is felt, and the heavier the fish is felt as it is pulled. The maximum excitation static torque of the rod-side motor 79 is the maximum holding torque (holding force) when the excitation current to the rod-side motor 79 is energized (rated current), and the holding torque, i.e., the static torque, can be increased by increasing the excitation current. Therefore, by controlling the magnitude of the excitation current to the rod-side motor 79, the magnitude of the static torque, i.e., the holding torque of the rod-side motor 79, can be set to multiple levels, such as "small," "medium," and "large."

In the figure, the reel 77a is in a torque-free state in which the reel-side motor 78b is de-energized, the reel-side motor 78b is in a non-energized state, the reel-side motor 78b is in a torque-free state, the reel-side motor 78b is in a torque-free state in which ... By detuning the reel-side motor 78b, the handle 77aa rotates jerkily for each step angle of the reel-side motor 78b, which is a stepping motor, and this jerkiness is transmitted to the player through the handle 77aa. In other words, the heavier the jerkiness feels through the handle 77aa when rotating the handle 77aa, the stronger the force of winding the fishing line is felt, and the heavier the fish is felt. The maximum excitation static torque of the reel-side motor 78b is the maximum holding torque (holding force) when the excitation current to the reel-side motor 78b is energized (rated current), and the holding torque, i.e., the static torque, can be increased by increasing the excitation current. Therefore, by controlling the magnitude of the excitation current to the reel-side motor 78b, the magnitude of the static torque, i.e., the holding torque of the reel-side motor 78b, can be set to multiple levels, such as "small," "medium," and "large."

In lure performance 1, when a reach is formed (after the lure is thrown), the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the center position, the stationary torque of the rod side motor 79 is set to "small", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel side motor 78b is set to "small". When the middle performance symbol passes without temporarily stopping at the winning symbol after the reach is formed, the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the center position, the stationary torque of the rod side motor 79 is set to "small", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel side motor 78b is set to "small".

In lure performance 2, when a reach is formed (after the lure is thrown), the swing position of the rod 76a is set to move (swing (rotate)) from the center position to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod side motor 79 is set to "small", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel side motor 78b is set to "small". When the middle performance pattern passes without temporarily stopping at the winning pattern after the reach is formed, the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod side motor 79 is set to "small", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel side motor 78b is set to "small".

In lure performance 3, when a reach is formed (after the lure is thrown), the swing position of the rod 76a is set to move (swing (rotate)) from the center position to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod-side motor 79 is set to "medium", and the reel 77a starts to rotate (rotates counterclockwise) and after it stops rotating, the stationary torque of the reel-side motor 78b is set to "medium". When the middle performance symbol passes without temporarily stopping at the winning symbol after the reach is formed, the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod-side motor 79 is set to "medium", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel-side motor 78b is set to "medium".

In lure performance 4, when a reach is formed (after the lure is thrown), the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the center position, the stationary torque of the rod side motor 79 is set to "small", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel side motor 78b is set to "small". When a super reach (SP reach) develops, the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod side motor 79 is set to "small", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel side motor 78b is set to "small". Note that even when the middle performance pattern passes without temporarily stopping at the winning pattern after the reach is formed, the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the center position, the stationary torque of the rod side motor 79 is set to "small", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel side motor 78b is set to "small".

In lure performance 5, when a reach is formed (after the lure is thrown), the swing position of the rod 76a is set to move (swing (rotation)) from the center position to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod-side motor 79 is set to "medium", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel-side motor 78b is set to "medium". When a super reach (SP reach) develops, the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod-side motor 79 is set to "medium", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel-side motor 78b is set to "medium". Note that even when the middle performance pattern passes without temporarily stopping at the winning pattern after the reach is formed, the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod-side motor 79 is set to "medium", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel-side motor 78b is set to "medium".

In lure performance 6, when a reach is formed (after the lure is thrown), the swing position of the rod 76a is set to move (swing (rotate)) from the central position to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod-side motor 79 is set to "large", and the reel 77a starts to rotate (rotates counterclockwise) and after it stops rotating, the stationary torque of the reel-side motor 78b is set to "large". When a super reach (SP reach) develops, the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod-side motor 79 is set to "large", the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel-side motor 78b is set to "large". Furthermore, even if the middle performance symbol passes without temporarily stopping at the winning symbol after the reach is formed, the swing position of the rod 76a is set to the rear position, the stationary torque of the rod side motor 79 is set to "large," the reel 77a does not rotate, and the stationary torque of the reel side motor 78b is set to "large."

In this way, in lure performances 1 to 6, the static torque of the rod-side motor 79 has multiple stages, such as "small," "medium," and "large," and the static torque of the rod-side motor 79 increases in the order of "small," "medium," and "large" so as to act as a resistance force against the force acting in the direction of pulling the rod 76a, making it possible to indicate the reliability of a hit based on the magnitude of the resistance force (magnitude of the static torque).

In addition, in lure performances 1 to 6, the static torque of the reel-side motor 78b is multi-staged, from "small," "medium," and "large," and the static torque of the reel-side motor 78b increases in the order of "small," "medium," and "large" so as to act as a resistance force against the force acting in the rotational direction of rotating the handle 77aa of the reel 77a, so that the magnitude of the resistance force (magnitude of the static torque) can indicate the reliability of a hit.

[Lure throwing process]
The lure throwing process will be described with reference to Fig. 79. The lure throwing process is the process of step SL4701d in the process during variable performance in Fig. 73. The lure throwing process is a process for controlling the lure throwing operation by the fishing rod device 75 in order to throw a lure.

The performance control microcomputer 91 first moves (swings (rotates)) the swing position of the rod 76a from the central position to the front position, then moves (swings (rotates)) from the front position to the central position and then to the rear position, and sets a rod-side command for the lure throwing operation to stop (step SL4770), starts the reel rotation when the swing position of the rod 76a moves from the front position to the central position and then to the rear position, and when the rod 76a has been stopped at the rear position for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), sets a reel-side command for the lure throwing operation to stop the reel rotation (step SL4771), and ends this process.

In the lure throwing operation of step SL4770, the performance control microcomputer 91 controls the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotor shaft of the rod side motor 79 so that the rod 76a moves (swings (rotates)) in sequence from the center position → front position → center position → back position without the player operating the rod 76a to throw the lure. Also, in the reel throwing operation of step SL4770, the performance control microcomputer 91 controls the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotor shaft of the reel side motor 78b to realize the state in which the fishing line is pulled out from the reel by throwing the lure. Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 stops the rotation of the reel when the rod 76a is stopped at the back position for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds). The rotation of the reel side motor 78b rotates the reel 77a, and the handle 77aa also rotates. For this reason, in the lure throwing operation, the rotation speed of the rotor shaft of the reel-side motor 78b is set so that the reel 77a rotates once every two seconds to prevent the handle 77aa from colliding with the player and causing injury. Of course, the rotation speed of the rotor shaft of the reel-side motor 78b may be set so that the reel 77a rotates once every second to prevent the handle 77aa from colliding with the player and causing injury, or the rotation speed of the rotor shaft of the reel-side motor 78b may be set so that the reel 77a rotates three times.

[Customization selection screen for customizing fishing rod devices, etc.]
Next, a customization selection screen for customizing a fishing rod device or the like will be described with reference to FIG. 80. Here, the setting screen will be described first, and the customization selection screen will be described in order. The setting screen and the customization selection screen are displayed in an opaque specific area 7aa having a horizontally long rectangular shape on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a background image, a performance pattern, a character, a performance image related to the performance, and the like. An opaque specific area 7aa that is smaller than the display screen 7a (for example, one or two sizes smaller) is formed on the display screen 7a so as to be arranged on the front side of these images. For this reason, the display mode is such that an image displayed in an area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the specific area 7aa cannot be viewed through the specific area 7aa, whereas an image displayed in an area of the display screen 7a that does not overlap with the specific area 7aa in the front-rear direction (in other words, an area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the outer area of the outline of the specific area 7aa) can be viewed without being obstructed by the specific area 7aa.

[Settings screen]
First, the setting screen will be described with reference to Fig. 80(A). The setting screen HSG is displayed in the specific area 7aa, and when the player operates (presses) the select button 68, the setting screen HSG is used to set the brightness, volume, and customization selection screen according to the setting item selected by the player by operating (pressing) the select button 68.

In the setting screen HSG for setting the brightness, volume, and customization selection screen, the brightness setting item is arranged in the left column of the setting screen HSG, the volume setting item is arranged in the middle column of the setting screen HSG, and the customization selection screen setting item is arranged in the right column of the setting screen HSG. A select button image SBG imitating the select button 68 is arranged below the brightness setting item on the lower left side of the setting screen HSG, a message image MG1 saying "Select with select button" is arranged to the right of the select button image SBG, and a message image MG2 saying "Confirm: Push effect button" is arranged near the lower right side of the setting screen HSG below the volume setting item and the customization selection screen setting item.

The brightness setting item displays brightness indicator images ranging from brightness level 1 (minimum brightness that is not completely dark) to brightness level 5 (maximum brightness), a numerical image showing the brightness level within each brightness indicator, and an image of the currently selected brightness level.

The volume setting item displays volume indicator images ranging from volume level 1 (not muted, minimum volume) to volume level 5 (maximum volume), a numerical image showing the volume level within each volume indicator, and an image of the currently selected volume level.

The customization selection screen settings item displays an image called "Customization Selection Screen" to allow you to select the customization selection screen.

When the player operates (presses) the right button of the select button 68 while the setting screen HSG is displayed, the item selection frame HKG moves to the right, and when the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68, the item selection frame HKG moves to the left and moves to the setting item that the player wants to set (change).

When the setting item selected by the item selection frame HKG is a brightness setting item, when the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select buttons 68, the brightness level increases and the brightness indicator also levels up accordingly, and when the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select buttons 68, the brightness level decreases and the brightness indicator also levels down accordingly. At this time, depending on the operation (pressing) of the upper or lower button of the select buttons 68, the currently selected brightness level is displayed as an image above the brightness indicator image; for example, when the brightness level is 4, "Brightness: Level 4" is displayed.

When the setting item selected by the item selection frame HKG is a volume setting item, when the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68, the volume level increases and the volume indicator also levels up, and when the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68, the volume level decreases and the volume indicator also levels down. At this time, depending on the operation (pressing) of the upper or lower button of the select button 68, the currently selected volume level is displayed as an image above the volume indicator image; for example, when the volume level is 2, "Volume: Level 2" is displayed.

When the setting item selected by the item selection frame HKG is a setting item on the customization selection screen, the customization selection screen is selected.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the specific area 7aa on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears, and the setting screen HSG disappears. Note that the currently selected brightness level and currently selected volume level at the time the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 are reflected as is, and when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 with the customization selection screen selected, the setting screen HSG transitions to the customization selection screen EKG.

[Customization selection screen]
Next, the customization selection screen will be described with reference to Fig. 80 (B). The customization selection screen EKG is displayed in the specific area 7aa, and is a screen where the player can change the contents of the item selected by operating (pressing) the select button 68 from the items of rod operation, rod and grip vibration, reel operation, automatic reel winding operation, automatic operation of the performance button, and reach occurrence notice.

Rod operation can be "ON" or "OFF". When "ON" is selected, the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 is permitted to move (swing (rotate)) forward and backward, whereas when "OFF" is selected, the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 is not permitted (prohibited) to move (swing (rotate)) forward and backward. Rod operation is preset to "ON" as the default when the power is turned on (when the power is restored). When the rod operation is selected to "OFF", the reel operation described below is forcibly selected to "OFF" and the reel operation described below is not selected to "ON". When the rod operation is selected to "ON", either "ON" or "OFF" can be selected as the reel operation described below. When the rod operation is selected to "OFF", the automatic reel winding operation described below is forcibly selected to "OFF" and the automatic reel winding operation described below is not selected to "ON". When rod operation is selected to "ON," the automatic reel winding operation described below can be selected to either "ON" or "OFF."

The vibration of the rod and grip can be set to "ON" or "OFF". When "ON" is selected, the operation of the vibration motor 78a for vibrating the fishing rod device 75 in the front, back, left and right directions is permitted, whereas when "OFF" is selected, the operation of the vibration motor 78a for vibrating the fishing rod device 75 in the front, back, left and right directions is not permitted (prohibited). When the vibration motor 78a is operated and the fishing rod device 75 vibrates in the front, back, left and right directions before a reach is formed, there is a possibility that a fishing experience performance using the fishing rod device 75 will be performed thereafter. In other words, the fishing rod device 75 vibrates in the front, back, left and right directions, suggesting to the player that a fishing experience performance using the fishing rod device 75 may be performed. The vibration of the rod and grip is preset to "ON" as the default when the power is turned on (when power is restored).

The reel operation can be "ON" or "OFF". When "ON" is selected, the reel 77a of the fishing rod device 75 is permitted to rotate, whereas when "OFF" is selected, the reel 77a of the fishing rod device 75 is not permitted (prohibited) to rotate. The reel operation is preset to "ON" as the default when the power is turned on (when power is restored). When the above-mentioned rod operation is selected to "OFF", the reel operation is forcibly selected to "OFF" and the reel operation cannot be selected to "ON". When the above-mentioned rod operation is selected to "ON", either "ON" or "OFF" can be selected as the reel operation.

The automatic reel winding operation can be set to "ON" or "OFF". When "ON" is selected, the reel 77a of the fishing rod device 75 is allowed to rotate automatically in the fishing experience performance without the player operating the handle 77aa. When "OFF" is selected, the automatic rotation of the reel 77a of the fishing rod device 75 is not allowed (prohibited) in the fishing experience performance. In other words, when "OFF" is selected, the player operates the handle 77aa to rotate the reel 77a of the fishing rod device 75 in the fishing experience performance. The automatic reel winding operation is preset to "OFF" as the default when the power is turned on (when the power is restored). When the above-mentioned rod operation is selected to "OFF", the automatic reel winding operation is forcibly selected to "OFF" and the automatic reel winding operation is not selected to "ON". When the above-mentioned rod operation is selected to "ON", the automatic reel winding operation can be selected to either "ON" or "OFF".

In actual fishing, the reel 77a may be wound automatically, and by setting the automatic reel winding operation to "ON," it is possible to realize an operation similar to that of fishing, which involves automatic reel winding.

The automatic operation of the effect button can be set to "ON" or "OFF". When "ON" is selected, the effect button 63 is permitted to be automatically pressed during the effective operation period of the effect button even if the player does not actually press it (in other words, it is assumed that the button has been pressed), whereas when "OFF" is selected, the automatic pressing of the effect button during the effective operation period of the effect button is not permitted (prohibited). In other words, when "OFF" is selected, the setting is such that the player must press the effect button 63 themselves during the effective operation period of the effect button. The automatic operation of the effect button is preset to "OFF" as the default when the power is turned on (when power is restored).

The reach occurrence notice can be set to "low," "normal," or "never appears." When "low" is selected, the reach occurrence notice will be set to appear at a rate of about 30% compared to "normal," and when "never appears" is selected, the reach occurrence notice will not appear at all. When the power is turned on (when power is restored), the reach occurrence notice is preset to "normal" as the default.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the specific area 7aa on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears, and the customization selection screen EKG disappears. Note that the currently selected rod operation, rod and grip vibration, reel operation, automatic reel winding operation, automatic operation of the effect button, and reach occurrence notice at the time when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 will be reflected as is.

[Fishing experience performance]
Next, the fishing experience performance will be described with reference to Figures 81 to 83. In the fishing experience performance, the player can experience a simulated fishing experience by using the fishing rod device 75 provided on the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, gripping the grip 76b and pulling it toward himself to catch a fish with the rod 76a, or by rotating the handle 77aa of the reel 77a to wind the fishing line around the reel 77a and reel in a fish. That is, the performance control microcomputer 91 controls the fishing rod device 75, and the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the fishing experience performance is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first explain the presentation designs, and then explain Fishing Experience Presentation A and Fishing Experience Presentation B in that order.

[Performance design]
The left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are composed of numbers and characters as coin-shaped three-dimensional images. The character patterns are three-dimensional images, and are arranged so as to fit within the outer periphery of the coin. The number patterns are three-dimensional images, and a part of the number patterns protrudes downward from the lower center of the character patterns constituting the performance pattern, which is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image (i.e., the lower center of the coin), and is arranged in front of the character patterns and merges with them, so that at least a part of the character patterns is covered by the number patterns. The performance patterns are given character patterns corresponding to the number patterns.

The number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except for the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The numbers (odd numbers and even numbers) are each composed of different character patterns with multiple colors (full color), and the character patterns are displayed large as the main performance patterns. For this reason, the size of the numbers is smaller than the size of the character patterns attached to the numbers. In this way, since the numbers (odd numbers and even numbers) each have a color, for example, when the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R are aligned with the same number pattern to form a reach and a performance is developed, the more times the player experiences the performance developed via the reach, the more opportunities the player can have to discover the relationship (rule) between the color of the number pattern temporarily displayed and the performance developed. This allows the number designs (odd numbers and even numbers) to each have their own color, which can help increase interest.

The effect pattern is configured such that the character A is attached to the number "1", the character B is attached to the number "2", the character C is attached to the number "3", the character D is attached to the number "4", the character E is attached to the number "5", the character F is attached to the number "6", the character G is attached to the number "7", the character H is attached to the number "8", and the character I is attached to the number "9", and the number patterns are each attached with different character patterns having multiple colors (full color). For example, the character A may be attached to the numbers "1" and "7" respectively and overlap, and the character C may be attached to the numbers "3" and "8" respectively and overlap. In this case, the character A that is displayed in a different manner from the character A attached to the number "1" is assigned to the number "7", and the character C that is displayed in a different manner from the character C attached to the number "3" is assigned to the number "8".

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has three vertically long rectangular areas (i.e., the display screen 7a is divided into three equal areas in a row) as variable display areas for the three performance symbols (also called "variable display areas of the performance symbols"). The variable display (variable display) of the performance symbols starts in a display mode in which the left performance symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center performance symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right performance symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of each variable display area. Specifically, the left performance pattern 8L starts changing the performance pattern (changing display) in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side of the left changing display area to the lower side of the left changing display area, the middle performance pattern 8C starts changing the performance pattern (changing display) in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side of the middle changing display area to the lower side of the middle changing display area, and the right performance pattern 8R starts changing the performance pattern (changing display) in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side of the right changing display area to the lower side of the right changing display area. When the performance pattern changing performance (changing display) starts, each performance pattern changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed in each changing area, and becomes a display mode in which it changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind each performance pattern can be viewed through the semi-transparent performance pattern during high-speed change. Just before stopping, each performance symbol slows down and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When each performance symbol is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small increments. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same vertical distance dimension, and furthermore, the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area, the horizontal distance dimension of the middle variable display area, and the horizontal distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same horizontal distance dimension.

The center of the left variable display area is the point where a vertical line passing through the center of the top and bottom of the left variable display area intersects with a horizontal line passing through the center of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a, the center of the middle variable display area is the point where a vertical line passing through the center of the top and bottom of the middle variable display area intersects (the center of the middle variable display area coincides with the center where a horizontal line passing through the center of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a intersects with a vertical line passing through the center of the top and bottom of the display screen 7a), and the center of the right variable display area is the point where a vertical line passing through the center of the top and bottom of the right variable display area intersects. Each performance pattern is temporarily stopped and stopped in the center of each of these variable display areas, and when each performance pattern is stopped and aligned with the same number pattern, the player is notified that there is a win, and when each performance pattern is stopped and not aligned with the same number pattern, the player is notified that there is a loss.

To briefly explain the variable icons and reserved icons, the variable icons 9C corresponding to the left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R currently changing as the first special chart reserved is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special chart reserved. This first reserved display area is capable of storing up to four reserved icons 9A, and from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the first reserved icon 9A, the second icon 9A, the third icon 9A, and the fourth icon 9A are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom side of the display screen 7a.

[Fishing experience performance A]
Next, the fishing experience presentation A will be described with reference to Fig. 81. The fishing experience presentation A will be described on the assumption that the player has selected rod operation to be "ON", rod and grip vibration to be "ON", reel operation to be "ON", and reel automatic winding operation to be "OFF" on the above-mentioned customization selection screen EKG.

As shown in FIG. 81(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left performance pattern 8L is a bright blue number "2" pattern 8La with character B pattern 8Lb attached, and is displayed stopped in the center of the left variable display area, the middle performance pattern 8C is a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca with character C pattern 8Cb attached, and is displayed stopped in the center of the middle variable display area, and the right performance pattern 8R is a bright blue number "6" pattern 8Ra with character F pattern 8Rb attached, and is displayed stopped in the center of the right variable display area, and since a miss has been confirmed, the variable icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a. The background image, which is not shown, is an image of the beach overlooking the sea. The background image may also be an image of a clear stream flowing through a rural mountain area from a riverbank.

In this case, there are only three reserved icons 9A that have not been consumed and are stored. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21.

In this state, the swing position of the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 is maintained in the center position, and the reel 7a is not rotating. The rod side motor 79 and the reel side motor 78b are in a non-excited state, and are in a torque-free state.

When the first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern begins, as shown in FIG. 81 (B). When the first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the third hold icon 9A moves to the right and becomes the second hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9A moves to the right and becomes the first hold icon 9A. This results in a state in which there are only two stocked hold icons 9A.

In this state, the swing position of the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 continues to be maintained in the central position, and the reel 7a is not rotating. The rod side motor 79 and the reel side motor 78b are in a non-excited state and are in a torque-free state. When the performance pattern change performance (changing display) starts, the vibration motor 78a may be activated to vibrate the fishing rod device 75 in the forward/backward/left/right directions.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81(C), the left performance pattern 8L is displayed temporarily in the center of the left variable display area with the character B's pattern 8Lb attached to the bright blue number "2" pattern 8La, and the right performance pattern 8R is displayed temporarily in the center of the right variable display area with the character B's pattern 8Rb attached to the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra, and the center performance pattern 8C is in the variable performance (variable display), forming a reach. A horizontal line connecting the center of the left performance pattern 8C that is displayed temporarily and the center of the right performance pattern 8R that is displayed temporarily is formed as a reach line. In this variation, in steps SL4750 and SL4751 of the lure performance determination process in FIG. 74, the lure performance 1 is determined by referring to the lure performance determination table in FIG. 75, so the type of lure is lure 1. However, the character of the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R, which are the performance symbols that formed the reach (so-called Tenpai symbols), is character B, and the favorite lure of this character B is lure 1 as shown in FIG. 76, so lure 1 of the determined lure performance 1 and the favorite lure 1 of the character of the Tenpai symbol are the same. Therefore, in step SL4755 of the lure performance determination process in FIG. 74, when it is lure performance 1, it is changed to lure performance 2, which is one number larger than lure performance 1, and a command is set to change to a lure performance with a higher expectation of winning (expectation of winning). Even if it is changed from lure performance 1 to lure performance 2, lure performance 2 progresses using the favorite lure 1 of the character of the Tenpai symbol, without using lure 2, which is the lure of lure performance 2.

When the reach is formed, the fishing rod device 75 starts the lure throwing operation. When the lure throwing operation starts, the swing position of the rod 76a moves (swings (rotates)) from the center position toward the front position, and then the swing position of the rod 76a moves (swings (rotates)) from the front position toward the back position. When the swing position of the rod 76a moves (swings (rotates)) from the front position toward the back position, the reel 77a rotates to express the fishing line being pulled out from the reel 77a by the lure member 76aa flying toward the water surface. When the swing position of the rod 76a completes the movement (swing (rotates)) to the back position and stops for a predetermined period (e.g., 1.5 seconds), the rotation of the reel 77a stops and lure performance 2 starts. The player grasps the grip 76b of the fishing rod device 75 and pulls it toward themselves, or grasps the handle 77aa of the fishing rod device 75 and rotates it.

When the lure throwing action by the fishing rod device 75 is started, that is, during the lure throwing action by the fishing rod device 75, a lure image LG1 corresponding to the favorite lure 1 of the character of the tenpai pattern appears near the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where it is tied to the fishing line image TIG as an image (specific image) showing the lure member 76aa, which is a specific object represented on at least a part of the fishing rod device 75. Note that after the lure throwing action by the fishing rod device 75 is performed, a lure image LG1 corresponding to the favorite lure 1 of the character of the tenpai pattern may appear near the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where it is tied to the fishing line image TIG as an image (specific image) showing the lure member 76aa, which is a specific object represented on at least a part of the fishing rod device 75.

When the lure image LG1, which is an image corresponding to the lure member 76aa, falls onto the water surface, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a ripple image SG1 of the water surface shaking at the point of fall appears toward the left center of the display screen 7a, and then the middle performance pattern 8C slows down and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and when the middle performance pattern 8C, with the number "2" pattern 8Ca in bright blue color and the character B pattern 8Cb attached, passes without being displayed as a temporary stop in the center of the middle variable display area (in other words, when the middle performance pattern 8C, which would be a win if it stopped, passes without being displayed as a temporary stop across the horizontal reach line formed by the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R), as shown in the enlarged view shown in FIG. 81(D1), at the point where the lure image LG1 falls onto the water surface, the fish image TSG gets caught on the fishing hook of the lure image LG1, and the lure image LG1 and the head of the fish image TSG pop out of the water surface, causing the water surface to shake, a ripple image SG1' appears. Here, because the hook is not fully hooked, the fish image TSG comes off the lure image LG1 (breaks off), the fish is not caught, and the display mode disappears from the lower left side of the display screen 7a. After that, a middle performance pattern 8C appears, which is a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca with a character C pattern 8Cb attached, and is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the middle variable display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81(E), the left performance pattern 8L is a bright blue number "2" pattern 8La with character B pattern 8Lb attached, stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, the middle performance pattern 8C is a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca with character C pattern 8Cb attached, stopped and displayed in the center of the middle variable display area, and the right performance pattern 8R is a bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra with character B pattern 8Rb attached, stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped, the rod side motor 79 becomes de-energized and enters a torque-free state. As a result, the swing position of the rod 76a automatically moves (rotates (swings)) to the center position due to the restoring force of the spring of the de-energized automatic center position return mechanism part provided in the swing mechanism of the swing device attached to the underside of the front frame 53, and the rod 76a stops in the center position before the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed as stopped.

After that, when the first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes variable icon 9C, the variable display of the performance symbols (variable display) begins, and if the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R do not line up as the same symbol and are displayed as still, a miss is confirmed, whereas if the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R line up as the same symbol and are displayed as still, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then the jackpot game begins in which the player is awarded a profit.

[Fishing experience performance B]
Next, the fishing experience presentation B will be described with reference to Figures 82 and 83. The fishing experience presentation B will be described on the assumption that the player has selected rod operation to be "ON", rod and grip vibration to be "ON", reel operation to be "ON", and reel automatic winding operation to be "OFF" on the above-mentioned customization selection screen EKG.

As shown in FIG. 82(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left performance pattern 8L is a bright blue number "2" pattern 8La with character B pattern 8Lb attached, and is displayed stopped in the center of the left variable display area, the middle performance pattern 8C is a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca with character C pattern 8Cb attached, and is displayed stopped in the center of the middle variable display area, and the right performance pattern 8R is a bright blue number "6" pattern 8Ra with character F pattern 8Rb attached, and is displayed stopped in the center of the right variable display area, and since a miss has been confirmed, the variable icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a. The background image, which is not shown, is an image of the beach overlooking the sea. The background image may also be an image of a clear stream flowing through a rural mountain area from a riverbank.

In this case, there are only three reserved icons 9A that have not been consumed and are stored. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21.

In this state, the swing position of the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 is maintained in the center position, and the reel 7a is not rotating. The rod side motor 79 and the reel side motor 78b are in a non-excited state, and are in a torque-free state.

When the first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern begins, as shown in FIG. 82 (B). When the first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the third hold icon 9A moves to the right and becomes the second hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9A moves to the right and becomes the first hold icon 9A. This results in a state in which there are only two stocked hold icons 9A.

In this state, the swing position of the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 continues to be maintained in the central position, and the reel 7a is not rotating. The rod side motor 79 and the reel side motor 78b are in a non-excited state and are in a torque-free state. In contrast, when the performance pattern change performance (changing display) starts, the vibration motor 78a is activated and the fishing rod device 75 is vibrated in the front-back and left-right directions.

After that, when the operation of the vibration motor 78a stops and the vibration of the fishing rod device 75 stops, as shown in FIG. 82(C), first, the left performance pattern 8L is displayed temporarily in the center of the left variable display area with the character G's pattern 8Lb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8La, and the right performance pattern 8R is displayed temporarily in the center of the right variable display area with the character G's pattern 8Rb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ra, and the center performance pattern 8C is in the variable performance (variable display), and a reach is formed. A horizontal line connecting the center of the left performance pattern 8C that is displayed temporarily and the center of the right performance pattern 8R that is displayed temporarily is formed as a reach line. In this variation, in steps SL4750 and SL4751 of the lure performance determination process in FIG. 74, the lure performance is determined to be 6 by referring to the lure performance determination table in FIG. 75, so the type of lure is lure 3. However, the character of the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R, which are the performance patterns that formed the reach (so-called Tenpai patterns), is character G, and the favorite lure of this character G is lure 3 as shown in FIG. 76, so the lure 3 of the determined lure performance 6 and the favorite lure 3 of the character of the Tenpai pattern are the same. However, there are lure performances 1 to 6, and although it is not possible to change to a lure performance with a number one larger than that of lure performance 6, lure performance 6 is the lure performance with the highest expectation of winning (expectation of winning). Therefore, although it is not possible to change to a lure performance with a number one larger than that of lure performance 6, the command of the determined lure performance 6 is set in step SL4754 of the lure performance determination process in FIG. 74. As a result, the performance progresses using lure 3 of lure performance 6.

When the reach is formed, the fishing rod device 75 starts the lure throwing operation. When the lure throwing operation starts, the swing position of the rod 76a moves (swings (rotates)) from the center position toward the front position, and then the swing position of the rod 76a moves (swings (rotates)) from the front position toward the back position. When the swing position of the rod 76a moves (swings (rotates)) from the front position toward the back position, the reel 77a rotates to express the fishing line being pulled out from the reel 77a by the lure member 76aa flying toward the water surface. When the swing position of the rod 76a completes the movement (swing (rotation)) to the back position and stops for a predetermined period (e.g., 1.5 seconds), the rotation of the reel 77a stops and lure performance 6 starts. The player grasps the grip 76b of the fishing rod device 75 and pulls it toward themselves, or grasps the handle 77aa of the fishing rod device 75 and rotates it.

When the lure throwing action by the fishing rod device 75 is started, that is, during the lure throwing action by the fishing rod device 75, the lure image LG3 corresponding to the lure effect 6 (in other words, the lure image LG3 corresponding to the favorite lure 3 of the character of the tenpai pattern) appears near the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where it is tied to the fishing line image TIG as an image (specific image) showing the lure member 76aa, which is a specific target displayed on at least a part of the fishing rod device 75. Note that after the lure throwing action by the fishing rod device 75 is performed, the lure image LG3 corresponding to the lure effect 6 (in other words, the lure image LG3 corresponding to the favorite lure 3 of the character of the tenpai pattern) may appear near the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where it is tied to the fishing line image TIG as an image (specific image) showing the lure member 76aa, which is a specific target displayed on at least a part of the fishing rod device 75.

When the lure image LG3, which is an image corresponding to the lure member 76aa, falls onto the water surface, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), a ripple image SG1 of the water surface shaking at the point of fall appears toward the left center of the display screen 7a, and then the middle performance pattern 8C slows down and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and when the middle performance pattern 8C, with the number "2" pattern 8Ca in bright blue color and the character B pattern 8Cb attached, passes without being displayed as a temporary stop in the center of the middle variable display area (in other words, when the middle performance pattern 8C, which would be a win if it stopped, passes without being displayed as a temporary stop across the horizontal reach line formed by the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R), as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 82 (D1), at the point where the lure image LG3 falls onto the water surface, the fish image TSG gets caught on the fishing hook of the lure image LG1, and the lure image LG1 and the head of the fish image TSG pop out of the water surface, causing a ripple image SG1' of the water surface shaking. In this case, the hook is sufficiently hooked, so the fish is hit and the lure image LG3 and the fish image TSG jump out of the water. At this time, a middle performance pattern 8C appears, which is a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca followed by a character C pattern 8Cb.

When a fish bites the lure, as shown in Figure 82 (E), the middle performance pattern 8C again slowly increases its speed, changing from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and changing at high speed (it starts changing again). At this time, a message image MG1 saying "Hit!" is displayed near the top center of the display screen 7a, informing the player that a fish has bitten the lure. When the fish bites the lure, a wave front image SG2 of a fishing line image TIG running on the water surface is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 82(F), when the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, the right performance pattern 8R, the two reserved icons 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position 9Cd are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), a message image MG2 saying "Reel in while pulling the rod!" is displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and a child screen image AG having a rectangular shape including an image imitating a fishing rod device 75 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In addition to the image imitating the fishing rod device 75, the child screen image AG includes an arrow image instructing the user to pull the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 toward the user, and a rotation direction instruction image instructing the user to rotate the reel 7a of the fishing rod device 75 in a predetermined direction. At the timing when the message image MG2 is displayed, a voice with the same content as the message image MG2, "Reel in while pulling the rod", is played from the speaker 67.

The player grasps the grip 76b of the fishing rod device 75 and pulls it towards himself, rotating the handle 77aa of the reel 77a of the fishing rod device 75. When the player rotates the handle 77aa in the opposite direction to the rotation direction indication image, a voice message stating "The rotation direction of the handle 77aa is reversed" is played from the speaker 67.

When the message image MG2 is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the child screen image AG moves from the lower right to the upper right of the display screen 7a, progressing to the Super Fishing Reach (SP Reach). When the Super Fishing Reach (SP Reach) begins, a band-shaped gauge image SIG is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7, as shown in FIG. 83 (G). This gauge image SIG indicates the distance between the fishing rod and the fish. Inside the gauge image SIG, a fish image ISG is displayed, which shows the fishing line being pulled from the right to the left as it is wound around the reel. To the left of the gauge image SIG, a distance image SNG is displayed, which indicates the distance between the fishing rod and the fish.

When the gauge image SIG is displayed, the fish image ISG is located on the inside right side of the gauge image SIG with its head facing the inside left side of the gauge image SIG, and the distance image SNG displays "30m remaining."

The player grasps the grip 76b and pulls it towards himself, spinning the handle 77aa of the reel 77a. As the player spins the handle 77aa of the reel 77a, the fishing line is wound onto the reel, and the fish image ISG inside the gauge image SIG is pulled to the left, gradually shortening the distance between the fishing rod and the fish. The distance between the fishing rod and the fish is displayed by the distance image SNG.

As the player continues to rotate the handle 77aa of the reel 77a, the fishing line is wound around the reel, pulling the fish image ISG inside the gauge image SIG to the left, and the distance image SNG, which shows the distance between the fishing rod and the fish, displays "5m remaining," as shown in FIG. 83(H).

The player grasps the grip 76b and pulls it toward himself, causing the swing position of the rod 76a to reach the front position from the rear position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 83(I), the rod 76a suddenly starts moving, and the swing position of the rod 76a moves (swings (rotates)) from the front position toward the rear position, and stops at the rear position. As a result, the fish image ISG moves toward the right side of the gauge image SIG with its head facing the right side of the gauge image SIG, and the distance image SNG indicating the distance between the fishing rod and the fish is displayed as "15m remaining." In other words, the swimming direction of the fish image ISG is reversed in opposition to the fishing line being wound on the reel, realizing an expression of the fish image ISG swimming powerfully as if escaping into the distance. At this time, the wave front image SG3 in which the fishing line image TIG runs vigorously on the water surface is displayed as the fish image ISG swims powerfully as if escaping into the distance. The wavefront image SG3 is a ripple caused by the fish image ISG fleeing into the distance, while the wavefront image SG2 is a ripple caused by the fish image ISG being pulled closer, so the directions in which the wavefront advances (the wavefront moves away, the wavefront approaches) are different. Also, the speed at which the wavefront image SG3 moves away is faster than the speed at which the wavefront image SG2 approaches. Note that the player is spinning the handle 77aa of the reel 77a.

After that, when the fish image ISG is pulled to the inside left side of the gauge image SIG and the distance image SNG, which shows the distance between the fishing rod and the fish, displays "0m remaining (zero meters remaining)," a message image MG3 saying "Pull the rod!" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 83(J). At the same time that the message image MG3 is displayed, a voice saying "Pull the rod," which has the same content as the message image MG3, is played from the speaker 67.

As the fishing super reach (SP reach) performance reaches its final stage, the message image MG3 and sound cause the player to stop rotating the handle 77aa, grasp the grip 76b and pull it towards himself, and as shown in Figure 83 (K), the entire fish image TSG that has bitten the lure image LG3 tied to the fishing line image TIG jumps out of the water surface, and a wave front image SG4 is displayed showing the water surface shaking violently. At this time, the gauge image SIG and distance image SNG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). The fish image TSG is the fish image ISG that was moving inside the gauge image SIG.

In this way, the Super Fishing Reach (SP Reach) performance allows the player to simulate the experience of fishing using the fishing rod device 75, and gives the player a sense of immersion in the performance provided by the fishing rod device 75 and the image display device (display means). The player can also feel a sense of accomplishment from catching a fish.

After that, when the fish image TSG biting the lure image LG3 tied to the fishing line image TIG and the wave front image SG4 are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), as shown in FIG. 83(L), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, the right performance pattern 8R, the two hold icons 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position 9Cd are displayed again, and the left performance pattern 8L is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the left variable display area with the character G's pattern 8Lb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8La, the middle performance pattern 8C is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the middle variable display area with the character G's pattern 8Cb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca, and the right performance pattern 8R is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the right variable display area with the character G's pattern 8Rb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ra.

When the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped, the rod side motor 79 becomes de-energized and enters a torque-free state. As a result, the swing position of the rod 76a automatically moves (rotates (swings)) to the center position due to the restoring force of the spring of the de-energized automatic center position return mechanism part provided in the swing mechanism of the swing device attached to the underside of the front frame 53, and the rod 76a stops in the center position before the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed as stopped.

Then, the left performance symbol 8L, the center performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are displayed in a stopped state, and when they line up with the same symbol (here, the number "7" and the character G), a win is confirmed and the jackpot opening begins, after which the jackpot game begins, in which the player is awarded a profit.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with operation means that can be operated by players are known (for example, JP 2021-176531 A). However, such gaming machines only require a simple operation of pressing the operation means, and therefore there are few player-participation effects that use the operation means, and there is still room for improvement in technology to increase the interest of players in the game.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of fishing experience production.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with a fishing rod device 75 (operation means) that can be operated by a player, an image display device 7 (display means) that can display a plurality of types of images, and a performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) and an image control microcomputer 101 (performance execution means) that can execute a plurality of types of performances. The performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) and the image control microcomputer 101 (performance execution means) can execute a first performance in which the fishing rod device 75 executes a lure throwing action (moving the fishing rod device 75 (operation means) in a predetermined direction) (FIG. 81(C) for fishing experience performance A, and FIG. 82(C) for fishing experience performance B), and during or after the first performance, a lure image (indicating a specific target displayed on at least a part of the operation means) corresponding to the lure member 76aa of the fishing rod device 75 is displayed. It is possible to execute a second performance in which a lure image (specific image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (Figure 81 (C) for fishing experience performance A, and Figure 82 (C) for fishing experience performance B), and it is possible to execute a third performance in which the lure image (specific image) is changed from a display mode in which a fish is not hooked to a display mode in which a fish is hooked (from the first mode to a second mode different from the first mode) (Figures 81 (C) to (D1) for fishing experience performance A, and Figures 82 (C) to (D1) for fishing experience performance B). According to this configuration, the fishing rod device 75 (operation means) is moved in a predetermined direction, a lure image (specific image) showing the lure member 76aa, which is a specific target displayed on at least a part of the fishing rod device 75 (operation means), is displayed, and the lure image (specific image) can be changed from a display state in which a fish is not hooked to a display state in which a fish is hooked (from a first state to a second state), so that a novel presentation using the fishing rod device 75, which is an unconventional operating means, can be provided to the player as a player-participation presentation. Therefore, the interest can be increased.

[Effect 2]
In the third effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when an effect pattern that will result in a win if it stops passes along a reach line on which a reach is formed by the variation of the effect pattern, the lure image (specific image) can be changed from a display state in which a fish is not hooked to a display state in which a fish is hooked (from the first state to the second state). With this configuration, when a reach is formed, a sense of expectation can be given to the player that a fish may be caught on the hook of the lure image (specific image), and the player can be excited about whether or not the fish will be caught on the hook of the lure image (specific image). This can contribute to improving the "sense of immersion in the effect of whether or not a fish will be caught" by forming a reach.

[Effect 3]
The performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) and the image control microcomputer 101 (performance execution means) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can execute a super reach performance with a high expectation of winning after the lure image (specific image) changes from a display mode in which a fish is not hooked to a display mode in which a fish is hooked (from the first mode to the second mode) (FIG. 82 (E) to (K) in the fishing experience performance B). According to this configuration, when a reach is formed and the lure image (specific image) changes from a display mode in which a fish is not hooked to a display mode in which a fish is hooked (from the first mode to the second mode), it can develop into a super reach performance, so that the super reach performance can enhance the player's immersion.

[Effect 4]
In the super reach presentation in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a player operates the fishing rod device 75 (operation means), a presentation can be executed in which a resistance force against a force acting in the direction in which the fishing rod device 75 (operation means) is operated is applied to the fishing rod device 75 (operation means), and the reliability of a hit can be suggested by the magnitude of the resistance force. With this configuration, when operating the fishing rod device 75 (operation means), the reliability of a hit can be suggested by the magnitude of the resistance force against the operation, so that a realistic presentation of resistance force can be provided to the player.

[Effect 5]
The fishing rod device 75 (operation means) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment represents a fishing rod reel 77a, and in the super reach performance, if a fish is caught with a lure, which is a lure image (specific image), a win occurs. With this configuration, the experience of fishing can be simulated using the fishing rod device 75, and the player can be given a sense of immersion in the performance provided by the fishing rod device 75 (operation means) and the image display device 7 (display means). The player can also feel a sense of accomplishment from catching a fish.

[Effect 6]
When the automatic reel winding operation is "ON" (in a specific mode), the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) and the image control microcomputer 101 (performance execution means) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment execute a performance in which the reel 77a of the fishing rod device 75 is automatically wound without the player having to operate the reel 77a of the fishing rod device 75. With this configuration, in actual fishing, the reel may be automatically wound, and it is possible to realize an operation similar to that of fishing with such automatic reel winding.

[Modification]
Below, variations on the fishing experience are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the fishing experience presentation A in Fig. 81 and the fishing experience presentation B in Fig. 82 and Fig. 83 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the fishing rod device 75 is mainly composed of a rod section 76 and a reel section 77, and a lure member 76aa is attached to the tip of the rod 76a of the rod section 76. However, the lure members 76aa may be built into the rod 76a of the rod section 76 in a plurality of parts and exposed from the tip of the rod 76a of the rod section 76 depending on the presentation. For example, there are lure members corresponding to the types of lures mentioned above, specifically, there is a lure member 76aa1 corresponding to lure 1, a lure member 76aa2 corresponding to lure 2, and a lure member 76aa3 corresponding to lure 3. When the lure member 76aa1 is exposed from the tip of the rod 76a of the rod section 76, the above-mentioned lure performance 1 or lure performance 4 is started, when the lure member 76aa2 is exposed from the tip of the rod 76a of the rod section 76, the above-mentioned lure performance 2 or lure performance 5 is started, and when the lure member 76aa3 is exposed from the tip of the rod 76a of the rod section 76, the above-mentioned lure performance 3 or lure performance 6 may be started. The multiple lure members are normally stored in the rod 76a of the rod section 76, and one lure member is exposed from the tip of the rod 76a of the rod section 76 depending on the performance, and when the performance ends, it is stored in the rod 76a of the rod section 76 again.

[Modification 2]
In the fishing experience presentation A of FIG. 81 and the fishing experience presentation B of FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the automatic reel winding operation can be set to "ON" or "OFF" on the customization selection screen EKG of FIG. 80(B). However, the automatic rod pulling operation may be set to "ON" or "OFF". In the automatic rod pulling operation, the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 is automatically pulled (moved) toward the front even if the player does not grip the grip 76b of the fishing rod device 75 and pull it toward the front in the fishing experience presentation, whereas when "OFF" is selected, the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 is automatically pulled (moved) toward the front in the fishing experience presentation is not permitted (prohibited). In other words, when "OFF" is selected, the fishing experience presentation is set to the player gripping the grip 76b of the fishing rod device 75 and pulling the rod 76a toward the front by himself. The automatic rod pulling operation is preset to "OFF" as a default when the power is turned on (when power is restored). When the above-mentioned rod operation is selected to "OFF", the automatic rod pulling operation is forcibly selected to "OFF" and the automatic rod pulling operation cannot be selected to "ON". When the above-mentioned rod operation is selected to "ON", either "ON" or "OFF" can be selected as the automatic rod pulling operation.

[Modification 3]
In the fishing experience presentation A in Fig. 81 and the fishing experience presentation B in Fig. 82 and Fig. 83 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the lure image LG1 or the lure image LG3 appears near the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where it is connected to the fishing line image TIG as part of the fishing rod device 75. However, the lure image LG1 or the lure image LG3 may be displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where it is connected to the fishing line image TIG together with the fishing rod device image that imitates the fishing rod device 75. In this case, the fishing rod device image may be linked to the operation of the fishing rod device 75. For example, when the swing position of the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 is moved to the rear position, the rod of the fishing rod device image is displayed as tilting toward the rear of the display screen 7a (the image of the rod is tilted away from the player), and when the swing position of the rod 76a of the fishing rod device 75 is moved to the front position, the rod of the fishing rod device image is displayed as tilting toward the front of the display screen 7a (the image of the rod is tilted toward the player). By rubbing, a more realistic effect can be provided to the player.

[Modification 4]
In the fishing experience presentation B of FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the fishing super reach (SP reach) is started, a band-shaped gauge image SIG is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7, and a fish image ISG is displayed, which is drawn from the right side to the left side by the fishing line being wound around the reel. However, if the thing that bites the lure is not a fish but a pebble, an empty can, a shrimp, a crab, or a turtle, the fish image ISG is replaced with a pebble image, an empty can image, a shrimp image, a crab image, and a turtle image. This can increase the variety of fish to catch, which can contribute to making the fishing super reach (SP reach) less likely to lose its freshness. Of course, the expectation of a hit may be set higher in the order of pebble image → empty can image → shrimp image → crab image → turtle image → fish image. In this case, the gauge image SIG may be initially a shrimp image, but the shrimp image may be switched to a fish image midway to increase the expectation of a hit.

[Modification 5]
In the fishing experience presentation A in Fig. 81 and the fishing experience presentation B in Fig. 82 and Fig. 83 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there may be multiple types of fish images to be caught, and in this case, the higher the price of the fish according to the type of fish (for example, mackerel → sea bass → Spanish mackerel → tuna), the higher the expected probability of winning is set. There may also be multiple sizes of fish to be caught, and in this case, the larger the size of the fish, the higher the expected probability of winning is set. Of course, the fish image to be caught is displayed as a fish image ISG within a band-shaped gauge image SIG on the lower side of the display screen 7.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the fishing experience performance A in FIG. 81 and the fishing experience performance B in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 are performed using the fishing rod device 75. However, instead of providing the fishing rod device 75 in the gaming machine 1 near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 in FIG. 1 below the front frame 53, a joystick-type operation means may be provided to perform the fishing experience performance A in FIG. 81 and the fishing experience performance B in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83. In this case, the rod portion 76 of the fishing rod device 75 corresponds to the joystick, and the reel portion 77 of the fishing rod device 75 does not exist. The joystick can be pulled forward, pushed backward, tilted leftward, or tilted rightward. When the joystick is pulled forward, a resistance force acting against the force acting in the forward direction is applied to the joystick by controlling the electric drive source, so that the pulling of the fish can be made lighter or heavier.

[Modification 7]
In the fishing experience presentation A in Fig. 81 and the fishing experience presentation B in Fig. 82 and Fig. 83 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the fishing rod device 75 is not vibrated in the front-rear and left-right directions when a fish is caught on the hook of the lure image. However, the fishing rod device 75 may be vibrated in the front-rear and left-right directions when a fish is caught on the hook of the lure image. This can create a more realistic feeling that a fish is caught on the hook of the lure image.

[Modification 8]
In the fishing experience presentation A in FIG. 81 and the fishing experience presentation B in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the player selects the rod operation to "ON" in the above-mentioned customization selection screen EKG, so that the lure throwing operation by the fishing rod device 75 is automatically started. However, the player may cast the lure by himself. In this case, the above-mentioned rod operation is selected to "OFF". At this time, the automatic reel winding operation is forcibly selected to "OFF" so that the automatic reel winding operation cannot be selected to "ON", but even if the above-mentioned rod operation is selected to "OFF", either "ON" or "OFF" may be selected as the automatic reel winding operation.

[Modification 9]
In the fishing experience presentation A of Figure 81 and the fishing experience presentation B of Figures 82 and 83 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the lure throwing action with the fishing rod device 75 is started, that is, during the lure throwing action with the fishing rod device 75, a lure image appears near the lower left side of the display screen 7a tied to a fishing line image TIG as an image (specific image) showing the lure member 76aa, which is a specific target represented on at least a part of the fishing rod device 75. However, the lure casting action by the fishing rod device 75 may be initiated after the lure image appears near the lower left side of the display screen 7a while being tied to the fishing line image TIG as an image (specific image) showing the lure member 76aa, which is a specific target represented on at least a part of the fishing rod device 75, or at the same timing as the lure image appears near the lower left side of the display screen 7a while being tied to the fishing line image TIG as an image (specific image) showing the lure member 76aa, which is a specific target represented on at least a part of the fishing rod device 75,

[Modification 10]
In the fishing experience presentation A of FIG. 81 and the fishing experience presentation B of FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load presentation determination process of FIG. 77, the magnitude of the static torque is determined to be either "none", "small", "medium" or "large" by referring to the load presentation determination table of FIG. 78. At this time, when the magnitude of the static torque, which is the holding torque of the rod side motor 79, is determined to be "medium", it is sufficient to control the magnitude of the final static torque to be "medium". For example, the initial static torque may be "small" and then the final static torque may be varied to be "medium". Also, when the magnitude of the static torque, which is the holding torque of the rod side motor 79, is determined to be "large", it is sufficient to control the magnitude of the final static torque to be "large". For example, the initial static torque may be "small", then the static torque may be "medium", and then the final static torque may be varied to be "large". Alternatively, the initial static torque may be "small", then the static torque may be "medium", then the static torque may return to "small", and then the final static torque may be varied to be "large".

[Modification 11]
In the fishing experience presentation A of FIG. 81 and the fishing experience presentation B of FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load presentation determination process of FIG. 77, the magnitude of the static torque is determined to be either "none", "small", "medium" or "large" by referring to the load presentation determination table of FIG. 78. At this time, when the magnitude of the stationary torque, which is the holding torque of the reel-side motor 78b, is determined to be "medium", it is sufficient to control the magnitude of the final stationary torque to be "medium". For example, the initial magnitude of the stationary torque may be "small" and then the final magnitude of the stationary torque may be varied to be "medium". Also, when the magnitude of the stationary torque, which is the holding torque of the reel-side motor 78b, is determined to be "large", it is sufficient to control the magnitude of the final stationary torque to be "large". For example, the initial magnitude of the stationary torque may be "small", then the magnitude of the stationary torque may be varied to be "medium", and then the final magnitude of the stationary torque may be varied to be "large". Alternatively, the initial magnitude of the stationary torque may be "small", then the magnitude of the stationary torque may be "medium", then the magnitude of the stationary torque may return to "small" again, and then the final magnitude of the stationary torque may be varied to be "large".

[Modification 12]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the fishing experience presentation A in FIG. 81 and the fishing experience presentation B in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 may not include some of the presentations described above, or other presentations may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine including an operation means operable by a player, a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and an effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects,
The performance execution means includes:
A first effect of moving the operating means in a predetermined direction is executable,
During or after the first performance, a second performance is executed in which a specific image showing a specific target displayed on at least a part of the operation means is displayed on the display means;
A third performance is executed in which the specific image is changed from a first aspect to a second aspect different from the first aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
In the third performance, when a performance pattern which will be a win if it stops passes on a reach line on which a reach is formed by the variation of the performance pattern, the specific image is changed from the first state to the second state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a super reach performance having a high expectation of winning after the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-3,
In the super reach presentation, when a player operates the operation means, a presentation can be executed in which a resistance force acting against a force acting in a direction in which the operation means is operated is applied to the operation means, and the reliability of a hit can be indicated by the magnitude of the resistance force.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
The operating means represents a fishing reel,
In the super reach performance, if a fish is caught with the lure that is the specific image, a win occurs.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-5,
the effect execution means executes an effect in which the reel is automatically wound without the player operating the reel in a specific mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the high probability promotion effects A to C using the super hot effects with the super hot effects. Fig. 84 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process for executing the high probability promotion effect with the super hot effects, Fig. 85 is a flowchart of the variable effect start process for executing the high probability promotion effect with the super hot effects, Fig. 86 is a flowchart of the pseudo chance time effect occurrence determination process for executing the high probability promotion effect with the super hot effects, Fig. 87 is an explanatory diagram of the pseudo chance time effect occurrence determination table for executing the high probability promotion effect with the super hot effects, Fig. 88 is a flowchart of the variable effect during processing for executing the high probability promotion effect with the super hot effects, Fig. 89 is an explanatory diagram of the super hot effect execution determination table for executing the high probability promotion effect with the super hot effects, and Fig. 90 is a flowchart of the customer waiting during the effect for executing the high probability promotion effect with the super hot effects.

In addition, FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the sure-win promotion effect A by the super-hot effect, FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the sure-win promotion effect B by the super-hot effect, and FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the sure-win promotion effect C by the super-hot effect. Note that in FIGS. 91 to 93, the various movable parts and decorative members arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

Here, we will first explain the various flowcharts for executing the high probability promotion effect with the super hot effect, and then we will explain the high probability promotion effect with the super hot effect in order.

[Various flowcharts for executing the special effect with super hot effects]
Various flowcharts for executing the performance of the high probability promotion by the super hot performance will be explained. Here, the flowchart of the sub-side timer interruption process for executing the performance of the high probability promotion by the super hot performance will be explained, followed by the flowchart of the variable performance start process for executing the performance of the high probability promotion by the super hot performance, the flowchart of the variable performance during process for executing the performance of the high probability promotion by the super hot performance, and the flowchart of the customer waiting standby process for executing the performance of the high probability promotion by the super hot performance.

[Sub-side timer processing for executing the effect of the probability of promotion by the super-heat effect]
The sub-side timer processing for executing the high probability promotion effect by the super hot effect will be described with reference to Fig. 84. The sub-side timer interrupt processing for executing the high probability promotion effect by the super hot effect is a processing executed in place of the sub-side timer interrupt processing shown in Fig. 36. Here, the same processing executed in the sub-side timer interrupt processing shown in Fig. 36 is given the same step number, and detailed description is omitted. In Fig. 84, the processing (step SM4307) different from the sub-side timer interrupt processing shown in Fig. 36 is characterized by being surrounded by a chain line.

When the sub-side timer process for executing the high probability promotion effect by the super hot effect is started, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S4300). After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the variable effect process (step S4305). This variable effect process is a variable effect process for executing the high probability promotion effect by the super hot effect, and details will be described later. After the variable effect process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the customer waiting standby effect process (step SM4307). The customer waiting standby effect process is a customer waiting standby effect process for executing the high probability promotion effect by the super hot effect, and details will be described later. After the customer waiting standby effect process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the above-mentioned switch process (step S4310). After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S4315). After the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs the other processes described above (step S4320) and ends this process.

[Variable performance start process for executing the probability promotion performance by the intense performance]
Next, the variable performance start process for executing the variable performance promotion effect by the super hot performance will be described with reference to FIG. 85. The variable performance start process for executing the variable performance promotion effect by the super hot performance is performed as one process of the received command analysis process of step S4300 in the sub-side timer interrupt process of FIG. 84, and is a process executed in place of the performance start process of step S4460 in the received command analysis process shown in FIG. 37 (that is, the variable performance start process shown in FIG. 41). Here, the same process executed in the variable performance start process shown in FIG. 41 is given the same step number, and detailed description is omitted. In FIG. 85, the process (steps SM5002 to SM5004, steps SM5017 to SM5018) that is different from the variable performance start process shown in FIG. 41 is characterized by being surrounded by a chain line.

When the process to start the variable effect to execute the guaranteed bonus promotion effect with the super hot effect is started, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable start command (step S5000).

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not this is the first change during the high probability mode (step SM5002). As described above, the information set in the sub-RAM 94 in step S5000 includes game state information indicating the current game state, and pattern information indicating the pattern as the judgment result of the hit judgment process for special chart 1 or special chart 2. The "first change during the high probability mode" means that this is the first change since the special game state (jackpot game state) ended when a "V passing jackpot" was reached and the game state became a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state), and in the judgment in step SM5002, a judgment is made based on the information set in the sub-RAM 94 as to whether or not this change is the first change during the high probability mode.

If it is not the first change during the high probability mode (step SM5002: NO), the process proceeds to step S5010. If it is the first change during the high probability mode (step SM5002: YES), the process performs a pseudo chance time effect occurrence determination process (step SM5004) and proceeds to step S5010. The pseudo chance time effect occurrence determination process is a process for determining whether or not to pseudo-generate a chance time effect that changes the game state to a low probability high base state (low probability time reduction state) without informing the player that the game state will change to a high probability high base state (high probability time reduction state) even though the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time reduction state), and details will be described later.

In step S5010, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process to determine a core performance pattern. After determining the core performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process to determine a chance-up performance pattern (step S5015). After determining the chance-up performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process to determine a count performance pattern (step S5016).

After the count performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether the probability variable promotion performance start flag is ON or not (step SM5017). The probability variable promotion performance start flag is a flag that is set to ON when the execution of the super hot performance is started when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) in a state where a pseudo chance time performance is occurring, or in a customer waiting standby state (customer waiting standby state) from a state where a pseudo chance time performance is occurring, and is set to OFF when the execution of the super hot performance is completed, or when the super hot performance has not yet been executed. When the super hot performance is executed, the probability variable is promoted and the pseudo chance time ends. This informs the player that the game state is actually in a high probability high base state (high probability time shortening state) rather than a low probability high base state (low probability time shortening state) called chance time. The probability bonus promotion start flag is backed up information, and when the power is turned on (restored), the probability bonus promotion start flag is set to the state it was in immediately before the power was cut off and restored.

If the special rate promotion start flag is not ON (step SM5017: NO), proceed to step S5020; if the special rate promotion start flag is ON (step SM5017: YES), proceed to step SM5018.

In step SM5018, the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance prioritizes the progress of the super hot performance until the super hot performance ends, and also advances the change of the performance pattern. As a result, the state where the pseudo chance time performance is occurring becomes a waiting state (waiting for customers waiting state), and in the waiting for customers waiting state, the player operates the device to start the super hot performance, and in the state where the super hot performance is started, the player operates the handle 60 to enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, which starts the change, and the super hot performance suddenly switches from the super hot performance to a guaranteed bonus promotion performance (the content of the guaranteed bonus promotion suddenly appears) which tells the player that the game state is not a low probability high base state (low probability time shortening state) called chance time, but a high probability high base state (high probability time shortening state) (i.e., the super hot performance is abruptly cut off by the guaranteed bonus promotion performance at the start of the change), thereby preventing the super hot performance from being visible. In other words, once the super hot performance begins, the player can see the content of the super hot performance without interruption until the performance ends.

Following step SM5018, the process proceeds to step SM5020. In step S5020, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5018 above is realized (step S5020).

Next, the performance control microcontroller 91 sets the variable performance timer (step S5030) and ends this process.

[Processing for determining the occurrence of pseudo-chance time effects to execute the effects of the probability of promotion by the super-heat effects]
The pseudo chance time performance occurrence determination process (FIG. 85: step SM5004) for executing the probability variable promotion performance by the super hot performance will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The pseudo chance time performance occurrence determination process for executing the probability variable promotion performance by the super hot performance is a process for determining whether or not to pseudo-generate a chance time performance in which, even though the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state), it is not notified that the game state will become a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state), but rather the game state becomes a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortening state).

When the pseudo chance time effect occurrence judgment process for executing the high probability promotion effect by the super hot effect is started, the effect control microcomputer 91 makes a judgment by referring to the pseudo chance time effect occurrence judgment table (step SM5004a). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of a counter for pseudo chance time effect occurrence judgment random numbers to judge whether or not to generate a pseudo chance time effect in a low probability high base state (low probability time reduction state) even though the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time reduction state), and judges whether or not to generate a pseudo chance time effect by referring to the acquired random number value and a pseudo chance time effect occurrence judgment table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 93.

Here, the pseudo chance time performance occurrence judgment table will be described with reference to FIG. 87. The pseudo chance time performance occurrence judgment table is stored in the sub-ROM 93 together with other tables. The pseudo chance time performance occurrence judgment random number is updated by a random number counter set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94. The "random number for pseudo chance time performance occurrence judgment" is a random number used to judge whether or not to generate a pseudo chance time performance in a low probability high base state (low probability time shortening state) even though the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time shortening state) in the case of the first fluctuation during the probability variable, and takes a value in the range of "value 0 (zero)" to "value 127". The "random number for pseudo chance time performance occurrence judgment" is acquired when determining whether or not to generate a pseudo chance time performance in the first fluctuation during the probability variable. When a pseudo chance time effect is not to be generated (i.e. when a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state) is to be notified), the random number for determining the occurrence of a pseudo chance time effect is between "value 0 (zero)" and "value 63". When a pseudo chance time effect is to be generated, the random number for determining the occurrence of a pseudo chance time effect is between "value 64" and "value 127". The allocation rate of no occurrence of a pseudo chance time effect/occurrence of a pseudo chance time effect is 64/128 when it is determined that no pseudo chance time effect has occurred, and 64/128 when it is determined that a pseudo chance time effect has occurred.

Returning to FIG. 86, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a pseudo chance time performance has occurred (step SM5004b). If a pseudo chance time performance has not occurred (step SM5004b: NO), the process ends. If a pseudo chance time performance has occurred (step SM5004b: YES), the process proceeds to step SM5004c.

In step SM5004c, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets the pseudo chance time presentation occurrence flag to ON and ends this process. The pseudo chance time presentation occurrence flag is set to ON when the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state) but a pseudo chance time presentation is to be generated in a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortening state), and is set to OFF when a pseudo chance time presentation is not to be generated (i.e., when an announcement is made that the game state will be a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state)) or when a pseudo chance time presentation has occurred and ended.

The pseudo chance time effect occurrence flag remains set to ON while the pseudo chance time effect is being executed, and is set to OFF when the pseudo chance time effect ends. Note that the pseudo chance time effect occurrence flag is backed up information, and when the power is turned on (when power is restored), the state of the pseudo chance time effect occurrence flag immediately before the power was cut off is set and restored.

[Processing during variable performance to execute the performance of the guaranteed promotion by the super hot performance]
The variable performance process for executing the high probability promotion performance by the super hot performance will be described with reference to Fig. 88. The variable performance process for executing the high probability promotion performance by the super hot performance is a process executed in place of the variable performance process shown in Fig. 44. Here, the same step numbers are given to the same processes executed in the variable performance process shown in Fig. 44, and detailed explanations are omitted. In Fig. 88, the processes (steps SM4701a to SM4701r) that differ from the variable performance process shown in Fig. 44 are characterized by being surrounded by a chain line.

When the variable performance processing for executing the guaranteed bonus promotion performance by the super hot performance is started, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not a variable performance is in progress can be judged, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is at zero. If a variable performance is not in progress (step S4701: NO), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if a variable performance is in progress (step S4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a pseudo chance time performance is in progress (step SM4701a). This judgment is made by judging whether or not the pseudo chance time performance occurrence flag is ON. As described above, the pseudo chance time effect occurrence flag is set to ON when the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state) but a pseudo chance time effect is generated that is in a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortened state), whereas it is set to OFF when a pseudo chance time effect is not generated (i.e., when an announcement is made that the game state will be in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state)) or when a pseudo chance time effect has occurred and ended.

If the pseudo chance time effect is not to be generated (step SM4701a: NO), the process proceeds to step S4702. On the other hand, if the pseudo chance time effect is to be generated (step SM4701a: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4701b.

In step SM4701b, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the probability bonus promotion performance execution flag is OFF. The probability bonus promotion performance execution flag is set ON when the player has already executed the super hot performance by operating the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) in a state where a pseudo chance time performance is occurring, or in a customer waiting standby state (customer waiting standby state) from a state where a pseudo chance time performance is occurring, and is set OFF when the player has not yet operated the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) and has not yet executed the super hot performance.

If the special bonus promotion effect execution flag is not OFF (step SM4701b: NO), the process proceeds to step S4702. If the special bonus promotion effect execution flag is OFF (step SM4701b: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4701c.

In step SM4701c, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the probability bonus promotion performance start flag is ON. As described above, the probability bonus promotion performance start flag is set ON when the execution of the super hot performance starts when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) while the pseudo chance time performance is occurring or while the pseudo chance time performance is occurring and the waiting state for customers (waiting for customers waiting state) is in progress, and is set OFF when the execution of the super hot performance ends or when the super hot performance has not yet been executed.

If the probability bonus promotion start flag is not ON (step SM4701c: NO), the process proceeds to step SM4701d. If the probability bonus promotion start flag is ON (step SM4701c: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4701k.

In step SM4701d, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation started. This determination can be made based on the fluctuation performance timer. The predetermined period is set to be the period from the start of the fluctuation to 3 seconds before the fluctuation ends.

If a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation started (step SM4701d: YES), the process proceeds to step S4702. If a predetermined period of time has not passed since the fluctuation started (step SM4701d: NO), the process proceeds to step SM4701e.

In step SM4701e, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the player has operated a device (the performance button 63 or the sword member 65). If the player has not operated a device (the performance button 63 or the sword member 65) (step SM4701e: NO), the process proceeds to step S4702. On the other hand, if the player has operated a device (the performance button 63 or the sword member 65) (step SM4701e: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4701f.

In step SM4701f, the performance control microcomputer 91 makes a judgment by referring to the super hot performance execution judgment table. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the random number for determining the sure-change promotion performance, and judges whether or not the super hot performance is to be executed by referring to the acquired random number value and the super hot performance execution judgment table stored in the sub-ROM 93.

The super hot performance execution judgment table will now be described with reference to FIG. 89. The super hot performance execution judgment table is stored in the sub-ROM 93 together with other tables. The super hot performance execution judgment table is composed of the timing of device operation, whether or not a super hot performance is executed, and the acquired random number (any of 0 to 127) for determining the probability of a promotion to high probability performance, and is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not a super hot performance is executed based on the timing of device operation and the acquired random number for determining the probability of a promotion to high probability performance. The random number for determining the probability of a promotion to high probability performance is updated by a random number counter set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94. The "random number for determining the probability of a promotion to high probability performance" is a random number used to determine the execution of a super hot performance, and takes a value in the range of "value 0 (zero)" to "value 127". The "random number for determining the probability of a promotion to high probability performance" is acquired when determining the execution of a super hot performance.

When the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) is operated during the device operation timing during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the specified period (as described above, the period from the start of the fluctuation to 3 seconds before the end of the fluctuation), if the random number for determining the high probability promotion effect is between "value 0 (zero)" and "value 100", it is determined that the super hot effect will not be executed, whereas if the random number for determining the high probability promotion effect is between "value 101" and "value 127", it is determined that the super hot effect will be executed. Note that when the device operation timing is during the pseudo chance time effect and the device is operated during the specified period from the start of the fluctuation, the allocation rate of non-execution/execution of the super hot effect is 101/128 when it is determined that the super hot effect will not be executed, and 27/128 when it is determined that the super hot effect will be executed.

When the device is operated (effect button 63 or sword member 65) as the timing of device operation, if the random number for determining the high probability promotion effect is between "value 0 (zero)" and "value 63", it is determined that the super hot effect will not be executed, whereas if the random number for determining the high probability promotion effect is between "value 64" and "value 127", it is determined that the super hot effect will be executed. Note that when the device is operated as the timing of device operation, if the device is operated from the state where the pseudo chance time effect is generated to the state where it is waiting for customers (waiting for customers), the allocation rate of non-execution/execution of the super hot effect is 64/128 when it is determined that the super hot effect will not be executed, and 64/128 when it is determined that the super hot effect will be executed.

Returning to FIG. 88, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a super hot performance is to be executed (step SM4701g). If a super hot performance is not to be executed (step SM4701g: NO), the process proceeds to step S4702. If a super hot performance is to be executed (step SM4701g: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4701h.

In step SM4701h, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a command for a super hot performance that sets the movable body, device, sound, and display screen to a special mode. In the special mode, the movable board body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) are set to a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the performance button 63 and sword member 65, which are devices, are set to a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as a sound, and among the images displayed on the display screen, specific images (for example, an image of "chance time", an image of a performance pattern, an image showing the number of remaining time reductions, an image of a reserved icon, an image of a variable icon, and an image of a variable display position) are set to a display mode in which they vibrate, and an effect image (effect image) in which a specific image vibrates is displayed. By setting it to the special mode, a super hot performance will be started. The execution time from the start to the end of this super hot effect is set to 2800 milliseconds (2.8 seconds), which is shorter than the shortest fluctuation time (4000 milliseconds (4 seconds)) when the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 is 3 to 4. As described above, the determination of whether the device is operated from the start of the fluctuation to 3 seconds before the end of the fluctuation (the determination in the above-mentioned step SM4071d and the determination in the above-mentioned step SM4071e) takes into account the execution time from the start to the end of the super hot effect.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the probability bonus promotion performance start flag to ON (step SM4701i) and proceeds to step S4702. Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the probability bonus promotion performance start flag to ON to start the execution of the super hot performance when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) while the pseudo chance time performance is occurring, or while the pseudo chance time performance has been occurring and the player is in a customer waiting standby state (customer waiting standby state).

On the other hand, in step SM4701c, if the guaranteed bonus promotion effect start flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 proceeds to step SM4701k and determines whether it is time to end the super hot effect. In this determination, the execution time from the start to the end of the super hot effect (the above-mentioned 2800 milliseconds (2.8 seconds)) can be determined based on the variable effect timer.

If it is not time to end the super hot effect (step SM4701k: NO), the process ends. If it is time to end the super hot effect (step SM4701k: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4701m.

In step SM4701m, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a command for canceling the super hot performance, which cancels the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen. By canceling the special mode, the vibration mode in which the movable board body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), which are movable bodies, vibrate, is canceled, the vibration mode in which the performance button 63 and the sword member 65, which are devices, vibrate, the vibrating sound effect (effect sound) stops flowing from the speaker 67 as sound, the display mode in which specific images (for example, the image of "chance time", the image of the performance pattern, the image showing the number of remaining time reductions, the image of the reserved icon, the image of the variable icon, and the image of the variable display position) among the images displayed on the display screen vibrate is canceled, and the effect image (effect image) in which the specific image vibrates is hidden (disappears from the display screen). By canceling the special mode, the super hot performance ends.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the probability bonus promotion performance start flag to OFF (step SM4701n). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the probability bonus promotion performance start flag to OFF as the execution of the super hot performance has ended.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 ends the pseudo chance time performance, sets a command for the high probability background to indicate (communicate) that the state is now in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state) (step SM4701p), and sets the high probability promotion performance execution flag to ON (step SM4701q). In step SM4701q, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the high probability promotion performance execution flag to ON, assuming that the player has already executed the super hot performance by operating the device (performance button 63 or sword component 65) while the pseudo chance time performance is occurring, or while the pseudo chance time performance has been occurring and is now in a customer waiting standby state (customer waiting standby state).

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the pseudo chance time performance occurrence flag to OFF (step SM4701r) and proceeds to step S4702. As described above, the pseudo chance time performance occurrence flag is set to ON when the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state) but a pseudo chance time performance is to be generated in a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortening state), whereas it is set to OFF when a pseudo chance time performance is not to be generated (i.e., when an announcement is made that the game state will be a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state)) or when a pseudo chance time performance has occurred and ended. In step SM4701r, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the pseudo chance time performance occurrence flag to OFF, assuming that the pseudo chance time performance has ended.

Following step SM4701i or step SM4701q, in step S4702, it is determined whether it is time to set a pre-variation end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94.

If it is not the time to set a pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the time to set a pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705), and this process ends.

[Processing during customer waiting for a special performance to execute a special performance with a super hot performance]
The customer waiting standby performance process (FIG. 84: step SM4307) for executing the high probability promotion performance by the super hot performance will be described with reference to FIG. 90. When the customer waiting standby performance process for executing the high probability promotion performance by the super hot performance is started, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is in standby or not (step SM4307a). During standby, in the customer waiting standby state (customer waiting standby state), the standby screen and the stop screen are alternately switched repeatedly. The standby screen is a demo screen for customer waiting displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop screen is a screen in which the performance pattern is stopped and displayed in a state where there are no reserved balls (a state where there are no reserved icons stored) and the performance pattern variation performance (variation display) has already ended.

If the device is not in standby mode (step SM4307a: NO), the process ends. If the device is in standby mode (step SM4307a: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4307b.

In step SM4307b, the presentation control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a pseudo chance time presentation is occurring. This judgement is made based on whether or not the pseudo chance time presentation occurrence flag is ON. As described above, the pseudo chance time presentation occurrence flag is set ON when the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state) but a pseudo chance time presentation in a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortening state) is to be generated, whereas it is set OFF when a pseudo chance time presentation is not to be generated (i.e., when an announcement is made that the game state will be a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state)) or when a pseudo chance time presentation has occurred and ended.

If the pseudo chance time effect is not to be generated (step SM4307b: NO), the process ends. On the other hand, if the pseudo chance time effect is to be generated (step SM4307b: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4307c.

In step SM4307c, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the probability bonus promotion performance execution flag is OFF. As described above, the probability bonus promotion performance execution flag is set ON when the player has already executed the super hot performance by operating the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) in a state where a pseudo chance time performance is occurring, or in a customer waiting standby state (customer waiting standby state) from a state where a pseudo chance time performance is occurring, and is set OFF when the player has not yet operated the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) and has not yet executed the super hot performance.

If the special rate promotion effect execution flag is not OFF (step SM4307c: NO), this process ends, whereas if the special rate promotion effect execution flag is OFF (step SM4307c: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4307d.

In step SM4307d, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the probability bonus promotion performance start flag is ON. As described above, the probability bonus promotion performance start flag is set ON when the execution of the super hot performance starts when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) while the pseudo chance time performance is occurring or while the pseudo chance time performance is in a waiting state (waiting for customers waiting state) and is set OFF when the execution of the super hot performance ends or when the super hot performance has not yet been executed.

If the special rate promotion start flag is not ON (step SM4307d: NO), the process proceeds to step SM4307e. If the special rate promotion start flag is ON (step SM4307d: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4307k.

In step SM4307e, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the player has operated a device (the effect button 63 or the sword member 65). If the player has not operated a device (the effect button 63 or the sword member 65) (step SM4307e: NO), the process ends. On the other hand, if the player has operated a device (the effect button 63 or the sword member 65) (step SM4307e: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4307f.

In step SM4701f, the performance control microcomputer 91 makes a judgment by referring to the super hot performance execution judgment table shown in FIG. 89 described above. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the random number for determining the sure-change promotion performance, and judges whether or not to execute the super hot performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the super hot performance execution judgment table shown in FIG. 89 described above stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a super hot performance is to be executed (step SM4307g). If a super hot performance is not to be executed (step SM4307g: NO), the process ends. On the other hand, if a super hot performance is to be executed (step SM4307g: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4307h.

In step SM4307h, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a command for a super hot performance that sets the movable body, device, sound, and display screen to a special mode. The processing in this step SM4307h is almost identical to the processing in step SM4701h in the variable performance processing in FIG. 88 described above (the difference is that there is no variable icon). In the special mode, as described above, the movable board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, the devices such as the performance button 63 and the sword member 65 are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as sound, and certain images (for example, the "chance time" image, the performance pattern image, the image showing the number of remaining time reductions, the image of the reserved icon if there is one, and the image of the variable display position) among the images displayed on the display screen are displayed in a vibrating display mode, and an effect image (effect image) in which certain images vibrate is displayed. By switching to the special mode, a super hot performance will be started.

Here, in the processing during the customer waiting standby effect, which is the main processing, the execution time from the start to the end of this super hot effect is set to 2800 milliseconds (2.8 seconds), which is shorter than the shortest fluctuation time (10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds)) when the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 20 is 1 to 2 balls. This is because when the player starts to operate the handle 60 in the customer waiting standby state, the launch strength of the game ball is small and there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the first starting port 20. Of course, even when the player starts to operate the handle 60, the launch strength of the game ball may be large and the game ball may enter the second starting port 21. The shortest change time (4000 milliseconds (4 seconds)) occurs when the number of reserved balls for the second starting port 21 is 3 to 4 balls, so the execution time from when the super hot effect starts to when it ends is set to 2800 milliseconds (2.8 seconds). Therefore, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 while the machine is waiting for customers and a change in the effect pattern (changing display) begins, the super hot effect can be sure to end before the change in the effect pattern (changing display) ends.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the probability bonus promotion performance start flag to ON (step SM4307i) and ends this process. Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the probability bonus promotion performance start flag to ON as the start of the execution of the super hot performance when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) in the customer waiting standby state (customer waiting standby state) from the state where the pseudo chance time performance is occurring. Note that when the super hot performance starts to be executed in the customer waiting standby state (customer waiting standby state), the customer waiting standby super hot performance timer is set to the execution time from the start to the end of the super hot performance (the above-mentioned 2800 milliseconds (2.8 seconds)), and a value of 1 is subtracted from the customer waiting standby super hot performance timer every time 1 millisecond passes.

On the other hand, in step SM4307d, if the probability bonus promotion effect start flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 proceeds to step SM4307k and determines whether it is time to end the super hot effect. In this determination, the execution time from the start to the end of the super hot effect (the above-mentioned 2800 milliseconds (2.8 seconds)) can be determined by whether the super hot effect timer during customer waiting is at zero.

If it is not time to end the super hot effect (step SM4307k: NO), the process ends. If it is time to end the super hot effect (step SM4307k: YES), the process proceeds to step SM4701m.

In step SM4307m, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a command to cancel the super hot performance, which cancels the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen. The processing in this step SM4307m is almost identical to the processing in step SM4701m in the variable performance processing in FIG. 88 described above (the difference is that there is no variable icon). When the special mode is released, as described above, the vibration mode in which the movable board (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable (frame movable role 69) vibrate is released, the vibration mode in which the performance button 63 and the sword member 65 vibrate is released, the sound effect (effect sound) of the vibrating sound is no longer emitted from the speaker 67, the display mode in which certain images (for example, the image of "Chance Time", the image of the performance pattern, the image showing the number of remaining time reductions, the image of the reserved icon if there is one, and the image of the variable display position) among the images displayed on the display screen are vibrated is released, and the effect image (effect image) in which certain images vibrate is hidden (disappears from the display screen). When the special mode is released, the super hot performance ends.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the probability bonus promotion performance start flag to OFF (step SM4307n). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the probability bonus promotion performance start flag to OFF as the execution of the super hot performance has ended.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 ends the pseudo chance time performance, sets a command for the high probability background to indicate (communicate) that the state is now in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state) (step SM4307p), and sets the high probability promotion performance execution flag to ON (step SM4307q). In step SM4307q, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the high probability promotion performance execution flag to ON, assuming that the player has already executed the super hot performance by operating the device (performance button 63 or sword component 65) during the customer waiting standby state (customer waiting standby state) from the state in which the pseudo chance time performance is occurring.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the pseudo chance time performance occurrence flag to OFF (step SM4307r) and ends this process. As described above, the pseudo chance time performance occurrence flag is set to ON when the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state) but a pseudo chance time performance is to be generated in a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortening state), whereas it is set to OFF when a pseudo chance time performance is not to be generated (i.e., when an announcement is made that the game state will be a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state)) or when a pseudo chance time performance has occurred and ended. In step SM4307r, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the pseudo chance time performance occurrence flag to OFF, assuming that the pseudo chance time performance has ended.

[Super hot effects that will boost your chances of success]
Next, the probability change promotion performance by the super hot performance will be described with reference to Fig. 91 to Fig. 93. In the probability change promotion performance by the super hot performance, even though the game state after the "V passing scheduled big win" is a high probability high base state (high probability time shortening state) after the special game state (big win game state) is ended, the high probability high base state (high probability time shortening state) is not notified, and the chance time performance is simulated to a low probability high base state (low probability time shortening state). When the player operates the handle 60 and plays a game by hitting the right side, when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65), the movable body, the device, the sound, the display, the display, the sound ... When the super hot performance in which the display screen is in a special mode starts and ends, the game state is notified that the game is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state), or when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) during the pseudo chance time performance, when all reserved balls are consumed and a predetermined period has passed, or when the player leaves the seat for a break and sits down again, and the standby screen or the stopped screen is displayed, the game state is notified that the game is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the high probability promotion performance by the super hot performance is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, as a sure-win promotion effect A due to the super hot effect, in the pseudo chance time effect, when the player operates the handle 60 and plays by hitting the right side to progress through the game, the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65), which triggers the start of a super hot effect in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are put into a special mode, and when it ends, an example of an effect will be described in which it is notified that the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state).

In addition, as a sure-win promotion effect B due to the super hot effect, during the pseudo chance time effect, when the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) in the standby state where the standby screen or the stopped screen appears after all reserved balls have been consumed and a predetermined period has passed, or when the player leaves the seat for a break and then sits down again, an example of an effect will be described in which, as a trigger, a super hot effect will start in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and when it ends, the player is notified that the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state).

As an example of a sure-win promotion effect C due to a super hot effect, during a pseudo chance time effect, when all reserved balls have been consumed and a predetermined period has passed, or when the player leaves his/her seat for a break and then sits down again, and the standby screen or the stopped screen appears, the player operates the handle 60 to start playing by hitting the right side, and when the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65), this triggers the start of a super hot effect in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and before the start and end of the super hot effect, the game ball enters the second start hole 21, starting a variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern, and when the super hot effect ends, an example of an effect is described in which it is notified that the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state).

Here, we will first explain the performance patterns, and then explain in order the special rate promotion performance A due to the super hot performance, the special rate promotion performance B due to the super hot performance, and the special rate promotion performance C due to the super hot performance.

[Performance design]
First, a brief description of the performance symbols will be given. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left performance symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center performance symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right performance symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started. In the variable performance (variable display) of a plurality of performance symbols, the performance symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → ...

When the performance pattern change (changing display) starts, the stopped performance pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) toward the top in a floating display mode of a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, after the stopped display of the performance pattern is released and the performance pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually speeds up from a low speed toward the bottom, changing from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the performance pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent performance pattern that is changing at high speed. The performance pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When the performance pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it is displayed as a display mode in which it moves slowly in small vertical movements.

To briefly explain the variable icons and reserved icons, the variable icons 9C corresponding to the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R currently being changed as the first special chart reserved is consumed, are displayed (placed) in the variable display position (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area to the left of the variable display position, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special chart reserved, and in the area to the right of the variable display position, a second reserved display area is provided as the second special chart reserved. In the first reserved display area, four reserved icons 9A can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The reserved icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A second closest to the variable icon 9C is called the second reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A third closest to the variable icon 9C is called the third reserved icon 9A, and the reserved icon 9A furthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth reserved icon 9A. In the second hold display area, four hold icons 9B can be displayed in a straight line, allowing a maximum of four hold icons 9B to be stored. The hold icon 9B closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B second closest to the variable icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B third closest to the variable icon 9C is called the third hold icon 9B, and the hold icon 9B farthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth hold icon 9B.

When the performance pattern change (changing display) starts, the changing performance music is output (starts playing) from the speaker 67, and when the performance pattern is stopped and displayed, the output of the changing performance music from the speaker 67 is stopped. In other words, each time the performance pattern change (changing display) starts, the changing performance music is started from the beginning.

[Super hot effects that will boost your chances of success A]
Next, the probability variable promotion performance A by the super hot performance will be described with reference to Fig. 91. The probability variable promotion performance A by the super hot performance is an example of a performance in which, when a player operates the handle 60 in a pseudo chance time performance and plays a game by hitting the right hand, the player operates a device (performance button 63 or sword member 65), which triggers the start of a super hot performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and when the performance ends, it is notified that the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time shortening state).

Here, five games have been played by right-hand hitting (five winning/losing results have already been obtained by the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern). At this time, only one reserved icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 91(A), since the pseudo chance time performance is in progress, a chance time background image HG1 in the chance time performance in which the low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state) is displayed on the display screen 7a. On the upper left side of the display screen 7a, a chance time image YG1 called "Chance Time" is displayed, which conveys that although the actual state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-saving state), it is a chance time performance in which the low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state) is displayed. On the lower left side of the display screen 7a, since five games have already been played, a remaining time-saving number image NMG with "remaining: 95 times" indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed. On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a right-hand hitting image MYG with "Right Hit" written in a right arrow image is displayed, so that a game is played by right-hand hitting. After five games have been played, the left performance symbol 8L is displayed as the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is displayed as the number "2", and the center performance symbol 8C is displayed as the number "3", and the symbols do not line up, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C in the variable display position is no longer displayed (it has disappeared from the display screen 7a).

The first hold icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes variable icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the variable display of the performance pattern starts. As a result, the remaining time-saving number image NMG is updated to show "Remaining: 94 times", and no hold icons are stored.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91(C), while the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are changing (changing display), the player operates the performance button 63. In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a super hot performance during the changing performance process in FIG. 88. Note that even if the sword component 65 is operated instead of the performance button 63, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a super hot performance during the changing performance process in FIG. 88.

When the super hot performance is executed, the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode as shown in Fig. 91 (D) and (E). The movable body, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15), the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, the device, the performance button 63 and the sword member 65 are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and as a sound, a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) flows from the speaker 67, and among the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the specific images, the chance time image YG1, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, the right performance pattern 8R, the remaining time reduction number image NMG, the variable icon 9C, and the image of the variable display position are displayed in a vibrating display mode, and an effect image (effect image) BEG that vibrates for the specific image is displayed. In contrast, the right hit image MYG and chance time background image HG1 do not go into special mode, and the display state is maintained without being affected by the super hot effect, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all for the right hit image MYG and chance time background image HG1.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shape of each specific image and is formed to surround each specific shape, and in a trembling display mode, the jagged portion propagates like a wave that vibrates in small increments. Note that since the variable icon 9C and the image at the variable table position are in a close positional relationship, the variable icon 9C and the image at the variable table position are formed to be surrounded by a single effect image BEG.

When the super hot performance ends, as shown in FIG. 91(F), the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, the movable body, device, sound, and display screen return to their original state (the state in FIG. 91(C)), and the background image is switched from the chance time background image HG1 to the probability change background image HG2 (the probability change background image HG2 is a different background image from the chance time background image HG1) as a background image indicating that the game is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state), and the chance time image YG1 is switched to the probability change in progress image YG2 indicating that the game state "in probability change" is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state). In other words, when the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, the probability change background image HG2 and probability change in progress image YG2 suddenly appear, which is a performance that has been promoted from the chance time performance to probability change.

As a result, if the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) at any time during the chance time effect during the change effect (changing display) of the effect pattern, the player can realize an effect as if they have been promoted from a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortened state) to a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state) due to the occurrence of a probability promotion effect (an effect in which the probability promotion background image HG2 and the probability promotion image YG2 suddenly appear). This type of probability promotion effect with an extremely exciting effect can surprise the player. Furthermore, the probability promotion effect with an extremely exciting effect can increase their desire to play.

In addition, the timing at which the super hot effect occurs is not fixed in advance, but the player can change the timing at which the super hot effect occurs by operating the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) at a timing of their choice, so the player can have fun discovering the pattern for themselves, that is, if they operate the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) at this timing, there is a possibility that the super hot effect will occur.

After that, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern and are displayed as stopped, and a loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). After that, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21 and the first reserved icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern begins, and if the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern and are displayed as stopped, a loss is confirmed, whereas if the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R line up with the same pattern and are displayed as stopped, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which the player is given a profit is started.

On the other hand, when the super hot effect is not executed, as shown in Fig. 91 (G) to (I), the movable body, device, sound, and display screen do not go into the special mode, the special mode promotion effect (the effect in which the special mode background image HG2 and the special mode image YG2 suddenly appear) does not occur, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R do not match the same pattern, are displayed as stopped, and a miss is confirmed. As a result, the variable icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). After that, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21 and the first reserved icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect of the effect pattern (variable display) starts, and the player has the opportunity to operate the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) at any time during the variable effect of the effect pattern (variable display) to generate the super hot effect.

In this way, in the special-mode-driven guaranteed bonus promotion effect A, following the first surprise of the special mode being activated and the start of the guaranteed bonus effect, the player is given a second surprise of the chance time effect being promoted to guaranteed bonus (guaranteed bonus promotion effect) by switching from the chance time background image HG1 to the guaranteed bonus background image HG2, allowing the player to be surprised in multiple stages.

In the highly anticipated promotion performance A due to the super hot performance, the movable bodies such as the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 were in their respective retreated positions. However, the movable bodies are activated during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and may enter a special mode while activated. By entering the special mode, the movable bodies, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate. Compared to when they are not activated, the movable bodies suggest to the player that there is a higher chance of winning, or suggest to the player that they will be promoted to a highly anticipated promotion. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the movable bodies.

[Super hot effects for guaranteed promotion B]
Next, the probability change promotion performance B by the super hot performance will be described with reference to Fig. 92. The probability change promotion performance B by the super hot performance is a performance example in which, when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65) during the pseudo chance time performance when all reserved balls are consumed and a predetermined period has passed, or when the player leaves the seat for a break and sits down again, and the standby screen or the stopped screen is displayed, the super hot performance is started with the movable body, device, sound, and display screen in a special mode, and when it ends, the player is informed that the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time shortening state).

Here, five games have been played by hitting the right hand (five winning/losing results have already been obtained by the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern). At this time, no reserved icons are stored. As shown in FIG. 92(A), since the pseudo chance time performance is in progress, a chance time background image HG1 in the chance time performance in which the low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state) is displayed on the display screen 7a. On the upper left side of the display screen 7a, a chance time image YG1 called "Chance Time" is displayed, which conveys that although the actual situation is a high probability high base state (high probability time-saving state), it is a chance time performance in which the low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state) is displayed. On the lower left side of the display screen 7a, since five games have already been played, a remaining time-saving number image NMG with "remaining: 95 times" indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed. On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a right-hit image MYG with "Right hit" written in a right arrow image is displayed, so that a game is played by hitting the right hand. After five games have been played, the left performance symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped number "2", and the center performance symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped number "3", and the symbols do not line up, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C at the variable display position is no longer displayed (it has disappeared from the display screen 7a).

In this state, if all reserved balls are consumed and a predetermined period of time has passed, or if the player leaves his/her seat for a break and then sits back down, as shown in FIG. 92 (B1), the state where this pseudo chance time effect is occurring switches to a standby screen in which the player is in a standby state (waiting for customers standby state), and the player enters standby mode. On the standby screen, a video in which the ally character CRA, the character image of FIG. 92 (B1), appears starts to play and ends. When the standby screen ends, as shown in FIG. 92 (B2), the screen switches to a stopped screen in the same state as the state in FIG. 92 (A). When the predetermined period of time has passed in the state of FIG. 92 (B2), a video in which the ally character CRA, the character image of FIG. 92 (B1), appears starts to play again, and when the playback ends, the state returns to that of FIG. 92 (B2).

In this way, during standby, the standby screen in which a video in which the ally character CRA, which is the character image of FIG. 92 (B1), appears is played back, and the stopped screen in the state of FIG. 92 (B2), is repeatedly displayed (switched). In other words, during standby, the following order is repeatedly displayed: video in which the ally character CRA, which is the character image of FIG. 92 (B1), appears (standby screen) → state (stop screen) of FIG. 92 (B2) → video in which the ally character CRA, which is the character image of FIG. 92 (B1), appears → state (stop screen) of FIG. 92 (B2) → ....

When the screen switches from the stopped screen in the state of Figure 92 (A) (Figure 92 (B2)) to the waiting screen in which the video in Figure 92 (B1) appears is played, the chance time background image HG1 switches to the background image for the video on the waiting screen, which is the background image for the video in the waiting screen, HG3 for the standby screen video (the background image for the standby screen video HG3 is a different background image from the chance time background image HG1), and the ally character CRA appears large on the display screen 7a, and, except for the right hit image MYG, the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R which are displayed in a stopped state are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the chance time image YG1, remaining time reduction count image NMG, and variable display position images are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a). In contrast, when switching from the video in which the ally character CRA appears in Figure 92 (B1) to the state in Figure 92 (B2), the background image HG3 for the standby screen video switches to the chance time background image HG1, the ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R that were displayed in a stopped state are redisplayed, and the chance time image YG1, remaining time reduction count image NMG, and variable display position image are redisplayed.

During the animation in which the ally character CRA appears in FIG. 92 (B1), the player operates the effect button 63 as shown in FIG. 92 (C1). In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a super hot effect in the customer waiting standby effect processing in FIG. 90. Note that even if the sword component 65 is operated instead of the effect button 63, a determination is still made as to whether or not to execute a super hot effect in the customer waiting standby effect processing in FIG. 90.

When the super hot effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 92 (D1), the screen returns to the stopped screen and becomes the same state as FIG. 92 (A), the background image HG3 for the standby screen animation is switched to the chance time background image HG1, the ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R that were displayed in a stopped state are redisplayed, and the chance time image YG1, the remaining time reduction count image NMG, and the image of the variable display position are redisplayed.

After that, as shown in Fig. 92 (D2) and (E), the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode. The movable body, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15), the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, the devices, the performance button 63 and the sword member 65, are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and as a sound, a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67, and among the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the specific images, the chance time image YG1, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, the right performance pattern 8R, the remaining time reduction count image NMG, and the image of the variable display position are displayed in a vibrating display mode, and an effect image (effect image) BEG that vibrates for the specific image is displayed. In contrast, the right hit image MYG and chance time background image HG1 do not go into special mode, and the display state is maintained without being affected by the super hot effect, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all for the right hit image MYG and chance time background image HG1.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shape of each specific image and is formed to surround each specific shape, and in the vibrating display mode, the jagged part propagates like a wave that vibrates in small waves.

When the super hot performance ends, as shown in FIG. 92(F), the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, and the movable body, device, sound, and display screen return to their original state (the state of FIG. 92(D1) (FIG. 92(A))), and the background image is switched from the chance time background image HG1 to the probability change background image HG2 (the probability change background image HG2 is a different background image from the chance time background image HG1 and the background image HG3 for the waiting screen video) as a background image indicating that the state is a high probability high base state (high probability time reduction state), and the chance time image YG1 is switched to the probability change in progress image YG2 indicating that the game state of "probability change in progress" is a high probability high base state (high probability time reduction state). In other words, when the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, the probability change background image HG2 and probability change in progress image YG2 suddenly appear, which is a performance that has been promoted from the chance time performance to probability change.

As a result, when the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword component 65) at any time on the waiting screen where the video of the ally character CRA appearing in Figure 92 (B1) is played, the player can realize an effect as if the player has been promoted from a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortened state) to a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state) due to the generated high probability promotion effect (an effect in which the high probability background image HG2 and the high probability promotion image YG2 suddenly appear). This type of high probability promotion effect with an extremely exciting effect can surprise the player. Furthermore, the high probability promotion effect with an extremely exciting effect can increase the player's desire to play.

In addition, the timing at which the super hot effect occurs is not fixed in advance to the animation effect in which the ally character CRA appears in Figure 92 (B1), but the player can change the timing at which the super hot effect occurs by operating the device (effect button 63 or sword component 65) at a timing of their choice, so the player can have fun discovering for themselves the pattern that if they operate the device (effect button 63 or sword component 65) at this timing, there is a possibility that the super hot effect will occur.

After that, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern and are displayed as stopped, and a loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). After that, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21 and the first reserved icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern begins, and if the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern and are displayed as stopped, a loss is confirmed, whereas if the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R line up with the same pattern and are displayed as stopped, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which the player is given a profit is started.

Meanwhile, in the stopped screen in the state of FIG. 92 (B2), the player operates the effect button 63 as shown in FIG. 92 (C2). In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a super hot effect in the customer waiting standby effect processing of FIG. 90. Note that even if the sword component 65 is operated instead of the effect button 63, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a super hot effect in the customer waiting standby effect processing of FIG. 90.

When the super hot performance is executed, the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode as shown in Fig. 92 (D2) and (E). The movable body, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15), the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, the device, the performance button 63 and the sword member 65 are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and as a sound, a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) flows from the speaker 67, and among the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the specific images, the chance time image YG1, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, the right performance pattern 8R, the remaining time reduction number image NMG, and the image of the variable display position are displayed in a vibrating display mode, and an effect image (effect image) BEG that vibrates for the specific image is displayed. In contrast, the right hit image MYG and chance time background image HG1 do not go into special mode, and the display state is maintained without being affected by the super hot effect, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all for the right hit image MYG and chance time background image HG1.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shape of each specific image and is formed to surround each specific shape, and in the vibrating display mode, the jagged part propagates like a wave that vibrates in small waves.

When the super hot performance ends, as shown in Figure 92 (F), the special modes of the movable body, device, sound and display screen are released, the movable body, device, sound and display screen return to their original state (the state of Figure 92 (D1) (Figure 92 (A))), and the background image changes from the chance time background image HG1 to the special probability background image HG2, and also changes from the chance time image YG1 to the special probability image YG2 indicating that the special probability is in progress, which means "in special probability." In other words, when the special modes of the movable body, device, sound and display screen are released, the special probability background image HG2 and special probability image YG2 suddenly appear, which is a performance that has been upgraded from the chance time performance to special probability.

As a result, when the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) at any time on the stopped screen where the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are displayed in the frozen state shown in Figure 92 (B2), the player can realize an effect as if the player has been promoted from a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortened state) to a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state) due to the generated probability promotion effect (an effect in which the probability promotion background image HG2 and the probability promotion image YG2 suddenly appear). This type of probability promotion effect with an extremely exciting effect can surprise the player. Furthermore, the probability promotion effect with an extremely exciting effect can increase the player's desire to play.

In addition, the timing at which the super hot effect occurs is not fixed to the amount of time that has elapsed since the stopped screen in which the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in the state shown in Figure 92 (B2) is displayed in advance, but the player can change the timing at which the super hot effect occurs by operating the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) at a timing of their choice, so the player can have fun discovering the pattern for themselves that if they operate the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) at this timing, there is a possibility that the super hot effect will occur.

After that, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern and are displayed as stopped, and a loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). After that, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21 and the first reserved icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern begins, and if the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern and are displayed as stopped, a loss is confirmed, whereas if the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R line up with the same pattern and are displayed as stopped, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In this way, in the highly anticipated special effect B, following the first surprise of the special mode being activated and the highly anticipated effect starting, the player is given a second surprise of the chance time effect being upgraded to a highly anticipated special effect (high probability effect) by switching from the chance time background image HG1 to the high probability effect background image HG2, allowing the player to be surprised in multiple stages.

In the highly anticipated promotion performance B due to the super hot performance, the movable bodies such as the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 were in their respective retreated positions. However, the movable bodies are activated during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and may enter a special mode while activated. By entering the special mode, the movable bodies, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate. The movable bodies suggest to the player that there is a higher chance of winning compared to when they are not activated, and suggest to the player that they will be promoted to a highly anticipated promotion. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the movable bodies.

[Super hot effects for guaranteed promotion C]
Next, the probability change promotion performance C by the super hot performance will be described with reference to Fig. 93. In the case where the player operates the handle 60 to start playing by hitting the right hand during the pseudo chance time performance when all reserved balls are consumed and a predetermined period has passed, or when the player leaves the seat for a break and sits down again, and is in the standby state where the standby screen or the stop screen is displayed, the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65), and this triggers the super hot performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and before the super hot performance starts and ends, the game ball enters the second start hole 21, and the performance pattern variation performance (variation display) starts, and when the super hot performance ends, it is an example of a performance that notifies that the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time shortening state).

Here, five games have been played by right-handed play (five winning/losing results have already been obtained by the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern). At this time, no reserved icons are stocked at all. As shown in FIG. 93(A), since the pseudo chance time performance is in progress, a chance time background image HG1 in the chance time performance in which the low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state) is displayed on the display screen 7a. On the upper left side of the display screen 7a, a chance time image YG1 called "Chance Time" is displayed, which conveys that although the actual situation is a high probability high base state (high probability time-saving state), it is a chance time performance in which the low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state) is displayed. On the lower left side of the display screen 7a, since five games have already been played, a remaining time-saving number image NMG of "remaining: 95 times" indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed. On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a right-handed play image MYG with "right-handed play" written in a right arrow image is displayed, so that a game is played by right-handed play. After five games have been played, the left performance symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped number "2", and the center performance symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped number "3", and the symbols do not line up, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C at the variable display position is no longer displayed (it has disappeared from the display screen 7a).

In this state, if all reserved balls are consumed and a predetermined period of time has passed, or if the player leaves his/her seat for a break and then sits back down, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the state switches from the pseudo chance time effect to a standby screen in which the player is waiting for customers (waiting for customers standby state), and the player enters standby mode. On the standby screen, a video in which the ally character CRA, the character image of FIG. 93(B), appears starts to play and ends. When the standby screen ends, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the screen switches to a stopped screen in the same state as FIG. 93(A). When the predetermined period of time has passed in the state of FIG. 93(C), a video in which the ally character CRA, the character image of FIG. 93(B), appears starts to play again, and when the playback ends, the screen returns to the state of FIG. 93(C).

In this way, during standby, the standby screen in which a video in which the ally character CRA, which is the character image of Fig. 93(B), appears is played back, and the stopped screen in the state of Fig. 93(C) is repeatedly displayed (switched). In other words, during standby, the following order is repeatedly displayed: video in which the ally character CRA, Fig. 93(B), appears (standby screen) → state (stopped screen) of Fig. 93(C) → video in which the ally character CRA, Fig. 93(B), appears (standby screen) → state (stopped screen) of Fig. 93(C) → ....

When the screen switches from the stopped screen in the state of Figure 93 (A) (Figure 93 (C)) to the standby screen in which a video in which the ally character CRA appears in Figure 93 (B) is played, the chance time background image HG1 switches to a background image HG3 for the standby screen video, which is the background image for the video on the standby screen (the background image HG3 for the standby screen video is a different background image from the chance time background image HG1), and the ally character CRA appears large on the display screen 7a, and, except for the right hit image MYG, the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R which are displayed in a stopped state are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the chance time image YG1, remaining time reduction count image NMG, and variable display position images are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a). In contrast, when the state switches from the video in which the ally character CRA appears in Figure 93 (B) to the state in Figure 93 (C), the background image HG3 for the standby screen video switches to the chance time background image HG1, the ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R that were displayed in a stopped state are redisplayed, and the chance time image YG1, remaining time reduction count image NMG, and variable display position image are redisplayed.

For example, in the state of FIG. 93(C), as shown in FIG. 93(D), the player operates the effect button 63 (if the player operates the effect button 63 during the animation in which the ally character CRA appears in FIG. 93(B), as explained in detail in the sure-change promotion effect B by the super hot effect in FIG. 92, the screen returns to the stopped screen, and the state becomes the same as FIG. 93(C) (FIG. 93(A)). Accordingly, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the super hot effect in the customer waiting standby effect processing in FIG. 90. Note that even if the sword member 65 is operated instead of the effect button 63, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the super hot effect in the customer waiting standby effect processing in FIG. 90. At this time, the player starts operating the handle 60 again, and resumes playing by hitting to the right.

When the super hot performance is executed, the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode as shown in FIG. 93 (E). The movable body, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15), the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, the device, the performance button 63 and the sword member 65 are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and as a sound, a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67, and among the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the specific images, the chance time image YG1, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, the right performance pattern 8R, the remaining time reduction number image NMG, and the image of the variable display position are displayed in a vibrating display mode, and an effect image (effect image) BEG that vibrates for the specific image is displayed. In contrast, the right hit image MYG and chance time background image HG1 do not go into special mode, and the display state remains unchanged without being affected by the super hot effect, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all for the right hit image MYG and chance time background image HG1.

When the super hot performance is being performed, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), when only one game ball enters the second starting hole 21 and the first hold icon 9B is displayed, this first hold icon 9B is also included in the specific image, so the first hold icon 9B also goes into a special mode and is displayed in a vibrating manner, and the effect image BEG is displayed.

When the first reserved icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes variable icon 9C while the super hot effect is being performed, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern begins, as shown in FIG. 93 (G). At this time, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R remain in the special mode during the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern. In other words, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern begins and during the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 93 (G) and (H), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are also displayed in a vibrating manner, and a vibrating effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shape of each specific image and is formed to surround each specific shape, and in a trembling display mode, the jagged portion propagates like a wave that vibrates in small increments. Since the first hold icon 9B and the image at the variable display position are in a close positional relationship, the first hold icon 9B and the image at the variable display position are formed to be surrounded by a single effect image BEG. Since the variable icon 9C and the image at the variable display position are in a close positional relationship, the variable icon 9C and the image at the variable display position are formed to be surrounded by a single effect image BEG.

When the super hot performance ends, as shown in FIG. 93(I), the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, the movable body, device, sound, and display screen return to their original states, and the background image is switched from the chance time background image HG1 to the probability change background image HG2 (the probability change background image HG2 is a different background image from the chance time background image HG1 and the background image HG3 for the waiting screen video) as a background image indicating that the state is a high probability high base state (high probability time reduction state), and the chance time image YG1 is switched to the probability change in progress image YG2 indicating that the game state of "probability change in progress" is a high probability high base state (high probability time reduction state). In other words, when the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, the probability change background image HG2 and probability change in progress image YG2 suddenly appear, which is a performance that has been promoted from the chance time performance to probability change.

When the special modes of the movable body, device, sound and display screen are released and the movable body, device, sound and display screen return to their original states, the vibration mode in which the movable board body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) vibrate, which are movable bodies, are released, the vibration mode in which the performance button 63 and sword component 65, which are devices, vibrate, is released, the vibrating sound effect (effect sound) stops being played from the speaker 67 as sound, the display mode in which certain images displayed on the display screen 7a, such as the chance time image YG1, left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C, right performance pattern 8R, remaining time reduction count image NMG, variable icon 9C and variable display position image vibrate, is released, and the vibrating effect image (effect image) BEG for certain images is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

Even when the super hot effect has ended, the changing effect (changing display) of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R continues.

In this way, the state where the pseudo chance time effect is occurring changes to a waiting state (waiting state for customers), and in the waiting state for customers, the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) to start the super hot effect, and in the state where this super hot effect is started, the player operates the handle 60 to cause the game ball to enter the second start hole 21 (or the first start hole 20), starting the fluctuation, and the super hot effect suddenly switches to a guaranteed bonus promotion effect (the content of the guaranteed bonus promotion suddenly appears) which indicates that the game state is not a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortened state) called chance time, but a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state) (i.e., the super hot effect is abruptly cut off by the guaranteed bonus promotion effect at the start of the fluctuation), preventing the super hot effect from being invisible. In other words, when the super hot effect starts, the content of the super hot effect can be seen by the player without interruption until the super hot effect ends.

In addition, since the Super Hot effect is not interrupted by the guaranteed bonus promotion effect when the fluctuation starts, once the Super Hot effect starts, the player can see the contents of the Super Hot effect without interruption until the Super Hot effect ends, which avoids a situation where the player is unable to see the guaranteed bonus promotion effect depending on the timing of the operation of the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) and does not know what has happened.

In addition, since the Super Hot effect is not interrupted by the guaranteed bonus promotion effect when the fluctuation starts, once the Super Hot effect starts, the player can see the contents of the Super Hot effect without interruption until the Super Hot effect ends. This avoids a situation where the player is unable to see the guaranteed bonus promotion effect depending on the timing of the player's operation of the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65), and the background image appears to have changed due to the occurrence of a so-called bug.

In this way, in the highly anticipated special effect C, following the first surprise of the special mode being activated and the highly anticipated effect starting, the player is given a second surprise as the chance time background image HG1 is switched to the highly anticipated special effect background image HG2, resulting in a chance time effect being promoted to a highly anticipated special effect (high probability effect), surprising the player in multiple stages.

In the highly anticipated promotion performance C due to the super hot performance, the movable bodies such as the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 were in their respective retreated positions. However, the movable bodies are activated during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and may enter a special mode while activated. By entering the special mode, the movable bodies, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate. The movable bodies suggest to the player that there is a higher chance of winning compared to when they are not activated, and suggest to the player that they will be promoted to a highly anticipated promotion. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the movable bodies.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known in which special effects are performed while the symbols are changing (for example, JP 2020-178995 A). However, in such gaming machines, the special effects occur at set times, so the player is not surprised by the occurrence of the special effects, and there is still room for improvement in technology to increase the interest of the game.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the hotly anticipated promotion effects.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with a performance button 63 or a sword member 65 (operation means) that can be operated by a player, an image display device 7 (display means) that can display a plurality of types of images, and a performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) and an image control microcomputer 101 (performance execution means) that can execute a plurality of types of performances. The gaming states of the gaming machine 1 include a low probability high base state (first gaming state) and a high probability high base state (second gaming state) in which the probability of winning is higher than in the low probability high base state (first gaming state), and the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) and the image control microcomputer 101 (performance execution means) execute a first performance that progresses the performance of the low probability high base state (first gaming state) even though it is in the high probability high base state (second gaming state). In the case of the high probability promotion performance A by the super hot performance, Figs. 91(A)-(E), (G)-(I), in the case of the high probability promotion performance B by the super hot performance, Figs. 92(A), (B1), (B2), (C1), (C2), (D1), (D2), (E), in the case of the high probability promotion performance C by the super hot performance, Figs. 93(A)-(H)), and when the performance button 63 or the sword member 65 (operation means) is operated during the first performance, a special image among the images displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is displayed. It is possible to execute a second effect in which a certain image (for example, an image of "chance time", an image of a performance pattern, an image showing the number of remaining time reductions, an image of a reserved icon, an image of a variable icon, an image of a variable display position, an image of a character) is changed from a display mode in which it is not vibrating to a display mode in which it is vibrating (from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode) (FIGS. 91(C)-(E) for the high probability promotion performance A by the super hot performance, FIG. 92(D1), (D2)-(E), (C2), (D2)-(E) for the high probability promotion performance B by the super hot performance, and FIG. 93(D)-(H) for the high probability promotion performance C by the super hot performance), and after the second effect is finished, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the performance of a high probability high base state (second game state) progresses (FIG. 91(F) for the high probability promotion performance A by the super hot performance, FIG. 92(F) for the high probability promotion performance B by the super hot performance, and FIG. 93(I) for the high probability promotion performance C by the super hot performance). According to this configuration, even though it is a high probability high base state (second game state), when the player operates the performance button 63 or the sword member 65 (operation means) in a state in which the performance of the low probability high base state (first game state) is progressing, the performance of the high probability high base state (second game state) can be progressed after the specific image changes from the first state to a second state different from the first state. In other words, the timing at which the specific image transitions from the first state to the second state can be set to the timing at which the player operates the performance button 63 or the sword member 65 (operation means). As a result, the specific image can transition from the first state to the second state based on the timing at which the player operates the performance button 63 or the sword member 65 (operation means), so that the player can be surprised by the transition of the specific image from the first state to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the first performance of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a chance time background image HG1 (first background image) corresponding to a low probability high base state (first gaming state) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and in the second performance, a specific image is changed from a display mode that does not vibrate to a display mode that vibrates (from the first mode to the second mode) so that an effect image BEG appears on the specific image, and when 2800 milliseconds (a predetermined period) which is the execution time from the start of the second performance has elapsed, the second performance ends, and in the third performance, a probability change background image HG2 (second background image) which is a background image different from the chance time background image HG1 (first background image) and corresponds to a high probability high base state (second gaming state) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The effect image BEG has a jagged shape according to the shape of each specific image, is formed so as to surround each specific shape, and is in a display mode that vibrates. In the display mode of the trembling vibration, the jagged shape propagates like a wave vibrating in small increments. According to this configuration, the effect image BEG appears, and the specific image in the display mode (second mode) of the trembling vibration can be emphasized and displayed. After the specific image is emphasized, the chance time background image HG1 (first background image) is switched to the probability change background image HG2 (second background image), so that the player can suddenly feel that the probability change has been promoted. In other words, following the first surprise of the effect image BEG appearing, the second surprise of the chance time background image HG1 (first background image) being switched to the probability change background image HG2 (second background image) can be given to the player, and the player can be surprised in multiple stages.

[Effect 3]
The performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) and the image control microcomputer 101 (performance execution means) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can switch from the stop screen displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) to a standby screen during the first performance, and can transition to a standby state for waiting for customers, and in the second performance, when the performance button 63 or the sword member 65 (operation means) is operated during the standby screen, the standby screen can be switched to the stop screen, and a specific image can be changed from a display mode that does not vibrate to a display mode that vibrates (from the first mode to the second mode). According to this configuration, even when the standby screen is displayed, when the player operates the performance button 63 or the sword member 65 (operation means), a specific image can be changed from a display mode that does not vibrate to a display mode that vibrates (from the first mode to the second mode). As a result, even when the standby screen is displayed, if the player operates the effect button 63 or the sword member 65 (operation means), the chance time background image HG1 (first background image) can be switched to the probability change background image HG2 (second background image), giving the player a sense of surprise.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, even if the second performance starts with the transition to a waiting state for customers, the second performance continues without being stopped midway, and the performance pattern variation performance also continues, and when the second performance ends, the performance pattern variation performance can end. According to this configuration, the content of the second performance can be viewed by the player without interruption until the second performance ends. In other words, it is possible to prevent the second performance from being cut off by the performance pattern variation performance, making it impossible to view the second performance.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the special rate promotion effect using the super hot effects is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the sure probability promotion effect A by the super hot effect in Figure 91, the sure probability promotion effect B by the super hot effect in Figure 92, and the sure probability promotion effect C by the super hot effect in Figure 93, even though the gaming state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state), a pseudo chance time effect is deliberately generated in which the gaming state is a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortened state), and when the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65), this triggers the start of a super hot effect in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and when it ends, it is announced that the gaming state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state). However, instead of the pseudo chance time effect, when the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65) in a low probability low base state (normal game state or low probability non-time shortening state), this may be used as a trigger to start a super hot effect in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and when it ends, it may develop into a super reach (SP reach) with a high expectation of a win. Figure 94 is an explanatory diagram of the development effect to the SP reach by the super hot effect (variation example 1).

The progression effect to SP Reach by the super hot effect (variation 1) is an example of an effect in which, when the player is in a low probability low base state (normal play state or low probability non-time-saving state) and is playing by operating the handle 60 and hitting the ball with the left hand, the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65), which triggers the start of a super hot effect in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and when it ends, the effect progresses to a super reach (SP reach) with a high probability of winning.

As shown in FIG. 94(A), since the game state is a low probability low base state (normal game state, or low probability non-time shortening state) or a low probability high base state (low probability time shortening state), the normal game state background image HG4 (the normal game state background image HG4 is a background image different from the above-mentioned background images (chance time background image HG1, probability change background image HG2, background image HG3 for waiting screen video)) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image, and as the change ends, the left performance pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1", the right performance pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "2", and the center performance pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "3", and the same patterns are not aligned, confirming a miss. As a result, the change icon 9C at the change display position is hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a). At this time, only one reserved icon 9A is stocked.

The first reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes variable icon 9C, and the variable display of the performance pattern (variable display) begins, as shown in FIG. 94 (B). As a result, no reserved icons are stored at all.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(C), while the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are changing (changing display), the player operates the performance button 63. In response to this, a determination is made during the processing during the changing performance as to whether or not to execute a super hot performance. Note that even if the sword member 65 is operated instead of the operation button 63, a determination is made during the processing during the changing performance as to whether or not to execute a super hot performance.

When the super hot performance is executed, the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, as shown in Fig. 94 (D) and (E). The movable body, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15), and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the devices, the performance button 63 and the sword member 65, are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as sound, and among the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the specific images, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, the right performance pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, and the image of the variable display position, are displayed in a vibrating display mode, and a vibrating effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed for the specific image.

When the super hot performance ends, as shown in Figure 94 (F), the special modes of the movable body, device, sound and display screen are released, the movable body, device, sound and display screen return to their original state (the state of Figure 94 (C)), the background image changes from the normal game state background image HG4 to the Super Reach (SP Reach) SP Reach background image HG5 (the SP Reach background image HG5 is a different background image from each of the above-mentioned background images (chance time background image HG1, special chance background image HG2, waiting screen video background image HG3, normal game state background image HG4)), and the changing performance (changing display) of the left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C and right performance pattern continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(G), the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, the right performance pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position image are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and a battle performance that is a super reach (SP reach) is started. In this battle performance, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a, which is a super reach performance (SP reach performance) in which the expectation of a hit is preset high. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle performance, it is a miss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle performance, it is a hit. In addition, in the battle performance, the second movable part 15 may move downward from the retreat position (the position of the second movable part 15 in FIG. 1) to the advance position which is the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and a vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), where it stops, and then move upward again to return to the retreat position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(H), when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, a message image MS saying "Defeat" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, the enemy character CRB and message image MS are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and the left performance pattern 8L that temporarily stops at the number "2", the middle performance pattern 8C that temporarily stops at the number "4", and the right performance pattern 8R that temporarily stops at the number "6" appear again, and the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position also appear again.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(I), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same numbers and are displayed as stopped, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C in the variable display position is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern will begin.

If the super hot effect is not executed, the game will not progress to a Super Reach (SP Reach), and no Reach will be formed. Instead, the game will move forward with the changing effect (changing display) of the effect symbols, resulting in the state shown in Figure 94 (I) above, and a miss will be confirmed.

In this way, when the changing performance (changing display) of the performance symbols starts and the player operates the device (operation button 63 or sword member 65) at a timing of their choice in the state of Figure 94 (C) (during the changing performance (changing display) of the performance symbols), a super hot performance occurs and when it ends, it can progress to a super reach (SP reach) which has a high expected probability of winning. The development to the SP reach due to such a super hot performance can give a surprise to the player. Furthermore, the development to the SP reach due to the super hot performance can increase motivation to play.

In addition, the timing at which the super hot effect occurs is not fixed in advance to the amount of time that has elapsed since the start of the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern, but the player can change the timing at which the super hot effect occurs by operating the device (operation button 63 or sword member 65) at a timing of their choice, so the player can have fun discovering the pattern for themselves that if they operate the device (operation button 63 or sword member 65) at this timing, there is a possibility that the super hot effect will occur.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the probability change promotion performance B by the super hot performance of FIG. 92 and the probability change promotion performance C by the super hot performance of FIG. 93, even though the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time shortening state), a pseudo chance time performance is generated in a low probability high base state (low probability time shortening state), and when the standby screen is displayed during the pseudo chance time performance, when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65), this triggers the start of the super hot performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and when it ends, it is notified that the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time shortening state). At this time, even if the video in which the ally character CRA, which is a character image, appears is started to be played, the super hot performance is started after returning to the screen of the stopped display. However, the super hot performance may be started without returning to the screen of the stopped display during the playback of the video in which the ally character CRA appears. FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram of the probability change promotion performance (variation 2) by the super hot performance.

The special promotion effect with the super hot effect (variation 2) is an example of an effect in which, when the standby screen is displayed during the pseudo chance time effect and the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword component 65), this triggers the start of a super hot effect in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and when this ends, the super hot effect starts without returning to the stopped display screen while the video in which the ally character CRA appears is being played.

Here, five games have been played by right-handed play (five winning/losing results have already been obtained by the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern). At this time, no reserved icons are stocked at all. As shown in FIG. 95(A), since the pseudo chance time performance is in progress, a chance time background image HG1 in the chance time performance in which the low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state) is displayed on the display screen 7a. On the upper left side of the display screen 7a, a chance time image YG1 called "Chance Time" is displayed, which conveys that although the actual situation is a high probability high base state (high probability time-saving state), it is a chance time performance in which the low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state) is displayed. On the lower left side of the display screen 7a, since five games have already been played, a remaining time-saving number image NMG with "remaining: 95 times" indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed. On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a right-handed play image MYG with "right-handed play" written in a right arrow image is displayed, so that a game is played by right-handed play. After five games have been played, the left performance symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped number "2", and the center performance symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped number "3", and the symbols do not line up, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C at the variable display position is no longer displayed (it has disappeared from the display screen 7a).

In this state, if all reserved balls are used up and a specified period of time has passed, or if the player leaves his seat for a break and then sits back down, the screen switches from the state in which this pseudo chance time effect is occurring to a standby screen in which the player is waiting for customers (waiting for customers standby state), as shown in FIG. 95(B). On the standby screen, a video in which the ally character CRA, the character image of FIG. 95(B), appears starts to play, and when playback ends, the screen returns to the same state as FIG. 95(A). When the specified period described above has passed in this state, a video in which the ally character CRA, the character image of FIG. 95(B), appears starts to play again, and when playback ends, the screen returns to the same state as FIG. 95(A).

In this way, on the standby screen, a state in which a video in which the ally character CRA, which is the character image in Fig. 95(B), appears and a state identical to the state in Fig. 95(A), are played back alternately and repeatedly. In other words, on the standby screen, the following order is repeated: video in which the ally character CRA in Fig. 95(B) appears → state identical to the state in Fig. 95(A) → video in which the ally character CRA in Fig. 95(B) appears → state identical to the state in Fig. 95(A) → ....

When switching from the same state as in Figure 95 (A) to the video in Figure 95 (B) in which the ally character CRA appears, the chance time background image HG1 switches to the background image HG3 for the standby screen video, which is the background image for the video on the standby screen (the background image HG3 for the standby screen video is a different background image from the chance time background image HG1), and the ally character CRA appears large on the display screen 7a, and, except for the right hit image MYG, the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R, which are displayed in a stopped state, are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and the chance time image YG1, remaining time reduction count image NMG, and variable display position images are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). In contrast, when switching from the video in which the ally character CRA appears in Figure 95 (B) to the same state as in Figure 95 (A), the background image HG3 for the standby screen video switches to the chance time background image HG1, the ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R that were displayed in a stopped state are redisplayed, and the chance time image YG1, remaining time reduction count image NMG, and variable display position image are redisplayed.

During the animation in which the ally character CRA appears in FIG. 95(B), the player operates the effect button 63 as shown in FIG. 95(C). In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a super hot effect in the customer waiting standby effect processing in FIG. 90. Note that even if the sword component 65 is operated instead of the operation button 63, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a super hot effect in the customer waiting standby effect processing in FIG. 90.

When the super hot performance is executed, the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, as shown in Fig. 95 (D) and (E). The movable body, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15), and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the device, the performance button 63 and the sword member 65, are in a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as a sound, and among the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA, which is a specific image, is displayed in a vibrating display mode, and a vibrating effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed for the specific image. In contrast, the right hit image MYG and the background image HG3 for the standby screen video are not in a special mode, and the display mode is maintained without being affected by the super hot performance, and the vibrating effect image (effect image) BEG is not displayed at all for the right hit image MYG and the background image HG3 for the standby screen video.

When the super hot performance ends, as shown in Figure 95 (F), the special modes of the movable objects, devices, sounds and display screen are released, the movable objects, devices, sounds and display screen return to their original states (the states in Figure 95 (B)), the background image changes from the background image HG3 for the waiting screen video to a special probability background image HG2 (the special probability background image HG2 is a different background image from the chance time background image HG1 and the background image HG3 for the waiting screen video) as a background image indicating that the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state), and a special probability image YG2 indicating that the game state "in special probability" is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortened state) is displayed in the position where the chance time image YG1 was displayed, and the chance time image YG1 changes to the special probability image YG2. In other words, when the special modes of the moving body, device, sound, and display screen are released, this triggers the effect of upgrading from chance time to probability variation, and the probability variation background image HG2 and probability variation in progress image YG2 suddenly appear.

As a result, when the player operates the device (operation button 63 or sword component 65) at a timing of their choice on the standby screen where the video of the ally character CRA appearing in Figure 95 (B) is played, the player can be promoted from a high probability base state (low probability time-shortened state) to a high probability base state (low probability time-shortened state) by the generated probability promotion effect (an effect in which the probability promotion background image HG2 and the probability promotion image YG2 suddenly appear). This type of probability promotion effect with an extremely exciting effect can surprise the player. Furthermore, the probability promotion effect with an extremely exciting effect can increase the player's desire to play.

In addition, the timing at which the super hot effect occurs is not fixed in advance to the animation in which the ally character CRA appears in Figure 95 (B), but the player can change the timing at which the super hot effect occurs by operating the device (operation button 63 or sword component 65) at a timing of their choice, so the player can have fun discovering for themselves the pattern that if they operate the device (operation button 63 or sword component 65) at this timing, there is a possibility that the super hot effect will occur.

Note that the standby screen will remain on unless the player operates the handle 60 to start playing, but in this case, the standby screen will alternate between a state in which a video of the character image of the ally character CRA appears in the state of the promoted probability mode in FIG. 95(F) is played, and a state identical to the state in FIG. 95(A). In other words, the standby screen will repeatedly play the following order: video of the ally character CRA appearing in the state of the promoted probability mode in FIG. 95(F) → state identical to the state in FIG. 95(A) → video of the ally character CRA appearing in the state of the promoted probability mode in FIG. 95(F) → state identical to the state in FIG. 95(A) → ....

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the high probability promotion performance A by the high probability performance of FIG. 91, the high probability promotion performance B by the high probability performance of FIG. 92, and the high probability promotion performance C by the high probability performance of FIG. 93, when the high probability performance in which the movable body, the device, the sound, and the display screen are in the special mode is started, an effect image (effect image) BEG that vibrates is displayed for a specific image among the images displayed on the display screen 7a. This effect image (effect image) BEG has a jagged shape according to the shape of each specific image, and is formed so as to surround each specific shape. However, the effect image (effect image) BEG may have another shape. Even if the effect image (effect image) BEG has another shape, the same effect as the effect by the effect image (effect image) BEG having a jagged shape in this embodiment can be achieved. FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example of the high probability performance.

The effect image (effect image) BEG may be a predetermined shape (for example, a star shape, a square shape, a triangle shape, a circle shape, a diamond shape). For example, in the case of a star shape, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG larger than the vertical distance dimension of the stopped and displayed performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed, and during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG that is approximately the same as the horizontal distance dimension of the variable area or larger than the vertical distance dimension of the stopped and displayed performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed, and a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG larger than the vertical distance dimension of the chance time image YG1 is displayed, and a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG larger than the vertical distance dimension of the remaining time reduction count image NMG is displayed. Alternatively, a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG larger than the vertical distance dimension may be displayed, the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position may be combined to display a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG larger than the vertical distance dimension, a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG larger than the vertical distance dimension of the reserved icons 9A and 9B may be displayed, and a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG larger than the vertical distance dimension of the ally character CRA (or the enemy character CRB when the enemy character CRB appears instead of the ally character CRA) may be displayed.

In addition, the effect image BEG may be a specific shape (e.g., a star shape, a square shape, a triangle shape, a circle shape, a diamond shape) and the effect image BEG may revolve around a specific image in an orbit in the forward and backward directions while tilting in a specific direction. For example, in the case of a star shape, as shown in FIG. 96(B), a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed which is approximately one size larger than the size of the vertical distance dimension of the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A, 9B, and the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed so as to rotate around in an orbit in the front-to-back direction while slanting upward to the right with respect to the stopped and displayed performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed so as to rotate around in an orbit in the front-to-back direction while slanting upward to the right so as to pass through both ends of the horizontal distance dimension of the variable area, the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed so as to rotate around in an orbit in the front-to-back direction while slanting upward to the right so as to pass through both ends of the horizontal direction of the chance time image YG1, and the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed so as to rotate around in an orbit in the front-to-back direction while slanting upward to the right so as to pass through both ends of the horizontal direction of the remaining time-saving count image NMG. Also, a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG having a size similar to the size of the vertical distance dimension of the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A, 9B is displayed so as to trace an orbit in the front-to-back direction while inclining upward to the right so as to pass through the lower left and upper right sides of the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position integrated, and the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed so as to trace an orbit in the front-to-back direction while inclining upward to the right so as to pass through the lower left and upper right sides of the reserved icons 9A, 9B. Also, a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG may be displayed that is approximately 3 to 5 times larger than the size of the vertical distance dimension of the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A, 9B, and the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG may be displayed so as to trace an orbit in the front-to-back direction while inclining upward to the right so as to pass through the lower left and upper right sides of the ally character CRA (or the enemy character CRB when the enemy character CRB appears instead of the ally character CRA). Note that there may be one, two, or three star-shaped effect images BEGs that revolve around the specific image in an orbit in the forward and backward directions while tilted in a specific direction. In FIG. 96(B), two star-shaped effect images BEGs revolve around the specific image in an orbit.

In addition, the effect image BEG may be a predetermined character image (for example, a smiling round-faced smiling image), and the effect image BEG may be arranged at a predetermined position of a specific image. For example, as shown in FIG. 96(C), an effect image BEG of a round smiling image may be displayed so as to cover a portion of the upper right side of the stopped-displayed performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, an effect image BEG of a round smiling image may be displayed at the same position as the position covering the portion of the upper right side of the stopped-displayed performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, an effect image BEG of a round smiling image may be displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower right side of the chance time image YG1, and an effect image BEG of a round smiling image may be displayed so as to cover a portion of the upper right side of the remaining time-saving count image NMG. The effect image (effect image) BEG of the "K" image may be displayed, the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position may be integrated, and the effect image (effect image) BEG of the round side smiley image may be displayed so as to cover a part of the upper right side of the variable icon 9C, the effect image (effect image) BEG of the round side smiley image may be displayed so as to cover a part of the upper right side of the reserved icons 9A and 9B, and the effect image (effect image) BEG of the round side smiley image may be displayed so as to cover a part of the lower right side of the ally character CRA (or the enemy character CRB when it appears instead of the ally character CRA). The smiley image on the round side may be a still image or a moving image (it may move up and down, left and right, up and down and left and right in small increments, or may rotate around). The smiley image on the round side is arranged at a predetermined position of the specific image, but there may be one, two, or three. In FIG. 96(C), an effect image (effect image) BEG of one smiley image on the round side is arranged at a predetermined position of the specific image.

[Modification 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the probability change promotion performance A by the super hot performance in Fig. 91, the probability change promotion performance B by the super hot performance in Fig. 92, and the probability change promotion performance C by the super hot performance in Fig. 93, when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65), this triggers the start of the super hot performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and when it ends, it is notified that the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time reduction state). However, as the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65), a touch panel may be provided to the right of the performance button 63 of the front frame 53, and the super hot performance may be started when the player touches this touch panel, or a distance measuring sensor may be provided on the game board 2, and the super hot performance may be started when the player approaches with the palm of his hand.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state) in the high probability promotion effect B in FIG. 92 and the high probability promotion effect C in FIG. 93, a pseudo chance time effect is generated in a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortening state) even though the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state), and when the pseudo chance time effect is on a standby screen, when the player operates the device (effect button 63 or sword member 65), this triggers the start of a high probability effect in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and when it ends, it is notified that the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state). In the standby screen, a video in which the ally character CRA, which is a character image, appears is started to be played. However, instead of the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB may appear, or the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB may appear together or alternately, or a demonstration of a battle effect by the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB may be played.

[Modification 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the high probability promotion performance A by the super hot performance in FIG. 91, the high probability promotion performance B by the super hot performance in FIG. 92, and the high probability promotion performance C by the super hot performance in FIG. 93, when the player operates the device (performance button 63 or sword member 65), this triggers the start of the super hot performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in the special mode, and then, when the super hot performance ends, it is notified that the game state is in the high probability high base state (high probability time reduction state). However, if the movable body such as the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 is not operated before the super hot performance in which the special mode is started, the movable body may be operated, and the super hot performance in which the movable body is in the special mode may be started when the movable body has been moved from the retreat position to the advance position. As described above, the movable body suggests to the player that the expectation of winning is high compared to when it is not operated, or suggests to the player that the probability of promotion is high, so the player is highly interested in the operation of the movable body. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of anticipation regarding the fluctuations as a result of the movable body being activated.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sure-win promotion effect A by the super hot effect in Figure 91, the sure-win promotion effect B by the super hot effect in Figure 92, and the sure-win promotion effect C by the super hot effect in Figure 93 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine including an operation means operable by a player, a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and an effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects,
The gaming state of the gaming machine includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the probability of winning is higher than that of the first gaming state,
The performance execution means includes:
A first effect that advances the effect of the first gaming state can be executed even though the game is in the second gaming state;
When the operation means is operated during the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which a specific image among the images displayed on the display means is changed from a first state to a second state different from the first state;
After the second performance is completed, a third performance that progresses the performance of the second game state can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
In the first performance, a first background image corresponding to the first game state is displayed on the display means;
In the second performance, an effect image appears on the specific image by changing the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the second performance, the second performance ends;
In the third performance, a second background image, which is different from the first background image and corresponds to the second game state, is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or B4-2,
the performance execution means is capable of switching the stop screen displayed on the display means to a standby screen during the first performance, and transitioning to a standby state for waiting for customers;
In the second performance, when the operation means is operated while the standby screen is displayed, the standby screen may be switched to the stop screen, and the specific image may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
During the second performance, even if the performance of the variation of the performance pattern is started, the execution of the second performance is continued without being stopped midway, and the variation of the performance pattern is also continued, and when the second performance ends, the variation of the performance pattern ends thereafter.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the special effect-based performance upgrades A to E with reference to Figures 97 to 103. Figure 97 is a flow chart of processing during variable performance for executing the special effect-based performance upgrade, and Figure 98 is an explanatory diagram of the performance upgrade performance execution determination table for executing the special effect-based performance upgrade.

In addition, Figure 99 is a diagram for explaining the performance upgrade A by special effects, Figure 100 is a diagram for explaining the performance upgrade B by special effects, Figure 101 is a diagram for explaining the performance upgrade C by special effects, Figure 102 is a diagram for explaining the performance upgrade D by special effects, and Figure 103 is a diagram for explaining the performance upgrade E by special effects. Note that in Figures 99 to 103, the various movable props and decorative members arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

Here, we will first explain the various flowcharts for executing the special effects to promote the performance, and then we will explain the special effects to promote the performance in order.

[Various flowcharts for executing special effects to promote performance]
Various flowcharts for executing the performance promotion performance by the special performance will be described. Here, a flowchart of the variable performance processing for executing the performance promotion performance by the special performance will be described.

[Processing during variable performance to execute performance promotion performance by special performance]
The variable performance processing for executing the performance promotion performance by the special performance will be described with reference to FIG. 97. The variable performance processing for executing the performance promotion performance by the special performance is a processing executed in place of the variable performance processing shown in FIG. 44. Here, the same processing executed in the variable performance processing shown in FIG. 44 is given the same step number, and detailed explanation is omitted. In FIG. 97, the processing (step SN4701a to step SN4701k) that is different from the variable performance processing shown in FIG. 44 is characterized by being surrounded by a chain line.

When the variable performance processing for executing the performance promotion performance by the special performance is started, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not the variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be judged, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is at zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step S4701: NO), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step S4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a ball has entered (step SN4701a). This judgment is made by whether or not a game ball has entered any of the first start gate 20, the second start gate 21, the gate 28, or the general winning gate 27. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting gate 20, the second starting gate 21, the gate 28, or the general winning gate 27, a command is sent from the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90, and the performance control microcomputer 91 is able to use the command to determine whether the ball entered the first starting gate 20, the second starting gate 21, the general winning gate 27, or the gate 28.

If the ball has not been scored (step SN4071a: NO), the process proceeds to step S4702. If the ball has been scored (step SN4071a: YES), the process proceeds to step SN4701b.

In step SN4701b, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the special effect start flag is ON. The special effect start flag is set ON when a game ball enters the first start gate 20, the second start gate 21, the gate 28, or the general winning gate 27, and when a special effect starts to be executed, and is set OFF when the execution of the special effect has ended or when the special effect has not yet been executed.

If the special effect start flag is not ON (step SN4701b: NO), proceed to step SN4701c; if the special effect start flag is ON (step SN4701b: YES), proceed to step SN4701g.

In step SN4701c, the performance control microcomputer 91 makes a judgment by referring to the performance promotion performance execution judgment table. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of a counter of a random number for performance promotion performance execution judgment to determine whether or not to generate a performance promotion performance that promotes the currently ongoing performance to another performance that has a higher expectation of winning compared to the currently ongoing performance, and judges whether or not to generate a performance promotion performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the performance promotion performance execution judgment table (not shown) stored in the sub-ROM 93.

The performance upgrade performance execution judgment table will now be described with reference to FIG. 98. The performance upgrade performance execution judgment table is stored in the sub-ROM 93 together with other tables. The performance upgrade performance execution judgment random number is updated by a random number counter set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94. The "performance upgrade performance execution judgment random number" is a random number used to judge whether or not to generate a performance upgrade performance that upgrades the currently ongoing performance to another performance that has a higher expectation of winning compared to the currently ongoing performance, and takes a value in the range of "value 0 (zero)" to "value 127". The "performance upgrade performance execution judgment random number" is acquired when judging whether or not to generate a performance upgrade performance based on whether the game ball has entered the first start gate 20, the second start gate 21, the general winning gate 27, or the gate 28 during the variable performance.

When the ball enters the first starting port 20 and the performance promotion effect is not generated (when the performance promotion effect is not executed), the random number for determining whether the performance promotion effect is executed is between "value 0 (zero)" and "value 100". On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 20 and the performance promotion effect is generated (when the performance promotion effect is executed), the random number for determining whether the performance promotion effect is executed is between "value 101" and "value 127". The allocation rate of the performance promotion effect not being executed/the performance promotion effect being executed when the ball enters the first starting port 20 is 101/128 when it is determined that the performance promotion effect is not executed, and 27/128 when it is determined that the performance promotion effect is executed.

When the ball enters the second starting port 21 and the performance promotion effect is not generated (when the performance promotion effect is not executed), the random number for determining whether the performance promotion effect is executed is between "value 0 (zero)" and "value 100". On the other hand, when the ball enters the second starting port 21 and the performance promotion effect is generated (when the performance promotion effect is executed), the random number for determining whether the performance promotion effect is executed is between "value 101" and "value 127". The allocation rate of the performance promotion effect not being executed/the performance promotion effect being executed when the ball enters the second starting port 21 is 101/128 when it is determined that the performance promotion effect is not executed, and 27/128 when it is determined that the performance promotion effect is executed.

When the ball enters the general winning slot 27 and the promotion effect is not generated (when the promotion effect is not executed), the random number for determining whether the promotion effect is executed is between "0 (zero)" and "24". When the ball enters the general winning slot 27 and the promotion effect is generated (when the promotion effect is executed), the random number for determining whether the promotion effect is executed is between "25" and "127". The allocation rate of the promotion effect not being executed/the promotion effect being executed when the ball enters the general winning slot 27 is 25/128 when it is determined that the promotion effect is not executed, and 103/128 when it is determined that the promotion effect is executed.

When the ball enters (passes) gate 28 and the performance promotion effect is not generated (when the performance promotion effect is not executed), the random number for determining whether the performance promotion effect is executed is between "value 0 (zero)" and "value 100". On the other hand, when the ball enters (passes) gate 28 and the performance promotion effect is generated (when the performance promotion effect is executed), the random number for determining whether the performance promotion effect is executed is between "value 101" and "value 127". The allocation rate of the performance promotion effect not being executed/performance effect being executed when the ball enters (passes) gate 28 is 101/128 when it is determined that the performance promotion effect is not executed, and 27/128 when it is determined that the performance promotion effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 97, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a performance upgrade performance is to be executed (step SN4701d). If a performance upgrade performance is not to be executed (i.e., a performance upgrade performance is not to be executed) (step SN4701d: NO), the process proceeds to step S4702. On the other hand, if a performance upgrade performance is to be executed (step SN4701d: YES), the process proceeds to step SN4701e.

In step SN4701e, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a command for a special performance that sets the movable body, device, sound, and display screen to a special mode. In the special mode, the movable board body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) are set to a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the performance button 63 and sword member 65, which are devices, are set to a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as a sound, and among the images displayed on the display screen, specific images (for example, an image of "chance time", an image of a performance pattern, an image showing the number of remaining time reductions, an image of a reserved icon, an image of a variable icon, an image of a variable display position, and an image of a character) are set to a display mode in which they vibrate, and an effect image (effect image) in which a specific image vibrates is displayed. By setting the mode to the special mode, a special performance is started. The execution time from when this special effect starts to when it ends is set to 2800 milliseconds (2.8 seconds), which is shorter than the shortest change time (4000 milliseconds (4 seconds)) when the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 is 3 to 4. If the change effect (changing display) of the effect pattern ends between the start and end of the special mode, the change effect (changing display) of the next change of the effect pattern will start while the special mode is maintained, and the special mode will end during the change effect (changing display) of the next change of the effect pattern.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the special performance start flag to ON (step SM4701f) and proceeds to step S4702. Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the special performance start flag to ON to indicate that a special performance has started to be executed when a game ball enters either the first start gate 20, the second start gate 21, the gate 28, or the general winning gate 27.

On the other hand, in step SN4701b, if the special effect start flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 proceeds to step SN4701g and determines whether it is time to end the special effect. In this determination, the execution time from the start to the end of the special effect (the above-mentioned 2800 milliseconds (2.8 seconds)) can be determined based on the variable effect timer.

If it is not time to end the special effect (step SN4701g: NO), this process ends, whereas if it is time to end the special effect (step SN4701g: YES), the process proceeds to step SN4701h.

In step SN4701h, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a special performance release command that releases the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen. When the special mode is released, the vibration mode in which the movable board body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) vibrate, which are movable bodies, are released, the vibration mode in which the performance button 63 and the sword member 65, which are devices, vibrate, the vibrating sound effect (effect sound) stops flowing from the speaker 67 as sound, the display mode in which certain images (for example, the image of "chance time", the image of the performance pattern, the image showing the number of remaining time reductions, the image of the reserved icon, the image of the variable icon, and the image of the variable display position) among the images displayed on the display screen vibrate is released, and the effect image (effect image) in which a certain image vibrates is hidden (disappears from the display screen). When the special mode is released, the special performance ends.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the special performance start flag to OFF (step SN4701i) and proceeds to step S4702. Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the special performance start flag to OFF to indicate that the execution of the special performance has ended.

In step S4702, the performance control microcontroller 91 determines whether it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94.

If it is not the time to set a pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the time to set a pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705), and this process ends.

[Special effects for enhanced performance]
Next, the performance promotion performance by the special performance will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 103. In the performance promotion performance by the special performance, when a game ball enters any of the first start hole 20, the second start hole 21, the general winning hole 27, and the gate 28 during the variation performance (variable display) of the performance pattern, the special performance in which the movable body, the device, the sound, and the display screen are in the special mode is started and ended, and the performance is promoted from the currently ongoing performance to another performance with a higher expectation of winning compared to the currently ongoing performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the performance promotion performance by the special performance is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will explain an example of a special effect-based promotion effect A, in which a special effect that sets the movable body, device, sound, and display screen to a special mode based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 20 during a change in the effect pattern (changing display) starts and ends, promoting the currently ongoing effect to another effect that has a higher expectation of a win compared to the currently ongoing effect.

In addition, as an example of a special effect-based performance upgrade performance B, a special performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are set to a special mode based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 during a performance pattern change (changing display) is started and ended, and the currently ongoing performance is promoted to another performance with a higher expectation of a win compared to the currently ongoing performance, and further, in the promoted performance, a special performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are set to a special mode based on a game ball entering the general winning port 27 is started and ended, and the currently ongoing promoted performance is further promoted to another performance with a higher expectation of a win compared to the currently ongoing promoted performance.

In addition, as an example of a special effect-based performance upgrade performance C, a reach is formed during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), which develops into a super reach (SP reach), and when a game ball enters the general winning slot 27 while the super reach (SP reach) performance is in progress, a special performance is started in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and when this special performance ends, the currently ongoing super reach (SP reach) performance is upgraded to another performance that has a higher expectation of a win compared to the currently ongoing super reach (SP reach) performance.

In addition, as an example of a special effect-based performance upgrade performance D, in a chance time performance in which the game state is a low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state), a special performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode is started and ended based on the game ball entering (passing through) gate 28 during a performance pattern change performance (changing display), and the performance is upgraded from the currently ongoing performance to another performance with a higher expectation of a win compared to the currently ongoing performance.

In addition, as an example of a special effect-based performance upgrade performance E, during a probability bonus in which the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-saving state), a reach is formed during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and it develops into a super reach (SP reach), and when the super reach (SP reach) performance is in progress, a special performance that sets the movable body, device, sound, and display screen to a special mode based on the game ball entering (passing through) gate 28 is started and ended, and the performance is upgraded from the currently ongoing super reach (SP reach) performance to another performance that has a higher expectation of a hit than the currently ongoing super reach (SP reach) performance.

Here, we will first explain the performance patterns, and then explain in order performance promotion performance A due to special effects, performance promotion performance B due to special effects, performance promotion performance C due to special effects, performance promotion performance D due to special effects, and performance promotion performance E due to special effects.

[Performance design]
First, a brief description of the performance symbols will be given. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left performance symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center performance symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right performance symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started. In the variable performance (variable display) of a plurality of performance symbols, the performance symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → ...

When the performance pattern change (changing display) starts, the stopped performance pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) toward the top in a floating display mode of a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, after the stopped display of the performance pattern is released and the performance pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually speeds up from a low speed toward the bottom, changing from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the performance pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent performance pattern that is changing at high speed. The performance pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or is displayed as stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When the performance pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it is displayed as a display mode in which it moves slowly in small vertical movements.

To briefly explain the variable icons and reserved icons, the variable icons 9C corresponding to the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R currently being changed as the first special chart reserved is consumed, are displayed (placed) in the variable display position (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area to the left of the variable display position, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special chart reserved, and in the area to the right of the variable display position, a second reserved display area is provided as the second special chart reserved. In the first reserved display area, four reserved icons 9A can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The reserved icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A second closest to the variable icon 9C is called the second reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A third closest to the variable icon 9C is called the third reserved icon 9A, and the reserved icon 9A furthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth reserved icon 9A. In the second hold display area, four hold icons 9B can be displayed in a straight line, allowing a maximum of four hold icons 9B to be stored. The hold icon 9B closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B second closest to the variable icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B third closest to the variable icon 9C is called the third hold icon 9B, and the hold icon 9B farthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth hold icon 9B.

When the performance pattern change (changing display) starts, the changing performance music is output (starts playing) from the speaker 67, and when the performance pattern is stopped and displayed, the output of the changing performance music from the speaker 67 is stopped. In other words, each time the performance pattern change (changing display) starts, the changing performance music is started from the beginning.

[Special Effects Promotion A]
Next, the special performance-based performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 99. The special performance-based performance A is a performance example in which, when a special performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode is started and ended based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 during the performance pattern variation performance (variable display), the currently ongoing performance is promoted to another performance with a higher expectation of winning than the currently ongoing performance.

Here, it is assumed that the game state is a low-probability, low-base state (normal game state or low-probability, non-time-saving state). In a low-probability, low-base state (normal game state or low-probability, non-time-saving state), the normal game state background image HG6 is selected as the normal background image and displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that there are multiple types of normal game state background image, and the normal game state background image HG6 is selected.

The first hold icon 9A moves to the change display position and becomes the change icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 99(A), the change display (change display) of the performance pattern begins. As a result, the second hold icon 9A moves to the first hold icon 9A, and only one hold icon is stored.

As shown in FIG. 99(B), during the change in the performance pattern (changing display), a game ball enters the first start hole 20. In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a performance upgrade performance during the change in performance processing in FIG. 97. When a game ball enters the first start hole 20, a second hold icon 9A is displayed, and two hold icons are stocked.

Here, since it is determined that the performance upgrade performance will not be executed, the special performance that sets the movable body, device, sound, and display screen to special mode is not started, and first the left performance pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1", the right performance pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2", and finally the middle performance pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3", and then, as shown in Figure 99 (C), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as stopped, and as they do not line up to form the same pattern, a miss is confirmed. As a result, the variable icon 9C at the variable display position is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

The first hold icon 9A moves to the change display position and becomes the change icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the change display (change display) of the performance pattern begins. As a result, the second hold icon 9A moves to the first hold icon 9A, and only one hold icon is stored.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(E), first, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "2", then the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2", and the variable performance (variable display) of the center performance symbol 8C continues, forming a reach. Here, while the normal reach performance is in progress, a game ball enters the first start hole 20. Accordingly, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a performance upgrade performance in the variable performance processing in FIG. 97. When the game ball enters the first start hole 20, the second hold icon 9A is displayed, and two hold icons are stocked.

Here, as it is determined that a performance upgrade performance will be executed, a special performance is started in which the movable bodies, devices, sound and display screen are set to a special mode, and as shown in Figures 99 (F) and (G), the movable bodies, that is, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the devices, that is, the performance button 63 and the sword component 65 enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as sound, and of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, specific images, that is, the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, right performance pattern 8R, hold icon 9A, variable icon 9C and the image at the variable display position, are displayed in a vibrating display mode, and an effect image (effect image) BEG that vibrates for the specific image is displayed. In contrast, the normal gameplay state background image HG6 does not go into special mode, the display state remains unchanged without being affected by the special effects, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all on the normal gameplay state background image HG6.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shape of each specific image and is formed to surround each specific shape, and in a trembling display mode, the jagged shape propagates like a wave that vibrates in small increments. Since the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position are in a close positional relationship, and the first hold icon 9A is positioned near the left of the image of the variable display position, the first hold icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the image of the variable display position are formed to be surrounded by one effect image BEG. Of course, the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position may be formed to be surrounded by one effect image BEG, and the first hold icon 9A (when there are multiple hold icons 9A, the entire multiple hold icons 9A) may be formed to be surrounded by one effect image BEG.

When the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, and the movable body, device, sound, and display screen return to their original states (the state of FIG. 99(E)), and the images of the left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C, right performance pattern 8R, hold icon 9A, variable icon 9C, and variable display position are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 99(H), the performance progresses to a battle performance, which is a super reach (SP reach), which is a higher level performance with a higher expectation of winning compared to a normal reach performance, and the performance is upgraded. Note that when the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, and the performance may progress to a battle performance without the movable body, device, sound, and display screen returning to their original states (the state of FIG. 99(E)).

When the game progresses to a battle performance, the background image changes from the normal game state background image HG6 to the Super Reach (SP Reach) SP reach battle performance background image HG7 (the SP reach battle performance background image HG7 is a different background image from the normal game state background image HG6).

In this battle performance, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a super reach performance (SP reach performance) in which the expectation of a win is preset high. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle performance, it is a miss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle performance, it is a win. In addition, in the battle performance, the second movable role 15 may move downward from the retreat position (the position of the second movable role 15 in FIG. 1) to the advance position, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), and then move upward again to return to the retreat position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(I), when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle performance, the ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS1 saying "Defeat" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Afterwards, the background image switches from the SP reach battle performance background image HG7 to the original normal game state background image HG6, the enemy character CRB and message image MS1 are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), the left performance pattern 8L that temporarily stops at the number "2", the middle performance pattern 8C that temporarily stops at the number "1", and the right performance pattern 8R that temporarily stops at the number "2" reappear, and the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position also reappear.

After that, as shown in Figure 99 (J), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same number (here, the number "2") and are displayed stopped, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C in the variable display position is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). After that, when the first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern will begin.

In this way, in the special effect promotion performance A, when the performance pattern change performance (changing display) starts, the timing at which the special effect is executed can be the timing of the ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, in the special effect promotion performance A, the timing at which the special effect is executed is not fixed in advance to the performance currently in progress, but by setting it to the timing of the ball entering the first starting hole 20, the timing at which the special effect is executed can be unspecified. This allows the player to experience the special effect as if it had occurred suddenly, giving the player a sense of surprise.

In addition, in the special effect promotion effect A, following the first surprise of switching to special mode and starting a special effect, the player can be given a second surprise of the currently ongoing effect being promoted to a higher level effect with a higher chance of winning compared to the currently ongoing effect (production promotion effect), allowing the player to be surprised in multiple stages.

In the special performance-based performance upgrade performance A, the movable bodies such as the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 were in their respective retreated positions. However, the movable bodies are activated during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and may enter a special mode while activated. By entering the special mode, the movable bodies, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate. Compared to when they are not activated, the movable bodies suggest to the player that there is a higher chance of winning, or suggest to the player that they will be promoted to a special mode. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the movable bodies.

[Special Effects Enhancement B]
Next, the performance promotion performance B by the special performance will be described with reference to Fig. 100. The performance promotion performance B by the special performance is a performance example in which, when a special performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode is started and ended based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 20 during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern, the currently ongoing performance is promoted to another performance with a higher expectation of winning compared to the currently ongoing performance, and further, when a special performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode is started and ended based on a game ball entering the general winning hole 27 in the promoted performance, the currently ongoing promoted performance is further promoted to another performance with a higher expectation of winning compared to the currently ongoing promoted performance.

Here, it is assumed that the game state is a low-probability, low-base state (normal game state or low-probability, non-time-saving state). In a low-probability, low-base state (normal game state or low-probability, non-time-saving state), the normal game state background image HG6 is selected as the normal background image and displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that there are multiple types of normal game state background image, and the normal game state background image HG6 is selected.

The first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes variable icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 100(A), the variable display of the performance pattern starts. As a result, no hold icons are stored at all.

As shown in FIG. 100(B), during the change in the performance pattern (changing display), a game ball enters the first start hole 20. In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a performance upgrade performance during the change in performance processing in FIG. 97. When a game ball enters the first start hole 20, the first hold icon 9A is displayed, and only one hold icon is stored.

Here, as it is determined that a performance upgrade performance will be executed, a special performance is started in which the movable bodies, devices, sound and display screen are set to a special mode, and as shown in Figures 100 (C) and (D), the movable bodies, that is, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the devices, that is, the performance button 63 and the sword component 65 enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as sound, and of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, specific images, that is, the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, right performance pattern 8R, hold icon 9A, variable icon 9C and the image at the variable display position, are displayed in a vibrating display mode, and a vibrating effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed for the specific images. In contrast, the normal gameplay state background image HG6 does not go into special mode, the display state remains unchanged without being affected by the special effects, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all on the normal gameplay state background image HG6.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shape of each specific image and is formed to surround each specific shape, and in a trembling display mode, the jagged shape propagates like a wave that vibrates in small increments. Since the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position are in a close positional relationship, and the first hold icon 9A is positioned near the left of the image of the variable display position, the first hold icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the image of the variable display position are formed to be surrounded by one effect image BEG. Of course, the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position may be formed to be surrounded by one effect image BEG, and the first hold icon 9A (when there are multiple hold icons 9A, the entire multiple hold icons 9A) may be formed to be surrounded by one effect image BEG.

When the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, and the movable body, device, sound, and display screen return to their original states (the states of FIG. 100(B)), and the images of the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, the right performance pattern 8R, the hold icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 100(E), while it is unclear whether a reach will be formed, or before a reach is formed, the performance progresses to a battle performance, which is a super reach (SP reach), which is a higher-level performance with a high expectation of a win, and the performance is upgraded. Note that when the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, and the movable body, device, sound, and display screen may be allowed to progress to a battle performance without returning to their original states (the states of FIG. 100(B)).

When the game progresses to a battle performance, the background image changes from the normal game state background image HG6 to the Super Reach (SP Reach) SP reach battle performance background image HG7 (the SP reach battle performance background image HG7 is a different background image from the normal game state background image HG6).

In this battle performance, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a super reach performance (SP reach performance) in which the expectation of a win is preset high. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle performance, it is a miss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle performance, it is a win. In addition, in the battle performance, the second movable role 15 may move downward from the retreat position (the position of the second movable role 15 in FIG. 1) to the advance position, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), and then move upward again to return to the retreat position.

As shown in FIG. 100(F), the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight while changing positions, and during the battle effect, a game ball enters the general winning hole 27. In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the effect upgrade effect in the variable effect processing in FIG. 97.

Here, as it has been determined that a performance upgrade performance should be executed, a special performance is started again with the movable bodies, devices, sound and display screen in a special mode, and as shown in Figures 100 (G) and (H), the movable bodies, that is, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the devices, that is, the performance button 63 and sword component 65, enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as sound, and of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, specific images, the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, are displayed in a vibrating mode, and a vibrating effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed for the specific image. In contrast, the SP reach battle performance background image HG7 does not go into special mode, the display mode remains unchanged without being affected by the special performance, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all on the SP reach battle performance background image HG7.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shapes of the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, and is formed to surround the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, respectively, and in the vibrating display mode, the jagged parts propagate like small vibrating waves.

When the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable body, device, sound and display screen are released, the movable body, device, sound and display screen return to their original states (the states in Fig. 100(F)), and as shown in Fig. 100(I), the performance progresses to a super battle performance, which is a super reach (SP reach), a higher level performance with a higher chance of winning compared to the battle performance, and the performance is further upgraded. Note that when the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable body, device, sound and display screen may be released, and the performance may progress to a super battle performance without the movable body, device, sound and display screen returning to their original states (the states in Fig. 100(F)).

When the game progresses to the Super Battle performance, the background image changes from the SP Reach Battle performance background image HG7 to the Super Reach (SP Reach) SP Reach Super Battle performance background image HG8 (the SP Reach Super Battle performance background image HG8 is a different background image from the normal game state background image HG6 and the SP Reach Battle performance background image HG7).

The super battle performance is a super reach (reach) performance, which is a reach performance with a higher expectation of winning than the battle performance. In the super battle performance, the ally character CRA transforms into a type with wings, and fights the enemy character CRB with increased fighting power. In the super battle performance, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, it is a miss, whereas in the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, it is a win. In the super battle performance, the second movable role 15 may move downward from the retreat position (the position of the second movable role 15 in FIG. 1) to the advance position, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), and then move upward again to return to the retreat position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(J), in the super battle performance, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS1 saying "Defeat" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Afterwards, the background image switches from the SP Reach Super Battle performance background image HG8 to the original normal game state background image HG6, the enemy character CRB and message image MS1 are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), the left performance pattern 8L that temporarily stops at the number "1", the middle performance pattern 8C that temporarily stops at the number "2", and the right performance pattern 8R that temporarily stops at the number "3" reappear, and the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position also reappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(K), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same numbers and are displayed as stopped, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C in the variable display position is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). After that, when the first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern will begin.

In this way, in the special effect promotion effect B, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern begins, the timing at which the special effect is executed can be the timing of the ball entering the first starting hole 20 or the general winning hole 27. In other words, in the special effect promotion effect B, the timing at which the special effect is executed is not fixed in advance to the currently ongoing effect, but can be made unspecified by setting it to the timing of the ball entering the first starting hole 20 or the general winning hole 27. This allows the player to experience the special effect as if it had occurred suddenly, giving the player a sense of surprise.

In addition, in the special effect promotion effect B, following the first surprise of switching to special mode and starting a special effect, the player can be given a second surprise of the currently ongoing effect being promoted to a higher level effect with a higher expectation of a win compared to the currently ongoing effect (production promotion effect), allowing the player to be surprised in multiple stages.

In the special performance-based performance upgrade performance B, the movable bodies such as the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 were in their respective retreated positions. However, the movable bodies are activated during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and may enter a special mode while activated. By entering the special mode, the movable bodies, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate. The movable bodies suggest to the player that there is a higher chance of winning compared to when they are not activated, or suggest to the player that they will be promoted to a special mode. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the movable bodies.

[Special Effects Promotion C]
Next, the performance promotion performance C by the special performance will be described with reference to Fig. 101. The performance promotion performance C by the special performance is a performance example in which a reach is formed during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and develops into a super reach (SP reach), and when a special performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode is started and ended based on a game ball entering the general winning port 27 during the progress of the super reach (SP reach) performance, the currently ongoing super reach (SP reach) performance is promoted to another performance with a higher expectation of winning compared to the currently ongoing super reach (SP reach) performance.

Here, it is assumed that the game state is a low-probability, low-base state (normal game state or low-probability, non-time-saving state). In a low-probability, low-base state (normal game state or low-probability, non-time-saving state), the normal game state background image HG6 is selected as the normal background image and displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that there are multiple types of normal game state background image, and the normal game state background image HG6 is selected.

The first hold icon 9A moves to the change display position and becomes the change icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 101(A), the change display (change display) of the performance pattern begins. As a result, the second hold icon 9A moves to the first hold icon 9A, and only one hold icon is stored.

During the change in the performance pattern (changing display), a game ball enters the first start hole 20. In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a performance upgrade performance in the process during the change in performance in FIG. 97. When a game ball enters the first start hole 20, the second hold icon 9A is displayed, and two hold icons are stocked.

Here, since it is determined that the performance upgrade performance will not be executed, the special performance that sets the movable body, device, sound, and display screen to special mode is not started, and first the left performance pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1", the right performance pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2", and finally the middle performance pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3", and then, as shown in Figure 101 (B), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as stopped, and as they do not line up to form the same pattern, a miss is confirmed. As a result, the variable icon 9C at the variable display position is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

The first hold icon 9A moves to the change display position and becomes the change icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 101(C), the change display (change display) of the performance pattern begins. As a result, the second hold icon 9A moves to the first hold icon 9A, and only one hold icon is stored.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101(D), first the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "2", then the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2", and the variable performance (variable display) of the center performance symbol 8C continues, forming a reach. After this reach is formed, it then develops into a battle performance, which is a super reach (SP reach), as shown in FIG. 101(E).

When the battle performance progresses, the background image changes from the normal game state background image HG6 to the Super Reach (SP Reach) SP reach battle performance background image HG7 (the SP reach battle performance background image HG7 is a different background image from the normal game state background image HG6), and the images of the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, right performance pattern 8R, hold icon 9A, change icon 9C, and change display position become hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a).

In this battle performance, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a super reach performance (SP reach performance) in which the expectation of a win is preset high. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle performance, it is a miss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle performance, it is a win. In addition, in the battle performance, the second movable role 15 may move downward from the retreat position (the position of the second movable role 15 in FIG. 1) to the advance position, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), and then move upward again to return to the retreat position.

As shown in FIG. 101(F), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight while changing positions, and during the battle effect, a game ball enters the general winning hole 27. In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the effect upgrade effect in the variable effect processing in FIG. 97.

Here, as it has been determined that a performance upgrade performance should be executed, a special performance is started again with the movable bodies, devices, sound and display screen in a special mode, and as shown in Figures 101 (G) and (H), the movable bodies, that is, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the devices, that is, the performance button 63 and sword component 65, enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as sound, and of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, specific images, the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, are displayed in a vibrating mode, and a vibrating effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed for the specific image. In contrast, the SP reach battle performance background image HG7 does not go into special mode, the display mode remains unchanged without being affected by the special performance, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all on the SP reach battle performance background image HG7.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shapes of the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, and is formed to surround the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, respectively, and in the vibrating display mode, the jagged parts propagate like small vibrating waves.

When the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable objects, devices, sounds and display screen are released, the movable objects, devices, sounds and display screen return to their original states (the states in Figure 101 (F)), and as shown in Figure 101 (I), the enemy character CRB is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and to inform players that they are about to progress to a super battle performance, which is a super reach (SP reach), the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a and a message image MS2 saying "It's a super battle performance!" is displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. At this time, a voice of the voice actor who voices the ally character CRA, saying "It's a super battle performance", which is the same as the message image MS, is played from the speaker 67.

Then, the ally character CRA and message image MS2 are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 101(J), the effect progresses to a super battle effect, which is a super reach (SP reach), a higher-ranked effect with a higher chance of winning compared to the battle effect, and the effect is upgraded. When it progresses to a super battle effect, the background image switches from the SP reach battle effect background image HG7 to the SP reach super battle effect background image HG8 of the super reach (SP reach) (the SP reach super battle effect background image HG8 is a different background image from the normal game state background image HG6 and the SP reach battle effect background image HG7).

The super battle performance is a super reach (reach) performance, which is a reach performance with a higher expectation of winning than the battle performance. In the super battle performance, the ally character CRA transforms into a type with wings, and fights the enemy character CRB with increased fighting power. In the super battle performance, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, it is a miss, whereas in the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, it is a win. In the super battle performance, the second movable role 15 may move downward from the retreat position (the position of the second movable role 15 in FIG. 1) to the advance position, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), and then move upward again to return to the retreat position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101(K), in the super battle performance, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS1 saying "Defeat" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Afterwards, the background image switches from the SP Reach Super Battle performance background image HG8 to the original normal game state background image HG6, the enemy character CRB and message image MS1 are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), the left performance pattern 8L that temporarily stops at the number "2", the middle performance pattern 8C that temporarily stops at the number "1", and the right performance pattern 8R that temporarily stops at the number "2" reappear, and the reserved icon 9A, variable icon 9C and variable display position image also reappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (L), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same number (here, the number "2") and are displayed stopped, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C in the variable display position is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). After that, when the first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern will begin.

In this way, in the special effect promotion effect C, the timing at which the special effect is executed while the super reach (SP reach) effect is in progress can be the timing of the ball entering the general winning port 27. In other words, in the special effect promotion effect C, the timing at which the special effect is executed is not fixed in advance to the effect currently in progress, but by setting it to the timing of the ball entering the general winning port 27, the timing at which the special effect is executed can be unspecified. This allows the player to experience the special effect as if it had occurred suddenly, giving the player a sense of surprise.

In addition, in the special effect promotion effect C, following the first surprise of switching to special mode and starting a special effect, the player can be given a second surprise of the currently ongoing effect being promoted to a higher level effect with a higher chance of winning compared to the currently ongoing effect (production promotion effect), allowing the player to be surprised in multiple stages.

In the special performance-based performance upgrade performance C, the movable bodies such as the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 were in their respective retreated positions. However, the movable bodies are activated during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and may enter a special mode while activated. By entering the special mode, the movable bodies, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate. Compared to when they are not activated, the movable bodies suggest to the player that there is a higher chance of winning, or suggest to the player that they will be promoted to a special mode. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the movable bodies.

[Special Effects for Promotion D]
Next, the special performance-based performance D will be described with reference to Fig. 102. The special performance-based performance D is a performance example in which, in a chance time performance in which the game state is a low probability high base state (low probability time-shortened state), a special performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode is started and ended based on a game ball entering (passing) the gate 28 during a performance pattern variation performance (variable display), and the currently ongoing performance is promoted to another performance with a higher expectation of a win compared to the currently ongoing performance.

Here, five games have been played by hitting the right hand (five winning/losing results have already been obtained by the change performance (change display) of the performance pattern). At this time, only one reserved icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 102(A), since the chance time performance is in progress, a chance time background image HG1 in the chance time performance in a low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state) is displayed on the display screen 7a. On the upper left side of the display screen 7a, a chance time image YG1 called "Chance Time" is displayed, which notifies the user that this is a chance time performance in a low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state). On the lower left side of the display screen 7a, since five games have already been played, a remaining time-saving number image NMG called "Remaining: 95 times" indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed. On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a right-hit image MYG with "Right hit" written in a right arrow image is displayed, so that the user can play by hitting the right hand. After five games have been played, the left performance symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped number "2", and the center performance symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped number "3", and the symbols do not line up, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C at the variable display position is no longer displayed (it has disappeared from the display screen 7a).

The first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes variable icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 102(B), the variable display of the performance pattern starts. As a result, the remaining time-saving number image NMG is updated to show "Remaining: 94 times", and no hold icons are stored.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(C), during the change in the performance pattern (changing display), a game ball enters the second start hole 21. In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a performance upgrade performance in the process during the change in performance in FIG. 97. When a game ball enters the second start hole 21, the first reserve icon 9A is displayed, and only one reserve icon is stored.

Here, since it is determined that the performance upgrade performance will not be executed, the special performance that sets the movable body, device, sound, and display screen to special mode is not started, and first the left performance pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2", the right performance pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "6", and finally the middle performance pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "4", and then, as shown in Figure 102 (D), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as stopped patterns, and as they do not line up to form the same pattern, a miss is confirmed. As a result, the variable icon 9C at the variable display position is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

The first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes variable icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 102(E), the variable display of the performance pattern (variable display) begins. As a result, the remaining time-saving number of times image NMG is updated to show "Remaining: 93 times", and no hold icons are stored at all.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(F), during the changing effect (changing display) of the effect pattern, the game ball enters (passes through) gate 28. In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the effect upgrade effect in the process during the changing effect in FIG. 97.

Here, as it is determined that an upgrade effect will be executed, a special effect is started again with the movable bodies, devices, sound and display screen in a special mode, and as shown in Figures 102 (G) and (H), the movable bodies, that is, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the devices, that is, the effect button 63 and the sword component 65, enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as sound, and of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, specific images, that is, the chance time image YG1, left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, right performance pattern 8R, remaining time-saving count image NMG, variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position, are displayed in a vibrating display mode, and an effect image (effect image) BEG that vibrates for the specific image is displayed. In contrast, the right hit image MYG and chance time background image HG1 do not go into special mode, the display state remains unchanged without being affected by the special effects, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all for the right hit image MYG and chance time background image HG1.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shape of each specific image and is formed to surround each specific shape, and in a trembling display mode, the jagged portion propagates like a wave that vibrates in small increments. Note that since the variable icon 9C and the image at the variable table position are in a close positional relationship, the variable icon 9C and the image at the variable table position are formed to be surrounded by a single effect image BEG.

When a special effect is being executed, a game ball enters the second start hole 21. However, since the special effect has been executed and the timing for the special effect to end has not yet been reached, no determination is made in the variable effect processing in FIG. 97 as to whether or not to execute an effect promotion effect. When a game ball enters the second start hole 21, the first hold icon 9B is displayed, and one hold icon is stocked.

When a single game ball enters the second starting hole 21 while a special effect is being performed and the first hold icon 9B is displayed, this first hold icon 9B is also included in the specific image, so the first hold icon 9B also goes into a special mode and is displayed in a vibrating manner, and an effect image (BEG) is displayed.

By displaying the first hold icon 9B, the change icon 9C and the image of the change display position are in a close positional relationship, and the first hold icon 9B is positioned near the right of the image of the change display position, so the first hold icon 9B, the change icon 9C, and the image of the change display position are surrounded by one effect image BEG. Of course, the change icon 9C and the image of the change display position may be surrounded by one effect image BEG, and the first hold icon 9B (when there are multiple hold icons 9B, all of the multiple hold icons 9B) may be surrounded by one effect image BEG.

When the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, and the movable body, device, sound, and display screen return to their original states (the state of FIG. 102(F)), and the images of the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, the right performance pattern 8R, the hold icon 9B, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 102(I), while it is unclear whether a reach will be formed, or before a reach is formed, the performance progresses to a battle performance, which is a super reach (SP reach), which is a higher-level performance with a high expectation of a hit, and the performance is upgraded. Note that when the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, and the movable body, device, sound, and display screen may be allowed to progress to a battle performance without returning to their original states (the state of FIG. 102(F)).

When the battle performance progresses, the background image changes from the chance time background image HG1 to the Super Reach (SP Reach) SP reach battle performance background image HG7 (the SP reach battle performance background image HG7 is a different background image from the chance time background image HG1).

In this battle performance, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a super reach performance (SP reach performance) in which the expectation of a win is preset high. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle performance, it is a miss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle performance, it is a win. In addition, in the battle performance, the second movable role 15 may move downward from the retreat position (the position of the second movable role 15 in FIG. 1) to the advance position, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), and then move upward again to return to the retreat position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(I), when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, the ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS1 saying "Defeat" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Afterwards, the background image switches from the SP reach battle performance background image HG7 to the original chance time background image HG1, the enemy character CRB and message image MS1 are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), the left performance pattern 8L that temporarily stops at the number "1", the middle performance pattern 8C that temporarily stops at the number "3", and the right performance pattern 8R that temporarily stops at the number "5" reappear, and the hold icon 9B, variable icon 9C and variable display position image also reappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(J), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same numbers and are displayed as stopped, confirming a miss. As a result, the variable icon 9C in the variable display position is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). After that, when the first hold icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 102(K), the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern begins. As a result, the remaining time-saving number image NMG is updated to display "Remaining: 92 times", and no hold icons are stocked at all.

In this way, in the special effect-based performance promotion performance D, when the performance pattern variation performance (variable display) starts in the chance time performance in which the game state is a low probability high base state (low probability time-saving state), the timing at which the special effect is executed can be the timing of the ball entering (passing through) gate 28. In other words, in the special effect-based performance promotion performance D, the timing at which the special effect is executed is not fixed in advance to the performance currently in progress, but by setting it to the timing of the ball entering (passing through) gate 28, the timing at which the special effect is executed can be unspecified. This allows the player to experience the special effect as if it had occurred suddenly, giving the player a sense of surprise.

In addition, in the special effect promotion effect D, following the first surprise of switching to special mode and starting a special effect, the player can be given a second surprise of the currently ongoing effect being promoted to a higher level effect with a higher chance of winning compared to the currently ongoing effect (production promotion effect), allowing the player to be surprised in multiple stages.

In the special performance-based performance upgrade performance D, the movable bodies such as the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 were in their respective retreated positions. However, the movable bodies are activated during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and may enter a special mode while activated. By entering the special mode, the movable bodies, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate. The movable bodies suggest to the player that the probability of winning is higher than when they are not activated, or suggest to the player that they will be promoted to a certain probability. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the movable bodies.

[Special Effects Promotion E]
Next, the performance promotion performance E by the special performance will be described with reference to Fig. 103. The performance promotion performance E by the special performance is an example of a performance example in which, during a probability change in which the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-shortening state), a reach is formed during a performance pattern variation performance (variation display), and the performance develops into a super reach (SP reach), and when a special performance in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode is started and ended based on a game ball entering (passing) the gate 28 during the progress of the super reach (SP reach) performance, the currently ongoing super reach (SP reach) performance is promoted to another performance with a higher expectation of winning than the currently ongoing super reach (SP reach) performance.

Here, five games have been played by hitting the right hand (five winning/losing results have already been obtained through the changing performance (changing display) of the performance pattern). The sixth game is currently being played, and the performance pattern is changing (changing display). At this time, no reserved icons are stocked. As shown in FIG. 103(A), since the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-saving state), a high probability background image HG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image indicating that the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-saving state). On the upper left side of the display screen 7a, a high probability image YG2 is displayed, indicating that the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-saving state). On the lower left side of the display screen 7a, since the sixth game is currently being played, a remaining time-saving number image NMG, indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving number is remaining, is displayed, indicating that the remaining number of times the time-saving number is remaining, indicating that the game state is in a high probability high base state (high probability time-saving state). A right-hit image MYG with "right hit" written inside a right arrow image is displayed on the top right side of the display screen 7a, to encourage playing by hitting the right side. Because the sixth game is being played, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are undergoing a variable performance (variable display), and a variable icon 9C is placed on the image at the variable display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103(B), first, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "1", then the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "1", and the variable performance (variable display) of the middle performance symbol 8C continues, forming a reach. Here, while the normal reach performance is in progress, a game ball enters the second start hole 21. Accordingly, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a performance upgrade performance in the variable performance processing in FIG. 97. When the game ball enters the second start hole 21, the first hold icon 9B is displayed, and one hold icon is stocked.

Here, as a result of it being determined that an upgraded performance will be executed, a special performance is started in which the movable bodies, devices, sound and display screen are set to a special mode, and as shown in Figures 103 (C) and (D), the movable bodies, that is, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the devices, that is, the performance button 63 and the sword component 65, enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as sound, and of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, certain images, that is, the special bonus image YG2, left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, right performance pattern 8R, hold icon 9B, variable icon 9C and the image at the variable display position, are displayed in a vibrating mode, and an effect image (effect image) BEG that vibrates for the certain images is displayed. In contrast, the right-hit image MYG and the variable probability background image HG2 do not enter the special mode, and the display state remains unchanged without being affected by the special effects, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all for the right-hit image MYG and the variable probability background image HG2.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shape of each specific image and is formed to surround each specific shape, and in a trembling display mode, the jagged shape propagates like a wave that vibrates in small increments. Since the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position are in a close positional relationship, and the first hold icon 9B is located near the right of the image of the variable display position, the first hold icon 9B, the variable icon 9C, and the image of the variable display position are formed to be surrounded by one effect image BEG. Of course, the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position may be formed to be surrounded by one effect image BEG, and the first hold icon 9B (when there are multiple hold icons 9B, the entire multiple hold icons 9B) may be formed to be surrounded by one effect image BEG.

When the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, and the movable body, device, sound, and display screen return to their original states (the states of FIG. 103(B)), with the images of the left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C, right performance pattern 8R, hold icon 9B, variable icon 9C, and variable display position no longer displayed (disappearing from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 103(E), the performance progresses to a battle performance, which is a super reach (SP reach), which is a higher level performance with a higher expectation of winning compared to a normal reach performance, and the performance is upgraded. Note that when the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are released, and the performance may progress to a battle performance without the movable body, device, sound, and display screen returning to their original states (the states of FIG. 103(B)).

When the game progresses to a battle performance, the background image changes from the special probability background image HG2 to the Super Reach (SP Reach) SP reach battle performance background image HG7 (the SP reach battle performance background image HG7 is a different background image from the special probability background image HG2).

In this battle performance, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a super reach performance (SP reach performance) in which the expectation of a win is preset high. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle performance, it is a miss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle performance, it is a win. In addition, in the battle performance, the second movable role 15 may move downward from the retreat position (the position of the second movable role 15 in FIG. 1) to the advance position, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), and then move upward again to return to the retreat position.

As shown in FIG. 103(F), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight while changing positions, and during the battle presentation, the game ball enters (passes through) the gate 28. In response to this, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a presentation upgrade presentation in the process during the variable presentation in FIG. 97.

Here, as it has been determined that a performance upgrade performance should be executed, a special performance is started again with the movable bodies, devices, sound and display screen in a special mode, and as shown in Figures 103 (G) and (H), the movable bodies, that is, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69) enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and the devices, that is, the performance button 63 and sword component 65, enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate, and a vibrating sound effect (effect sound) is played from the speaker 67 as sound, and of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, specific images, the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, are displayed in a vibrating mode, and a vibrating effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed for the specific image. In contrast, the right hit image MYG and the SP reach battle performance background image HG7 do not go into special mode, the display state remains unchanged without being affected by the special performance, and the vibrating effect image BEG is not displayed at all for the right hit image MYG and the SP reach battle performance background image HG7.

The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shapes of the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, and is formed to surround the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, respectively, and in the vibrating display mode, the jagged parts propagate like small vibrating waves.

When the special performance ends, the special modes of the movable objects, devices, sounds and display screen are released, the movable objects, devices, sounds and display screen return to their original states (the states in Figure 103 (F)), and as shown in Figure 103 (I), the enemy character CRB is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and to inform players that they are about to progress to a super battle performance, which is a super reach (SP reach), the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a and a message image MS2 saying "It's a super battle performance!" is displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. At this time, a voice of the voice actor who plays the ally character CRA, saying "It's a super battle performance", which is the same as the message image MS, is played from the speaker 67.

In addition, the background image will switch from the Super Reach (SP Reach) SP Reach Battle Presentation Background Image HG7 to a confirmed win premium background image HG9 that notifies the player of a confirmed win (the confirmed win premium background image HG9 is a different background image from the special win background image HG2 and the SP Reach Battle Presentation Background Image HG7, and is a premium background image that rarely appears).

Then, the ally character CRA and message image MS2 are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 103(J), the effect progresses to a super battle effect, which is a super reach (SP reach), a higher level effect with a higher chance of winning compared to the battle effect, and the effect is upgraded further. When it progresses to the super battle effect, the background image remains the guaranteed win premium background image HG9, and does not switch to the SP reach super battle effect background image HG8, which is the background image that corresponds to the super battle effect.

The super battle performance is a super reach (reach) performance, which is a reach performance with a higher expectation of winning than the battle performance. In the super battle performance, the ally character CRA transforms into a type with wings, and fights the enemy character CRB with increased fighting power. In the super battle performance, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, it is a miss, whereas in the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, it is a win. In the super battle performance, the second movable role 15 may move downward from the retreat position (the position of the second movable role 15 in FIG. 1) to the advance position, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), and then move upward again to return to the retreat position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103(K), when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the super battle performance, the enemy character CRB is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS3 saying "Victory" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103(L), the ally character CRA and message image MS3 are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and the left performance pattern 8L that temporarily stops at the number "1", the middle performance pattern 8C that temporarily stops at the number "1", and the right performance pattern 8R that temporarily stops at the number "1" appear again.

Then, the left performance symbol 8L, the center performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are displayed without lining up with the same number (here, the number "1"), and a win is confirmed. After that, a jackpot opening is performed, and the game enters a jackpot game state, and the jackpot performance begins.

In this way, in the special effect-based performance promotion performance E, when the performance pattern variation performance (variation display) starts during a probability bonus in which the game state is a high probability high base state (high probability time-saving state), the timing at which the special effect is executed can be the timing of the ball entering the second start port 21 or the timing of the ball entering (passing through) the gate 28. In other words, in the special effect-based performance promotion performance E, the timing at which the special effect is executed is not fixed in advance to the performance currently in progress, but can be the timing of the ball entering the second start port 21 or the timing of the ball entering (passing through) the gate 28, making it possible to make the timing at which the special effect is executed unspecified. This allows the player to experience the special effect as if it had occurred suddenly, giving the player a sense of surprise.

In addition, in the special effect promotion effect E, following the first surprise of switching to special mode and starting a special effect, the player can be given a second surprise of the currently ongoing effect being promoted to a higher level effect with a higher chance of winning compared to the currently ongoing effect (production promotion effect), allowing the player to be surprised in multiple stages.

In the special performance-based performance upgrade performance E, the movable bodies such as the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 were in their respective retreated positions. However, the movable bodies are activated during the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and may enter a special mode while activated. By entering the special mode, the movable bodies, the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), enter a vibration mode in which they vibrate. Compared to when they are not activated, the movable bodies suggest to the player that there is a higher chance of winning, or suggest to the player that they will be promoted to a special mode. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the movable bodies.

Note that gaming machines that perform special effects while the symbols are changing are known (for example, JP 2020-178995 A). However, in such gaming machines, the special effects occur at set times, so the player is not surprised by the occurrence of the special effects, and there is still room for improvement in technology to increase the interest of the game.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of special effects that can be used to upgrade the performance.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with receiving sections such as a first starting port 20, a second starting port 21, a general winning port 27, and a gate that can receive gaming balls, an image display device 7 (display means) that can display multiple types of images, and a performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) and an image control microcomputer 101 (performance execution means) that can execute multiple types of performances. The performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) and the image control microcomputer 101 (performance execution means) are capable of executing a first performance in which, based on the start of a performance pattern variation performance and the reception of a game ball in the reception section, a specific image (e.g., an image of "Chance Time", an image of a performance pattern, an image indicating the number of remaining time reductions, an image of a reserved icon, an image of a variable icon, an image of a variable display position, an image of a character) among the images displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is changed from a display mode that is not vibrating to a display mode that vibrates (from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode) (Figures 99 (E) to (G) in performance promotion performance A by special performance, and 100(B)-(D), (F)-(H), for special effect promotion performance C, Fig. 101(F)-(H), for special effect promotion performance D, Fig. 102(F)-(H), for special effect promotion performance E, Fig. 103(B)-(D), (F)-(H)), after the first performance is completed, a second performance can be executed in which the currently ongoing performance is transitioned to a performance different from the currently ongoing performance (special effect promotion performance A, Fig. 99(H), for special effect promotion performance B, Fig. 100(E), (I), for special effect promotion performance C, Fig. 101(I), for special effect promotion performance D, Fig. 102(H), for special effect promotion performance E, Fig. 103(E), (I)). According to this configuration, the variation performance of the performance pattern is started, and the specific image is changed from the first state to the second state different from the first state based on the reception of the game ball in the receiving section, and then the currently ongoing performance can be shifted to a different performance from the currently ongoing performance. In other words, the timing at which the specific image shifts from the first state to the second state can be set to a timing based on the reception of the game ball in the receiving section, rather than a timing determined after the start of the variation performance of the performance pattern. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of surprise when the specific image shifts from the first state to the second state, since the timing at which the specific image shifts from the first state to the second state can be made unspecified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the variation of the performance symbols is started, the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) and the image control microcomputer 101 (performance execution means) may execute the first performance in any of the following states: the performance symbols are varying, the reach is formed, and the super reach performance is developed. For example, in the performance promotion performance A by the special performance, when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 in the reach of FIG. 99 (E) is formed, the first performance is started. In the performance promotion performance B by the special performance, when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 in the performance symbols of FIG. 100 (B) are varying, the first performance is started, or when the game ball enters the general winning hole 27 in the battle performance, which is the super reach performance of FIG. 100 (F), the first performance is started. In the special performance promotion performance C, when the game ball enters the general winning hole 27 in a state where the game has developed into the battle performance, which is the super reach performance in Fig. 101 (F), the first performance is started. In the special performance promotion performance D, when the game ball enters (passes) the gate 28 in a state where the performance pattern in Fig. 102 (F) is fluctuating, the first performance is started. In the special performance promotion performance E, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21 in a state where the reach in Fig. 103 (B) is formed, the first performance is started, or when the game ball enters (passes) the gate 28 in a state where the game has developed into the battle performance, which is the super reach performance in Fig. 103 (F), the first performance is started. According to this configuration, when the variation of the performance symbols starts, the first performance may be executed in any of the following states: the performance symbols are varying, a reach is formed, and the performance has progressed to a super reach performance. Therefore, the first performance is executed in various performance scenes, and even in the same performance, there are cases where the first performance is executed and cases where the second performance is not executed, and the variety of performances can be increased. This makes it difficult for the performance to lose its novelty, and suppresses a decline in motivation to play.

[Effect 3]
In the first effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect image BEG appears on the specific image by changing the specific image from a display mode that does not vibrate to a display mode that vibrates (from the first mode to the second mode). The effect image BEG has a jagged shape that matches the shape of each specific image, and is formed so as to surround each specific shape, resulting in a vibrating display mode. In the vibrating display mode, the jagged portion propagates like a wave that vibrates in small increments. According to this configuration, the appearance of the effect image BEG makes it possible to emphasize and display the specific image in the vibrating display mode (second mode).

[Effect 4]
In the second performance in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to move from the currently ongoing performance to a higher performance with a higher expectation of winning compared to the currently ongoing performance. For example, in the performance promotion performance A by the special performance, the performance is promoted by developing from the normal reach performance of FIG. 99(E) to the battle performance which is the super reach performance of FIG. 99(H), and the performance is promoted. In the performance promotion performance B by the special performance, while it is not known whether the reach of FIG. 100(E) will be formed, or before the reach is formed, the performance is promoted by developing to the battle performance which is the super reach (SP reach) of FIG. 100(E), and the performance is promoted, and the battle performance of FIG. 100(F) is developed to the super battle performance which is the super reach (SP reach) of FIG. 100(I), and the performance is further promoted. In the special performance C, the battle performance, which is the super reach performance in Fig. 101(F), develops into the super battle performance, which is the super reach performance in Fig. 101(J), and the performance is upgraded to a higher level performance with a higher expectation of winning. In the special performance D, the performance is upgraded to the battle performance, which is the super reach (SP reach) in Fig. 102(H), and the performance is upgraded while it is still unclear whether the reach in Fig. 102(F) will be formed, or before the reach is formed. In the special performance promotion performance E, the normal reach performance of FIG. 103(B) develops into a battle performance that is a super reach performance of FIG. 103(E), which is a transition to a higher-level performance with a higher expectation of winning, and the performance is promoted, and the battle performance of FIG. 103(F) develops into a super battle performance that is a super reach (SP reach) of FIG. 103(J), which is a transition to a higher-level performance with a higher expectation of winning, and the performance is further promoted. According to this configuration, the performance can be promoted from the currently ongoing performance to a higher-level performance with a higher expectation of winning compared to the currently ongoing performance, so that the progress of the performance can be made less monotonous. In addition, since the timing at which a specific image transitions from the first mode to the second mode can be made unspecified, the execution of the second performance can also be made unspecified, and a performance that has never been seen before, in which the performance suddenly transitions to a higher-level performance with a higher expectation of winning, can be provided to the player.

[Effect 5]
The receiving sections in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment are the first start port 20, the second start port 21, the general winning port 27, and the gate 28. Since the game area 3 of the game board 2 is provided with receiving sections such as the first start port 20, the second start port 21, the general winning port 27, and the gate 28, there are many opportunities for a gaming ball flowing down the game area 3 to enter one of the receiving sections, and the player can have more opportunities to experience the first and second presentations.

[Modification]
Below are some variations on the special effects that can be used to upgrade the performance.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special effect promotion performance A of FIG. 99, the special effect promotion performance B of FIG. 100, the special effect promotion performance C of FIG. 101, the special effect promotion performance D of FIG. 102, and the special effect promotion performance E of FIG. 103, when the special effect in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in the special mode is started, an effect image (effect image) BEG that vibrates is displayed for a specific image among the images displayed on the display screen 7a. This effect image (effect image) BEG has a jagged shape according to the shape of each specific image, and is formed so as to surround each specific shape. However, the effect image (effect image) BEG may have another shape. Even if the effect image (effect image) BEG has another shape, the same effect as the effect of the effect image (effect image) BEG having a jagged shape in this embodiment can be achieved. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example of the special effect.

The effect image BEG may be a predetermined shape (for example, a star shape, a square shape, a triangle shape, a circle shape, a diamond shape). For example, in the case of a star shape, as shown in FIG. 104(A), a star-shaped effect image BEG larger than the vertical distance dimension of the stopped and displayed performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed, and during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a star-shaped effect image BEG is displayed that is approximately the same as the horizontal distance dimension of the variable area or larger than the vertical distance dimension of the stopped and displayed performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and a star-shaped effect image BEG larger than the vertical distance dimension of the chance time image YG1 is displayed, and a star-shaped effect image BEG larger than the vertical distance dimension of the remaining time reduction count image NMG is displayed. It is also possible to display a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG that is larger than the distance dimension in the vertical direction, to display a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG that is larger than the distance dimension in the vertical direction by integrating the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position, to display a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG that is larger than the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the reserved icons 9A and 9B, and to display a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG that is larger than the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the ally character CRA (or the enemy character CRB when the enemy character CRB appears instead of the ally character CRA).

In addition, the effect image BEG may be a specific shape (e.g., a star shape, a square shape, a triangle shape, a circle shape, a diamond shape), and the effect image BEG may revolve around a specific image in an orbit in the forward and backward directions while tilting in a specific direction. For example, in the case of a star shape, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed which is approximately one size larger than the size of the vertical distance dimension of the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A, 9B, and the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed so as to rotate in an orbit in the front-to-back direction while slanting upward to the right with respect to the stopped and displayed performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed so as to rotate in an orbit in the front-to-back direction while slanting upward to the right so as to pass through both ends of the horizontal distance dimension of the variable area, the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed so as to rotate in an orbit in the front-to-back direction while slanting upward to the right so as to pass through both ends of the horizontal direction of the chance time image YG1, and the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed so as to rotate in an orbit in the front-to-back direction while slanting upward to the right so as to pass through both ends of the horizontal direction of the remaining time-saving count image NMG. Also, a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG having a size similar to the size of the vertical distance dimension of the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A, 9B is displayed so as to trace an orbit in the front-to-back direction while inclining upward to the right so as to pass through the lower left and upper right sides of the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position integrated, and the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG is displayed so as to trace an orbit in the front-to-back direction while inclining upward to the right so as to pass through the lower left and upper right sides of the reserved icons 9A, 9B. Also, a star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG may be displayed that is approximately 3 to 5 times larger than the size of the vertical distance dimension of the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A, 9B, and the star-shaped effect image (effect image) BEG may be displayed so as to trace an orbit in the front-to-back direction while inclining upward to the right so as to pass through the lower left and upper right sides of the ally character CRA (or the enemy character CRB when the enemy character CRB appears instead of the ally character CRA). Note that there may be one, two, or three star-shaped effect images BEGs that revolve around the specific image in an orbit in the forward and backward directions while tilted in a specific direction. In FIG. 104(B), two star-shaped effect images BEGs revolve around the specific image in an orbit.

In addition, the effect image BEG may be a predetermined character image (for example, a smiling round-faced smiling image), and the effect image BEG may be arranged at a predetermined position of a specific image. For example, as shown in FIG. 104(C), an effect image BEG of a round smiling image may be displayed so as to cover a portion of the upper right side of the stopped-displayed performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, an effect image BEG of a round smiling image may be displayed at the same position as the position covering the portion of the upper right side of the stopped-displayed performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, an effect image BEG of a round smiling image may be displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower right side of the chance time image YG1, and an effect image BEG of a round smiling image may be displayed so as to cover a portion of the upper right side of the remaining time-saving count image NMG. The effect image (effect image) BEG of the "K" image may be displayed, the variable icon 9C and the image of the variable display position may be integrated, and the effect image (effect image) BEG of the round side smiley image may be displayed so as to cover a part of the upper right side of the variable icon 9C, the effect image (effect image) BEG of the round side smiley image may be displayed so as to cover a part of the upper right side of the reserved icons 9A and 9B, and the effect image (effect image) BEG of the round side smiley image may be displayed so as to cover a part of the lower right side of the ally character CRA (or the enemy character CRB when it appears instead of the ally character CRA). The smiley image on the round side may be a still image or a moving image (it may move up and down, left and right, up and down and left and right in small increments, or may rotate around). The smiley image on the round side is arranged at a predetermined position of the specific image, but there may be one, two, or three. In FIG. 104(C), an effect image (effect image) BEG of one smiley image on the round side is arranged at a predetermined position of the specific image.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the special effect-based performance A in Fig. 99, the special effect-based performance B in Fig. 100, the special effect-based performance C in Fig. 101, the special effect-based performance D in Fig. 102, and the special effect-based performance E in Fig. 103 are receiving sections that, when a game ball enters (passes) one of the first start gate 20, the second start gate 21, the general winning gate 27, and the gate 28, start and end the special performance, and transition from the currently ongoing performance to a higher-ranked performance with a higher expectation of winning than the currently ongoing performance. However, when a predetermined number of game balls are reached in one of the first start gate 20, the second start gate 21, the general winning gate 27, and the gate 28, when the special performance starts and ends, transition may be made from the currently ongoing performance to a higher-ranked performance with a higher expectation of winning than the currently ongoing performance. For example, in the judgment of step SN4701 in the processing during variable presentation in Figure 97, if a special presentation has not yet been executed (step SN4701: NO), the presentation control microcomputer 91 may judge whether the number of game balls that have entered (passed) the receiving section has reached a predetermined number of five balls, and if it determines that the number of game balls that have entered (passed) the receiving section has reached the predetermined number of five balls, it may proceed to the judgment of step SN4701c and then step S4701d in the processing during variable presentation in the same figure, and determine whether or not a presentation upgrade presentation is to be executed. The number of game balls that enter (pass) into the receiving section can include, for example, when game balls enter the first starting port 20 consecutively, the number of game balls that enter the first starting port 20 and the general winning port 27, the number of game balls that enter the second starting port 21 consecutively, the number of game balls that enter (pass) into gate 28 consecutively, the number of game balls that enter gate 28 and the second starting port 28, the number of game balls that enter the general winning port 27 and gate 28, the number of game balls that enter the general winning port 27 and the second starting port 27, and the number of game balls that enter (pass) into the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the general winning port 27, and the gate 28.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the performance promotion performance A by the special performance in Fig. 99, the performance promotion performance B by the special performance in Fig. 100, the performance promotion performance C by the special performance in Fig. 101, the performance promotion performance D by the special performance in Fig. 102, and the performance promotion performance E by the special performance in Fig. 103, when a game ball enters (passes) one of the first start gate 20, the second start gate 21, the general winning gate 27, or the gate 28 as the receiving section, a special performance is started in which the movable body, the device, the sound, and the display screen are in the special mode, and then, when the special performance ends, the currently ongoing performance is shifted to a higher-level performance with a higher expectation of winning compared to the currently ongoing performance. However, if the movable bodies such as the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 are not operated before the special performance is started, the movable body may be operated, and the special performance in which the movable body is in the special mode may be started in a state in which the movable body has been moved from the retreat position to the advance position. As described above, the movable body indicates to the player that the probability of winning is higher than when it is not activated, or indicates to the player that the probability of progression to a special rate is high, so the player is highly interested in the operation of the movable body. As a result, the operation of the movable body can give the player a sense of expectation for the change.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special effect-based performance upgrade performance A of Figure 99, the special effect-based performance upgrade performance B of Figure 100, the special effect-based performance upgrade performance C of Figure 101, the special effect-based performance upgrade performance D of Figure 102, and the special effect-based performance upgrade performance E of Figure 103, when a game ball enters (passes through) any of the receiving sections, namely the first start port 20, the second start port 21, the general winning port 27, or the gate 28, a special performance is initiated in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and then, when the special performance ends, the currently ongoing performance is switched to a higher-level performance which has a higher expectation of a win compared to the currently ongoing performance. However, when a jackpot is hit and a jackpot performance is started and a round is being played, if a game ball enters (passes) one of the first start port 20, the second start port 21, the general winning port 27, or the gate 28 as the receiving section, a special performance is started in which the movable body, device, sound, and display screen are in a special mode, and then, when the special performance ends, the jackpot performance image displayed in the currently ongoing normal jackpot performance may be changed to a higher performance called a premium performance that displays a jackpot premium image that is rarely visible compared to the jackpot performance image displayed in the currently ongoing normal jackpot performance. The jackpot premium image may be a character that represents the world view expressed by the game board 2, or a character that represents the mascot of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1. In addition to the first start port 20, the second start port 21, the general winning port 27, and the gate 28, the receiving section may further include a first large winning port (first special winning port) 30 and a second large winning port (second special winning port) 35.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special performance promotion performance A of FIG. 99, the special performance promotion performance B of FIG. 100, the special performance promotion performance C of FIG. 101, the special performance promotion performance D of FIG. 102, and the special performance promotion performance E of FIG. 103, when a game ball enters (passes) one of the first start gate 20, the second start gate 21, the general winning gate 27, and the gate 28 as the receiving section, a special performance is started in which the movable body, the device, the sound, and the display screen are in a special mode. Even when the special performance is started, the background image does not become a special mode, and the display mode is maintained without being affected by the special performance, and the effect image (effect image) BEG that vibrates against the background image is not displayed at all. However, when the special performance is started, the background image becomes a special mode, and the background image may be displayed vibrating slightly in any one or a combination of the up-down direction, the left-right direction, the up-down direction, the left-right direction, the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the like. In this way, there will be cases where the background image is not in a special mode and cases where the background image is in a special mode, thereby increasing the variety of presentation effects.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance promotion effect A by special effect in Figure 99, the performance promotion effect B by special effect in Figure 100, the performance promotion effect C by special effect in Figure 101, the performance promotion effect D by special effect in Figure 102, and the performance promotion effect E by special effect in Figure 103 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine including a receiving section capable of receiving a gaming ball, a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of performances,
The performance execution means includes:
A first effect is executed in which a specific image among the images displayed on the display means is changed from a first state to a second state different from the first state based on the fact that a variation effect of the effect symbol is started and a game ball is received by the receiving section,
After the first performance is completed, a second performance can be executed to transition from the currently ongoing performance to a performance different from the currently ongoing performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
When the variation performance of the performance symbol is started, the performance execution means may execute the first performance in any state among a state in which the performance symbol is varying, a state in which a reach is formed, and a state in which the performance symbol has developed into a super reach performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
In the first performance, an effect image appears on the specific image by changing the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-3,
In the second performance, the currently ongoing performance is shifted to a higher-ranked performance having a higher expectation of winning than the currently ongoing performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B5-1 to B5-4,
The receiving section is a starting port, a general winning port, and a gate.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The touch sensor linked effects A to E are explained below using Figures 105 to 117. These touch sensor linked effects are executed during the decorative pattern changing effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a touch sensor linked effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64.

First, the configuration of the sub-control board when executing touch sensor linked performances will be explained using Figures 105 and 106. Figure 105 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of a gaming machine 1 capable of executing touch sensor linked performances A and B. Figure 106 is a diagram for explaining the right region R72R and left region R72L of the display screen 7a. Note that content that overlaps with that explained in Figure 4 will be omitted.

The sub-control board 90 includes a performance control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The performance control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the performance of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the performance control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to an image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

In addition to the performance button detection switch 63a and the select button detection switch 68a, the right area touch sensor 72Ra and the left area touch sensor 72La are connected to the relay board 108. The right area touch sensor 72Ra is a sensor for detecting that the player's hand, etc. is held over or touches the display screen 7a in the right area R72R (Fig. 106) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the hand is held over or touches the right area R72R, a switch signal is output from the right area touch sensor 72Ra to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The left area touch sensor 72La is a sensor for detecting that the player's hand, etc. is held over or touches the display screen 7a in the left area R72L (Fig. 106) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the hand is held over or touches the left area R72L, a switch signal is output from the left area touch sensor 72La to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. As described above, by providing different touch sensors in the right region R72R and the left region R72L of the display screen 7a, it is possible to detect an action of holding a hand over the right region R72R of the display screen 7a and sliding the hand from right to left parallel to the display screen 7a, or an action of holding a hand over the left region R72L of the display screen 7a and sliding the hand from left to right parallel to the display screen 7a (hereinafter referred to as a swipe action). The other configurations are the same as those described in FIG. 4, so their description will be omitted. Note that the switch signal is transmitted continuously from the start to the end of the state in which the hand is held over or in contact. Here, regarding the detection of a swipe motion by the above-mentioned touch sensor, for example, if a photoelectric sensor is used, a light-emitting unit is provided at the top of the display screen 7a and a light-receiving unit is provided at the bottom, and the light-receiving unit is configured to transmit a detection signal when it is not receiving light, the swipe motion and its direction after the hand is held over can be detected by comparing the detection signal from the light-receiving unit in the right region R72R with the detection signal from the light-receiving unit in the left region R72L. Also, if the hand is held over multiple regions before and after the swipe motion, the area over which the hand is held in each region can be calculated, and the values can be compared to detect the movement.

[Touch sensor linked performance A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the touch sensor linked performance A(1). FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the touch sensor linked performance A(2). The touch sensor linked performance A is a performance that prompts the player to perform a swipe action, and when the action is detected, suggests whether the change performance is successful or not. It is a performance in which the swipe action is used to support the ally character during a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character. Note that the touch sensor linked performance A(1) is a performance example when the result of the change performance is a hit, and the touch sensor linked performance A(2) is a performance example when the result of the change performance is a miss. First, the touch sensor linked performance A(1) will be explained from the start of the change performance in which the touch sensor linked performance is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable performance starts. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly variable. It is assumed that the result of the special drawing that triggered this variable performance was a win, and further that touch sensor linked performance A was selected as the variable performance pattern. Also, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (vertical direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the pattern is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 107(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines indicating that the pattern is moving at high speed become visible. On the other hand, when the pattern is displayed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner in each pattern arrangement, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the pattern row displayed in a stopped state, only one number pattern is displayed, and the display of other number patterns that are consecutive up and down disappears. In addition, when the display stops, other number patterns may remain displayed without disappearing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerate in sequence from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, after which only one number pattern in each pattern row stops, and the center decorative pattern 8C maintains its high-speed changing display, making the number pattern difficult to see. Note that the number pattern representing "6" stops for both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, forming a reach.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), a battle presentation begins in which the friendly character image MC and the enemy character image TC battle. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all difficult to see, but they may be displayed so as to be visible, for example, in a specified area of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a display effect is executed that encourages the player to help the ally character MC by performing a swipe motion on the display screen 7a. Here, a display effect of a battle between the ally character image MC and the enemy character image TC, a message image DS saying "Help!!!", a hand image TG showing the shape of a hand, and an arrow YG indicating the direction of the swipe motion are displayed.

At this time, the player places his/her hand over the right region R72R of the display screen 7a, and then swipes parallel to the display screen 7a to the left region R72L, and this action is detected by the right region touch sensor 72Ra and the left region touch sensor 72La. Note that this action can be detected based on the performance control microcomputer 91 receiving switch signals transmitted in the following order: the right region touch sensor 72Ra detects that a hand has been placed over the display screen 7a, then the right region touch sensor 72Ra is unable to detect that a hand is placed over it, and then the left region touch sensor 72La detects it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), the battle in the display presentation started in FIG. 107(C) comes to a conclusion. Here, an ally character image MC, a fallen enemy character image TC, and a message image SM saying "Victory!!!" are displayed. The victory of the ally character suggests that the variable presentation is a win. This increases the likelihood that the player will feel a sense of accomplishment that their ally character has won by helping them with their swiping action, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, with the battle now concluded, the battle presentation started in FIG. 107(C) comes to an end.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning state. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop as number symbols representing "6." This notifies the player that the variable presentation is a winning one.

Next, as shown in Fig. 107(G), an opening effect for the winning game starts. Here, a message image OM saying "Big Win!!!" is displayed. After this, the winning game is executed.
The above is an example of touch sensor linked performance A (1), that is, when the result of the special chart lottery that triggered the variable performance is a win and touch sensor linked performance A is selected as the content of the variable performance.

Next, using Figure 108, we will begin explaining touch sensor linked performance A (2) from the start of the variable performance at which the touch sensor linked performance is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 108(A), the variable performance starts. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly variable. It is assumed that the result of the special drawing that triggered this variable performance was a win, and further that touch sensor linked performance A was selected as the variable performance pattern. Also, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during the slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (vertical direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the pattern is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 108(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines indicating that the pattern is moving at high speed become visible. On the other hand, when the pattern is displayed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the pattern row displayed in a stopped state, only one number pattern is displayed, and the display of other number patterns that are consecutive up and down disappears. In addition, when the display stops, other number patterns may remain displayed without disappearing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerate in sequence from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, after which only one number pattern in each pattern row stops, and the center decorative pattern 8C maintains its high-speed changing display, making the number pattern difficult to see. Note that the number pattern representing "6" stops for both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, forming a reach.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), a battle presentation begins in which the friendly character image MC and the enemy character image TC battle. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all difficult to see, but they may be displayed so as to be visible, for example, in a specified area of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), a display effect is executed that encourages the player to help the ally character MC by performing a swipe motion on the display screen 7a. Here, a display effect is displayed in which the ally character image MC and the enemy character image TC are battling, along with a message image DS saying "Help!!!", a hand image TG showing the shape of a hand, and an arrow YG indicating the direction of the swipe motion.

At this time, the player places his/her hand over the right region R72R of the display screen 7a, and then swipes parallel to the display screen 7a to the left region R72L, and this action is detected by the right region touch sensor 72Ra and the left region touch sensor 72La. Note that this action can be detected based on the performance control microcomputer 91 receiving switch signals transmitted in the following order: the right region touch sensor 72Ra detects that a hand has been placed over the display screen 7a, then the right region touch sensor 72Ra is unable to detect that a hand is placed over it, and then the left region touch sensor 72La detects it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(E), the battle in the display presentation that began in FIG. 108(C) comes to a conclusion. Here, a fallen ally character image MC, an enemy character image TC, and a message image HM reading "Defeat..." are displayed. The enemy character's victory suggests that the variable presentation was a failure. Furthermore, with the battle now being concluded, the display presentation of the battle that began in FIG. 108(C) comes to an end.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a losing mode. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R stop with the number symbols representing "6," "7," and "6," respectively. This notifies the player that the variable effect is a losing one.

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (G), a variable effect based on the next special drawing is started. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly changing.
The above is an example of touch sensor linked performance A (2), that is, when the result of the special chart lottery that triggered the variable performance is a miss and touch sensor linked performance A is selected as the content of the variable performance.

[Touch sensor linked performance B]
The touch sensor linked performance B will be described with reference to Figs. 109-110. Fig. 109 is a diagram for explaining the touch sensor linked performance B (1). Fig. 110 is a diagram for explaining the touch sensor linked performance B (2). Fig. 111 is a diagram for explaining the touch sensor linked performance B (3). The touch sensor linked performance B is a performance in which, when the player swipes the display screen 7a during the variable performance, an image including a character image is cut in according to the direction of the swipe. Note that the touch sensor linked performance B (1) is a performance example in which the result of the variable performance is a win and the swipe action is performed from right to left on the display screen 7a, and the touch sensor linked performance B (2) is a performance example in which the result of the variable performance is a miss and the swipe action is performed from right to left on the display screen 7a. Also, the touch sensor linked performance B (3) is a performance example in which the result of the variable performance is a win and the swipe action is performed from left to right on the display screen 7a. First, the explanation of the touch sensor linked performance B (1) will begin from the start of the variable performance in which the touch sensor linked performance B is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 109(A), the variable performance starts. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly variable. It is assumed that the result of the special drawing that triggered this variable performance was a win, and further that touch sensor linked performance B was selected as the variable performance pattern. Also, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during the slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the pattern is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 109(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines representing the high speed movement become visible. On the other hand, in the case of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 109(B), when the pattern is displayed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the sequence of symbols that are stopped and displayed, only one number symbol is displayed, and the other number symbols that are consecutive above and below disappear. Note that when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the other number symbols may remain displayed without disappearing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down in sequence from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and the multiple number patterns lined up vertically in each pattern row become visible. Meanwhile, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain their high-speed changing display, making the number patterns difficult to see.

At this time, the player holds his/her hand over the right region R72R of the display screen 7a, and then swipes parallel to the display screen 7a to the left region R72L, and this action is detected by the right region touch sensor 72Ra and the left region touch sensor 72La. Note that this action can be detected based on the performance control microcomputer 91 receiving a switch signal transmitted in the following order: the right region touch sensor 72Ra detects that a hand has been held over the display screen 7a, then the right region touch sensor 72Ra is unable to detect that a hand is being held over, and then the left region touch sensor 72La detects it. Note that although FIG. 109(B) does not suggest that an image including a character image will be cut in by performing a swipe action, this may be suggested by displaying a message image saying, for example, "Swipe to cut in a character!?"

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(C), an image including character image KC frames in from the right side of display screen 7a. This makes right decorative pattern 8R difficult to see. Note that the framed-in image may be displayed behind at least one of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R so that right decorative pattern 8R is not difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(D), an image including the character image KC follows the right decorative pattern 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C is also difficult to see. In addition, a number pattern representing "6" is displayed statically in the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(E), an image including the character image KC is displayed across the entire display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all difficult to see. This suggests that the result of the special drawing that triggered the variable performance was a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning state. Here, the number pattern representing "7" is stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. This notifies the player that the variable presentation is a winning effect. In addition, when all the decorative patterns become difficult to see due to the image framed in by the swipe action, and then become visible in a winning state, the player is more likely to feel a sense of elation that he or she has won a winning effect with his or her own hands, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Next, as shown in Fig. 109(G), an opening effect for the winning game starts. Here, a message image OM saying "Big Win!!!" is displayed. After this, the winning game is executed.
The above is an example of touch sensor linked performance B (1), that is, the performance when the result of the special chart lottery that triggered the variable performance is a win, touch sensor linked performance B is selected as the content of the variable performance, and a swipe motion is performed from right to left on the display screen 7a.

Next, using Figure 110, we will begin explaining touch sensor linked performance B (2) from the start of the variable performance at which the touch sensor linked performance is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 110(A), the variable performance starts. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly variable. It is assumed that the result of the special drawing that triggered this variable performance was a win, and further that touch sensor linked performance B was selected as the variable performance pattern. Also, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during the slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the pattern is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 110(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines representing the high speed movement become visible. On the other hand, in the case of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 110(B), when the pattern is displayed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the sequence of symbols that are stopped and displayed, only one number symbol is displayed, and the other number symbols that are consecutive above and below disappear. Note that when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the other number symbols may remain displayed without disappearing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down in sequence from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and the multiple number patterns lined up vertically in each pattern row become visible. Meanwhile, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain their high-speed changing display, making the number patterns difficult to see.

At this time, the player holds his/her hand over the right region R72R of the display screen 7a, then swipes parallel to the display screen 7a to the left region R72L, and this action is detected by the right region touch sensor 72Ra and the left region touch sensor 72La. Note that this action can be detected based on the performance control microcomputer 91 receiving a switch signal transmitted in the following order: the right region touch sensor 72Ra detects that a hand has been held over the display screen 7a, then the right region touch sensor 72Ra is unable to detect that a hand is being held over, and then the left region touch sensor 72La detects it. Note that although FIG. 110(B) does not suggest that an image including a character image will be cut in by performing a swipe action, this may be suggested by displaying a message image saying, for example, "Swipe to cut in a character!?"

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(C), an image including character image KC frames in from the right side of display screen 7a. This makes right decorative pattern 8R difficult to see. Note that the framed-in image may be displayed behind at least one of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R so that right decorative pattern 8R is not difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(D), an image including the character image KC follows the right decorative pattern 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C is also difficult to see. In addition, a number pattern representing "6" is displayed statically in the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(E), the image including the character image KC makes it difficult to see a portion of the number pattern representing the number "6" that is stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L. However, not everything becomes difficult to see, and the display ends without the entire image including the character image KC being displayed. This suggests that the result of the special drawing that triggered the variable performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a losing mode. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R stop with the number symbols representing "6," "7," and "7," respectively. This notifies the player that the variable effect is a losing one.

Next, as shown in Figure 110 (G), a variable effect based on the next special drawing is started. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly changing.
The above is an example of touch sensor linked performance B (2), that is, the performance when the result of the special chart lottery that triggered the variable performance is a miss, touch sensor linked performance B is selected as the content of the variable performance, and a swipe motion is performed from right to left on the display screen 7a.

Next, using Figure 111, we will begin explaining touch sensor linked performance B (3) from the start of the variable performance at which the touch sensor linked performance is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), the variable performance starts. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly variable. It is assumed that the result of the special drawing that triggered this variable performance was a win, and further that touch sensor linked performance B was selected as the variable performance pattern. Also, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during the slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the pattern is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 111(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines representing the high speed movement become visible. On the other hand, in the case of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 111(B), when the pattern is displayed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the sequence of symbols that are stopped and displayed, only one number symbol is displayed, and the other number symbols that are consecutive above and below disappear. Note that when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the other number symbols may remain displayed without disappearing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down in sequence from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and the multiple number patterns lined up vertically in each pattern row become visible. Meanwhile, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain their high-speed changing display, making the number patterns difficult to see.

At this time, the player holds his/her hand over the left region R72L of the display screen 7a, then swipes parallel to the display screen 7a to the right region R72R, and this action is detected by the right region touch sensor 72Ra and the left region touch sensor 72La. This action can be detected based on the performance control microcomputer 91 receiving a switch signal transmitted in the following order: the left region touch sensor 72La detects that a hand has been held over the display screen 7a, then the left region touch sensor 72La is unable to detect that a hand is being held over, and then the right region touch sensor 72Ra detects it. Note that although FIG. 111(B) does not suggest that an image including a character image will be cut in by performing a swipe action, this may be suggested by displaying a message image saying, for example, "Swipe to cut in a character!?"

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), an image including the character image KC frames in from the left side of the display screen 7a. This makes the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see. Note that the framed-in image may be displayed behind at least one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R so that the left decorative pattern 8L is not difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(D), an image including the character image KC follows the left decorative pattern 8L, and the center decorative pattern 8C is also difficult to see. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically in each pattern row become visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(E), an image including the character image KC is displayed across the entire display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all difficult to see. This suggests that the result of the special drawing that triggered the variable performance was a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning state. Here, the number pattern representing "7" is stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. This notifies the player that the variable presentation is a winning display. In addition, when all the decorative patterns become difficult to see due to the image framed in by the swipe action, and then become visible in a winning state, the player is more likely to feel a sense of elation that he or she has won a winning display with his or her own hands, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Next, as shown in Fig. 111(G), an opening effect for the winning game starts. Here, a message image OM saying "Big Win!!!" is displayed. After this, the winning game is executed.
The above is an example of the touch sensor linked performance B (3), that is, the result of the special drawing that triggered the variable performance is a win, the touch sensor linked performance B is selected as the content of the variable performance, and the swipe action is performed from left to right on the display screen 7a. Note that the touch sensor linked performance B (3) may be executed in the variable performance based on the special drawing that results in a loss.

Next, touch sensor linked performances C, D, and E will be explained using Figures 112 to 117. First, the configuration of the sub-control board when touch sensor linked performances C and D are executed will be explained using Figures 112 and 113. Figure 112 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of a gaming machine 1 capable of executing touch sensor linked performances C and D. Figure 59 is a diagram for explaining the upper right region R72UR, lower right region R72LR, upper left region R72UL, and lower left region R72LL of the display screen 7a. Note that content that overlaps with that explained in Figures 4 and 105 will be omitted.

The sub-control board 90 includes a performance control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The performance control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the performance of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the performance control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to an image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

In addition to the performance button detection switch 63a and the select button detection switch 68a, the upper right area touch sensor 72URa, the lower right area touch sensor 72LRa, the upper left area touch sensor 72ULa, and the lower left area touch sensor 72LLa are connected to the relay board 108.

The upper right area touch sensor 72URa is a sensor for detecting that a player's hand, etc., is held over or touches the display screen 7a in the upper right area R72UR (Fig. 113) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When a hand is held over or touches the upper right area R72UR, a switch signal is output from the upper right area touch sensor 72URa to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The lower right area touch sensor 72LRa is a sensor for detecting that a player's hand, etc., is held over or touches the display screen 7a in the lower right area R72LR (Fig. 113) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When a hand is held over or touches the lower right area R72LR, a switch signal is output from the lower right area touch sensor 72LRa to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The upper left area touch sensor 72ULa is a sensor for detecting that a player's hand or the like is held over or touches the display screen 7a in the upper left area R72UL (Fig. 113) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When a hand is held over or touches the upper left area R72UL, a switch signal is output from the upper left area touch sensor 72ULa to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The lower left area touch sensor 72LLa is a sensor for detecting that a player's hand or the like is held over or touches the display screen 7a in the lower left area R72LL (Fig. 113) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When a hand is held over or touches the lower left area R72LL, a switch signal is output from the lower left area touch sensor 72LLa to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. Note that the switch signal is transmitted continuously from the start to the end of the state in which the hand is held over or touched.

As described above, by providing different touch sensors in the upper right region R72UR, lower right region R72LR, upper left region R72UL, and lower left region R72LL of the display screen 7a, it is possible to detect, for example, an action of placing a hand over the upper right region R72UR or lower right region R72LR of the display screen 7a and sliding the hand from right to left parallel to the display screen 7a, or an action of placing a hand over the upper left region R72UL or lower left region R72LL of the display screen 7a and sliding the hand from left to right parallel to the display screen 7a (hereinafter referred to as a swipe action). Also, for example, it is possible to detect a swipe motion from top to bottom parallel to the display screen 7a by holding a hand over the upper right region R72UR or upper left region R72UL of the display screen 7a, or a swipe motion from bottom to top parallel to the display screen 7a by holding a hand over the lower right region R72LR or lower left region R72LL of the display screen 7a. In addition, it is also possible to detect a diagonal swipe motion, such as a swipe motion from the upper right region R72UR to the lower left region R72LL of the display screen 7a. Note that the other configurations are the same as those described in FIG. 4, so the description will be omitted. In addition, for example, when an electrostatic sensor is used to detect the swipe motion by the above-mentioned touch sensor, an electrostatic sensor is attached to the display screen 7a, and the position where the player's hand touches the display screen 7a and the position where the movement starts and the position where the movement ends are detected, and the swipe motion and its direction after the hand is held over can be detected by comparing the position where the movement starts and the position where the movement ends. Also, if the hand is held over multiple areas before and after the swipe motion, the area over which the hand is held in each area may be calculated and the movement may be detected by comparing the values.

The touch sensor linked performances C and D described below are the same performance pattern as determined by the performance control microcomputer 91. However, during this performance, depending on the direction in which the swipe action is performed, either the touch sensor linked performance C or the touch sensor linked performance D is executed.

[Touch sensor linked performance C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the touch sensor linked performance C. In the touch sensor linked performance C, when the player swipes the display screen 7a from right to left or from left to right in the horizontal direction during the variation performance, an image including a character image is cut in according to the direction, suggesting that the variation performance is a win. When the swipe motion is performed horizontally from right to left, there is no difference from the touch sensor linked performance C except that the image cuts in from right to left, so the explanation here is omitted. Note that the content of the performance when the swipe motion is performed horizontally from right to left may be different from the content of the performance when the swipe motion is performed horizontally from left to right. First, the explanation of the touch sensor linked performance C will be started from the start of the variation performance in which the touch sensor linked performance C is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the variable performance starts. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly variable. It is assumed that the result of the special drawing that triggered this variable performance was a win, and further that touch sensor linked performance C was selected as the variable performance pattern. Also, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during the slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the variable display is performed at high speed as shown in FIG. 114(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines representing the fast movement become visible. On the other hand, in the case of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 114(B), when the variable display is performed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner in each pattern arrangement, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the sequence of symbols that are stopped and displayed, only one number symbol is displayed, and the other number symbols that are consecutive above and below disappear. Note that when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the other number symbols may remain displayed without disappearing.

At this time, the player places his/her hand over at least one of the upper left region R72UL and the lower left region R72LL of the display screen 7a, and then performs a swipe motion horizontally parallel to the display screen 7a to the upper right region R72UR or the lower right region R72LR, and this motion is detected by at least one of the upper left region touch sensor 72ULa and the lower left region touch sensor 72LLa, and the upper right region touch sensor 72URa or the lower right region touch sensor 72LRa. Note that this motion can be detected based on the performance control microcomputer 91 receiving switch signals transmitted in the following order: the upper right region touch sensor 72URa detects that a hand has been placed over the display screen 7a, then the upper right region touch sensor 72URa cannot detect that a hand is placed over it, and then the upper left region touch sensor 72ULa detects it. Note that although FIG. 114(A) does not suggest that the image will be moved by performing a swipe motion, this may be suggested. Also, a display encouraging the user to perform a swipe motion may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the character image MC frames in from the left side of the display screen 7a. Since the swipe action was performed from left to right, the character image MC frames in from the left side of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerates in sequence from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and the multiple number patterns lined up vertically in each pattern row become visible. On the other hand, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain a high-speed changing display, making the number patterns difficult to see. Also, in this example, the character image MC is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, so the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not difficult to see due to the display of the character image MC, but at least a part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be made difficult to see by displaying the character image MC in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), the character image MC, which has entered the frame from the left side of the display screen 7a, moves from left to right on the display screen 7a and reaches the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a number pattern representing "3" is displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern 8L. The right decorative pattern 8R decelerates from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically in each pattern row become visible. Meanwhile, the center decorative pattern 8C maintains its high-speed changing display, making the number pattern difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), the character image MC, which has framed in from the left side of the display screen 7a, moves further from left to right on the display screen 7a, and frames out from the right side of the display screen 7a. Additionally, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R display a static number pattern representing "3." The middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and multiple vertically aligned number patterns become visible in each pattern row.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were displayed stationary in FIG. 114(D), start to fluctuate again. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all fluctuate at high speed, and then they slow down and change from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically become visible in each pattern row.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning state. Here, the number pattern representing "3" is stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. This notifies the player that the variable presentation is a winning display. In addition, because all the decorative patterns change again due to the image that is framed in by the swipe action and then stop in a winning state, the player is more likely to feel a sense of elation that he or she has won a prize with his or her own hands, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, as shown in Fig. 114(G), an opening effect for the winning game starts. Here, a message image OM saying "Big Win!!!" is displayed. After this, the winning game is executed.
The above is an example of the touch sensor linked performance C, that is, the result of the special drawing that triggered the variable performance is a win, the touch sensor linked performance is selected as the content of the variable performance, and the swipe action is performed from left to right on the display screen 7a. Note that the touch sensor linked performance C may be executed in the variable performance triggered by the special drawing that results in a loss.

[Touch sensor linked performance D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the touch sensor linked performance D. In the touch sensor linked performance D, when the player swipes the display screen 7a from top to bottom or from bottom to top in the vertical direction during the variation performance, a plurality of identical images are framed in according to the direction, suggesting that the variation performance is a win. Note that when the swipe motion is performed vertically from top to bottom, there is no difference from the touch sensor linked performance D except that the direction in which the image cuts in is from top to bottom, so the explanation here is omitted. However, the content of the performance when the swipe motion is performed vertically from top to bottom may be different from the content of the performance when the swipe motion is performed vertically from bottom to top. The explanation of the touch sensor linked performance D will begin from the start of the variation performance in which the touch sensor linked performance D is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 115(A), the variable performance starts. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly variable. It is assumed that the result of the special drawing that triggered this variable performance was a win, and further that touch sensor linked performance C was selected as the variable performance pattern. Also, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during the slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the pattern is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 115(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines representing the high speed movement become visible. On the other hand, in the case of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 115(B), when the pattern is displayed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the sequence of symbols that are stopped and displayed, only one number symbol is displayed, and the other number symbols that are consecutive above and below disappear. Note that when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the other number symbols may remain displayed without disappearing.

At this time, the player places his/her hand over the lower left region R72LL of the display screen 7a, then performs a swipe motion horizontally parallel to the display screen 7a up to the upper left region R72UL, and this motion is detected by the upper left region touch sensor 72ULa and the lower left region touch sensor 72LLa. Note that this motion can be detected based on the performance control microcomputer 91 receiving switch signals transmitted in the following order: the lower left region touch sensor 72LLa detects that a hand has been placed over the display screen 7a, then the lower left region touch sensor 72LLa is unable to detect that a hand has been placed over it, and then the upper left region touch sensor 72ULa detects it. This swipe motion may also be performed vertically from the lower right region R72LR to the upper right region R72UR of the display screen 7a, or from an area where both the lower right region touch sensor 72LRa and the lower left region touch sensor 72LLa can detect to an area where both the upper right region touch sensor 72URa and the upper left region touch sensor 72ULa can detect. Note that although FIG. 115(A) does not suggest that the image is moved by the swipe motion, this may be suggested. Also, a display encouraging the swipe motion may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), multiple character images KG frame in from the bottom of the display screen 7a. Because the swipe action was performed from bottom to top, multiple character images KG frame in from the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerates in sequence from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically in each pattern row become visible. Meanwhile, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the high-speed changing display, making the number patterns difficult to see. Also, in this example, all character images KG are displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, so the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not difficult to see due to the display of the character images KG, but at least one character image KG may be displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to make at least a portion of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), multiple character images KG that have been framed in from the bottom of the display screen 7a move from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a, and multiple more character images KG are newly framed in, so that they are displayed to cover the display screen 7a. Also, in the left decorative pattern 8L, a number pattern representing "3" is displayed stationary. The right decorative pattern 8R decelerates from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically in each pattern row become visible. Meanwhile, the center decorative pattern 8C maintains its high-speed changing display, making the number pattern difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), the character image KG that has framed in from the bottom of the display screen 7a moves from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. Here, new character images KG no longer frame in, and flow out of the frame from the top of the display screen 7a. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R display a static number pattern representing "3". The middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and multiple vertically lined number patterns become visible in each pattern row.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were displayed stationary in FIG. 115(D), start to fluctuate again. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all fluctuate at high speed, and then they slow down and change from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically become visible in each pattern row.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning state. Here, the number pattern representing "3" is stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. This notifies the player that the variable presentation is a winning display. In addition, because all the decorative patterns change again due to the image that is framed in by the swipe action and then stop in a winning state, the player is more likely to feel a sense of elation that he or she has won a prize with his or her own hands, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, as shown in Fig. 115(G), an opening effect for the winning game starts. Here, a message image OM saying "Big Win!!!" is displayed. After this, the winning game is executed.
The above is an example of the touch sensor linked performance D, that is, the result of the special drawing that triggered the variable performance is a win, the touch sensor linked performance is selected as the content of the variable performance, and the swipe action is performed from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. Note that the touch sensor linked performance D may be executed in the variable performance triggered by the special drawing that results in a loss.

[Touch sensor linked performance E]
The touch sensor linked performance E will be described with reference to FIG. 116 and FIG. 117. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the group performance of the normal mode. The group performance is a performance that is specified in advance as a performance that suggests that the variable performance is a hit by moving and displaying multiple character images. FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the touch sensor linked performance E. The touch sensor linked performance E is a performance linked with the above-mentioned group performance, and during the variable performance, the player swipes the display screen 7a along the direction in which multiple character images in the group performance move, increasing the number of character images displayed in a moving manner, suggesting that the variable performance has a higher hit expectation. The touch sensor linked performance E will be described from the start of the variable performance in which the touch sensor linked performance is executed. Note that the group performance example of the normal mode shown in FIG. 116 and the touch sensor linked performance E shown in FIG. 117 will be described simultaneously in chronological order to make the comparison easier to understand.

First, as shown in FIG. 116(A) and FIG. 117(A), the variable performance starts. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly variable. It is assumed that the result of the special symbol lottery that triggered this variable performance was a win. Also, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during the slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the pattern is displayed at high speed as shown in Fig. 116(A) and Fig. 117(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines representing the high speed movement become visible. On the other hand, in the case of the left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 116(B) and Fig. 117(B), when the pattern is displayed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the sequence of symbols that are stopped and displayed, only one number symbol is displayed, and the other number symbols that are consecutive above and below disappear. Note that when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the other number symbols may remain displayed without disappearing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(B), multiple character images KG frame in from the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerates in sequence from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically in each pattern row become visible. On the other hand, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain a high-speed changing display, making the number patterns difficult to see. Also, in this example, all the character images KG are displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, so the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not difficult to see due to the display of the character image KG, but at least one character image KG may be displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to make at least a part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R difficult to see.

In the touch sensor linked performance E shown in FIG. 117, at the time shown in FIG. 117(B), the player holds his hand over the lower left region R72LL of the display screen 7a, and then performs a swipe motion parallel to the display screen 7a up to the upper right region R72UR, and this motion is detected by the upper right region touch sensor 72URa and the lower left region touch sensor 72LLa. Note that this motion can be detected based on the performance control microcomputer 91 receiving a switch signal transmitted in the following order: the lower left region touch sensor 72LLa detects that a hand has been held over the display screen 7a, then the lower left region touch sensor 72LLa is unable to detect that a hand has been held over, and then the upper right region touch sensor 72URa detects it. Note that although it is not suggested in FIG. 116(B) and FIG. 117(B) that the image is moved by the swipe motion, this may be suggested. Also, a display encouraging the swipe motion may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(C) and FIG. 117(C), multiple character images KG that have been framed in from the bottom of the display screen 7a move from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a, and multiple new character images KG are framed in, so that they are displayed to cover the display screen 7a. Here, the number of character images KG displayed in FIG. 117(C) is greater than the number of character images KG displayed in FIG. 116(C). This is because the above-mentioned swipe action has been detected. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L displays a number pattern representing "3" in a stationary manner. The right decorative pattern 8R decelerates from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and multiple vertically arranged number patterns are visible in each pattern row. On the other hand, the center decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed changing display, making it difficult to see the number pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(D) and FIG. 117(D), the character image KG that framed in from the bottom of the display screen 7a moves from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a, and as new character images KG no longer frame in, they flow out of the frame from the top of the display screen 7a. Again, the number of character images KG displayed in FIG. 117(C) is greater than the number of character images KG displayed in FIG. 116(C). Also, in a group presentation, an increase in the number of images forming a group means that the expectation that the variable presentation will be a hit has increased, that is, the presentation content has been upgraded by the swipe action. Therefore, because the number of images that frame in has increased by the swipe action, the player is more likely to feel elated that he or she has increased the expectation of a hit with his or her own hand, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R display a static number symbol representing the number "3." The center decorative pattern 8C decelerates from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and multiple vertically aligned number symbols become visible in each pattern row.

Next, as shown in Figures 116 (E) and 117 (E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change again, and after the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all change at high speed, they slow down and change from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically become visible in each pattern row.

Next, as shown in Figures 116 (F) and 117 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning state. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R all stop as number symbols representing "3." This notifies the player that the variable presentation is a winning one.

Next, as shown in Figures 116(G) and 117(G), an opening performance for the winning game starts. Here, a message image OM saying "Big Win!!!" is displayed. After this, the winning game is executed.
The above is an example of the normal group presentation and the touch sensor linked presentation E.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 can execute touch sensor linked performances A to E by detecting a swipe motion with any of the touch sensors by configuring as described above. A swipe motion can be detected by detecting a hand being held over one of the multiple areas of the display screen 7a, and then detecting a hand being held over another area. In touch sensor linked performance B, the direction of movement of the image including the character image KC can be changed according to the direction of the detected swipe motion. In addition, it is possible to change which of touch sensor linked performances C and D is executed according to the direction of the swipe motion detected during the variation performance. In addition, it is possible to increase the number of images that are displayed and moved according to the direction of the swipe motion detected during the group performance, suggesting promotion.

[Example of effect]
The following are examples of the effects of this embodiment.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the presentation control microcomputer 91 is configured to execute touch sensor linked presentations A and B when a change in hand position is detected by the right area touch sensor 72Ra and the left area touch sensor 72La, or to execute touch sensor linked presentations C and D when a change in hand position is detected by the upper right area touch sensor 72URa, the lower right area touch sensor 72LRa, the upper left area touch sensor 72ULa, and the lower left area touch sensor 72LLa. This configuration increases the possibility of entertaining the player with unprecedented and novel presentations, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the area touch sensor 72Ra and the left area touch sensor 72La can detect whether or not a hand is placed over each of the two areas (the right area R72R and the left area R72L) on the display screen 7a. After detecting that a hand is placed over one of the right area R72R and the left area R72L, the area touch sensor 72Ra detects that a hand is placed over the other area, thereby detecting a swipe action. Alternatively, the upper right area touch sensor 72URa, the lower right area touch sensor 72LRa, the upper left area touch sensor The touch sensor 72ULa and the lower left region 72LLa can detect whether a hand is held over four regions (upper right region R72UR, lower right region R72LR, upper left region R72UL, and lower left region R72LL) on the display screen 7a, and detects a swipe action by detecting that a hand is held over one of the upper right region R72UR, lower right region R72LR, upper left region R72UL, and lower left region R72LL, and then detecting that a hand is held over another region (FIGS. 105, 106, 112, and 113). This configuration makes it possible to detect the player's action, and increases the possibility of entertaining the player with unprecedented and novel effects based on the action, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to change the direction in which the character image KC is moved in the touch sensor-linked performance B according to the direction of the swipe motion detected by the area touch sensor 72Ra and the left area touch sensor 72La (FIGS. 109 and 111). This configuration increases the possibility that the player can be entertained by unprecedented and novel performances based on the player's actions, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to determine whether to execute the touch sensor linked performance C or the touch sensor linked performance D depending on the direction of the swipe motion detected by the upper right area touch sensor 72URa, the lower right area touch sensor 72LRa, the upper left area touch sensor 72ULa, and the lower left area touch sensor 72LLa (FIGS. 114 and 115). This configuration increases the possibility that the player can be entertained by unprecedented and novel performances based on the player's actions, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 can execute a group performance that is a performance that is specified in advance as a performance that suggests a high expectation of a win after the change during the change, and when a swipe action is detected by the upper right area touch sensor 72URa, the lower right area touch sensor 72LRa, the upper left area touch sensor 72ULa, and the lower left area touch sensor 72LLa during the group performance, the number of character images KG that are moved and displayed in the group performance increases, thereby executing a touch sensor linked performance E that suggests an increase in the expectation of a win after the change (FIGS. 116 and 117). With this configuration, it is more likely that the player will be entertained by an unprecedented and novel performance based on the player's actions, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the display mode and contents of the performance can be changed according to the action detected by the touch sensor that detects the hand being held over or touching the display screen 7a. In addition to this, or instead, the display mode and contents of the performance may be changed according to the operation of other operating means such as the steering wheel 60 or the select button 68.

[Modification 2]
The type, number and arrangement of the touch sensors may be changed as desired.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the touch sensor linked performances B to E, the image was moved according to the direction of the swipe motion detected by the touch sensor. In contrast, in a performance in which the image is not moved, a new image may be displayed without movement due to the touch sensor detecting the motion.

[Modification 4]
In the touch sensor linked performances A to E in the above embodiment, the recommended direction of the swipe motion may be changed as appropriate.

[Modification 5]
In the touch sensor linked performances B to E in the above embodiment, the display mode of each performance (such as the direction of image movement) was configured to change depending on the direction of the swipe motion detected by the touch sensor. In contrast, for example, in a performance in which a story is displayed, the content of the subsequent story may change depending on the direction of the swipe motion. Also, for example, the image may be moved and displayed multiple times in accordance with the swipe motion detected by the touch sensor.

[Modification 6]
In the touch sensor linked performances B to E in the above embodiment, the image is moved to display a performance that suggests the expected hit probability of the variable performance. In contrast to this, for example, a pre-reading performance such as a performance in which the display mode of the reserved image changes upon detection of a swipe motion may be executed to suggest that the result of the variable performance executed after the change is a hit. Also, for example, when a swipe motion is detected after the result of the variable performance is confirmed as a hit, a promotion performance that suggests that the hit type will be a more advantageous hit may be executed. Also, for example, when a swipe motion is detected after any of the decorative patterns is temporarily stopped, a pseudo consecutive performance that starts the change again may be executed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
A display screen;
A performance execution means capable of displaying a plurality of types of performances including a specific performance;
A gaming machine including: a detection means capable of detecting a change in the position of a player's hand held over the display screen;
The performance execution means includes:
When the detection means detects a change in the position of the hand, the specific performance can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
the detection means is capable of detecting whether a hand is held over each of a plurality of regions on the display screen, and detects a change in the position of the hand by detecting that a hand is held over one of the plurality of regions and then detecting that a hand is held over another region;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1 or B6-2,
The performance execution means includes:
changing a direction in which a predetermined image is moved and displayed in the specific performance according to a direction of the change in the position of the hand detected by the detection means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1 or B6-2,
The performance execution means includes:
changing the content of the specific performance according to the direction of the change in the hand position detected by the detection means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1 or B6-2,
The performance execution means includes:
During the change, a suggestive effect that is specified in advance as an effect that suggests a high expectation of a win after the change can be executed,
During the aforementioned suggestion,
When the detection means detects a change in the position of the hand, a promotion display is executed to increase the expectation of a win after the change;
If the detection means does not detect a change in the position of the hand, the promotion display is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The highlighting of the non-visit mode will be explained below with reference to Figures 118 to 121. This highlighting of the non-visit mode is a display that is executed when a high reliability effect is executed in a variable effect in a non-visit effect mode, which is an effect in which the stopped symbol after the variable effect has a high expectation of becoming a winning symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute highlighting of the non-visit mode, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64.

First, when highlighting the non-stay mode, the gaming machine 1 can select and execute one of a number of different presentation modes. When the presentation mode is switched, only the display mode, such as the content of the image displayed in the presentation, is different. Note that parameters such as the probability of winning, the basic presentation pattern, and the variation time are not changed by switching the presentation mode. In this gaming machine 1, one of three presentation modes, "steel mode," "river mode," and "lightning mode," can be arbitrarily selected as the presentation mode. In the "steel mode," "river mode," and "lightning mode," presentations other than the high reliability presentation described below have different display modes, but presentations of the same pattern are selected and executed. The selected presentation mode is called the "stay mode," and the unselected presentation mode is called the "non-stay mode." For example, when the "steel mode" is selected, the "stay mode" becomes the "steel mode," and the "river mode" and "lightning mode" become the "non-stay mode."

The presentation mode can be selected by pressing the "left" or "right" side of the select button 68, and each time the "right" side of the select button 68 is pressed, the presentation mode is switched between "steel mode," "river mode," "lightning mode," "steel mode," and so on. Furthermore, when the "left" side of the select button 68 is pressed, the modes are switched in the reverse order to when the "right" side is pressed. Note that other presentation modes may be included, and the presentation mode may be switched automatically, regardless of the player's operation.

Next, a high reliability performance is a type of performance executed during a variable performance, and is a performance that is specified in advance as a performance with a high expectation that the decorative pattern after the variable performance will stop as a winning pattern. In this gaming machine 1, as high reliability performances, a group performance in which multiple images are displayed and moved during a variable performance, a cut-in performance in which an image is suddenly displayed over the entire display screen 7a during a variable performance, and a freeze performance in which all changes, movements, and fluctuations of the images displayed during the variable performance suddenly stop can be executed. Note that other high reliability performances may also be executed.

Next, the configuration of the performance control microcomputer 91 involved in the execution of this high reliability performance will be described. Note that only the configuration that differs from the configuration described above will be described. First, the sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a core performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54, as well as a high reliability performance pattern determination table T55. The high reliability performance pattern determination table T55 will be described in detail later. Also, in the sub-control main process (FIG. 35), the performance control microcomputer 91 executes variable performance start process A instead of the variable performance start process. The details of variable performance start process A are as follows.

[Variable performance start process A]
118 is a flowchart of the variable performance start process A. The variable performance start process A (step S4460A) is a step that the performance control microcomputer 91 executes instead of the variable performance start process of step S4460 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 37). Here, only the points in the variable performance start process A that are different from the variable performance start process (FIG. 41) are described.

In the variable performance start process A, in addition to the steps executed in the variable performance start process, a high reliability performance pattern determination process is executed (step S5017). The execution timing is after the count performance pattern determination process (step S5016) and before the variable performance start command (step S5020). The high reliability performance pattern determination process is a process for determining a performance that indicates the expectation that the special drawing that triggered the variable performance during the variable performance is a win. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the high reliability performance, and determines the chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the high reliability performance pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub-ROM 93. The above are the differences between the variable performance start process A and the variable performance start process (FIG. 41).

Figure 119 is a diagram for explaining the high reliability performance pattern determination table T55. Here, only the part of the high reliability performance pattern determination table T55 that determines the variable performance pattern of special chart 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. In other words, Figure 119 shows the high reliability performance pattern that is executed when the variable pattern included in the variable start command is "P1" to "P16". Note that the high reliability performance pattern determination table T55 may or may not include a part that determines the high reliability performance pattern that is executed when the variable pattern is "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", or "61" to "73".

From FIG. 119, for example, if the result of the special drawing is a jackpot, the high reliability performance random number value is "0-12", and the reach performance type is "SP1", then in "steel mode", high reliability performance pattern HA1 is selected, and in "river mode" and "thunder mode", high reliability performance is not executed. Similarly, in other cases, high reliability performance is executed only in one of the performance modes. Note that high reliability performance may be executed simultaneously in multiple performance modes. Of the three types of high reliability performance described above, the group performance corresponds to high reliability performance pattern HA1, the cut-in performance corresponds to high reliability performance pattern HA2, and the freeze performance corresponds to high reliability performance pattern HA3.

In addition, if the result of the special drawing is a "jackpot," and the high reliability performance random number value is "0-38," that is, there is a 39/128 probability that a high reliability performance will be executed in any of the performance modes. In contrast, if the result of the special drawing is a "miss," the high reliability performance will be executed only if the "reach with miss" is selected, the reach performance type is one of "SP1," "SP2," or "SP3," and the high reliability performance random number value is "0-8" (a 9/128 probability). In other words, if a high reliability performance is executed during a variable performance, there is an 80% or higher probability that the variable performance will result in a hit. For this reason, it is called a "high reliability performance."

In addition, when highlighting the non-stay mode, the presentation in the non-stay mode is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. Therefore, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines the presentation patterns for all of the stay mode and non-stay mode, and displays the presentation in the stay mode on the entire display screen 7a, and the presentation in the non-stay mode in a specified area of the display screen 7a or on the sub-display screen 64. In order to simultaneously display the presentation in three presentation modes, the parameters determined by the game control microcomputer 81, including the variable time, are the same regardless of the presentation mode. Therefore, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines the presentation content for each presentation mode based on the various parameters selected, one for each.

The above is an explanation of the differences in the configuration of the performance control microcomputer 91 when executing a high reliability performance from the performance control microcomputer 91 shown in Figure 4.
Below, using Figures 120 and 121, we will explain an example of highlighting the non-visitor mode that is executed when a high reliability effect is executed in the non-visitor mode.

[Display example A when non-stay mode is emphasized]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining a display example A when the non-stay mode is emphasized. In this example, the non-stay mode is assumed to be displayed inside the display screen 7a. An example will be described in which a group performance that is a high reliability performance is executed in the "lightning mode" while staying in the "steel mode", that is, "SP2" is selected as the basic performance pattern, and "HA1" is selected as the high reliability performance pattern of the lightning mode. The explanation will begin from the start of the variable performance in which the high reliability performance is executed. Note that, in this example, the performance by the non-stay mode is assumed to be displayed in the display area KM1 in the upper left part of the display screen 7a and the display area KM2 in the upper right part. In addition, since the same basic performance pattern is selected for each performance mode, the progress of the variable performance for each performance mode is always the same.

First, as shown in FIG. 120(A), the variable effect starts. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Also displayed are a stay mode display IM indicating that the stay mode is "steel mode", a display area KM1 displaying the effect of "lightning mode", and a display area KM2 displaying the effect of "river mode". The display area KM1 displays the background image and decorative pattern fluctuations in the "lightning mode" mode. The display area KM2 displays the background image and decorative pattern fluctuations in the "river mode" mode. Note that the hold icons 9A, 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during the slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (vertical direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the pattern is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 120(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines indicating that the pattern is moving at high speed become visible. On the other hand, when the pattern is displayed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner in each pattern arrangement, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the pattern row displayed in a stopped state, only one number pattern is displayed, and the display of other number patterns that are consecutive up and down disappears. In addition, when the display stops, other number patterns may remain displayed without disappearing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(B), during the variable performance in the "lightning mode", a group performance is started, and the display area of the "lightning mode" is expanded to become the expanded area DM1. In the performance by the "steel mode", the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. In addition, the stay mode display IM indicating the stay mode is displayed. Furthermore, in the expanded display area DM1, which is the display area in which the display area KM1 in the upper left part is expanded, the performance of the "lightning mode" mode is displayed, and in the display area KM2, the performance of the "river mode" mode is displayed. The display area KM1 in the upper left part is expanded because the group performance, which is a type of high reliability performance, has started in the "lightning mode". When the display area KM1 in the upper left part is expanded, it may be suggested that the high reliability performance has started in the non-stay mode by other methods such as sound or vibration of the performance button 63. In addition, as the display area KM1 in the upper left part is expanded to become the expanded display area DM1, the display positions of the stay mode display IM and the display area KM2 on the display screen 7a are changed. In addition to or instead of this, the display positions of other images (for example, performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) may be changed. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the player notices that the swarm performance, which is a high reliability performance in "lightning mode", has started due to the expansion of the display area KM1 in the upper left part, and presses "left" of the select button 68, switching the stay mode to "lightning mode".

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), the stay mode is switched from "steel mode" to "lightning mode", and almost the entire display screen 7a is in the "lightning mode" state. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Also, a stay mode display IM indicating the stay mode is displayed. Furthermore, as a group performance, which is a type of high reliability performance, multiple images GC are displayed moving in a direction from right to left on the display screen 7a. In addition, as in FIG. 120(A), a "river mode" performance is displayed in the display area KM1 in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and a "steel mode" performance is displayed in the display area KM2 in the upper right part.

As a result of the above, when a high reliability effect occurs in non-stay mode, it can be highlighted by enlarging the display area of that non-stay mode. With this configuration, the player can notice that a high reliability effect has started in non-stay mode, and by changing the stay mode, can enjoy the high reliability effect without missing it, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Display example B when non-stay mode is emphasized]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining a display example B when the non-stay mode is emphasized. In this example, the non-stay mode is displayed on the sub-display screens 64L and 64R. An example will be described in which a group performance that is a high reliability performance is executed in the "lightning mode" while staying in the "steel mode", that is, "SP2" is selected as the basic performance pattern, and "HA1" is selected as the high reliability performance pattern of the lightning mode. The explanation will start from the start of the variable performance in which the high reliability performance is executed. Note that, in this example, the performance by the non-stay mode is displayed in the display area KM1 of the sub-display screen 64L and the display area KM2 of the sub-display screen 64R. In addition, since the same basic performance pattern is selected for each performance mode, the progress of the variable performance for each performance mode is always the same.

First, as shown in FIG. 121(A), the change performance starts. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed on the display screen 7a. Also, on the display screen 7a, a stay mode display IM is displayed, indicating that the stay mode is "steel mode". The display area KM1 of the sub-display screen 64L displays a performance in the "lightning mode" mode, and the display area KM2 of the sub-display screen 64R displays a performance in the "river mode" mode. The display area KM1 displays the background image and decorative pattern changes in the "lightning mode" mode. The display area KM2 displays the background image and decorative pattern changes in the "river mode" mode. Note that the hold icons 9A, 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during the slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (vertical direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the pattern is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 121(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical line indicating that the pattern is moving at high speed becomes visible. On the other hand, when the pattern is displayed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the pattern row displayed in a stopped state, only one number pattern is displayed, and the display of other number patterns that are consecutive up and down disappears. In addition, when the display stops, other number patterns may remain displayed without disappearing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), during the variable performance in the "lightning mode", a group performance is started, and the boundary between the display area KM1 of the "lightning mode" and the background image of the "steel mode" mode is illuminated. In the performance by the "steel mode", the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, the stay mode display IM indicating the stay mode is displayed. Furthermore, the performance of the "lightning mode" mode is displayed in the display area KM1 of the sub-display screen 64L, and the performance of the "river mode" mode is displayed in the display area KM2 of the sub-display screen 64R. In addition, only when a high reliability performance occurs in the non-stay mode, a message image SM saying "Press to switch to lightning mode" and a button image BG representing the performance button 63 are displayed to indicate that it is possible to switch to the performance mode in which the high reliability performance occurs not only by pressing the select button 68 but also by pressing the performance button 63. Note that the display area KM1 of the sub-display screen 64L is illuminated because a group performance, which is a type of high reliability performance, has started in the "lightning mode". When the display area KM1 of the sub-display screen 64L illuminates, other methods, such as sound or vibration of the effect button 63, may also indicate that a high reliability effect has started in the non-stay mode. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the player notices that a swarm effect, which is a high reliability effect, has started in the "lightning mode" as a result of the illumination of the display area KM1 of the sub-display screen 64L, and presses the effect button 63, thereby switching the stay mode to the "lightning mode".

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(C), the stay mode is switched from "steel mode" to "lightning mode", and the entire display screen 7a and the background images of the sub-display screens 64L and 64R are in the "lightning mode" mode. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed on the display screen 7a. Also, a stay mode display IM indicating the stay mode is displayed. Furthermore, as a group performance, which is a type of high reliability performance, multiple images GC are displayed moving in a direction from right to left on the display screen 7a. In addition, as in FIG. 121(A), a performance in the "river mode" mode is displayed in the display area KM1 of the sub-display screen 64L, and a performance in the "steel mode" mode is displayed in the display area KM2 of the sub-display screen 64R.

As a result, when a high reliability effect occurs in non-stay mode, the frame of the display area for that non-stay mode can be highlighted by illuminating it. With this configuration, the player can notice that a high reliability effect has started in non-stay mode, and by changing the stay mode, can enjoy the high reliability effect without missing it, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

By configuring as described above, when a high reliability effect is executed in non-stay mode, the gaming machine 1 can execute an emphasis effect by changing the size of the non-stay mode display area or by changing the display mode of the border of the non-stay mode display area.

[Example of effect]
The following are examples of the effects of this embodiment.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the presentation control microcomputer 91 is configured to highlight the display area displaying the presentation of the non-stay mode when executing the high reliability presentation in the non-stay mode (FIGS. 120 and 121). With this configuration, the player can notice that the high reliability presentation has started in the non-stay mode and can enjoy the high reliability presentation without missing it by changing the stay mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a high reliability effect is executed in the non-stay mode, the display area displaying the non-stay mode effect is enlarged to emphasize it, as shown in Fig. 120. With this configuration, the player can notice that a high reliability effect has started in the non-stay mode, and by changing the stay mode, can enjoy the high reliability effect without missing it, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a high reliability effect is executed in the non-stay mode, the frame of the display area displaying the non-stay mode effect is highlighted by illuminating it, as shown in Fig. 121. This configuration allows the player to notice that a high reliability effect has started in the non-stay mode, and by changing the stay mode, the player can enjoy the high reliability effect without missing it, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in each presentation mode, during the change, a high reliability presentation that is specified in advance as a presentation that suggests a high expectation of a win after the change can be executed (FIGS. 118 and 119). This configuration allows the high reliability presentation to be executed in the non-stay mode, and enables novel presentations, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the presentation control microcomputer 91 is configured to be able to switch and display the non-stay mode in which the high reliability presentation is being executed as the stay mode when the select button 68 or the presentation button 63 is operated while the high reliability presentation is being executed in the non-stay mode (FIGS. 120 and 121). With this configuration, when the high reliability presentation is started in the non-stay mode, the player can enjoy the high reliability presentation without missing it by changing the stay mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Modification]
A modified example of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when a high reliability effect is executed in the non-stay mode, the display area of the non-stay mode is expanded or the frame of the display area is illuminated to emphasize the effect. In addition to or instead of this, a sound may be used to notify the effect. A message image may be used to notify the effect. For example, a message image saying "Super hot effect occurring in thunder mode!" may be displayed on the display screen and a sound may be output. The size of the display area may be repeatedly expanded and contracted. A message image may be displayed to notify the effect. The entire display area or the frame may be flashed. Alternatively, a movable part may be moved to notify the effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, when a high reliability effect is executed in the non-stay mode, the stay mode is changed by operating the select button 68 or the effect button 63. In contrast, for example, when a high reliability effect is executed in the non-stay mode, the stay mode may be automatically changed to the effect mode in which the high reliability effect is being executed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the non-stay mode effect is always displayed in a predetermined display area. In contrast, the non-stay mode effect may be displayed only when the high reliability effect is executed in the non-stay mode. Also, it may be possible to only notify that the high reliability effect is being executed in the non-stay mode. For example, a message image saying "Super hot effect is occurring in thunder mode!" may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the same variable time and basic performance pattern were selected regardless of the performance mode, so the degree of progress of the variable performance etc. for each performance mode was always the same. In contrast, in at least one of the multiple types of performance modes, a variable time and basic performance pattern different from those of the other performance modes may be selected.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C1-1]
a display means having a first display area and a second display area;
a presentation mode execution means for displaying, in the first display area and the second display area, presentation modes different from each other among a plurality of presentation modes;
A game machine including: a performance execution means for executing display performances different from each other in the first display area and the second display area,
When the effect execution means executes a specific display effect in the second display area, the effect execution means executes an emphasis effect for emphasizing the second display area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The emphasis effect is an effect of changing the size of the second display area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The highlighting effect is an effect of changing the display mode of a frame area surrounding the outer periphery of the second display area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
The specific display effect is a suggestive effect that is specified in advance as an effect that suggests that there is a high expectation of a win after the change during the change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C1-1 to C1-3 further comprises:
an operation means for allowing a player to switch between the presentation modes displayed in the first display area and the second display area;
the performance mode execution means and the performance execution means, when the operation means is operated while the specific display performance is being executed in the second display area, cause the performance mode and the specific display performance displayed in the second display area to be displayed in the first display area;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, game custom displays A to D are explained using Figures 122 to 127. These game custom displays are executed when the effect button 63 is pressed at any timing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a game custom display is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 or the sub-display screen 64.

When executing the game custom display B to D, the gaming machine 1 can select and execute one of a plurality of types of presentation modes when the game state is in the normal state. When the presentation mode is switched, only the display mode, such as the content of the image displayed in the presentation, is changed. Note that parameters such as the probability of a big win, the basic presentation pattern, and the variation time are not changed by switching the presentation mode. In this gaming machine 1, one of three presentation modes, "steel mode", "river mode", and "lightning mode", can be arbitrarily selected as the presentation mode. In the "steel mode", "river mode", and "lightning mode", presentations other than the high reliability presentation described later have different display modes, but presentations of the same pattern are selected and executed. The selected presentation mode is called the "stay mode", and the unselected presentation mode is called the "non-stay mode". For example, when the "steel mode" is selected, the "stay mode" becomes the "steel mode", and the "river mode" and "lightning mode" become the "non-stay mode".

The select button 68 also has four buttons, "up," "down," "right," and "left," and a different signal is sent for each button. The presentation mode can be selected by pressing "left" or "right" of the select button 68, and each time "right" of the select button 68 is pressed, the presentation mode is switched between "steel mode," "river mode," "lightning mode," "steel mode," and so on. Furthermore, when "left" of the select button 68 is pressed, the modes are switched in the reverse order to when "right" is pressed. Note that other presentation modes may be installed, and the presentation mode may be switched automatically without depending on the player's operation.

Next, game customization displays B to D are displays that allow game customization to be set for all presentation modes, including non-stay mode, regardless of the stay mode being executed. During execution of game customizations B to D, it is possible to set different game customizations for each presentation mode. Game customization display A is a display for setting game customizations in stay mode. In addition, the customization display is started based on the operation of the presentation button 63 at a timing other than during execution of a presentation that prompts the player to operate the presentation button 63.

In addition, in game customizations A to D, the execution frequency of "group preview," "preview," and "reserved change" can be set to one of "high," "normal," and "low." First, "group preview" is a presentation in which multiple images are displayed moving during a variable presentation, and is a presentation that has been specified in advance as a presentation that suggests that there is a high expectation that the result of the variable presentation will be a hit. "Preview" is a presentation in which a specified display is executed during a variable presentation, and is a presentation that has been specified in advance as a presentation that suggests that there is a high expectation that the result of the next or subsequent variable presentation will be a hit. "Reserved change" is a presentation in which the display mode of the variable icon 9C or the reserved icons 9A and 9B changes, and is a presentation that has been specified in advance as a presentation that suggests that there is a high expectation that the result of the variable presentation or the next or subsequent variable presentation will be a hit. Note that presentations for which the execution frequency can be set may be added or changed at will.

Next, a state where the execution frequency is "normal" means that the range of values for executing the relevant effect in the variable pattern random number value, the look-ahead pattern random number value, etc. is within the range of values explained in Figures 10, 11, 40, etc. (for example, in the case of look-ahead performance pattern A, if the special chart lottery is a jackpot, the effect is executed when the look-ahead performance random number value is "56 to 67"). A state where the execution frequency is "high" means that the range of values for executing the relevant effect in the variable pattern random number value, the look-ahead pattern random number value, etc. is wider than the range in the above-mentioned execution frequency state where the execution frequency is "normal". A state where the execution frequency is "low" means that the range of values for executing the relevant effect in the variable pattern random number value, the look-ahead pattern random number value, etc. is narrower than the range in the above-mentioned execution frequency state where the execution frequency is "normal". Note that the selectable execution frequency patterns and their ratios may be added or changed as desired.

In addition, in game customizations A to D, two settings can be made: the "Auto Button" and the frequency of the "Big Vibe". These two settings are the same for all presentation modes. The "Auto Button" is a setting that, when a display is executed during a variable presentation that prompts the player to operate the presentation button 63, the presentation continues to be displayed as if the presentation button 63 has been operated, even if the presentation button 63 has not actually been operated. This setting can be set to either "ON" or "OFF". The "Big Vibe" is a presentation that executes a presentation in which the entire gaming machine vibrates at a specified timing during the variable presentation, and is a presentation that is specified in advance as a presentation that suggests that the variable presentation has a high expectation of winning. The frequency of the "Big Vibe" can also be set to one of "high", "normal", or "low", just like the "group announcement".

Next, we will explain the configuration of the performance control microcomputer 91 of the gaming machine 1 that is configured to be able to execute game custom displays A and B. Note that we will only explain the points that differ from the content explained in Figure 4.

Figure 122 is a flowchart of switch processing A. The performance control microcomputer 91 executes sub-control main processing. In the sub-control main processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035). In the sub-side timer interrupt processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes switch processing A (step S4310A) instead of switch processing (step S4310).

In switch processing A, the performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a custom display is being executed. A custom display is a display of an image for a player to set custom settings for the performance. If a custom display is being executed (step S5100: YES), the process proceeds to step S5108. On the other hand, if a custom display is not being executed (step S5100: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a detection signal transmitted by pressing the performance button 63 has been received (step S5101). If the detection signal has not been received (step S5101: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends switch processing A. On the other hand, if a detection signal transmitted by pressing the performance button 63 has been received (step S5101: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a performance is being executed that prompts the player to operate the performance button 63 (step S5102). This determination can be made from the contents of the performance command set immediately before. If an effect is being performed that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63 (step S5102: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an effect command that corresponds to the effect being performed (step S5103) and ends switch processing A. On the other hand, if an effect is not being performed that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63 (step S5102: NO), processing proceeds to step S5104.

In step S5104, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is being performed (step S5104). This determination is made based on whether or not the value of the variable time timer is 0. If a variable performance is being performed (step S5104: YES), the process proceeds to step S5107. On the other hand, if a variable performance is not being performed (step S5104: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special chart reservation is 0 (step S5105). This determination is possible by determining whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received. If the special chart reservation is 0 (step S5105: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 executes a collective custom display process (step S5106) and ends switch process A. This collective custom display is a display that allows different game customization to be set for each performance mode for all performance modes. On the other hand, if the reserved special chart is not 0 (step S5105: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the individual custom display process (step S5107) and ends switch process A. This individual custom is a display that allows you to set game customization in the stay mode during the variable performance.

In step S5108, the performance control microcomputer 91 stores the number of times and the order in which each of the four buttons "up", "down", "right" and "left" of the select button 68 is operated (step S5108). This is a process for identifying what content of the game customization for which parameter of which performance mode is set. This process is performed by storing the number of times and the order of signals received from the sensors provided on each of the "up", "down", "right" and "left" of the select button 68. Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not it has received a detection signal transmitted by pressing the performance button 63 (step S5109). This process is because operating the performance button 63 during execution of the custom display is used as a trigger for ending the custom display and reflecting the custom content. If it has not been received (step S5109: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends the switch process A. On the other hand, if it has been received (step S5109: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a game custom command (step S5110), executes custom display end processing (step S5111), and ends switch processing A. The game custom command is set in order to analyze the contents stored in step S5108 and set the game custom content according to the contents.
This concludes the description of the flowchart of switch process B. The rest of the configuration is generally the same as that of FIG.

Next, using Fig. 123 and Fig. 124, display examples when game custom displays A and B are executed will be described. Fig. 123 is a diagram for explaining a display example of game custom display A. Fig. 124 is a diagram for explaining a display example of game custom display B. Game custom display A is a display example when it is determined in step S5104 of switch processing A shown in Fig. 122 that a variable presentation is in progress, and individual custom display processing is executed in step S5107. Game custom display B is a display example when it is determined in step S5105 of switch processing A that the number of reserved special charts is 0, and collective custom display processing is executed in step S5106. First, a display example of game custom display A will be described.

[Display example of game custom display A]
A display example of the game customization display A will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the game customization display A, game customization in the stay mode can be set, so that by switching the stay mode and setting the game customization, it is possible to set the game customization for each presentation mode. The description will be given assuming that the stay mode is executed during the variable presentation in the "steel mode".

First, as shown in FIG. 123(A), the variable presentation ends and the presentation symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and showing "1", "6", and "7", respectively. In addition, the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM indicating the stay mode are displayed. Furthermore, to indicate that game customization can be performed by pressing the presentation button 63, a message image CM saying "Customize" and a button image BG1 representing the presentation button 63 are displayed. At this point, the explanation will continue assuming that the presentation button 63 has been operated.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during the slow variable display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (vertical direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the pattern is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 123(B), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical line indicating that the pattern is moving at high speed becomes visible. On the other hand, when the pattern is displayed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in a visible manner in each pattern arrangement, framed in from the top end of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framed out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the pattern row displayed in a stopped state, only one number pattern is displayed, and the display of other number patterns that are consecutive up and down disappears. In addition, when the display stops, other number patterns may remain displayed without disappearing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), by operating the effect button 63, it becomes possible to set game customization in the "steel mode" which is the stay mode. As a display for setting game customization, an individual custom display image CG is displayed in the area of the lower right part of the display screen 7a. In the individual custom display image CG, by operating the "up" or "down" of the select button 68, it is possible to switch whether to customize the degree of effect, and by operating the "right" or "left", it is possible to switch how to customize. In this state, by operating the "right" button, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the "group notice" to "high", and by operating the "left" button, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the "group notice" to "normal". In addition, by operating the "up" button of the select button 68, it is possible to change the customized effect to "hold change", and by operating the "down" button, it is possible to change the customized effect to "preview". The display position of this individual custom image CG may be changed arbitrarily, and it may be displayed in an area different from the display screen 7a, such as the sub-display screen 64.

At this time, the next change performance after the change performance that ended in Figure 123 (A) is starting. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Furthermore, the reserved icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM indicating the stay mode are displayed. Note that the explanation will continue assuming that the "down" of the select button 68 has been operated at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), by operating the "down" button of the select button 68, the effect for which customization can be set is switched to "preview". Here, as a display for setting game customization, an individual custom display image CG is displayed in the area in the lower right part of the display screen 7a. In this state, by operating the "right" button of the individual custom display image CG, the frequency of "preview" can be changed to "frequent", and by operating the "left" button, the frequency of "preview" can be changed to "normal". In addition, by operating the "up" button of the select button 68, the effect to be customized can be changed to "group preview", and by operating the "down" button, the effect to be customized can be changed to "hold change".

The variable effect that started in FIG. 123(B) is also progressing. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, showing "5". The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R continue to fluctuate at high speed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM, which indicates the stay mode, are displayed. Note that the explanation will continue assuming that the "right" select button 68 has been operated at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), the "right" of the select button 68 is operated, changing the frequency of "read ahead" to "high". Here, an individual custom display image CG is displayed in the area at the bottom right of the display screen 7a as a display for setting game customization. In this state, operating the "right" of the individual custom display image CG allows the frequency of "read ahead" to be changed to "normal", and operating the "left" allows the frequency of "read ahead" to be changed to "high". In addition, operating the "up" of the select button 68 allows the customized effect to be changed to "group preview", and operating the "down" allows the customized effect to be changed to "hold change".

The variable effect started in FIG. 123(B) is also progressing. Here, the right effect symbol has been temporarily stopped, and the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped, showing "5" and "2", respectively. The center effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM, which indicates the stay mode, are displayed. Note that the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), the game custom display A is ended by operating the effect button 63. A message image TM saying "Settings updated after 3 games" is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 7a to indicate that the game custom setting has been made. The variable effect started in FIG. 123(B) has ended, and the effect symbols have been fixed and stopped. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped, showing "5", "6", and "2", respectively. Furthermore, the reserved icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM showing the stay mode are displayed. The above is an example of the display of the game custom display A. Also, in FIG. 123(F) to (H), an example of the effect when the stay mode is switched will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 123(F), the variable effect ends and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and showing "7", "5", and "8", respectively. Also, the hold icon 9C, hold icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM indicating the stay mode are displayed. Furthermore, to indicate that game customization can be performed by pressing the effect button 63, a message image CM saying "Customize" and a button image BG1 representing the effect button 63 are displayed. Note that the stay mode at this time is assumed to be "Steel mode", and the explanation will continue assuming that the "right" select button 68 has been operated at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (G), the "right" side of the select button 68 is operated, switching the stay mode to "river mode," and a variable performance begins. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly varying. Furthermore, the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM, which indicates the stay mode, are displayed. Furthermore, to indicate that game customization is possible by pressing the performance button 63, a message image CM saying "Customize" and a button image BG1 representing the performance button 63 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(H), when the stay mode is "river mode", the variable performance ends and the performance symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped, showing "7", "5", and "8", respectively. Also, the reserved icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM representing the stay mode are displayed. Furthermore, in order to indicate that it is possible to perform game customization by pressing the performance button 63, a message image CM saying "custom" and a button image BG1 representing the performance button 63 are displayed.
The above is an example of the effects that occur when you switch stay modes.

[Display example of game custom display B]
A display example of the game custom display B will be described with reference to Fig. 124. The description will be given assuming that the game custom display B is executed during a variable presentation in which the stay mode is the "steel mode".

First, as shown in FIG. 124(A), the variable performance is progressing. Here, the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped, showing "7" and "2", respectively. The center performance pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Also, the reserved icon 9C and the stay mode display GM showing the stay mode are displayed. Furthermore, to indicate that game customization is possible by pressing the performance button 63, a message image CM saying "Customize" and a button image BG1 showing the performance button 63 are displayed. Note that the explanation will continue assuming that the stay mode at this time is "Steel mode" and the special pattern reservation is 0.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), the middle performance symbol that was fluctuating in FIG. 124(A) stops, and performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop representing "7," "3," and "2," respectively. In addition, a stay mode display GM indicating the stay mode, a message image CM saying "Customize," and a button image BG1 representing the performance button 63 are displayed to indicate that game customization is possible by pressing the performance button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), a message image IS saying "Bulk game custom setting" and a button image BG2 representing the effect button 63 are displayed to indicate that the bulk custom display can be performed. Also, a stay mode display GM representing the stay mode is displayed. The explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(D), it is now possible to set different game customizations for each of the presentation modes for all presentation modes. Here, as a display for setting game customizations, a collective customization display image SG is displayed in the area in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In this state, the collective customization display image SG allows the setting for the "Auto Button" to be changed (shaded area). By operating the "Right" or "Left" of the select button 68, the "Auto Button" can be changed to "ON", and by operating the "Down" of the select button 68, the customized presentation can be changed to "Big Vibe Frequency". Note that the collective customization image SG may be displayed in a predetermined area rather than the entire display screen 7a, or may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64, for example. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the "Down" of the select button 68 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(E), the all-at-once custom display image SG is displayed, and when the settings for the "Auto Button" can be changed, the settings for the "Big Vibe Frequency" can be changed by operating the "Down" button of the select button 68 (shaded area). In this state, operating the "Right" button of the select button 68 sets the "Big Vibe Frequency" to "Normal," and operating the "Left" button sets the "Big Vibe Frequency" to "Low." Operating the "Up" button of the select button 68 also changes the customized effect to the "Auto Button," and operating the "Down" button allows the customized effect mode to be selected from "Steel Mode," "River Mode," and "Thunder Mode." Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the "Right" button of the select button 68 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(F), the all-at-once custom display image SG is displayed, and the setting for "Big Vibe Frequency" can be changed. By operating the "right" side of the select button 68, "Big Vibe Frequency" is changed to "Normal" (shaded area). In this state, operating the "right" side of the select button 68 changes "Big Vibe Frequency" to "Low," and operating the "left" side changes "Big Vibe Frequency" to "High." In addition, operating the "up" side of the select button 68 changes the customized effect to "Auto Button," and operating the "down" side allows the customized effect mode to be selected from "Steel Mode," "River Mode," and "Thunder Mode." Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(G), the batch custom display image SG is displayed, and the setting related to "big vibration frequency" is changeable. When the effect button 63 is operated, the changes made in FIG. 124(E)-(F) are confirmed, and a custom command is sent by the effect control microcomputer 91. At this time, the display screen 7a is in a state in which the batch custom display is executed when the effect button 63 is operated, as in FIG. 124(C). Here, to indicate that the batch custom display can be executed, a message image IS saying "Batch game custom setting" and a button image BG2 representing the effect button 63 are displayed. In addition, a stay mode display GM representing the stay mode is displayed. In this state, the explanation will continue assuming that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(H), when the stay mode is the "steel mode", a variable performance starts. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Furthermore, the reserved icon 9C and the stay mode display GM representing the stay mode are displayed. Furthermore, in order to indicate that it is possible to perform game customization by pressing the performance button 63, a message image CM saying "Customize" and a button image BG1 representing the performance button 63 are displayed.
The above is an example of the game custom display B.

As described above, a gaming machine 1 capable of executing game customization displays A and B can set game customization for each presentation mode. Game customization display A also includes items that are set for each presentation mode (the frequency of execution of multiple types of presentations, including "group preview," "preview," and "hold change"), and game customization display B also includes items that are set commonly to all modes (ON/OFF setting of "auto button," frequency of "big vibration"). Also, the presentation modes that can be customized in game customization displays A and B ("steel mode," "river mode," and "lightning mode") are all game states in the normal state.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the performance control microcomputer 91 of the gaming machine 1 that is configured to be able to execute game custom displays C and D. Note that we will only explain the points that are different from the content explained in Figure 4.

Figure 125 is a flowchart of switch processing B. The performance control microcomputer 91 executes sub-control main processing, during which the performance control microcomputer 91 executes sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035). In the sub-side timer interrupt processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes switch processing B (step S4310B) instead of switch processing (step S4310).

In switch processing B, the performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a custom display is being executed. A custom display is a display of an image for a player to set custom settings for the performance. If a custom display is being executed (step S5100: YES), the process proceeds to step S5108. On the other hand, if a custom display is not being executed (step S5100: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a detection signal transmitted by pressing the performance button 63 has been received (step S5101). If the detection signal has not been received (step S5101: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends switch processing B. On the other hand, if a detection signal transmitted by pressing the performance button 63 has been received (step S5101: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a performance is being executed that prompts the player to operate the performance button 63 (step S5102). This determination can be made from the contents of the performance command set immediately before. If an effect is being performed that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63 (step S5102: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an effect command that corresponds to the effect being performed (step S5103) and ends switch process A. On the other hand, if an effect is not being performed that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63 (step S5102: NO), a collective custom display process is executed (step S5112). This collective custom display differs from the collective custom display shown in Figures 122 to 124 in that it is a display that allows different game customizations to be set for each effect mode for all effect modes, even if a variable effect is being performed. An example of this display will be described later.

In step S5108, the performance control microcomputer 91 stores the number of times and the order in which each of the four buttons "up", "down", "right" and "left" of the select button 68 is operated (step S5108). This is a process for identifying what content of the game customization for which parameter of which performance mode is set. This process is performed by storing the number of times and the order of signals received from the sensors provided on each of the "up", "down", "right" and "left" of the select button 68. Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not it has received a detection signal transmitted by pressing the performance button 63 (step S5109). This process is because operating the performance button 63 during execution of the custom display is used as a trigger for ending the custom display and reflecting the custom content. If it has not been received (step S5109: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends the switch process B. On the other hand, if it has been received (step S5109: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a game custom command (step S5110), executes custom display end processing (step S5111), and ends switch processing B. The game custom command is set in order to analyze the contents stored in step S5108 and set the game custom content according to the contents.
This concludes the description of the flowchart of switch process B. The rest of the configuration is generally the same as that of FIG.

Next, using Fig. 126 and Fig. 127, we will explain display examples when game customization displays C and D are executed. Fig. 126 is a diagram for explaining a display example of game customization display C. Fig. 127 is a diagram for explaining a display example of game customization display D. First, we will explain a display example of game customization display C.

[Display example of game custom display C]
126, a display example of the game customization display C will be described. The game customization display C can be executed during a variable presentation that does not prompt the player to operate the presentation button 63, and displays in a specific area of the display screen 7a a different game customization can be set for each presentation mode for all presentation modes.

First, as shown in FIG. 126(A), the variable presentation when the stay mode is "lightning mode" ends, and the presentation pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, presentation patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped, showing "6", "7", and "6", respectively. In addition, the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM indicating the stay mode are displayed. Furthermore, to indicate that game customization can be performed by pressing the presentation button 63, a message image CM saying "Customize" and a button image BG1 representing the presentation button 63 are displayed. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the presentation button 63 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(B), by operating the performance button 63, the collective custom display image SGA is displayed, and the performance mode to be customized can be changed (shaded area). In this state, by operating the "right" of the select button 68, the performance mode to be customized can be changed to "steel mode", and by operating the "left" of the select button 68, the performance mode to be customized can be changed to "river mode". In addition, by operating the "up" of the select button 68, the frequency of execution of "big vibe" can be changed, and by operating the "down" of the select button 68, the performance to be customized in "thunder mode" can be selected. At this time, the next change performance after the change performance that ended in FIG. 126(A) has started. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Furthermore, the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM indicating the stay mode are displayed. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the "left" of the select button 68 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(C), the batch custom display image SGA is displayed, and the customization performance mode can be changed. By operating the "left" of the select button 68, the customization performance mode is changed to "river mode" (shaded area). In this state, by operating the "right" of the select button 68, the customization performance mode can be changed to "lightning mode", and by operating the "left", the customization performance mode can be changed to "steel mode". In addition, by operating the "up" of the select button 68, the execution frequency of "big vibe" can be changed, and by operating the "down" of the select button 68, the customization performance in "river mode" can be selected. At this time, the variable performance started in FIG. 126(B) is in progress. Here, the number pattern representing "7" is temporarily stopped in the left performance pattern 8L, and the center performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Furthermore, the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM representing the stay mode are displayed. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the "down" of the select button 68 is operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(D), the batch custom display image SGA is displayed, and the performance mode to be customized can be changed. By operating the "down" button of the select button 68, the performance to be customized in the "river mode" can be selected (shaded area). In this state, by operating the "right" button of the select button 68, the performance to be customized can be changed to "preview", and by operating the "left" button, the performance to be customized can be changed to "one shot announcement". Furthermore, by operating the "up" button of the select button 68, the performance mode to be customized can be changed, and by operating the "down" button, the frequency of execution of the "group notice" in the "river mode" can be changed. At this time, the variable performance started in FIG. 126(B) is further progressing. Here, the number pattern representing "7" is temporarily stopped in the left performance pattern 8L, the number pattern representing "5" is temporarily stopped in the right performance pattern 8R, and the center performance pattern 8C is rapidly variable. Furthermore, the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM representing the stay mode are displayed. Here, we will continue the explanation assuming that the "right" select button 68 was operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(E), the batch custom display image SGA is displayed, and the performance to be customized in the "river mode" can be selected. By operating the "right" of the select button 68, the performance to be customized in the "river mode" is switched to "preview" (shaded area). In this state, by operating the "right" of the select button 68, the performance to be customized can be changed to "one shot announcement", and by operating the "left" of the select button 68, the performance to be customized can be changed to "group notice". In addition, by operating the "up" of the select button 68, the performance mode to be customized can be changed, and by operating the "down" of the select button 68, the frequency of execution of the "group notice" in the "river mode" can be changed. At this time, the variable performance that started in FIG. 126(B) has ended, and the performance pattern has been fixed and stopped. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped, showing "7", "5", and "5", respectively. Furthermore, the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM indicating the stay mode are displayed. Here, we will continue the explanation assuming that the "Down" button on the select button 68 is operated, and then the "Right" button on the select button 68 is operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(E), the collective custom display image SGA is displayed, and with "preview" selected as the performance to be customized in "river mode", the "down" and "right" of the select button 68 are operated, and the execution frequency of "preview" in "river mode" is switched to "normal" (meaning normal) (shaded area). In this state, by operating the "right" of the select button 68, the execution frequency of "preview" in "river mode" can be changed to "high", and by operating the "left" of the select button 68, the execution frequency of "preview" in "river mode" can be changed to "low". In addition, by operating the "up" of the select button 68, the state in which the performance to be customized in "river mode" can be changed is entered, and by operating the "down" of the select button 68, the state in which the setting of the "automatic button" can be changed is entered. At this time, the next change performance of the change performance started in FIG. 126(B) is started. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Furthermore, the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM representing the stay mode are displayed. Here, we will continue the explanation assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(G), when the collective custom display image SGA is displayed, the display of the collective custom display image SGA is terminated by operating the performance button 63, and the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits a custom command based on the customization set in FIG. 126(B)-(F). As a result, the display mode of the variable performance returns to the normal mode. The display content is generally the same as FIG. 126(A). In addition, the variable performance started in FIG. 126(F) is progressing. The number pattern representing "6" in the left performance pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and the center performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are rapidly varying. In addition, the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and the stay mode display GM representing the stay mode are displayed. In addition, in order to indicate that it is possible to perform game customization by pressing the performance button 63, a message image CM saying "Custom" and a button image BG1 representing the performance button 63 are displayed.

This concludes the explanation of the game custom display C. In the game custom display C, the display mode of the performance patterns and the like in the variable performance when the collective custom display image SGA is displayed is generally not changed from the display mode when the collective custom display image SGA is not displayed. In addition, the display size of the collective custom display image SGA on the display screen 7a may be changed as desired, and it may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

[Display example of game custom display D]
A display example of the game customization display D will be described with reference to FIG. 127. The game customization display D can be executed during a variable performance that is not a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance button 63, and a display is made on the display screen 7a that allows different game customizations to be set for each performance mode for all performance modes. Note that when the game customization display D is executed during a variable performance, the display area of the variable performance is reduced to a specific area on the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 127(A), a variable effect is being executed when the stay mode is "steel mode." Here, the number symbol representing "1" is temporarily stopped in the left effect symbol 8L, and the center effect symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R are rapidly variable. In addition, the hold icon 9C and hold icon 9A, as well as the stay mode display GM representing the stay mode, are displayed. Furthermore, to indicate that game customization can be performed by pressing the effect button 63, a message image CM saying "Customize" and a button image BG1 representing the effect button 63 are displayed. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(B), by operating the performance button 63, the collective custom display image SGB is displayed, and a different game custom can be set for each performance mode for all performance modes. In this state, the customization for the "Auto Button" can be changed (shaded area). In this state, by operating the "Right" or "Left" of the select button 68, the "Auto Button" can be changed to "ON", and by operating the "Down" of the select button 68, the setting for the "Big Vibe Frequency" can be changed. At this time, the variable performance is displayed in the display area 7as on the display screen 7a, and reduced performance patterns 8Ls, 8Cs, and 8Rs are displayed instead of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the number pattern representing "1" is temporarily stopped in the left reduced performance pattern 8Ls, the number pattern representing "7" is temporarily stopped in the right reduced performance pattern 8Rs, and the center reduced performance pattern 8Cs is rapidly changing. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the "Down" of the select button 68 is operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(C), the collective custom display image SGB is displayed, and the setting for the "big vibe frequency" can be changed by operating the performance button 63 in a state where the customization for the "automatic button" can be changed (shaded area). In this state, by operating the "right" of the select button 68, the "big vibe frequency" can be changed to "low", and by operating the "left" of the select button 68, the "big vibe frequency" can be changed to "high". In addition, by operating the "up" of the select button 68, the customization for the "automatic button" can be changed, and by operating the "down" of the select button 68, the performance mode to be customized can be selected. At this time, the variable performance is displayed in the display area 7as on the display screen 7a, and reduced performance patterns 8Ls, 8Cs, and 8Rs are displayed instead of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the variable performance has ended, and the number patterns representing "1", "9", and "7" have stopped in the reduced performance patterns 8Ls, 8Cs, and 8Rs, respectively. Represents. The subsequent display modes are generally similar to those in FIG. 124, so a description thereof will be omitted. However, the display modes may be different.

The above is an explanation of the game custom display D. In the game custom display D, the variable effects when the collective custom display image SGA is displayed are displayed in the display area 7as on the display screen 7a. The display size of this display area 7as on the display screen 7a may be changed as desired, and the variable effects may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

As described above, a gaming machine 1 capable of executing game customization displays C and D can set game customization for each presentation mode. Game customization display C also includes items that are set for each presentation mode (the execution frequency of multiple types of presentations, including "group preview," "preview," and "hold change"), while game customization display D also includes items that are set commonly to all modes (ON/OFF setting of "auto button," frequency of "big vibration"). Furthermore, the presentation modes that can be customized in game customization displays C and D ("steel mode," "river mode," and "lightning mode") are all game states in the normal state.

[Example of effect]
The following are examples of the effects of this embodiment.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to be able to display a custom display that allows game customization to be set for each presentation mode (FIGS. 122 to 127). With this configuration, the player can set their preferred game customization for each mode, which increases the possibility of entertaining the player and improves the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the custom displays B and D are configured to include items that are set for each presentation mode (frequency of execution of "group preview", "preview", and "reserve change"), and items that are set commonly to all modes (ON/OFF setting of "automatic button", frequency of "big vibration") (Figs. 124 and 127). This configuration increases the possibility of entertaining the player with a novel configuration that has never been seen before, and can increase the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the presentation modes in which game customization can be set in the custom displays A to D ("steel mode,""rivermode," and "lightning mode") are all presentation modes when the game state is normal. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility of entertaining the player with a novel configuration that has never been seen before, and to increase the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to set the execution frequency of the "group effect", which is a pre-specified effect suggesting that the result of the variable effect is highly likely to be a hit, and the "preview effect", which is a pre-specified effect suggesting that the result of the next and subsequent variable effects is highly likely to be a hit, in the custom displays A to D. According to this configuration, by adjusting the execution frequency of these effects, it is possible to increase the possibility of giving the player a sense of excitement, thereby improving the interest.

[Modification]
A modified example of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the settings regarding the "Auto Button" and the "Big Vibe Frequency" are configured to be common settings in the previous performance mode. In contrast, the settings regarding the "Auto Button" and the "Big Vibe Frequency" may be configured for each performance mode.

[Modification 2]
In addition to the configuration of the above embodiment, an operation may be performed to reset all game customizations in all presentation modes, or an operation to reset any setting in any presentation mode. In this case, a default customization state may be set in advance, and the default customization state may be achieved by resetting.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the game customization display is executed by operating the effect button 63. However, the game customization display may be executed at all times.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the customization is confirmed and the game customization display is terminated by operating the effect button 63 during game customization display. In addition to this, or instead, the customization may be confirmed and the game customization display may be terminated even if the effect button 63 and the select button 68 are not operated for a predetermined period of time.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the game customization display is executed on the display screen 7a. However, the game customization display may be executed on the sub-display screen 64, for example.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C2-1]
A display screen;
A game machine including: a presentation mode switching means for switching a presentation mode to be displayed on the display screen from among a plurality of presentation modes;
The display screen is capable of displaying a custom display that allows game customization to be set for each presentation mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The custom display includes items that are set for each rendering mode and items that are set commonly to all rendering modes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1, further comprising:
A game state control means is provided for selecting and setting one game state from among a plurality of game states,
The presentation modes in which the game customization can be set in the custom display are all presentation modes that can be switched in the same game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
In the custom display, a frequency of execution of a plurality of types of effects can be set,
One of the multiple types of effects is a suggestive effect that is specified in advance as an effect that suggests, during a change, that there is a high expectation of a win after the change,
One of the multiple types of effects is a pre-reading effect that is specified in advance as an effect that suggests that there is a high expectation of a winning result after the next or subsequent change during the change.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Special effects operated by the player]
The player-operated special effects are explained below with reference to Figures 128 to 144. The player-operated special effects are executed during the display of the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the command to execute the player-operated special effects is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U). When the player-operated special effects are executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a corresponding command to the voice control board 106, and the voice control board 106 that receives the command reads out the corresponding sound data from the sub-ROM 93 and outputs sound from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received command.

In switch processing (FIG. 36: step S4310), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the select button 68 or the performance button 63 has been pressed based on the switch data (edge data and level data) of the select button 68 or the performance button 63. The performance control microcomputer 91 stores the result of this determination as switch data press data. In other words, in this switch processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates and stores switch data press data that can determine whether the select button 68 or the performance button 63 has been pressed.

In other processing (FIG. 36: step S4320), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to adjust the LED brightness, adjust the volume, or switch the performance mode. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the select button 68 or the performance button 63 has been pressed to adjust the LED brightness, adjust the volume, or switch the performance mode, based on the switch data press data created in the switch processing. If the button has been pressed for this purpose, the performance control microcomputer 91 adjusts the LED brightness, adjusts the volume, and switches the performance mode. In addition, the determination as to whether or not to perform a special player-operated performance is made by lottery. Details will be described later.

In other processing (Figure 36: step S4320), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute a special player-operated performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the select button 68 or the performance button 63 has been pressed based on the switch data press data created in the switch processing. If the select button 68 or the performance button 63 has been pressed, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs the following lottery to determine whether or not to execute a player-operated special performance, and if the lottery is won, the corresponding performance is executed.

[Lottery for the appearance of special effects operated by the player]
Fig. 128 is a diagram for explaining the lottery for determining whether or not a player-operated special effect is to be performed, and which player-operated special effect is to be performed. Fig. 128(A) is a diagram for explaining the lottery when a player operates the LED brightness adjustment, and Fig. 128(B) is a diagram for explaining the lottery when a player operates the volume adjustment. Here, a chance-up random number is used, and the numerical range of the random number is 0 to 127 as an example. Other random numbers may be used.

Figure 128 (A) shows the case where the player operates the LED brightness adjustment. The LED brightness adjustment is performed by pressing the up and down buttons of the select button 68. In other words, each time the player presses the up or down button of the select button 68, the lottery shown in Figure 128 (A) is performed. If the random number is 0 to 9, character A is displayed on the display screen 7a, if the random number is 10 to 19, character B is displayed on the display screen 7a, if the random number is 20 to 29, character C is displayed on the display screen 7a, if the random number is 30 to 39, the sound "beep" is output from the speaker 67, if the random number is 40 to 49, the sound "squeak" is output from the speaker 67, and if the random number is 50 to 59, the sound "bang" is output from the speaker 67. When displayed on the display screen 7a, the performance control microcomputer 91 sends a command to the image control microcomputer 101 to display the corresponding image. When sound is to be output from the speaker 67, the performance control microcomputer 91 sends a command to the audio control board 106 to output the corresponding sound.

Figure 128 (B) shows the case where the player performs a volume adjustment operation. Volume adjustment is performed by pressing the left or right select button 68. In other words, each time the player presses the left or right select button 68, the lottery shown in Figure 128 (B) is performed. The content of the presentation that appears is the same as that of the LED brightness adjustment operation in Figure 128 (A), so it will not be described here.

[Example 1 of special effects operated by the player]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the appearance of a special effect when a player operates the LED brightness adjustment. As shown in FIG. 129(A), the effect is performed during the change of the special chart. Here, the display screen 7a displays the state in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and three reserved icons 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed. In addition, the image HK of the select button 68 and its explanation SM1 and the effect button 63 and its explanation SM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a to explain the operation of adjusting the LED brightness, adjusting the volume, and switching the effect mode. The effect mode is spring, and a background representing spring is displayed. Also, the LED brightness is medium. In FIG. 129(A) to (E), the size of the LED brightness is represented by the number of straight lines around the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 on the schematic diagram of the gaming machine 1. When there is one line, the LED brightness is small, when there are two lines, the LED brightness is medium, and when there are three lines, the LED brightness is large.

Figure 129 (B) shows the case where the player presses the up button of the select button 68 to adjust the LED brightness during fluctuation. When the up button is pressed to adjust the LED brightness, the LED brightness increases and the lottery in Figure 128 (A) is performed, and if applicable, a specified effect is performed. Here, it is assumed that the random number value is 0. In this case, since the random number value is between 0 and 9, "display character A on display screen 7a" is selected. Therefore, as shown in Figure 129 (B), an image CRA of a fish character is displayed.

Figure 129 (C) shows the case where the player presses the down button of the select button 68 to adjust the LED brightness while it is fluctuating. When the down button is pressed to adjust the LED brightness, the LED brightness becomes medium and the lottery in Figure 128 (A) is performed, and if it matches, a specified effect is performed. Here, let's say the random number value is 100. In this case, there is no matching random number value, so this operation does not result in a specified effect.

Figure 129 (D) shows the case where the player further presses the down button of the select button 68 to adjust the LED brightness during the fluctuation. When the down button is pressed to adjust the LED brightness, the LED brightness becomes low and the lottery in Figure 128 (A) is performed, and if applicable, a specified effect is performed. Here, it is assumed that the random number value is 10. In this case, since the random number value is between 10 and 19, "display character B on display screen 7a" is selected. Therefore, as shown in Figure 129 (D), an image CRB of a human character is displayed.

Figure 129 (E) shows the case where the player presses the up button of the select button 68 to adjust the LED brightness during fluctuation. When the up button is pressed to adjust the LED brightness, the LED brightness becomes medium and the lottery in Figure 128 (A) is performed, and if applicable, a specified effect is performed. Here, it is assumed that the random number value is 50. In this case, since the random number value is between 50 and 59, "output the sound "bang" from the speaker 67" is selected. Therefore, the sound "bang" is output from the speaker 67, as shown in Figure 129 (E).

[Example 2 of special effects operated by the player]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the appearance of a special effect when a player operates to adjust the volume. As shown in FIG. 130(A), the display screen 7a is the same as FIG. 129(A) of "Example 1 of Player-Operated Special Effects" described above. The volume is medium. In FIGS. 130(A) to (E), the volume is represented by the number of curved lines around the speaker 67 on the schematic diagram of the gaming machine 1. One line indicates low volume, two lines indicates medium volume, and three lines indicates high volume.

Figure 130 (B) shows the case where the player presses the left button of the select button 68 to adjust the volume while the value is fluctuating. When the left button is pressed to adjust the volume, the volume turns up and the lottery in Figure 128 (B) is performed, and if applicable, a specified effect is performed. Here, it is assumed that the random number value is 0. In this case, since the random number value is between 0 and 9, "display character A on display screen 7a" is selected. Therefore, as shown in Figure 130 (B), an image CRA of a fish character is displayed.

Figure 130 (C) shows the case where the player presses the right button of the select button 68 to adjust the volume while it is fluctuating. When the right button is pressed to adjust the volume, the volume becomes medium and the lottery in Figure 128 (B) is performed, and if it matches, a specified effect is performed. Here, let's say the random number value is 100. In this case, there is no matching random number value, so this operation does not result in the specified effect.

Figure 130 (D) shows the case where the player further presses the right button of the select button 68 to adjust the volume during the fluctuation. When the right button is pressed to adjust the volume, the volume is turned down and the lottery in Figure 128 (B) is carried out, and if applicable, a specified effect is performed. Here, it is assumed that the random number value is 10. In this case, since the random number value is between 10 and 19, "display character B on display screen 7a" is selected. Therefore, as shown in Figure 130 (D), an image CRB of a human character is displayed.

Figure 130 (E) shows the case where the player presses the left button of the select button 68 to adjust the volume while the value is fluctuating. When the up button is pressed to adjust the volume, the volume becomes medium and the lottery in Figure 128 (B) is performed, and if applicable, a specified effect is performed. Here, assume that the random number value is 50. In this case, since the random number value is between 50 and 59, "output the sound "bang" from the speaker 67" is selected. Therefore, the sound "bang" is output from the speaker 67, as shown in Figure 130 (E).

[Example 3 of special effects operated by player]
Fig. 131 is a diagram for explaining the appearance of special effects when a player operates to switch the effect mode. As shown in Fig. 131(A), the display screen 7a is the same as Fig. 129(A) of "Effect Example 1 of Player-Operated Special Effects" described above. The effect mode is spring.

Figure 131 (B) shows a case where the player presses the effect button 63 to switch the effect mode. In response to the operation to switch the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a lottery in "Player Operated Special Effect Judgment Process 1" to determine whether or not to perform a player-operated special effect. This "Player Operated Special Effect Judgment Process 1" will be described later.

Here, let us assume that the result of the lottery is that no winner is selected. In this case, the special player-operated effect is not performed, and the effect mode is switched from spring mode to summer mode. This effect mode switch is a normal switch. Note that the normal switching order is spring mode → summer mode → autumn mode → winter mode → spring mode → ... (and so on), which is a preset order. Note that the display effect of the effect mode switch will be described later in "Effect mode switch effect".

Figure 131 (C) shows the case where the player further presses the effect button 63 to switch the effect mode. Here, the player-operated special effect is an effect in which a "bang" sound is output from the speaker 67. When the effect button 63 is pressed to switch the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 91 holds a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the player-operated special effect.

Here, let us assume that the lottery results in a win. In this case, a special player-operated effect is performed, and the effect mode is switched from summer mode to autumn mode. This effect mode switch is a normal switch. As a special player-operated effect, a sound is output from the speaker 67, and this sound is output when the speaker 67 is operated. Details of the sound being output from the speaker 67 will be described later in "Effective mode switch effect (sound output)".

Figure 131 (D) shows the case where the player further presses the effect button 63 to switch the effect mode. Here, the player-operated special effect is an effect that displays the character ACRA on the display screen 7a. When the effect button 63 is pressed to switch the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the player-operated special effect.

Here, let's assume that the lottery results in a win. In this case, a special player-operated effect is performed, and the effect mode is switched from autumn mode to winter mode. This effect mode switch is a normal switch. As a special player-operated effect, the character ACRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, and details will be given later in "Effect mode switch effect (character display)".

Figure 131 (E) shows the case where the player further presses the effect button 63 to switch the effect mode. Here, the player-operated special effect is an effect that advances the effect mode by one in the reverse order. When the effect button 63 is pressed to switch the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the player-operated special effect.

Here, it is assumed that the lottery results in a win. In this case, the player operation special effect is performed, and the effect mode is switched to advance by one in the reverse order. Normally, the effect modes are switched in a predetermined order. The predetermined order in this embodiment is spring mode → summer mode → autumn mode → winter mode → spring mode → ... (same below). However, in the case of the effect mode switching to advance by one in the reverse order, it is spring mode → winter mode → autumn mode → summer mode → spring mode → .... In this case, the effect mode switching to advance by one in the reverse order is performed during the winter mode, so the effect mode is switched to the autumn mode. Details of the switching method will be described later in "Effect mode switching effect (reverse order)". Here, the player operation special effect has been described as an effect to advance by one in the reverse order, but other effects may be used. For example, the player operation special effect may be an effect to change the effect mode to the same effect mode. Details of the switching method in this case will be described later in "Effect mode switching effect (same effect mode)".

[Effect 1 of Example 3 of Special Effects Operated by Players]
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control microcomputer 91, a performance button 63, and a speaker 67, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a lottery when the performance button 63 for switching the performance mode is operated during a fluctuation, and performs a performance in which a specific sound ("bang", Fig. 131 (C)) is output from the speaker 67 if the lottery is won. With this configuration, the player will associate the switching of the performance mode with the result of the fluctuation and think that a good result has been achieved or a good performance has appeared, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 2 of Example 3 of Special Effects Operated by Players]
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control microcomputer 91, a performance button 63, and a display screen 7a, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a lottery when the performance button 63 for switching the performance mode is operated during a change, and when the lottery is won, a performance is performed in which a predetermined image (character A, Fig. 131 (D)) is displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, the player will associate the result of the change during the change with the change and think that a good result has been achieved or a good performance has appeared because the performance mode has been switched, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 3 of Example 3 of Special Effects Operated by Players]
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control microcomputer 91 and a performance button 63, the performance control microcomputer 91 switches the performance modes to be executed in a preset order by operating the performance button 63, and when the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the performance button 63 to switch the performance modes during a change, it holds a lottery, and when the lottery is won, it operates the performance button 63 to perform a performance in which the performance modes to be executed are switched in an order different from the preset order (such as one in the reverse order, FIG. 131(E)). With this configuration, the player will associate the result of the change during the change with the change and think that a good result has been achieved or a good performance has appeared because the performance mode has been switched, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Player Operation Special Effects Judgment Process 1]
FIG. 133 is a flow chart of the player operation special effect judgment process 1. This process is performed in other processes (FIG. 36: step S4320). When the player presses the effect button 63 to switch the effect mode, the switch data press data of the effect button 63 is turned ON in the switch process (FIG. 36: step S4310). The effect control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a mode switching operation has been performed based on the switch data press data (step S6001). If there has been no mode switching operation (step S6001: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there has been a mode switching operation (step S6001: YES), a random number is obtained for drawing a lottery for whether or not to perform a player operation special effect (step S6002). This random number is a chance-up random number (0 to 127). Here, a chance-up random number is used as an example, but other random numbers may be used. This random number is compared with the winning value, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a player-operated special effect (step S6003). For example, if the winning value is 0 to 10 and the obtained random number is 10, it is determined that the winning is achieved and that the player-operated special effect will be performed. If the obtained random number is 20, it is determined that the winning is not achieved and that the player-operated special effect will not be performed. If it is determined that the player-operated special effect will not be performed (step S6004: NO), the player-operated special effect will not be performed, the effect mode will be switched (step S6006), and this process will end. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player-operated special effect will be performed (step S6004: YES), the player-operated special effect will be performed and the effect mode will be switched (step S6005), and this process will end.

[Mode switching effect]
Fig. 134 is a diagram for explaining the effect of switching the effect mode. Fig. 134(A) shows the state immediately after the effect button 63 is pressed. The effect mode has not yet been switched. The effect is changing, and the spring mode is displayed in the background KS1.

In Figure 134 (B), the switching of the presentation mode is beginning. The background KS1 displaying the spring mode is no longer displayed on part of the display screen 7a, sliding from within the display area of the display screen 7a to outside the display area on the left side, and the background KS2 displaying the summer mode is displayed on part of the display screen 7a, sliding from outside the display area on the right side of the display screen 7a to inside the display area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the image HK of the select button 68, and its description SM1, other than the background, are not slid and are displayed in that position.

After that, as shown in Figure 134 (C), background KS1 displaying spring mode and background KS2 displaying summer mode slide further to the left, and as shown in Figure 134 (D), background KS1 displaying spring mode disappears and background KS2 displaying summer mode is displayed in full view, the background becomes summer mode, and the switch in presentation mode is completed.

Note that, although the background is changed by sliding horizontally here, it may be changed by sliding vertically. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the image HK of the select button 68, and its explanation SM1, other than the background, are displayed in their positions without sliding, but these may also slide along with the sliding of the background.

[Performance mode switching performance (sound output)]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the performance of the performance mode switching accompanied by the player operation special performance that outputs a sound. FIG. 135(A) is immediately after the pressing of the performance button 63. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the image HK of the select button 68, and the explanation SM1 thereof are omitted because they are the same as those in FIG. 134(A). The performance mode has not yet been switched. The sound is output immediately after the pressing of the performance button 63. For this reason, it sounds to the player like the pressing sound of the performance button 63 pressed for the operation of switching the performance mode. The switching of the performance mode is the same as the "performance mode switching performance", so the explanation is omitted here.

Note that, although the sound is output immediately after pressing the horizontal effect button 63, the sound may be output when the background has finished changing. In other words, the sound may be output at the time shown in FIG. 135 (D).

[Switching production mode (character display)]
Fig. 136 is a diagram for explaining the presentation of the presentation mode switching accompanied by the player operation special presentation of the character. Fig. 136 (A) shows the state immediately after the presentation button 63 is pressed. The presentation mode has not yet been switched. It is changing, and the autumn mode is displayed in the background KS3.

In Figure 136 (B), the switching of presentation modes is beginning. Character CRA is displayed on background KS4, which displays the post-switching winter mode. Background KS3, which displays autumn mode, is no longer displayed on part of display screen 7a, sliding from within the display area of display screen 7a to outside the display area on the left side, and background KS4, which displays winter mode, is displayed on part of display screen 7a, sliding from outside the display area on the right side of display screen 7a to within the display area. However, background KS4 has not slid to the position where character CRA is displayed on display screen 7a, and character CRA is not displayed on display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 136(C), background KS3 displaying the autumn mode and background KS4 displaying the winter mode slide further to the left. Here, part of the character CRA displayed in background KS4 displaying the winter mode begins to appear on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 136(D), the background KS3 displaying the autumn mode is no longer displayed, and the background KS4 displaying the winter mode is displayed in full, with the entire character CRA being displayed on the display screen 7a. The background changes to winter mode, and the switch in the presentation mode is completed.

[Mode switching (reverse order)]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the performance of the performance mode switching. FIG. 137(A) is immediately after pressing the performance button 63. The performance mode has not yet been switched. The background KS4 displays the winter mode. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the image HK of the select button 68, and the explanation SM1 are the same as in the normal case of the "performance mode switching performance", so they will be omitted here.

In FIG. 137(B), the switching of the presentation mode is beginning. The background KS4 displaying the winter mode is no longer displayed on part of the display screen 7a, sliding from within the display area of the display screen 7a to outside the display area on the right side, and the background KS3 displaying the autumn mode is displayed on part of the display screen 7a, sliding from outside the display area on the left side of the display screen 7a to within the display area.

After that, as shown in Figure 137 (C), background KS4 displaying winter mode and background KS3 displaying autumn mode slide further to the right, and as shown in Figure 137 (D), background KS4 displaying winter mode disappears, background KS3 displaying autumn mode is displayed in full, the background becomes autumn mode, and the switch in presentation mode is completed.

[Mode switching effect (same mode)]
Fig. 143 is a diagram for explaining the presentation of the presentation mode switching in which the same presentation mode is obtained after the switching presentation. Fig. 143 (A) is immediately after the presentation button 63 is pressed. The background KS1a is the background of the spring mode before the switching, and the background KS1b is the background of the spring mode after the switching. The presentation mode has not yet been switched. The spring mode is displayed in the background KS1a before the switching. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the image HK of the select button 68, and the explanation SM1 thereof, other than the background, are the same as in the normal case of the "presentation mode switching presentation", and will not be described here.

In FIG. 143(B), the switching of the presentation mode is beginning. The background KS1a displaying the spring mode before the switch is no longer displayed on part of the display screen 7a, sliding from within the display area of the display screen 7a to outside the display area on the left side, and the background KS1b displaying the spring mode after the switch is displayed on part of the display screen 7a, sliding from outside the display area on the right side of the display screen 7a to within the display area.

After that, as shown in Figure 143 (C), the background KS1a displaying the spring mode before the switch and the background KS1b displaying the spring mode after the switch slide further to the left, and as shown in Figure 143 (D), the background KS1a displaying the spring mode before the switch disappears and the background KS1b displaying the spring mode after the switch is displayed in full view, completing the switch in the presentation mode.

[Another example of special effects operated by the player]
In the above embodiment, the predetermined effect when the lottery is won is an effect in which a specific sound is output from the sound output means, an effect in which a specific image is displayed on the display means, and an effect in which the effect modes to be executed are switched in an order different from the pre-set order by operating the operation means, but it may also be a lamp effect, a moving object effect, a vibration effect, or a wind blowing effect, or it may also be a combination of these effects.

[Effects of Example 3 of Special Effects Operated by Players, and Other Examples of Special Effects Operated by Players]
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control microcomputer 91 and a performance button 63, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a lottery when the performance button 63 for switching the performance mode during a fluctuation is operated, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined performance (a performance in which a specific sound ("bang") is output from the speaker 67 (FIG. 131(C)), a performance in which a predetermined image (character A) is displayed on the display screen 7a (FIG. 131(D)), a performance in which the performance mode to be executed is switched in an order different from the pre-set order (one in the reverse order) (FIG. 131(E)), a lamp performance, a moving object performance, a vibration performance, a wind blowing performance) is performed. With this configuration, the player can link the result of the fluctuation during the fluctuation and think that a good result has been achieved or a good performance has appeared because the performance mode has been switched, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Player Operation Special Effects Judgment Process 2]
In the embodiment described above in "Example 3 of Player-Operated Special Effects," a decision was made as to whether to perform a player-operated special effect regardless of the likelihood of winning, but here we describe an embodiment in which a win can be expected if a player-operated special effect is performed.

Figure 138 is a flowchart of the player operation special effect judgment process 2. It is another example of the player operation special effect judgment process 1. This process is performed in other processes (Figure 36: step S4320). When the player presses the effect button 63 to switch the effect mode, the switch data press data of the effect button 63 becomes ON in the switch process (Figure 36: step S4310). The effect control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a mode switching operation has been performed based on the switch data press data (step S6101). If a mode switching operation has not been performed (step S6101: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if a mode switching operation has been performed (step S6101: YES), a random number is obtained to draw whether or not a player operation special effect will be performed (step S6102). This random number is a chance-up random number (0 to 127). Here, a chance-up random number is used as an example, but other random numbers may be used. This random number is compared with the winning value, and a lottery is held to see whether or not to execute a player-operated special effect (step S6103). For example, the winning value ranges from 0 to 10, and if the obtained random number is 10, it is determined that a win has been won and that a player-operated special effect will be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that a player-operated special effect will not be executed (step S6104: NO), the player-operated special effect is not executed, the effect mode is switched, and this process ends.

If it is determined that a player-operated special effect is to be executed (step S6104: YES), the reserved specific information is further acquired, and it is confirmed whether the reserved information is a "win", "SP reach", or "normal reach" (step S6105). A random number is acquired to perform a lottery as to whether or not a player-operated special effect is to be executed according to the information (step S6106). A lottery as to whether or not a player-operated special effect is to be executed according to the information (step S6107). The method of acquiring, confirming, and selecting reserved specific information will be described later in "reserved specific information". If it is determined that a player-operated special effect is not to be executed (step S6108: NO), the player-operated special effect is not executed, the effect mode is switched (step S6110), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that a player-operated special effect is to be executed (step S6108: YES), the player-operated special effect is executed, the effect mode is switched (step S6109), and this process is terminated.

[Pending specific information]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining reserved specific information classification. The reserved ball specific information is acquired. There may be multiple reserved balls, but the specific information of all reserved balls is acquired. Each reserved ball is checked to see which reserved specific information classification shown in FIG. 139 matches, and the number is acquired. If multiple results are obtained as a result of the check, the number with the smaller number is used as the lottery number. For example, if there are two reserved balls and the numbers are 2 and 4, the lottery number is 2. The classification of hit, miss, SP reach, and normal reach given as examples here is merely an example, and other classifications may be used. In addition, the specific information acquired may also include specific information that is changing.

Figure 140 is a diagram for explaining the lottery performed based on the acquired lottery number. As described above, the reserved specific information classification is checked, and a lottery is performed based on the acquired lottery number to determine whether or not to perform a player-operated special effect. For example, if the lottery number is 4 and the random number value is 100, the result is "no" and the player-operated special effect is not performed. Also, if the lottery number is 4 and the random number value is 110, the result is "yes" and the player-operated special effect is performed. By performing this lottery, the player can know that if a player-operated special effect is performed, it is likely to be a hit or an SP reach, and the player can have high expectations. Also, by adjusting the numerical value, it is possible to determine that a player-operated special effect will develop into an SP reach, that it is likely to develop into a reach, or that a hit will be confirmed if a player-operated special effect is performed.

[Player Operation Special Effects Judgment Process 3]
In the embodiment described above in "Player-operated special effect judgment process 2," there is no type of player-operated special effect that is performed, but here we will describe an embodiment in which a win can be expected depending on the type of player-operated special effect.

Figure 141 is a flowchart of player-operated special effect determination processing 3. This processing is performed in other processing (Figure 36: step S4320). This flowchart differs from the flowchart of player-operated special effect determination processing 2 described in Figure 138 only in the part where "lottery for effect content" (step S6207) is performed (player-operated special effect determination processing 2 "lottery for effect presence/absence" (Figure 138: step S6107) is performed), so some explanation will be omitted.

If it is determined that a player-operated special effect is to be executed (step S6204: YES), specific reserved information is acquired, and it is confirmed whether the reserved information is a "win", "SP reach", or "normal reach" (step S6205). This is confirmed in the same manner as in the player-operated special effect judgment process 2 (Fig. 138: step S6105). A random number is acquired to draw a lottery as to which player-operated special effect will be executed according to the information (step S6206). This is acquired in the same manner as in the player-operated special effect judgment process 2 (Fig. 138: step S6106). A lottery is performed as to which player-operated special effect will be executed according to the information (step S6107). The lottery method will be described later. If it is determined that a player-operated special effect will not be executed (step S6208: NO), the player-operated special effect is not executed, the presentation mode is switched (step S6210), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a special player-operated effect should be executed (step S6208: YES), the special player-operated effect obtained by lottery is executed, the effect mode is switched (step S6209), and the process ends.

[Lottery method for player operation special effect judgment process 3]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the selection of the type of player-operated special effects. A selection is made as to which player-operated special effects will be performed by the selection number described above in the "reserved specific information". This selection can be "none", which means that no effects will be performed, but "none" is not necessary. The selection is made by selecting the type of sound output from the speaker 67, but it can also be the type of image displayed on the display screen 7a or the type of effect mode switching. These can also be combined. For example, if the selection number is 2 and the random number value is 80, the sound "squeak" is selected and the sound "squeak" is output from the speaker 67. If the random number value is 40, the sound "beep" is selected and the sound "beep" is output from the speaker 67. By selecting this, the player can know that the type of player-operated special effects is likely to win or reach SP, and can have high expectations. In addition, by adjusting the numerical values, when a special player-operated effect is performed, it is possible to determine whether the game will develop into an SP reach, whether it will be more likely to develop into a reach, or whether a win will be confirmed.

[Method of Setting Special Effects Operated by Players]
In the above embodiment, the player does not have the ability to set whether or not the player-operated special effects will be displayed, but this setting may be possible. The setting operation will be described below.

Figure 132 is a diagram for explaining the setting operation of the player-operated special effects. First, as shown in Figure 132 (A), a fixed stop effect is executed. A fixed stop effect is an effect in which the effect patterns are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at a "1" pattern, the center effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at a "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at a "3" pattern. At this time, if the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 and the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 are both "0" (Figure 22: Step S1401: YES, Step S1407: YES), and the screen is not in the standby screen (Step S1413: NO), a customer waiting standby command is set (Step S1414).

Next, in the customer waiting standby process, when a predetermined time has elapsed, a demo performance is executed as shown in FIG. 132 (B). Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and a button image BG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Menu display" is displayed above the button image BG.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 132 (C). The menu screen display shows the main menu items. Here, the volume setting button OB, light intensity setting button KB, effect mode setting button EB, player-operated special effect setting button SB, and menu end button MB are displayed. The player selects the button OB, KB, EB, SB, or MB using the up and down keys of the select button 68, and then presses the effect button 63 to make a selection. It is assumed that the player-operated special effect setting button SB has been selected (shown with hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (D), the player-operated special effect setting is performed. In the player-operated special effect setting, the setting "No" and "Yes" are displayed. "No" is displayed on the left side, and "Yes" is displayed on the right side. Here, the player uses the select button 68 to select whether or not to set the player-operated special effect, and then confirms with the effect button 63. When the setting or no setting is selected, the information on the player-operated special effect setting is stored, and if "Yes" is selected, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute the player-operated special effect in other processing (FIG. 36: step S4320).

Then, as shown in FIG. 132(E), the demo performance shown in FIG. 132(B) is executed. As soon as the ball enters the special chart 1 starting hole or the special chart 2 starting hole, the special chart will change.

[Process 4 for determining special effects operated by player depending on whether or not they are set]
FIG. 144 is a flow chart of the player operation special effect judgment process 4 when the player operation special effect is set. This process is performed in other processes (FIG. 36: step S4320). When the player presses the effect button 63 to switch the effect mode, the switch data pressing data of the effect button 63 is turned ON in the switch process (FIG. 36: step S4310). The effect control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a mode switching operation has been performed based on the switch data pressing data (step S6301). If there has been no mode switching operation (step S6301: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there has been a mode switching operation (step S6301: YES), the information of the player operation special effect setting is confirmed (step S6302). If the setting for the player operation special effect is disabled (step S6302: NO), the effect mode is switched (step S6307), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the setting for the player-operated special effect is enabled (step S6302: YES), a random number is obtained for drawing a lottery for whether or not to perform a player-operated special effect (step S6303). This random number is a chance-up random number (0 to 127). This random number is compared with the winning value, and a lottery is performed for whether or not to perform a player-operated special effect (step S6304). If it is determined that the player-operated special effect will not be performed (step S6305: NO), the player-operated special effect is not performed, the effect mode is switched (step S6307), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the player-operated special effect will be performed (step S6305: YES), the player-operated special effect is performed, the effect mode is switched (step S6306), and this process is terminated.

[Example of effect]
Examples of special effects that can be achieved by player operation are shown below.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effects of Example 3 of Special Effects Operated by Players, and Other Examples of Special Effects Operated by Players", the gaming machine equipped with the effect control microcomputer 91 and the effect button 63 performs a lottery when the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the effect button 63 for switching the effect mode during a change, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined effect (an effect of outputting a specific sound ("bang") from the speaker 67 (FIG. 131(C)), an effect of displaying a predetermined image (character A) on the display screen 7a (FIG. 131(D)), an effect of switching the effect mode to be executed in a different order from the pre-set order (one in the reverse order) (FIG. 131(E)), a lamp effect, a moving object effect, a vibration effect, a wind blowing effect) is performed. With this configuration, the player associates the result of the change during the change with the change and thinks that a good result has been achieved or a good effect has appeared because the effect mode has been switched, and this can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effect 1 of Presentation Example 3 of Player-Operated Special Presentation," the gaming machine includes a presentation control microcomputer 91, a presentation button 63, and a speaker 67. When the presentation button 63 for switching presentation modes is operated during a fluctuation, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a lottery, and when the lottery is won, a specific sound ("bang," Fig. 131(C)) is output from the speaker 67. With this configuration, the player will associate the result of the fluctuation during the fluctuation with the fact that the presentation mode has been switched, leading to a good result, or the appearance of a good presentation, and this can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effect 2 of Presentation Example 3 of Player-Operated Special Presentation," the gaming machine includes a presentation control microcomputer 91, a presentation button 63, and a display screen 7a. When the presentation button 63 for switching presentation modes is operated during a change, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a lottery, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined image (character A, FIG. 131(D)) is displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, the player associates the result of the change during the change with the change and thinks that a good result has been achieved or a good presentation has appeared because the presentation mode has been switched, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effect 3 of Presentation Example 3 of Player-Operated Special Presentation", the gaming machine equipped with the presentation control microcomputer 91 and the presentation button 63 switches the presentation mode to be executed in a preset order by the presentation control microcomputer 91 operating the presentation button 63, and when the presentation control microcomputer 91 operates the presentation button 63 to switch the presentation mode during the change, a lottery is held, and when the lottery is won, the presentation button 63 is operated to switch the presentation mode to an order different from the preset order (one in the reverse order, the same presentation mode diagram 131 (E)). With this configuration, the player associates the result of the change during the change with the fact that the presentation mode was switched, leading to a good result, or the appearance of a good presentation, and the like, and therefore the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of special effects operated by the player.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the operation means is the effect button 63, but it may be a directional key such as the select button 68. Also, it may be a sensor that detects the movement of the player (a so-called motion sensor).

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the predetermined effect when the lottery is won is an effect in which a specific sound is output from the sound output means, an effect in which a specific image is displayed on the display means, and an effect in which the effect modes to be executed are switched in an order different from the pre-set order by operating the operation means, but it may also be a lamp effect, a moving object effect, a vibration effect, or a wind blowing effect, or it may also be a combination of these effects.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, it has been described that the predetermined effect when the lottery is won does not affect the effect that is performed regardless of the lottery, but the effect may be performed at a different timing.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the lottery is drawn whenever the operating means is operated, but it is also possible to not draw again for a predetermined time (for example, five seconds) after the lottery is drawn.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the specified effect is performed when the operating means is operated, but it may not be performed for a specific period of time (for example, 10 seconds after the special chart begins to change).

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the specified performance is performed when the operating means is operated, but it may also be performed at a specific time (for example, when the special chart starts to change).

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, it was stated that the effect of causing the output means to output a specific sound does not affect the sound that is output regardless of the lottery, but the effect may change the sound that is output.

[Modification 8]
In the above embodiment, it was stated that the effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display means does not affect the image displayed regardless of the lottery, but it may be an effect that changes the displayed image.

[Modification 9]
In the above embodiment, the information of all reserved items is acquired as the reserved specific information, but it may be information of one reserved item. In this case, since there may be multiple reserved items, it may be acquired in the order in which they are consumed or in the reverse order, or randomly, one by one, the oldest reserved item, the newest reserved item, etc.

[Modification 10]
In the above embodiment, if a lottery is drawn to see whether or not a special player-operated effect will be performed and the lottery is won, the effect is to advance the effect mode by one in the reverse order or to the same effect mode, but the effect may also be to change the speed at which the effect mode is switched (for example, to switch effect modes more quickly).

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C3-1]
A performance execution means capable of executing one of a plurality of types of performance modes;
A gaming machine including an operation means for allowing a player to switch the presentation mode,
The performance execution means performs a lottery when the operation means is operated to switch the performance mode during the variation, and performs a predetermined performance when the lottery is won.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 further comprises:
A sound output means is provided for outputting sound,
The predetermined effect is an effect in which the sound output means outputs a specific sound.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 further comprises:
A display means capable of displaying an image is provided,
The predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
The performance execution means switches the performance modes to be executed in a preset order in response to an operation of the operation means;
The predetermined effect is an effect in which the effect modes to be executed are switched in an order different from a pre-set order by operating the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Background mode transition when displaying multiple background modes]
Background mode transitions in a multiple background mode display will be described below with reference to Figs. 145 to 156. In this embodiment, the background mode can be transitioned while checking the notices and the like given in the background modes to which transitions can be made by operation. The background modes to which transitions can be made by operation are displayed on the two sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L). Note that, although this embodiment will be described using three different display means, one display means may have three display areas.

The transition to background mode in this multiple background mode display is executed during the decorative pattern variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the transition to background mode is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L).

[Background mode transition method determination]
In the switch process (FIG. 36: step S4310), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether the select button 68 has been pressed based on the switch data (edge data and level data) of the select button 68. The performance control microcomputer 91 stores the judgment result as switch data press data. In other words, in this switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates switch data press data that can judge whether the select button 68 has been pressed, and stores the switch data in the advance judgment information storage area 94c of the sub-RAM 94.

Figure 145 is a flowchart of the background mode transition method determination process. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to transition to background mode in other processing (Figure 36: step S4320). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the select button 68 has been pressed based on the switch data press data created in the switch processing (Figure 36: step S4310).

When the player presses the select button 68 to switch to the background mode, the switch data pressing data of the select button 68 is turned ON in the switch processing (FIG. 36: step S4310). The performance control microcomputer 91 uses this switch data pressing data to determine whether the select button 68 (left button) has been pressed (step S6701). If the button has been pressed (step S6701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 switches to the background mode displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In this case, a command for switching to the background mode displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is set in the performance command set area 94b (step S6702), and this processing is terminated. If the button has not been pressed (step S6701: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 uses the switch data pressing data to determine whether the select button 68 (right button) has been pressed (step S6703). If the button is pressed (step S6703: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 switches to the background mode displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. In this case, a command for switching to the background mode displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is set in the performance command set area 94b (step S6702), and the process ends. If the button is not pressed (step S6701: NO), the process ends.

The command for transitioning to background mode set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control microcomputer 101 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315). The image control microcomputer 101 transitions to background mode, and details will be described later in "Background mode transition effect."

[Pre-notification selection process]
A method for selecting a preview performance is described with reference to Figs. 146 to 151. Fig. 146 is a flowchart of the preview selection process. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs the preview selection process to determine the preview performance in the chance-up performance pattern determination process (Fig. 41: step S5015). In this embodiment, there are three background modes (land background mode, ocean background mode, sky background mode), the performances of the three background modes are displayed simultaneously, and a preview performance is performed in each background mode, so the preview performance to be performed in each background mode is determined. Here, three types of background modes are shown as an example, but there may be other than three.

If the command received from the main control board 80 contains information specifying the variation pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the preview selection process.

The performance control microcomputer 91 conducts a lottery to determine the major classification of the preview (step S6501). In this embodiment, three preview performances are performed using three background modes (land background mode, sea background mode, sky background mode) on the display screen 7a, right sub-display screen 64R, and left sub-display screen 64L of the image display device 7, but the major classification of the preview is common. However, instead of being common, the major classification may be drawn for each background mode. The lottery for determining the major classification of the preview is explained below.

Figure 147 is an explanatory diagram of the lottery used to determine the major category of the preview. The lottery for this major category of the preview is performed using a chance-up random number. Other random numbers may be used. If the random number value is between 0 and 39, "None" is selected; if the random number value is between 40 and 59, "Item" is selected; if the random number value is between 60 and 89, "Step Up" is selected; and if the random number value is between 90 and 127, "Effect" is selected. At this point, the major category of the preview is selected. In the following explanation, it is assumed that "Item" has been selected.

148 is an explanatory diagram for explaining variations of the item preview. When the item preview is selected in the lottery of the major category of the preview, a variation of the item preview is selected, and one of the variations described below is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Depending on the lottery, "none" may be selected and not displayed on the display screen 7a. FIG. 148(A) shows a variation of "stone". When "stone" is selected as the item preview variation, the image control microcomputer 101 displays an image YKA representing a stone on the display screen 7a. FIG. 148(B) shows a variation of "rope", FIG. 148(C) shows a variation of "stick", FIG. 148(D) shows a variation of "gun", and FIG. 148(E) shows a variation of "cannon". When these are selected as the item preview variation, the image control microcomputer 101 displays the images YKB, YKC, YKD, and YKE representing each of them on the display screen 7a, in the same way as when "stone" is selected.

The selected variation is displayed on the display screen 7a after the change starts, and is erased after a certain time has passed. When displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L), it is displayed after the change starts, and is erased after a certain time has passed, just like the display screen 7a. The time displayed may differ depending on the change pattern. Since the display screen is changing, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the hold icon 9A, the change icon 9C, the image HKL of the left button of the select button 68 for explaining the background mode transition operation, the image HKR of the right button of the select button 68, and the images EL and ER representing the background mode to be transitioned are also displayed on the display screen 7a. Other images are also displayed depending on the situation. In addition, other images are also displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L) depending on the situation.

The reliability of these predictions is, in order from lowest to highest, "stone," "rope," "stick," "gun," and "cannon." In this embodiment, each variation has a different reliability, but there may be variations with the same reliability. Note that reliability is the percentage of a hit when the target effect appears. If the reliability is high, it is more likely to be a hit, and if the reliability is low, it is less likely to be a hit.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the variation of the item preview (step S6502). The following describes the lottery that determines the variation of the preview in the ocean background mode.

The table for drawing the preview variations for each background mode has an appearance rate set according to a reliability category. The reliability category is set in advance for each background mode. In the land background mode, the reliability category is low, in the sea background mode, the reliability category is medium, and in the sky background mode, the reliability category is high. Based on this, a table for drawing the preview variations described below is set.

Figure 149 is an explanatory diagram of the lottery for determining the variation of the item preview in the ocean background mode. The reliability category for the ocean background mode is medium, which is the standard setting value. The table shown in Figure 149 is used to select the variation of the item preview in the ocean background mode. For example, if the variation pattern number received by the performance control microcomputer 91 is 3, then "none" will be selected 30% of the time, "stone" will be selected 30% of the time, "rope" will be selected 20% of the time, "stick" will be selected 10% of the time, "gun" will be selected 5% of the time, and "cannon" will be selected 5% of the time. Here, it is assumed that "stick" is selected.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149, the appearance rate of each variation is the same for all losing variation patterns and the same for all winning variation patterns, but a different appearance rate may be set for each variation pattern.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines the variation of the preview to be performed in the land background mode (step S6503). The following describes the lottery that determines the variation of the preview in the land background mode.

Figure 150 is an explanatory diagram of the lottery for determining the variation of the item preview in the land background mode. The reliability classification of the land background mode is low, and the table shows that only the item preview with the lowest reliability, "stone", is selected. In Figure 150, the setting values other than "stone" are added to "none" from the sea background mode, which is the standard setting value. Therefore, the reliability of "stone" is the same as that of the sea background mode, which is the standard setting value. Other than "stone", "rope", "stick", "gun", and "cannon" do not appear. This table is used to select the variation of the item preview in the land background mode. For example, if the variation pattern number received by the performance control microcomputer 91 is 2, "none" is selected 30% of the time, and "stone" is selected 70% of the time. Here, it is assumed that "stone" is selected.

Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 150, the lottery table for the low reliability category is set up so that one variation ("stone") is selected from the available variations, but multiple variations may be used. For example, the selection may be made between "stone" and "rope."

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines the variation of the preview to be performed in the sky background mode (step S6504). The following describes the lottery that determines the variation of the preview in the sky background mode.

Figure 151 is an explanatory diagram of the lottery for determining the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode. The reliability classification of the sky background mode is high, and the table shows that only the most reliable "cannon" is selected for the item preview. In Figure 151, the setting values other than "cannon" are added to "none" from the ocean background mode, which is the standard setting value. Therefore, the reliability of "cannon" is the same as that of the ocean background mode, which is the standard setting value. Other than "cannon", "stone", "rope", "stick", and "gun" do not appear. This table is used to select the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode. For example, if the variation pattern number received by the performance control microcomputer 91 is 72, "none" is selected 70% of the time, and "cannon" is selected 30% of the time. Here, it is assumed that "cannon" is selected.

Note that, here, as shown in FIG. 151, in the reliability classification lottery table, a selection is made from one variation that appears ("cannon"), but multiple variations may be used instead of one. For example, a selection may be made from "cannon" and "gun."

As described above, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines the variation of the preview to be performed in each background mode. Here, in the sea background mode, the "stick" with a medium reliability is selected as the variation of the item preview, in the land background mode, the "stone" with a low reliability is selected as the variation of the item preview, and in the sky background mode, the "cannon" with a high reliability is selected as the variation of the item preview. As a result, in the sea background mode, the item preview of the "stick" is executed, in the land background mode, the item preview of the "stone" is executed, and in the sky background mode, the item preview of the "cannon" is executed. The performance control microcomputer 91 executes display performances with different hit reliability in the display area of each background mode.

As described above, the performance control microcomputer 91 selects the preview for each background mode. Here, an example is given in which an item preview is selected, but the same processing is performed if a step-up preview or effect preview is selected in the preview lottery (major category).

[Pre-notification selection process example 1]
FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram of another example 1 of a lottery table for determining the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode. The lottery table of the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode shown in FIG. 152 has the setting values of "cannon" and "none" adjusted compared to the lottery table of the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode shown in FIG. 151. The setting value of "cannon" in all the variation patterns of the loss is reduced to 1%. The setting value of "cannon" in all the variation patterns of the win is increased to 70%. By adjusting the setting values, the reliability of the item preview "cannon" in the sky background mode is higher than the reliability of the item preview "cannon" in the ocean background mode. The table shown in FIG. 152 may be used to select the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode. When this lottery table is used as the lottery table of the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode, the item preview "cannon" may be displayed in the ocean background mode, and the item preview "cannon" may be displayed in the sky background mode. In this case, the variation of the item preview is the same, but an effect with a different reliability is displayed depending on the background mode.

In addition, if the setting values for all miss variation patterns in the sky background mode described above are set to "none" ("none" being 100%), then if a "cannon" appears in the sky background mode, the reliability will be 100%, which means a win is confirmed. When using this combination of lottery tables, if a "cannon" appears as an item preview in the ocean background mode, it is not a win confirmed, but if a "cannon" appears as an item preview in the sky background mode, it is a win confirmed.

[Pre-notification selection process example 2]
FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram of another example 2 of a lottery table for determining the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode. The lottery table of the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode shown in FIG. 153 has the set values of "cannon" and "none" adjusted compared to the lottery table of the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode shown in FIG. 151. The set value of "cannon" in all the variation patterns of the loss is increased to 70%. The set value of "cannon" in all the variation patterns of the win is increased to 90%. By adjusting the set values, the appearance rate of "cannon" in the item preview in the sky background mode is higher than the appearance rate of "cannon" in the item preview in the sea background mode. The table shown in FIG. 153 may be used to select the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode. When this lottery table is used as the lottery table of the variation of the item preview in the sky background mode, "cannon", which is considered to have a high reliability, appears more often in the sky background mode. If the item preview "cannon" appears in ocean background mode and the item preview "cannon" appears in sky background mode, the variation of the item preview will be the same, but the effect displayed will have a different reliability depending on the background mode.

[Background mode transition effect]
The background mode transition effect will be explained with reference to Figures 154 to 156. Figure 154 is a diagram for explaining the effect of background mode transition by operating the select button 68. The player can transition to the background mode by pressing the left or right button of the select button 68, and the advance notice effect is also changed in conjunction with this transition to the background mode.

In FIG. 154(A), it is changing. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing at high speed. It is the ocean background mode. Also, three reserved icons 9A and the changing icon 9C are displayed, and an image HKL of the left button of the select button 68 and an image HKR of the right button of the select button 68 are displayed to explain the background mode transition operation. In addition, an image EL (an image representing the land background mode) representing the background mode to be transitioned to when the left button is pressed is displayed to the left of the image HKL of the left button, and an image ER (an image representing the sky background mode) representing the background mode to be transitioned to when the right button is pressed is displayed to the right of the image HKR of the right button. Also, in this ocean background mode, a notice YK1 (stick: medium reliability) is being performed.

On the left sub-display screen 64L, an image in land background mode is displayed in the divided area ERL of the screen, and a preview YK2 (stone: low reliability) is being performed. Also, on the right sub-display screen 64R, an image in sky background mode is displayed in the divided area ERR of the screen, and a preview YK3 (cannon: high reliability) is being performed.

In FIG. 154(B), the background mode transition and the notice that is performed when the left button is pressed during the change will be described. By pressing the left button, the background mode on the display screen 7a is transitioned to the background mode (land) displayed in the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L. In addition, with this background mode transition, the notice YK2 that was performed in the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L is performed on the display screen 7a. In addition, in the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L, the sky background mode that was displayed in the divided area ERR of the right sub-display screen 64R is displayed, and the notice YK3 that was performed in the divided area ERR of the right sub-display screen 64R is performed. In the divided area ERR of the right sub-display screen 64R, the sea background mode that was displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed, and the notice YK1 that was performed on the display screen 7a is performed. Details of the background mode transition effects will be explained later in "Background mode transition effects (display screen)" and "Background mode transition effects (left sub-display screen)."

In FIG. 154(C), the background mode transition and the notice that is performed when the left button is pressed further during the change will be described. By pressing the left button further, the background mode on the display screen 7a is transitioned to the background mode (sky) displayed in the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L. In addition, with this background mode transition, the notice YK3 that was performed in the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L is performed on the display screen 7a. In addition, in the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L, the sea background mode that was displayed in the divided area ERR of the right sub-display screen 64R is displayed, and the notice YK1 that was performed in the divided area ERR of the right sub-display screen 64R is performed. In the divided area ERR of the right sub-display screen 64R, the land background mode that was displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed, and the notice YK2 that was performed on the display screen 7a is performed.

In FIG. 154(D), the background mode transition and the notice that is performed when the right button is pressed during the change will be described. By pressing the right button, the background mode on the display screen 7a is transitioned to the background mode (land) displayed in the divided area ERR of the right sub-display screen 64R. In addition, with this background mode transition, the notice YK2 that was performed in the divided area ERR of the right sub-display screen 64R is performed on the display screen 7a. In addition, in the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L, the sky background mode that was displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed, and the notice YK3 that was performed on the display screen 7a is performed. In the divided area ERR of the right sub-display screen 64R, the sea background mode that was displayed in the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L is displayed, and the notice YK1 that was performed in the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L is performed.

Note that here, the background mode to which the mode changes when the left or right button is pressed is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R, not on the display screen 7a, but the background mode to which the mode changes may also be displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Background mode transition effect 1]
A gaming machine including: display means (display screen 7a, left sub-display screen 64L, right sub-display screen 64R) having a plurality of display areas (display screen 7a, divided area ERL of left sub-display screen 64L, divided area ERR of right sub-display screen 64R); background mode execution means (performance control microcomputer 91) for displaying different background modes from a plurality of background modes (land background mode, sea background mode, sky background mode) in the plurality of display areas; and performance execution means (image control microcomputer 101) for executing different display performances (notice YK1, notice YK2, notice YK3) in each of the plurality of display areas, wherein the performance execution means (image control microcomputer 101) executes display performances having different reliability of hits in the plurality of display areas (notice YK1: medium reliability, notice YK2: low reliability, notice YK3: high reliability). According to this configuration, the player wants to see a highly reliable presentation and will therefore switch to the background mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Background mode transition effect 2]
The gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of Background Mode Transition Presentation" further includes an operating means (select button 68) that can be operated by the player, and when the presentation execution means (image control microcomputer 101) detects that the operating means (select button 68) has been operated, it displays the background mode (land background mode) displayed in one of the multiple display areas (the partitioned area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L) and the currently executed display presentation (notice YK2) in another of the multiple display areas (display screen 7a). With this configuration, the player wants to see the presentation being performed in one of the multiple display areas, and thus performs the background mode transition, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Background mode transition effect 3]
In the gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of Background Mode Transition Presentation," the presentation execution means displays, in one of the display areas, one of the multiple types of display presentations (stone, rope) that have been preset as presentations with a relatively low reliability of winning, and displays, in another of the multiple display areas, one of the multiple types of display presentations (gun, cannon) that have been preset as presentations with a relatively high reliability of winning. With this configuration, the player wants to see a presentation with a high reliability and transitions to the background mode, which increases the player's interest in the game.

[Background mode transition effect 4]
In the gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of Background Mode Transition Effect,""Effect 2 of Background Mode Transition Effect," and "Effect 3 of Background Mode Transition Effect," the display effect is a preview effect (preview YK1, preview YK2, preview YK3) that displays a predetermined image, and the effect execution means executes preview effects with different reliability (preview YK1: medium reliability, preview YK2: low reliability, preview YK3: high reliability) in parallel in a plurality of display areas (display screen 7a, divided area ERL of left sub-display screen 64L, divided area ERR of right sub-display screen 64R). With this configuration, the player wants to see an effect with high reliability and performs background mode transition, which can improve the interest of the game.

[Background mode transition effect (display screen)]
155 is a diagram for explaining the background mode transition effect on the display screen 7a. The effect of the background mode transition from the ocean background mode to the land background mode on the display screen 7a will be explained.

Figure 155 (A) shows the state after a short time has passed since the left button was pressed. The ocean background mode MHK1 slides from within the display area of the display screen 7a to outside the display area on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a part of the right side of the ocean background mode MHK1 is no longer displayed on the display screen 7a. In response to this, the land background mode MHK2 slides from outside the display area on the right side of the display screen 7a to inside the display area of the display screen 7a, and a part of the right side of the land background mode MHK2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, the preview performance YK1 performed in the ocean background mode and the preview performance YK2 performed in the land background mode slide along with the sliding of the respective background modes. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the images HKL and HKR of the select button 68 for explaining the background mode transition operation, and the images EL and ER representing the transitioning background mode are displayed in their positions without sliding.

Figure 155 (B) shows the state after some time has passed since Figure 155 (A). The sea background mode MHK1 and preview performance YK1 have slid further to the right, with more of them not being displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, the land background mode MHK2 and preview performance YK2 have slid further to the right, with more of them being displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the images HKL, HKR of the select button 68 for explaining the background mode transition operation, and the images EL, ER showing the transitioning background mode are omitted as they do not slide and are displayed in their positions, similar to Figure 155 (A).

Figure 155 (C) shows the state after further time has passed since Figure 155 (B), when the background mode transition has been completed. The ocean background mode MHK1 and preview effect YK1 slide further to the right and are no longer displayed on the display screen 7a, while the land background mode MHK2 and preview effect YK2 slide further to the right and are displayed across the entire display screen 7a. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the images HKL, HKR of the select button 68 for explaining the background mode transition operation, and the images EL, ER representing the background mode to be transitioned to are not slid but are displayed in their positions, similar to Figure 155 (A), and are therefore omitted.

In this example, the background mode is changed by sliding from left to right, but it may be changed from right to left, top to bottom, or bottom to top. Also, instead of sliding, the background mode before the change may fade out to black, for example, and then the background mode after the change may fade in from black, for example.

[Background mode transition effect (left sub display screen)]
156 is a diagram for explaining a background mode transition effect in a divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L. The effect of the background mode transition from the land background mode to the sky background mode in the area ERL is explained.

Figure 156 (A) shows the state a short time has passed since the left button was pressed. The land background mode SHK1 slides from within the display area of the area ERL to outside the display area on the right side of the area ERL, and a part of the right side of the land background mode SHK1 is no longer displayed in the area ERL. In response to this, the sky background mode SHK2 slides from outside the display area on the right side of the area ERL to inside the display area of the area ERL, and a part of the right side of the sky background mode SHK2 is displayed in the area ERL. In addition, the preview performance YK2 performed in the land background mode SHK1 and the preview performance YK3 performed in the sky background mode SHK2 slide along with the sliding of the respective background modes. In addition, in this area ERL, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the images HKL and HKR of the select button 68 for explaining the background mode transition operation, and the images EL and ER representing the transitioning background mode are not displayed.

Note that, here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in the separated area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L, but the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed in the separated area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L.

Figure 156 (B) shows the state after further time has passed since Figure 156 (A). The land background mode SHK1 and preview performance YK2 have slid further to the right, with more of them not being displayed in area ERL. In addition, in conjunction with this, the sky background mode SHK2 and preview performance YK3 have slid further to the right, with more of them being displayed in area ERL.

Figure 156 (C) shows the state after further time has passed since Figure 156 (B), when the background mode transition has been completed. The land background mode SHK1 and preview effect YK2 slide further to the right and are no longer displayed in area ERL, and the sky background mode SHK2 and preview effect YK3 slide further to the right and are displayed over the entire area ERL.

The background mode transition is also performed in the separated area ERR of the right sub-display screen 64R in the same way as in the separated area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L.

In this example, the background mode is changed by sliding from left to right, but it may be changed from right to left, top to bottom, or bottom to top. Also, instead of sliding, the background mode before the change may fade out to black, for example, and then the background mode after the change may fade in from black, for example.

[Example of effect]
Examples of special effects that can be achieved by player operation are shown below.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effect 1 of background mode transition presentation", the gaming machine is provided with: display means (display screen 7a, left sub-display screen 64L, right sub-display screen 64R) having a plurality of display areas (display screen 7a, divided area ERL of left sub-display screen 64L, divided area ERR of right sub-display screen 64R); background mode execution means (presentation control microcomputer 91) for displaying different background modes from a plurality of types of background modes (land background mode, sea background mode, sky background mode) in the plurality of display areas; and presentation execution means (image control microcomputer 101) for executing different display presentations (notice YK1, notice YK2, notice YK3) in each of the plurality of display areas, in which the presentation execution means (image control microcomputer 101) executes display presentations having different reliability of hits in the plurality of display areas (notice YK1: medium reliability, notice YK2: low reliability, notice YK3: high reliability). According to this configuration, the player wants to see a highly reliable presentation and will therefore switch to the background mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effect 2 of Background Mode Transition Effect," the gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of Background Mode Transition Effect" further includes an operation means (select button 68) that can be operated by the player, and when the effect execution means (image control microcomputer 101) detects that the operation means (select button 68) is operated, it displays the background mode (land background mode) displayed in one of the multiple display areas (the divided area ERL of the left sub-display screen 64L) and the display effect (notice YK2) being executed in another of the multiple display areas (display screen 7a). With this configuration, the player wants to see the effect being performed in one of the multiple display areas, and performs the background mode transition, which can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effect 3 of Background Mode Transition Effect," the gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of Background Mode Transition Effect," the effect execution means displays one display effect (stone) of the multiple types of display effects (stone, rope) that are preset as display effects with a relatively low reliability of winning in one display area of the multiple display areas, and displays one display effect (cannon) of the multiple types of display effects (gun, cannon) that are preset as display effects with a relatively high reliability of winning in another display area of the multiple display areas. With this configuration, the player wants to see an effect with a high reliability and performs background mode transition, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effect 4 of Background Mode Transition Effect," the gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of Background Mode Transition Effect,""Effect 2 of Background Mode Transition Effect," and "Effect 3 of Background Mode Transition Effect," the display effect is a notice effect (notice YK1, notice YK2, notice YK3) that displays a predetermined image, and the effect execution means executes notice effects with different reliability (notice YK1: medium reliability, notice YK2: low reliability, notice YK3: high reliability) in parallel in a plurality of display areas (display screen 7a, divided area ERL of left sub-display screen 64L, divided area ERR of right sub-display screen 64R). With this configuration, the player wants to see a highly reliable effect and performs background mode transition, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of special effects operated by the player.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the display means having a plurality of types of display areas is three different display means, but a single display means may be provided with a plurality of types of display areas.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the operation means is the select button 68 with left and right buttons, but it may be a button without left and right buttons such as the performance button 63. It may also be a sensor that detects the movement of the player (a so-called motion sensor). In this case, the background modes are switched in a fixed order.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the reliability level is divided into three categories: low, medium, and high. However, the reliability level may be divided into categories other than three. For example, the reliability level may be divided into two categories: low and high. Alternatively, the reliability level may be divided into four categories: low, low, high, and high.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the background mode transition effect is performed when the operating means is operated, but it may not be performed during a specific period of time (for example, 10 seconds after the special chart begins to change, or within 5 seconds after the operating means is operated).

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C4-1]
A display means having a plurality of display areas;
a background mode execution means for displaying different background modes from among a plurality of types of background modes in the plurality of display areas;
and a performance execution means for executing different display performances in each of the plurality of display areas,
The effect execution means executes display effects having different winning reliabilities in the plurality of display areas.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 further comprises:
The game machine includes an operating means operable by a player,
when detecting that the operation means is operated, the effect execution means displays the background mode displayed in one display area of the plurality of display areas and the display effect being executed in another display area of the plurality of display areas;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The performance execution means includes:
displaying one of a plurality of types of display effects preset as display effects having a relatively low reliability of winning in one of the plurality of display areas;
displaying one of a plurality of types of display effects preset as a display effect having a relatively high reliability of a winning combination in another of the plurality of display areas;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
The display effect is a preview effect that displays a predetermined image,
The performance execution means executes preview performances having different reliability in parallel in the plurality of display areas.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Selecting a performance mode when multiple performance modes are displayed]
The following describes the selection of a presentation mode in the multiple presentation mode display with reference to Figs. 157 to 166. In this embodiment, a presentation mode can be selected while checking the notices and the like performed in the presentation modes selectable by operation. The presentation modes selectable by operation are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The presentation control microcomputer 91 also transmits a command corresponding to the displayed presentation to the lamp control board 107. The lamp control board 107, which has received the command, reads out the corresponding lamp emission data from the sub-ROM 93 in accordance with the received command, and causes the corresponding frame lamp 66 or board lamp 5 to emit light. The selectable presentation modes may be displayed on a sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L) different from the display screen 7a.

The selection of a presentation mode in this multiple presentation mode display is performed during the display of the decorative pattern variation. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command contains an instruction to display, select, and confirm the selectable presentation modes, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Performance mode selection process]
In the switch process (FIG. 36: step S4310), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether the performance button 63 or the select button 68 has been pressed based on the switch data (edge data and level data) of the performance button 63 or the select button 68. The performance control microcomputer 91 stores the judgment result as switch press data in the pre-determination information storage area 94c of the sub-RAM 94. In other words, in this switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates and stores switch press data that can be used to judge whether the performance button 63 or the select button 68 has been pressed.

Figure 157 is a flowchart of the presentation mode selection process. The presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to perform the presentation mode selection process in other processes (Figure 36: step S4320). When the player presses the presentation button 63 or the select button 68 to select a presentation mode, the switch press data of the presentation button 63 or the select button 68 is turned ON in the switch process (Figure 36: step S4310). The presentation control microcomputer 91 uses this switch press data to determine whether or not the presentation button 63 or the select button 68 has been pressed.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the performance mode selection screen is currently being displayed (step S6801). If the performance mode selection screen is not currently being displayed (step S6801: NO), processing proceeds to step S6813. If the performance mode selection screen is currently being displayed (step S6801: YES), it determines whether or not the left button of the select button 68 has been pressed (step S6802). If the left button of the select button 68 has been pressed (step S6802: YES), a command to move the image PT representing the selection position on the display screen 7a to the left is set in the performance command set area 94b (step S6803), and processing ends.

If the left button of the select button 68 has not been pressed (step S6802: NO), it is determined whether the right button of the select button 68 has been pressed (step S6804). If the right button of the select button 68 has been pressed (step S6804: YES), a command to move the image PT representing the selected position on the display screen 7a to the right is set in the performance command set area 94b (step S6805), and this process ends.

If the right button of the select button 68 has not been pressed (step S6804: NO), it is determined whether the up button of the select button 68 has been pressed (step S6806). If the up button of the select button 68 has been pressed (step S6806: YES), a command to move the image PT representing the selected position on the display screen 7a upward is set in the performance command set area 94b (step S6807), and this process ends.

If the up button of the select button 68 has not been pressed (step S6806: NO), it is determined whether the down button of the select button 68 has been pressed (step S6808). If the down button of the select button 68 has been pressed (step S6808: YES), a command to move the image PT representing the selected position on the display screen 7a downward is set in the performance command set area 94b (step S6809), and this process ends.

If the down button of the select button 68 has not been pressed (step S6808: NO), it is determined whether the effect button 63 has been pressed (step S6810). If the effect button 63 has been pressed (step S6810: YES), a command that determines the effect mode is set in the effect command set area 94b (step S6812), and this process ends.

If the performance button 63 has not been pressed (step S6810: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether a predetermined period has elapsed (step S6811). The predetermined period is a period in which a certain amount of time has elapsed since the performance mode selection screen was displayed. In this embodiment, the period is set to 60 seconds after the performance mode selection screen is displayed. Note that it may be a time other than 60 seconds. It may also be a period in which a certain amount of time has elapsed since the performance button 63 or the select button 68 was last pressed. It may also be a period in which a certain number of variable performances are performed, rather than a time. For example, it is a period in which 10 variations are performed after the performance mode selection screen is displayed. The variation is counted by counting the number of times the confirmation display of the variation is performed after the performance mode selection screen is displayed, and when that number is reached, it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed. The count is made by including the variation when the performance mode selection screen is displayed. In addition, each time a variation is performed, this period may be ended or a lottery may be performed. Furthermore, these may be combined. For example, it may be a period in which a certain amount of time has elapsed or a period in which a certain number of variable performances are performed. Alternatively, the period may be a period in which a certain amount of time has elapsed and a certain number of variable effects are performed. If the certain amount of time has elapsed (step S6811: YES), a command that determines the effect mode is set in the effect command set area 94b (step S6812), and this process ends. If the certain amount of time has not elapsed (step S6811: NO), this process ends.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines in step S6813 whether the performance button 63 has been pressed. If the performance button 63 has been pressed (step S6813: YES), a command to display the performance mode selection screen is set in the performance command set area 94b (step S6812), and this process ends. If the performance button 63 has not been pressed (step S6813: NO), this process ends.

[Pre-notification selection process]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the notice selection process. Here, a method of selecting a notice performance will be described. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs a notice selection process to determine a notice performance in the chance-up performance pattern determination process (FIG. 41: step S5015). In this embodiment, there are four performance modes (performance mode A, performance mode B, performance mode C, and performance mode D), and the performances of the four performance modes are displayed simultaneously while the performance mode selection screen is displayed, and a notice performance is performed in each performance mode. Therefore, the notice performance to be performed in each performance mode is determined. Here, the types of performance modes are four, but they may be other than four.

When the command received from the main control board 80 includes information specifying a variation pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes a preview selection process. The performance control microcomputer 91 selects by lottery a preview to be executed in performance mode A. Here, it is assumed that step up (SU3) is selected as a result of the lottery. Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 selects by lottery a preview to be executed in performance mode B. Here, it is assumed that effect (green) is selected as a result of the lottery. Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 selects by lottery a preview to be executed in performance mode C. Here, it is assumed that conversation (red) is selected as a result of the lottery. Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 selects by lottery a preview to be executed in performance mode D. Here, it is assumed that an item (sword) is selected as a result of the lottery.

As mentioned above, it is selected by advance lottery for each presentation mode. In presentation mode A it is step up (SU3), in presentation mode B it is an effect (green), in presentation mode C it is a conversation (red), and in presentation mode D it is an item (sword). This is only an example, and other presentations may be used. Also, different presentations are selected for presentation mode A through presentation mode D, but some of them may be the same, or all of them may be the same. This information is stored by the presentation control microcomputer 91 in the advance judgment information storage area 94c of the sub-RAM 94.

[Select performance mode]
Fig. 159 is Fig. 1 for explaining the presentation of the presentation mode selection by the operation of the presentation button 63 and the select button 68. Fig. 160 is Fig. 2 for explaining the presentation of the presentation mode selection by the operation of the presentation button 63 and the select button 68. Figs. 159 and 160 explain the presentation of the presentation mode selection. The presentation control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on the switch press data stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c of the sub-RAM 94. The player can select a presentation mode by pressing the presentation button 63 and the select button 68. In each presentation mode, the preview selected in the above-mentioned "preview selection process" is executed.

In Figure 159 (A), the pattern is changing. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing at high speed. This is presentation mode A. In addition, three hold icons 9A and the corresponding changing icon 9C are displayed, along with an image BG of a presentation button 63 to explain the presentation mode selection operation and an explanation SM1 that pressing the button will switch presentation modes.

Figure 159 (B) explains the selection screen for each presentation mode that is displayed when the presentation button 63 is pressed during the fluctuation in Figure 159 (A) above. When the presentation button 63 is pressed during the above fluctuation, the selection screen for each presentation mode is displayed. The presentation that transitions to the selection screen for each presentation mode will be described later in "Presentation mode selection screen transition presentation". The hold icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed in the same position as before the presentation button 63 was pressed. Also, in the position where the image BG of the presentation button 63 and its explanation SM1 were displayed, the image HK of the select button 68 and an explanation SM2 that a presentation mode can be selected by pressing it, and the image BG of the presentation button 63 and an explanation SM3 that a presentation mode can be determined by pressing it are displayed.

The selection screen GA for presentation mode A is displayed in the upper left, the selection screen GB for presentation mode B is displayed in the upper right, the selection screen GC for presentation mode C is displayed below the selection screen GA for presentation mode A, and the selection screen GD for presentation mode D is displayed below the selection screen GB for presentation mode B. The decorative patterns corresponding to each presentation mode are displayed on the screen for each presentation mode. The selection screen GA for presentation mode A displays the decorative pattern 8LA, middle decorative pattern 8CA, and right decorative pattern 8RA for presentation mode A, the selection screen GB for presentation mode B displays the decorative pattern 8LB, middle decorative pattern 8CB, and right decorative pattern 8RB for presentation mode B, the selection screen GC for presentation mode C displays the decorative pattern 8LC, middle decorative pattern 8CC, and right decorative pattern 8RC for presentation mode C, and the selection screen GD for presentation mode D displays the decorative pattern 8LD, middle decorative pattern 8CD, and right decorative pattern 8RD for presentation mode B.

An image PT indicating the selection position is also displayed. This image PT indicating the selection position is displayed so that the image of the selected presentation mode is surrounded by a thick frame. When the selection screen for this presentation mode is displayed, the image PT indicating the selection position is displayed so that the presentation mode that was displayed before the selection screen for this presentation mode was displayed is selected. In FIG. 159 (B), the image PT indicating the selection position is displayed so that presentation mode A is selected.

Figure 159 (C) explains how to select each presentation mode. By pressing the select button 68, the image PT representing the selection position moves and the selected presentation mode changes. For example, when presentation mode A is selected, pressing the right select button 68 causes the image PT representing the selection position to move to the right and presentation mode B is selected, and when the lower select button 68 is pressed further, the image PT representing the selection position moves down and presentation mode D is selected.

Figure 160 (D) describes the case where the effect button 63 is pressed when the selection screen for each effect mode is displayed. When the effect button 63 is pressed during the predetermined period described above in the "effect mode selection process", the effect mode selected by the image PT representing the selection position is selected, and that effect mode is enlarged and displayed. The display returns to the normal display state (a state in which one effect mode is displayed on the display screen 7a). The effect of transitioning to the normal display state will be described later in "Normal display state transition effect". The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed in the same position as before the effect button 63 was pressed. In addition, the image BG of the effect button 63 and its explanation SM1 are displayed in the position where the image HK of the select button 68 and its explanation SM2 and the image BG of the effect button 63 and its explanation SM3 were displayed.

If the performance button 63 is not pressed within a specified period of time, the performance mode that was displayed before the performance mode selection screen was displayed is confirmed and displayed, as shown in FIG. 160(E). As shown in FIG. 160(F), the performance mode selected by the image PT representing the selection position may be selected, as in FIG. 160(D), and the performance mode may be enlarged and displayed.

[Transition to the performance mode selection screen]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the presentation mode selection screen. When the presentation button 63 is pressed in the normal display state, a selection screen for each presentation mode is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the presentation button 63 is pressed during the change of the presentation mode A. As shown in FIG. 161(A), the image BG of the presentation button 63 and its explanation SM1 are erased. After that, the presentation display performed in the background of the changing left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, their background GA, and the notice etc. is reduced. The position after reduction is the upper left in the case of presentation mode A. The position after reduction is determined by the presentation mode, the upper right in the case of presentation mode B, below the position where the presentation mode A is displayed in the case of presentation mode C, and below the position where the presentation mode B is displayed in the case of presentation mode D. It is not necessary to determine the position according to the presentation mode. For example, the presentation mode before the presentation button 63 is pressed may be the upper left. The reserved icon 9A and the changeable icon 9C are displayed in the same position as before the presentation button 63 is pressed.

After shrinking, an image PT showing the selection position is displayed to allow the user to select the presentation mode, as shown in FIG. 161 (B).

After that, as shown in FIG. 161(C), a presentation mode other than the one displayed before pressing the presentation button 63, an image HK of the select button 68 and its explanation SM2, and an image BG of the presentation button 63 and its explanation SM3 are displayed.

The image PT representing the selection position may be displayed after a presentation mode other than the presentation mode displayed before the presentation button 63 was pressed is displayed. In this embodiment, the image PT representing the selection position is displayed at a position to select the presentation mode displayed before the presentation button 63 was pressed, but it does not have to be the presentation mode displayed before the presentation button 63 was pressed. For example, it may be the presentation mode displayed in the upper left. It may also be the presentation mode when the power is turned on.

[Normal display state transition effect]
162 is a diagram for explaining the normal display state transition effect. When the effect button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time has passed while the selection screen for each effect mode is displayed, the normal display state is entered. Here, it is assumed that the effect mode D is selected.

As shown in FIG. 162(A), the three presentation modes other than presentation mode D selected by the image PT indicating the selection position, the image HK of the select button 68 and its explanation SM2, and the image BG of the presentation button 63 and its explanation SM3 are erased. Note that the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed in the same position. After that, the screen GD of presentation mode D is enlarged so that it covers the entire display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are fluctuating in presentation mode D, as well as the presentation displays in the background such as previews, are also enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 162(B), the screen GD for presentation mode D is displayed over the entire display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 162(C), an image BG of the effect button 63 and its explanation SM1 are displayed.

[Effect 1 of the transition to the presentation mode selection screen and the transition to the normal display state]
The gaming machine includes a display means (display screen 7a), a presentation execution means (presentation control microcomputer 91) for displaying on the display means a display presentation corresponding to one of a plurality of presentation modes (presentation mode A, presentation mode B, presentation mode C, presentation mode D), and an operation means (presentation button 63 and select button 68) that can be operated by a player. When the operation means is operated in a state in which a display presentation corresponding to one of the plurality of presentation modes is being executed, the presentation execution means of the gaming machine can execute a first presentation (presentation mode selection screen transition presentation) for displaying on the display means a plurality of display presentations corresponding to each of the plurality of presentation modes, and when a predetermined period has elapsed after the first presentation, a second presentation (normal display state transition presentation) for displaying a display presentation corresponding to one of the plurality of presentation modes. With this configuration, the player can select a presentation mode while viewing the presentations of the other presentation modes, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effects of transition to the presentation mode selection screen and transition to the normal display state 2]
The predetermined period in the configuration of the gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of the presentation mode selection screen transition presentation and the normal display state transition presentation" is at least one of the period from when a plurality of display presentations corresponding to each of the plurality of presentation modes (presentation mode A, presentation mode B, presentation mode C, presentation mode D) are displayed in the first presentation (presentation mode selection screen transition presentation) until a predetermined time has elapsed (a period in which 60 seconds have elapsed), or the period from when the first presentation is executed until a predetermined number of variable presentations (10 variable presentations) are executed after the variable presentation in which the first presentation is executed. According to this configuration, the player can select a presentation mode while watching the presentations of other presentation modes for a predetermined period, which can improve the interest of the game.

[Effects of transition to the presentation mode selection screen and transition to the normal display state 3]
In the gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of the presentation mode selection screen transition presentation and the normal display state transition presentation," the presentation execution means (presentation control microcomputer 91) displays a display presentation corresponding to one of the presentation modes selected from the plurality of presentation modes (presentation mode A, presentation mode B, presentation mode C, presentation mode D) if a presentation mode selection operation is performed by the operation means (presentation button 63 and select button 68) before a predetermined period has elapsed in the second presentation (normal display state transition presentation) (FIG. 160(D)), and if a presentation mode selection operation is not performed by the operation means before a predetermined period has elapsed in the second presentation, displays a display presentation corresponding to the same presentation mode as the one presentation mode displayed before the plurality of display presentations were displayed in the first presentation (presentation mode selection screen transition presentation) (FIG. 160(E)). With this configuration, the player can select a presentation mode while watching the presentation of the other presentation modes for a predetermined period, which can improve the interest of the game.
[Example of a notice occurring while the selection screen is displayed]
163 is a diagram for explaining the preview performance performed during the display of the selection screen. During the display of the selection screen of the performance mode, the preview performance selected in the "preview selection process" and stored in the advance judgment information storage area 94c of the sub-RAM 94 is performed in the background of each performance mode. In the background GA of the performance mode A, step-up (SU3) YKA is performed, in the background GB of the performance mode B, effect (green) YKB is performed, in the background GC of the performance mode C, conversation (red) YKC is performed, and in the background GD of the performance mode D, item (sword) YKD is performed.

Each preview performance has a lighting effect that matches the display performance. In this case, the performance control microcomputer 91 sends a command corresponding to the performance to the lamp control board 107. The lamp control board 107 receives the command and reads the corresponding lamp lighting data from the sub-ROM 93 in accordance with the received command, and lights up the corresponding frame lamp 66 or board lamp 5.

In the above example shown as an example, there is an effect (green) YKB performed on the background GB of the performance mode B, and a conversation (red) YKC performed on the background GC of the performance mode C, and the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 are illuminated, and the effect (green) YKB emits green light and the conversation (red) YKC emits red light. There are cases where performances being performed at the same time cause the same lamps to emit light in different colors. In this case, some of the light-emitting performances are not performed due to the priority order of the light-emitting performances.
The processing method for this case will be explained below in "Priority Setting".

[Priority Settings]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the priority order of light-emitting effects. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164(A), the priority order is determined by the color of the light-emitting effects, and when the same lamp is to be illuminated in different colors at the same time, the light-emitting effects with a high priority order are performed, and the light-emitting effects with a low priority order are not performed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164(A), the priority order is "red," followed by "green,""blue," and "white." In general, the priority order is set to a color with a high expectation. The player is shown a light-emitting effect with a high expectation rather than a light-emitting effect with a low expectation. As an example, the priority order is set to four types, but it may be other than four types. In this embodiment, the priority order is set by color, but the priority order may be set by the performance mode performed, as shown in FIG. 164(B), instead of the color. In addition, as shown in FIG. 164(C), the priority order may be set by the preview performance performed.

[Effects of Priority Setting]
The gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of the presentation mode selection screen transition presentation and the normal display state transition presentation", "Effect 2 of the presentation mode selection screen transition presentation and the normal display state transition presentation", and "Effect 3 of the presentation mode selection screen transition presentation and the normal display state transition presentation" further includes a light-emitting means (frame lamp 66, board lamp 5) capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, and the presentation execution means (presentation control microcomputer 91) is capable of emitting light from the light-emitting means in a color corresponding to the display presentation displayed on the display means (example of a notice occurring during the selection screen display), and when a plurality of display presentations (presentation mode A, presentation mode B, presentation mode C, presentation mode D) are displayed on the display means (display screen 7a), if the colors corresponding to the plurality of display presentations are different, the light-emitting means is caused to emit light in a color corresponding to the display presentation with a relatively high expectation (priority setting). According to this configuration, the light-emitting presentation of the color corresponding to the display presentation with a high expectation is not lost, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Light emission priority example]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining a light emission priority example 1. FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining a light emission priority example 2. As the light emission priority example 1, a case where a light emission performance with a low priority is performed first and a light emission performance with a high priority is performed later will be explained. As shown in FIG. 165(A), when an effect (green) that performs a green light emission performance occurs first, and as shown in FIG. 165(B), a conversation (red) that performs a red light emission performance occurs later, since the red has a higher priority, the light emission performance of the conversation (red) that performs a red light emission performance is prioritized during the period in which they are performed simultaneously. As shown in FIG. 165(C), during the period in which the light emission performance of the conversation (red) is not performed, the light emission performance of the effect (green) is performed, but during the period in which the light emission performance of the effect (green) and the light emission performance of the conversation (red) are performed, the light emission performance of the conversation (red) that has a higher priority is performed.

As an example of light-emitting priority 2, a case will be described in which a light-emitting effect with a higher priority is performed first, followed by a light-emitting effect with a lower priority. As shown in FIG. 166(A), if a conversation (red) that produces a red light-emitting effect occurs first, and then an effect (green) that produces a green light-emitting effect occurs later, as shown in FIG. 166(B), since red has a higher priority, the light-emitting effect of the conversation (red) that produces a red light-emitting effect takes priority during the period in which they are performed simultaneously. As shown in FIG. 166(C), during the period in which the light-emitting effect of the conversation (red) and the light-emitting effect (green) are performed, the light-emitting effect of the conversation (red) that has a higher priority is performed, and the light-emitting effect (green) for the remaining period is performed after the light-emitting effect of the conversation (red) has finished.

[Example of effect]
Examples of special effects that can be achieved by player operation are shown below.

[Effect 1]
As shown in "Effect 1 of the presentation mode selection screen transition presentation and normal display state transition presentation," the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine that includes a display means (display screen 7a), a presentation execution means (presentation control microcomputer 91) that displays a display presentation corresponding to one of the presentation modes selected from among the plurality of presentation modes (presentation mode A, presentation mode B, presentation mode C, presentation mode D) on the display means, and an operation means (presentation button 63 and select button 68) that can be operated by a player. When the operation means is operated in a state in which a display presentation corresponding to one of the plurality of presentation modes is being executed, the presentation execution means of the gaming machine can execute a first presentation (presentation mode selection screen transition presentation) that displays a plurality of display presentations corresponding to each of the plurality of presentation modes on the display means, and when a predetermined period has elapsed after the first presentation, a second presentation (normal display state transition presentation) that displays a display presentation corresponding to one of the plurality of presentation modes. With this configuration, the player can select a presentation mode while watching the presentations of the other presentation modes, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effect 2 of the presentation mode selection screen transition presentation and the normal display state transition presentation," the predetermined period of the configuration of the gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of the presentation mode selection screen transition presentation and the normal display state transition presentation" is at least one of the period from when a plurality of display presentations corresponding to each of the plurality of presentation modes (presentation mode A, presentation mode B, presentation mode C, presentation mode D) are displayed in the first presentation (presentation mode selection screen transition presentation) until a predetermined time has elapsed (a period in which 60 seconds have elapsed), or the period from when the first presentation is executed until a predetermined number of variable presentations (10 variable presentations) are executed. According to this configuration, the player can select a presentation mode while watching the presentations of other presentation modes for a predetermined period of time, which can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effect 3 of the presentation mode selection screen transition presentation and the normal display state transition presentation", the gaming machine is the one described above in "Effect 1 of the presentation mode selection screen transition presentation and the normal display state transition presentation", and the presentation execution means (presentation control microcomputer 91) displays a display presentation corresponding to one presentation mode selected from the multiple presentation modes (presentation mode A, presentation mode B, presentation mode C, presentation mode D) if a presentation mode selection operation is performed by the operation means (presentation button 63 and select button 68) before a predetermined period has elapsed in the second presentation (normal display state transition presentation) (Fig. 160(D)), and displays a display presentation corresponding to the same presentation mode as the one presentation mode displayed before the multiple display presentations were displayed in the first presentation (presentation mode selection screen transition presentation) if a presentation mode selection operation is not performed by the operation means before a predetermined period has elapsed in the second presentation (Fig. 160(E)). With this configuration, the player can select a presentation mode while watching the presentation of the other presentation modes for a predetermined period, which can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Effect of Priority Setting", the gaming machine described above in "Effect 1 of Presentation Mode Selection Screen Transition Presentation, Normal Display State Transition Presentation", "Effect 2 of Presentation Mode Selection Screen Transition Presentation, Normal Display State Transition Presentation", and "Effect 3 of Presentation Mode Selection Screen Transition Presentation, Normal Display State Transition Presentation" further includes a light-emitting means (frame lamp 66, board lamp 5) capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, and the performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 91) is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit light in a color corresponding to the display performance displayed on the display means (example of advance notice occurrence during selection screen display), and when a plurality of display performances (presentation mode A, presentation mode B, presentation mode C, presentation mode D) are displayed on the display means (display screen 7a), if the colors corresponding to the plurality of display performances are different, the light-emitting means is caused to emit light in a color corresponding to the display performance with a relatively high expectation (priority setting). According to this configuration, the light-emitting performance of the color corresponding to the display performance with a high expectation is not lost, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of special effects operated by the player.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the operating means is the performance button 63 and the select button 68 equipped with left and right buttons, but it may also be a sensor that detects the movement of the player (a so-called motion sensor).

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the effect that transitions to the effect mode selection screen is displayed at a position where it will be displayed after the effect while shrinking, but instead of shrinking, one effect mode displayed before the transition may fade out and then fade in at the reduced size at the same position. It may also fade in together with the display of the other three effect modes.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the effect of transitioning to the normal display state is displayed across the entire display screen 7a while being enlarged, but it is also possible that the effect mode displayed before the transition does not enlarge, but fades out and then fades in across the entire display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, a low priority light-emitting performance is not performed if a high priority light-emitting performance is present, and the light-emitting performance for the remaining period of the low priority light-emitting performance is performed after the high priority light-emitting performance is finished, but the light-emitting performance for the remaining period of the low priority light-emitting performance may not be performed.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, when counting the number of changes during a specified period, the count includes the changes that occur when the presentation mode selection screen is displayed, but it is not necessary to include the changes that occur when the presentation mode selection screen is displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C5-1]
A display means;
a performance execution means for causing the display means to display a display performance corresponding to one of a plurality of types of performance modes;
A gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player,
The performance execution means includes:
a first effect that, when the operation means is operated in a state in which a display effect corresponding to one of a plurality of types of presentation modes is being executed, causes the display means to display a plurality of display effects corresponding to each of the plurality of types of presentation modes;
A second performance that displays a display performance corresponding to one of a plurality of types of performance modes when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1,
The predetermined period is:
In the first performance, a period from when a plurality of display performances corresponding to each of the plurality of types of performance modes are displayed until a predetermined time has elapsed, or
At least one of the period from the variable performance in which the first performance is executed until a predetermined number of variable performances are executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1,
The performance execution means includes:
In the second performance, when a selection operation of the performance mode is performed by the operation means before the predetermined period has elapsed, a display performance corresponding to one of the multiple types of performance modes is displayed;
In the second performance, if the operation for selecting the performance mode is not performed by the operation means before the predetermined period has elapsed, a display performance corresponding to the same performance mode as the one performance mode displayed before the display of the plurality of display performances in the first performance is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3 further comprises:
Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors,
The performance execution means includes:
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a color corresponding to the display effect displayed on the display means,
when the plurality of display effects are displayed on the display means, if the colors corresponding to the plurality of display effects are different, causing the light-emitting means to emit light in a color corresponding to a display effect having a relatively high expectation level.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation units operated by the player are provided with the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68, but are not limited to these, and the operation units operated by the player may also be levers, triggers, etc. Also, in the display performance of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65, or the display performance may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the display devices (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-mentioned multiple effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), and the display effects performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, and the display effects performed on the sub-display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiment and modified examples, the above-mentioned embodiment of the aspect is intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect and does not limit the present aspect. The present aspect may be modified or improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present aspect.

1: gaming machine 3: playing area 5: board lamp 7: image display device 9A, 9B: reserved image (reserved icon)
9C…Relevant hold image (hold icon)
14 ... First movable part 15 ... Second movable part 17 ... Big prize opening start hole 20 ... First start hole (first ball entry hole)
21…Second starting hole (second ball entry hole)
64: Sub-display screen 69: Movable frame accessory 66: Frame lamp 81: Game control microcomputer 91: Performance control microcomputer 101: Image control microcomputer

Claims (6)

An operation means operable by a player;
A game machine including: a performance execution means capable of executing a performance related to the operation means;
When a lottery is held for a game ball entering a specific ball entrance, the lottery can be held with a lottery probability according to the setting information by referring to the setting information,
The period during which the operation of the operation means is valid includes a setting corresponding period that is set in correspondence with the setting information.
A gaming machine characterized by: 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
the effect execution means, when the operation means is operated during the set corresponding period, executes a valid effect suggesting that the operation is valid;
A gaming machine characterized by: 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The setting information includes first setting information and second setting information,
When the first setting information is information of a higher setting than the second setting information, the setting corresponding period set in response to the first setting information is a period equal to or longer than the setting corresponding period set in response to the second setting information.
A gaming machine characterized by: 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The setting information includes first setting information and second setting information,
a first period is set as the setting corresponding period in correspondence with the first setting information;
A second period is set as the setting corresponding period in correspondence with the second setting information.
A gaming machine characterized by: 5. The gaming machine according to claim 4,
The setting information is represented by a predetermined integer value,
The first setting information is an even number, and the second setting information is an odd number.
A gaming machine characterized by: 6. The gaming machine according to claim 4 or 5,
There is an overlapping period between the first period and the second period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images